SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 - GENERAL

1
 SECTION 1 – GENERAL 综述

PART (A): ADMINISTRATION ETC.管理等

PRELIMINARY 1001.

The conditions of contract and the drawings shall be read in conjunction with this
specification and matters referred to, shown or described in any one of them are not
necessarily repeated in the other two.

The drawings and specifications are intended to complement and supplement

each other. Any work required by either of them and not by the other shall be
performed as if denoted by each. Should any work be required which is not denoted in
the specifications or on the drawings because of an inadvertent obvious omission, but
which is nevertheless necessary for the proper performance of the Project, such work
shall be performed as if it were described and delineated subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall call to the attention of the Engineer's Representative,
any perceived errors or omissions that occur on the drawings and/or specifications.

On the drawings, figured dimensions shall govern in case of discrepancy between

scaled and figured dimensions. If any discrepancy be found between the drawings and
specifications, in so far as dimensions are concerned, the requirements of the drawings
shall govern. If there be a discrepancy between the General Specifications and the
Supplementary Specifications, the requirements of the latter shall govern. The Engineer
shall have the right to correct apparent errors and omissions in the drawings and
specifications and to make such interpretation as he deem necessary for the proper
implementation of the intent and purpose of the drawings and specifications.

DEFINITIONS 1002.

The terms "Approved", "Directed" and "Required" shall mean to the approval,
direction or requirement of the Engineer or, his duly authorized representative.

The letters B.S. refer to the latest British Standards published by the British
Standards Institution. The British Standards mentioned in the specification are
particularly described in Schedule VII of Volume III of these Specifications bound
together with the Bill of Quantities. Where no particular direction is given, the letters
B.S. refer to the latest British Standards including any amendments in force at the time
of the tendering. Materials specified to be in accordance with the British Standards are
to be branded or a certificate provided where and as described in the particular
Standard.

Where applicable the abbreviations used in the Specification and Bill of

Quantities are in accordance with the recommendations contained in B.S. l991, Parts 1
and 4, are as follows:

"A.A.S.H.T.O." or "A.A.S.H.O." refer to the Specifications used by the American

2
 Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials, current edition.

"A.S.T.M." refer to the American Society of Testing Materials.

"C.P." or "B.S.C.P." refer to the latest (unless otherwise stated) British Standard
Code of Practice, including any amendments.

"DOE" refer to Department of Environment, United Kingdom

"F.M.W." refer to "The Federal Ministry of Works of the Government of the

Federal Republic of Nigeria.

"NIS" refer to the Nigerian Industrial Standards

"SON" refer to the Standard Organization of Nigeria

"W.A.S.C." refer to the West African Standard Compaction.

DESCRIPTION OF WORKS 1003.

The works comprised in this Contract are described in Schedule V of Volume III
of these specifications bound together with the Bills of Quantities.

The drawings showing the dimensions and layouts of the works are listed in
Schedule IV appended to Volume III of these specifications bound together with the Bills
of Quantities.

The scope of the contract covers the supply of materials, plant, equipment,
labour and supervision necessary for the complete works all as specified together with
all temporary works and traffic diversions required during the construction of the works.

Where called for, the contract also includes the maintenance of a diversion for
traffic during construction, and the maintenance of the works in terms of Clause 49 of
the conditions of contract for a period after completion as stated in the appendix to
Tender.

LIAISON WITH ADJACENT WORKS 1004.

In the event of other works being in progress concurrently with and adjacent to
the works specified in this contract, liaison shall be maintained with such other works to
ensure that the several works being undertaken shall not cause any mutual interference
with progress and shall culminate in the integrated improvement as a whole. If so
required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall vary his programme of work in
accordance with Clauses 14 and 90 of the Conditions of Contract, to coordinate the
works with any other works on or adjacent to the site of the works, whether being
carried out by contract or by direct labour of the Ministry.

AVOIDANCE OF DAMAGE TO WORKS 1005.

3
 The Contractor shall arrange his programme of works and control of traffic in
such a way as to avoid damage to the works at any stage of their construction.

DATUM 1006.

The datum to which the various levels have been reduced for the purposes of
the contract are as stated on the respective drawings. Where these datums are likely to
be covered by the new works, the Contractor shall transfer the levels to such fixed
points or beacons, to be provided by the Contractor at his own cost, as shall be required
and specified by the Engineer's Representative. The positions of such transferred
datums shall be accurately surveyed and shown on the working and as made drawings.

SURVEYS AND LEVELS TO BE AGREED AS BASIS FOR MEASUREMENT 1007.

Before the works or any part thereof are begun the Contractor and the
Engineer's Representative shall together survey and take levels of the site of the works
and agree all particulars on which measurements of works are to be based. Such
surveys shall be recorded and signed as agreed by the Engineer's Representative and
the Contractor and shall form basis of the measurements for the Engineer's Certificates.
Failing such surveys and agreements being signed by the Contractor the surveys of the
Engineer's Representative shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

DIMENSIONS AND LEVELS 1008.

The dimensions and levels shown on the drawings are believed to be correct but
the Contractor must verify the same on the ground, as well as all other particular of the
contract and he will be held responsible for the consequences of any error contained
therein or omission therefrom. Levels on existing roads will depend upon the amount of
wear and maintenance which has taken place between the time of survey and the time
of construction and similarly the levels of river beds and banks will be affected by the
amount of erosion and repair which has taken place in the same interval. Should any
discrepancy be discovered between the levels shown on the drawings and those found
on the site, which may affect the levels and dimensions of any part of the works, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer's Representative in sufficient time to enable the
Engineer to prepare drawings showing the amended levels and dimensions. The
attention of the Contractor in this respect is particularly directed to the extent of wing
walls (also see Clause 1010).

PARTICULARS OF EXISTING WORK 1009.

Such information as may be given on the drawings or in the specification or in

the Bill of Quantities as to the present condition, character, position and size of existing
structures, roadways, rivers, pipes, cables and other services are given without
guarantee of accuracy or completeness, and neither the employer nor the Engineer will
be liable for the consequences of any discrepancy therein or omission therefrom.

Where existing works are required to be removed completely or in part or otherwise

4
modified, it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to satisfy himself absolutely in all
respects in all matters pertaining to the carrying out and completion of the works and
the rates given in the priced Bill of Quantities for the carrying out and completion of the
work shall be deemed to be fully inclusive and no extras will be allowed to the
Contractor on the said rates.

WORKING DRAWINGS 1010.

Before any part of the works is put in hand the Contractor must prepare and
submit for the approval of the Engineer's Representative copies in duplicate (in the first
instance) of any further detailed working drawings which may be required for that part
of the work and at the same time call the attention of the Engineer's Representative to
any differences between these and the contract drawings. The Engineer's
Representative will, after the Contractor has made any alterations which he may require,
record on the copies, as amended, his approval and will return one copy to the
Contractor who shall carry out the work in accordance there-with. The Contractor shall
forward to the Engineer's Representative four additional copies of the working drawings
as approved. In addition, working drawings are also to be submitted (the same
procedure being followed as above described) in respect of any work proposed to be
executed by Sub-Contractors, the distribution of drawings being as directed by the
Engineer's Representative. The approval by the Engineer's Representative of all or any
of the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.

ALTERATIONS OF DRAWINGS 1011.

In any cases where drawings are specified or required to be supplied by the

Contractor for the approval of the Engineer any alteration to such drawings which the
Engineer may require shall be made by the Contractor without extra charge.

DRAWINGS OF TEMPORARY WORKS TO BE SUBMITTED 1012.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineers Representative for his approval,
complete drawings of all temporary works, stagings, required for carrying out the
work, together with the calculations relating to their strength and anticipated
deflections. The drawings shall show the method proposed for the erection of the
various parts of the temporary works and their application to the carrying out of the
permanent works. All temporary works shall be properly designed and substantially
constructed to carry the loads to which they will be subjected and all drawings and
calculations pertaining thereto shall be forwarded to the Engineer's Representative
sufficiently in advance of the intention to proceed as will allow for their proper study and
the incorporation of any modification which the Engineer's Representative may require
notwithstanding the approval or modification by the Engineer's Representative of any
submitted design for any of the temporary works, stagings, etc., the Contractor shall
remain wholly and entirely responsible until the removal of such works for their
efficiency security and maintenance and for all obligations and risks in regard to such
works specified or implied in the contract and he shall reinstate the same at his own
entire cost should any mishap or accident occur causing damage or injury thereto
subject however to such provisions of the conditions of contract as may be applicable in

5
the case of such damage or injury.

Two copies of each drawing shall be submitted to the Engineer's Representative

in the first instance and he will record on these copies, amended and modified as
required, his approval and will return one copy to the Contractor who may then proceed
in accordance therewith. The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's Representative
four additional copies of the drawings as approved.

The cost of complying with all the requirements of this clause shall be borne by
the Contractor.

SETTING-OUT 1013.

The attention of the Contractor is directed to Clause 17 of the Conditions of

Contract. The Contractor shall give the Engineer's Representative not less than 24 hours
notice of his intention to set out or give levels for any part of the work in order that
arrangements may be made for checking.

To enable the Engineer's Representative to check the accuracy of the

Contractor's setting out, the Contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineer's
Representative approved theodolites, levels, staves, bands, pegs, labour and all things
necessary as may be particularly specified in the respective clause. Any approval or
collaboration in respect of setting out by the Engineer's Representative shall not in any
way affect the Contractor's sole responsibility for the accuracy of the setting
out and the consequent construction.

NOTICE OF OPERATION 1014.

No important operation and in particular no blocking or cutting of any road,

water pipe or other service shall be carried out without the consent in writing of the
Engineer's Representative nor without full and complete notice being given to him also
in writing sufficiently in advance of the time of the operation and will enable him to
make such arrangements as may be deemed necessary for its inspection and the
provision of all relevant safety precautions.

EXISTING SERVICES 1015.

The Contractor shall satisfy himself entirely as to the location of all existing
drains, pipes, cables and similar services whether above or below ground level. Drains,
pipes, cables and similar services encountered in the course of the works shall be
guarded from injury by the Contractor at his own cost so that they may continue in full
and uninterrupted use to the satisfaction of the owners thereof and the Contractor shall
not store materials or otherwise occupy any part of the site in a manner likely to hinder
the operations of such owners. If the interests of the work shall in the opinion of the
Engineer so require, the Contractor shall on his direction arrange for the construction by
the respective departments, bodies, corporations or authorities of permanent protective
works or permanent or temporary diversions of the said drains etc., (afterwards
reinstating if temporary) and the cost of such works or diversions including

6
reinstatement shall be charged against the appropriate provisional sum provided in the
Bill of Quantities. The Contractor shall be at liberty subject to the approval of the owners
and the requirements of Clause 90 of the Conditions of Contract to make any further
diversions he may consider necessary. The cost of these additional diversions including
the cost of reinstatement shall be borne by the Contractor. No services may be
tampered with by the Contractor and all works in connection with any services shall be
carried out by their respective owners.

DAMAGE TO SERVICES 1016.

The Contractor shall be held liable for damage and interference to mains and
pipes, to electric cables or services of any kind either above or below ground caused by
him or his Sub-Contractors in the execution of the works. Should any damage be done
to mains, pipes, wires, telecommunications or electrical apparatus or any other service,
whether shown on the drawings or not, the Contractor must make good the same
without delay and do any further work considered necessary by the Engineer or the
owners all at his own cost or pay the costs to the owner in so doing. The Contractor will
be deemed to have provided for these contingencies in fixing the rates, etc., inserted in
the Bill of Quantities.

FILLING IN HOLES AND TRENCHES 1017.

The Contractor shall take all precautions and provide any temporary fences
necessary to protect the public from accidents which may be caused by the presence
of any excavations, mounds, heaps or earth or any other materials or stores connected
with the works. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, and immediately upon
completion of any part of the work, fill up all holes and trenches and level all mounds
and heaps of earth which have been excavated or made in connection with the works.
The Contractor shall bear and pay all costs, charges, damages and expenses incurred or
sustained on account of or in consequence of any accident which may happen by reason
of holes and trenches being dug and left unprotected, or materials being left or placed
in unprotected or improper situations.

JOINT MEASUREMENT OF EXTRAS 1018.

In the event of the Contractor having to execute any work or provide any
material in regard to which he may propose to claim extras, he shall first obtain a
written order from the Engineer's Representative and shall at once make arrangements
to take the measurements of the said work or materials with the Engineer's
Representative. If these measurements are not taken jointly and booked and agreed at
the time the work is being executed the Contractor's measurements will not afterwards
be recognized by the Engineer. The fact of such joint measurements having being made
will in no way commit the Engineer to a recognition of the claim if he considers such a
claim without foundation. The Engineer's Representative shall at all times have full
access to the Contractor's time book and may daily check the time of any extra works
with the Contractor's time keeper or otherwise, but the fact of his agreeing upon any
time shall in no way bind the Engineer to value the work other than by measurement if
he thinks fit so to do.

7
PROTECTION FROM WEATHER 1019.

All materials shall be stored on the site in a manner approved by the Engineer
and the Contractor shall carefully protect from weather all work and materials which
may be affected thereby.

WORKS TO BE KEPT FREE FROM WATER 1020.

All those parts of the works required to be carried out in the dry, whether
within any part specified to be enclosed or not, shall be kept free at all times from
water from whatever source it may come to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative. The costs of complying with the provisions of this clause shall be borne
by the Contractor.

STAFF ACCOMMODATION ETC. 1021.

The Contractor shall at his own expense provide for himself suitable offices and
housing for his staff and labour. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
supply, erect and maintain suitable furnished offices and Residential quarters for the
Engineer's Representative and his assistants, inspectors and staff on a site or sites to be
selected, together with all proper lighting, heating, water, sanitary arrangements and
attendance.

SUPPLY OF WATER AND ELECTRICITY 1022.

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the provision of water and
electricity, whether for use in the execution and construction of permanent works or
otherwise. In the event of the source of water being from any existing piped supply, the
Contractor shall comply with any regulation laid down by the water authority and shall
pay for such supply, standpipes, connections, meter rent and all other charges as
required all at his own expense. The same conditions apply for the temporary supply of
electrical power.

RETURNS OF LABOUR 1023.

Every working day, the Contractor shall supply the Engineers Representative
with a return of the men employed the previous day and of the work on which they
were engaged, specifying also the number employed in each trade. He shall also supply
any other returns, which may be required from time to time, as to the number of men
and plant employed and the nature, quality and quantity of the work done.

PHOTOGRAPHS 1024.

The Contractor, shall, if required, supply to the Engineer monthly, or at such

other periods as he may direct, well executed and mounted photographs showing the
progress of the works and also such particular sections of the works, site, plant,
machinery or materials as the Engineer may direct. The cost of such photographs will

8
be charged against the appropriate provisional sum.

The copyright of the photographs shall be held by the Employers. The Contractor
shall provide the Engineer's Representative (within 5 days of the photographs having
been taken) with the negative and three prints of each photograph which shall be I.O. ,
standard size A4 or a minimum of 200mm x 300mm. On the reverse side of each
print the following information shall be shown:

(1) Date photograph was taken.

(2) A brief description of the location illustrated or the name of the structure.

(3) The negative number of the photograph.

(4) The name and address of the photographer.

The prints of each approved photograph shall be signed and dated by the
Contractor and the Engineer's Representative.

REPORTS OF ACCIDENTS OR UNUSUAL OCCURRENCE 1025.

Notwithstanding the submission of the normal and regular monthly progress

reports the Contractor shall report to the Engineer's Representative promptly and in
writing the particulars of any accident or unusual or unforeseen occurrence on the site
whether likely to affect the progress of the work or not stating also the steps he has
taken or is arranging to take in the matter.

MAINTENANCE OF WORKS 1026.

(A) During the period of maintenance as defined in Clause 48 and 49 of the

Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall maintain the works, or such part of the
works as are involved, for the period named in the tender to the entire satisfaction of
the Engineer. Such maintenance shall include repairs to the superstructures and sub-
structures of the bridges; defects in the subgrade, base course and bituminous surfacing
of the roadways; landslips and failures of culverts, but shall not include grass cutting
brushing or the cleaning of drains.

(B) The Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance other than grass
cutting, of all verges, margins and side
slopes, including stone pitching, for the period of maintenance and shall make good all
erosions during such period whether attributable to defects in workmanship or not.

(C) Before the commencement of the period of maintenance the Contractor

shall remove all his buildings and plant from the whole of the site and shall clear and
regrade the areas to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

AS-MADE DRAWINGS 1027.

9
 On completion of the works, the Contractor shall prepare as made drawings
giving complete details of the entire works as constructed, including all work carried out
by Sub Contractors. The as made drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the
requirements of the respective clauses in the specifications and all costs arising out of
their preparation, supply and distribution etc., shall be deemed to be included in the
tendered rates for the work to which they refer.

TRAFFIC ROUTES TO BE MAINTAINED AND WORKS TRAFFIC CONTROLLED

1028.

There shall be no unnecessary obstruction of roads, railways, footpaths,

waterways, electrical installations etc., during the course of the work and in no
circumstances shall closure, in whole or in part, of these or any other "Right of Way be
permitted except with the prior permission of the Engineer in writing. Before granting
such permission the Engineer shall consult with the authorities, government
departments and/or persons concerned and when desirable shall publish due notice of
the proposed action in the government gazette. The Contractor shall maintain adequate
through safe traffic routes for vehicles and pedestrians throughout the whole length of
the public highways within and adjacent to the site of the works, including such
diversion of highways as may be required, and make arrangements for watching,
signalling and control of traffic by day and by night and for adequate lighting all to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall without extra charge if instructed to
do so by the Engineer install, make use of, adequately maintain automatic "Stop and
Go" signals, traffic lights or other special method or methods of traffic control and
direction as the Engineer may consider necessary, and the Contractor shall carry out all
such instructions to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Where directed by the Engineer, temporary single or double tracks shall be

constructed and maintained in a safe and satisfactory condition for the use of all traffic
during the construction of the works. The temporary tracks shall be removed and all
reinstatement made to the satisfaction of the Engineer when no longer required.

The Contractor shall, at his own expense, and during the period of this Contract,
maintain in a safe condition and adequately protect any work executed by him which is
exposed to traffic. The Contractor shall supply adequate advance warning signs of
reflecting type with letters not less than 150mm high and such warning signs shall be
placed in positions approved by the Engineer and shall be left in such positions as long
as traffic is still utilizing any such temporary running surface.

The Contractor shall make arrangements and cooperate with all other
contractors working in the area for directing, routing, marshalling, controlling and
circulating the traffic connected with the works under this contract in accordance with
the Engineer's Requirements, in order that the flow of all traffic may be facilitated, that
all obstruction, inconvenience and delay may be minimized, and that the interests of all
concerned, including the general public, may be protected.

The Contractor shall allow in his tender for complying with the requirements of

10
this clause and for any directions in connection therewith which the Engineer may issue
from time to time. The Contractor will be deemed to have allowed for additional
expense he may incur on account of extra running or kilometre covered by his vehicle or
labour or material involved in compliance with these requirements.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the highways in the vicinity
of the works are kept clean of mud and other debris falling from vehicles connected with
the works or spreading on to the highways as a result of the works in any way.

BARRICADES, WARNING AND DEVIATION SIGNS 1029.

The Contractor will at all times during the contract, provide, erect and maintain
such barricades, warning lights, dangers signals, reflectors, signs and watchmen as may
be necessary to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Any such warning
signs etc., shall be left in position as long as traffic is utilizing any temporary running
surface and/or until such time as their removal is sanctioned by the Engineer's
Representative.

Barricades and signs shall be constructed and used in accordance with the
requirements of the Engineer's Representative. All barricades, obstructions and such
other conveniences as are necessary to protect the travelling public, or as required by
the Engineer's Representative shall be illuminated at night by reflectors or red lanterns.

The cost of barricades, danger, warning and deviation signs and providing
watchmen, shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.

WEATHER CONDITIONS 1030.

The Contractors shall be deemed to have taken all possible weather conditions
into account when preparing their tender and they shall not be entitled to extra payment
by reason of the occurrence or effect of high winds, tornadoes, excessive rainfall,
temperature or humidity or any other meteorological phenomena.

OTHER WORKS AND SERVICES 1031.

During the continuance of the contract the employer may cause other works
such as the installation of services to be carried out on, through or adjacent to the site.

The Contractor shall at all times comply with the requirements of the general
conditions of contract in respect of these and any other works not included in the
Contract and shall allow reasonable access as approved by the Engineer on and through
the site of the works to any other Contractors or workmen who may be working on or
near the site.

The Contractor shall make adequate arrangements to the satisfaction of the

Engineer's Representative for the disposal of all sewage, rubbish and all other waste
materials arising from or connected with the execution of the works.

11
 The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for and shall provide any
service (including telephone and radio communications) which he may require in
addition to the foregoing.

In the programme and particulars required under Clause 14 of the Conditions of

Contract the Contractor shall:

(i) provide details of the sequence he proposes for carrying out the works,

(ii) state and allow a reasonable margin of time for contingencies and

(iii) state his intentions regarding shift work.

The Contractor's programme shall make due allowance for requirements

specified in all clauses of the Specification.

The Contractor shall report monthly progress to the Engineer on charts

submitted in triplicate and showing actual work done superimposed upon copies of the
programme.

He shall furnish an explanation of any deviation from the programme and shall
state proposals for improving progress should this be lacking in any respect.

(CLAUSES 1032 - 1039 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (B): MATERIALS AND TESTING

MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORIES AND STAFF 1040.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain materials laboratories, equipment

and staff as directed by the Engineer and more particularly described in Schedule No.
VI of the Bills of Quantities.

The Contractor shall provide, maintain and staff laboratories at his own expense
throughout the Contract. The said laboratories shall be in a waterproof building or
rooms designated and used exclusively for the purpose and shall be maintained in a
clean and tidy fashion to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. The
laboratories shall have an adequate water and electricity supply. The laboratories shall
be staffed with Engineers well experienced in materials testing and approved by the
Engineer. The laboratories shall be located within 50 Km. of all works in the field
requiring sampling and testing. Work will not be permitted to begin until laboratories
and staff have been provided within this distance.

The Contractor shall provide all the testing equipment, tools, etc., and shall carry
out tests on materials as directed and shall supply the Engineer's Representative with
two copies of the results of each test on approved printed forms. A third copy of the
results shall be retained in the laboratories.

12
 Without limiting the Contractor's responsibility as stipulated above, the facilities
of the laboratories shall be available for the use of the Engineer's Representative and his
assistants to perform control tests on workmanship and materials as provided for in the
Specification.

Notwithstanding the results of tests carried out by the Contractor, approval of

workmanship and materials shall be based on the results of these control tests.

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the Engineer's Representative

when any items of the works scheduled below are completed and ready for approval
and the Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow control tests to be performed.
Generally the time required to perform control tests by the Engineer's Representative
after the receipt of the Contractor's notification shall be as follows:

All filling and subgrade 3 days

Unstabilized sub base and base course 3 days
Crushed stone base 3 days
Surfacing materials 7 days
Structural concrete 30 days
Asphalt concrete 10 days

Note: Where construction is carried out in arid region where moisture of finished fill,
subbase base or stone base can dry out from the surface rapidly, the time of notification
may be reduced at the request of the Contractor making representation to the
Engineer's Representative on same.

Unless otherwise specified, the cost of carrying out all tests shall be deemed to
be included in the tendered rates and prices and the Contractor shall be deemed to have
allowed for the costs of providing all facilities necessary. No claim for delay of any kind
shall be entertained by the Engineer in this respect if the stipulations of the foregoing
have not been observed.

All samples and records shall be preserved as long as the Engineer's

Representative may direct and they shall be kept and labelled in an orderly fashion. The
laboratories, equipment, all records and samples shall be open to inspection and use by
the Engineer or his Representative during all normal work hours.

The laboratory building shall be in accordance with the standards specified for
the office of the Engineer's Representative. Concrete floors shall be provided
throughout. The Contractor also shall provide air conditioning throughout the laboratory
and shall service, clean and light the building to the standards specified for the Office of
the Engineer's Representative.

As specified elsewhere in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall supply

suitable vehicles equipped and reserved exclusively for the use at all times of the
laboratory staff to permit the carrying out of control tests in the field.

Where directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall remove and dispose of the

13
building and unserviceable vehicles make good any damage to the site and leave it clean
and neat.

The facilities of the testing laboratory shall be made available for use by the
Engineer's Representative at all times for the purpose of the works.

TESTING OF MATERIALS 1041.

The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of all materials used throughout the
contract, to ensure that they are up to the standards specified.

The Contractor shall carry out such laboratory and field tests (including tests to
check the accuracy of testing equipment and methods but excluding tests specified to
be carried out in an independent testing laboratory) as specified and as may be
necessary to ensure and satisfy the Engineer that the requirements of the Specifications
are met. The type and frequency of testing shall be in accordance with the relevant
Nigerian Industrial Standards or British Standards except as otherwise specified herein
or directed by the Engineer.

The frequencies of testing specified in the relevant clauses are intended to

represent only a general guide. The Engineer's Representative shall be empowered to
vary the frequencies at which tests are conducted should he deem this necessary for the
proper control of the quality of the Works. Should the Engineer's Representative vary
the frequencies stated in the relevant clauses of the Specification, the Contractor will not
be entitled to extra payment.

Unless otherwise agreed or directed by the Engineer, methods of sampling and

test procedures shall be in accordance with the relevant Nigerian Industrial Standards/
British Standards, British Standard Codes of Practice, Standard Methods of the Institute
of Petroleum and the American Society for Testing Materials, the Asphalt Institute,
Building Research Station Digests and published recommendations of the Transport and
Road Research Laboratory. Samples will be selected by the Engineer's Representative.

Where tests are specified or directed by the Engineer's Representative to be

carried out in an independent testing laboratory, the Contractor shall supply and deliver
the samples and shall arrange for the relevant tests to be carried out. The independent
testing laboratory shall be nominated by the Contractor and shall be acceptable to the
Engineer's Representative. Unless otherwise specified the Contractor shall arrange for
one copy of the independent testing laboratory's test certificates to be delivered to the
Engineer's Representative not less than 7 working days before the materials covered by
the relevant test certificate are incorporated in the Works. Each test certificate shall be
relatable to the materials from which the sample was taken.

When any material or article is required to comply with a British Standard or any
other Standard specified herein such material or article or its container shall bear the
stamp of the registered certificate trade mark of the British Standards Institution or the
certification of the applicable standard. Alternatively, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer certified test certificates furnished by the supplier or manufacturer of the

14
material or article indicating compliance with the relevant British Standards or a copy of
the manufacturer's or supplier's test certificate showing that the material has been
tested and found to comply in all respects with the relevant standard. Notwithstanding
the above, the Engineer's Representative may require additional tests to be carried out
by an approved local testing establishment and the material shall be supplied by the
Contractor. In such cases a copy of the test result shall be submitted to the Engineer's
Representative in lieu of the Manufacturer's/Supplier's certificate. All testing carried out
by the Contractor shall be undertaken by approved qualified staff who shall be
nominated by the Contractor and sufficient notice of the intention to carry out such tests
shall be given to the Engineer's Representative to enable him to be present during the
tests should he so desire.

The Contractor shall arrange and the Engineer shall have power to send
inspectors to the premises of the manufacturers and suppliers to inspect the
manufacture and testing of the materials intended for use in the works. Materials tested
before leaving the manufacturer's or supplier's premises may be tested again after
delivery at the site, at the discretion of the Engineer's Representative.

Notwithstanding the results of the tests at the supplier's or manufacturer's

premises, the production of a test certificate or the results of any tests carried out by an
approved testing establishment or by the Contractor, the Engineer's Representative shall
have power to reject after delivery at the site any materials found to be not in
accordance with the requirements of this specification.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his tendered rates and prices
all costs arising out of compliance with the requirements of this clause.

INDEPENDENT TESTS 1042.

Notwithstanding successful t test results being submitted for any material, and in
addition to the tests required under other clauses of this specification, the Engineer may
order further tests of any material to be carried out by his own central laboratory or by
an independent tester at such places as he may determine. The Contractor shall
provide the samples for such tests free of charge, but payment for the tests shall be the
employer's responsibility and charged against the appropriate provisional sum except as
detailed in Clause 36 (4) of the Conditions of Contract.

INSPECTION ENGINEER 1043.

For the purposes of this contract and in accordance with Clause 36 of the
Conditions of Contract, the Engineer may appoint one or more Inspection Engineers for
all imported materials to be used in connection with the contract.

If any Inspection Engineer is to be appointed for the inspection of imported

materials the Engineer shall select the Inspection Engineer and inform the Contractor
accordingly.

For all materials of Nigerian origin the Inspection Engineer shall be the

15
Engineer's duly Authorized Representative in Nigeria.

Where an Inspection Engineer has been appointed for imported materials the
Contractor shall before he enters into any arrangement for the supply or manufacture of
materials, submit for the approval of the Inspection Engineer, the names of the
manufacturers or merchants he proposes to employ. Should the Inspection Engineer at
any time be dissatisfied with any of the methods or operations carried out at the
manufacturer's works or place of business, he shall be empowered to cancel his previous
consent for materials to be obtained from such manufacturer or merchant. Should the
Contractor fail to submit for the approval of the Inspection Engineer samples of material
of satisfactory quality or workmanship, the Inspection Engineer shall have the power to
specify any particular manufacturer or merchant for the supply of the materials and the
Contractor shall obtain such materials from the said manufacturers or merchants without
additional charge.

The Inspection Engineer shall examine and test and if necessary analyze all
materials and test the fabrication of any structures or structural components to be used
in the permanent works. The Inspection Engineer and his Representatives shall have
free access at all reasonable times to the manufacturer's or merchant's premises and
shall be afforded every facility for making inspections and for taking of samples for
testing and analyses.

The manufacturers or merchants shall provide free of charge and to the

satisfaction of the Inspection Engineer all appliances required for the testing of the
materials at the manufacturer's or merchant's premises and they shall supply samples
and meet the costs of transport thereof to enable tests and analyses to be made at a
laboratory if and when directed by the Inspection Engineer.

All materials to be provided by the Contractor shall be submitted for the approval
of the Inspection Engineer before removal from the place of manufacture and under no
circumstances shall materials be shipped without the approval certificate issued by the
Inspection Engineer. The Contractor shall give twenty one days' notice in writing to the
Inspection Engineer of his intention to remove materials from the place of manufacture
or fabrication.

If in the opinion of the Inspection Engineer the despatch of any materials or

things have been unduly delayed after they have been inspected and approval
certificates issued, the Inspection Engineer may issue an order in writing that the
materials or things shall be reinspected.

Invoices or shipping lists in triplicate showing in detail the net weights and
quantities of all materials for the permanent work despatched to the site shall be
forwarded to the Inspection Engineer directly when the materials are despatched. In
the case of steel and iron work such invoices or shipping lists shall show separately the
net weight of articles under each item in the schedule of prices included in the invoice or
shipping lists.

All materials and any iron or steel articles supplied by the Contractor for use in

16
the permanent works or any materials for fabricating permanent steel or iron structures
and other articles shall be subjected from time to time before the issue of the approval
certificate to such tests and inspections as may be required or directed by the
Inspection Engineer.

All the tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Inspection Engineer or his
Representative and shall be performed in such a manner and by such processes at such
premises and at such times as he may consider desirable.

Notwithstanding any examination or tests that the Inspection Engineer may wish
to be carried out on any perishable materials prior to their despatch to the site, the
Engineer shall be at liberty to carry out any further tests that he may consider desirable
after delivery of such perishable materials at the site and to reject such materials which
fail to comply with the required quality or conditions, notwithstanding any provisional
approval before despatch to the site. The Engineer shall arrange for the inspection on
site of all materials and fabricated components to ascertain whether these materials and
fabricated components have in any way become damaged in transit to site.

The Engineer and the Inspection Engineer shall be kept properly informed as to
the progress of any work in hand or materials being prepared and supplied by the
Contractor in order that they shall be able to make such arrangements for examination,
testing and analysis as they may desire.

The Contractor shall weigh without any extra charge any materials, articles or
things supplied for the execution of the permanent work that the Engineer or the
Inspection Engineer may require and such weighing shall be carried out in their
presence or in the presence of their representatives.

When the Inspection Engineer is satisfied in all respects with the inspection,
regarding samples and test results of materials and fabrication of structures, he shall
issue to the Contractor an approval certificate thereof.

Where the Contractor/Manufacturer could not agree with the inspection Engineer
the Contractor may request with the permission of the Engineer that such materials be
tested by an independent testing body as may be agreed by both parties in dispute,
and cost of such test shall be borne by the Contractor.

MATERIALS SPECIFIED TO B.S. 1044.

As provided in Clause 36 of the General Condition of Contract and in

accordance with the Standard Organization of Nigeria or British Standard Specifications
quoted for any materials used on the works of this Contract, tests may be called for by
the Engineer to be carried out at the place of manufacture, fabrication, on the site, or at
any of such places.

The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of all materials used throughout the

17
contract to ensure that they are up to the standard specified, i.e., aggregates, sand,
cement, water, reinforcement, concrete, blinding materials as specified or decided by
the Engineer.

The tests to be carried out on any material except as detailed hereafter, shall be
those specified, implied or intended in the appropriate N.I.S or B.S.

APPARATUS REQUIRED FOR TESTING 1045.

Notwithstanding that any test, piece of equipment or apparatus is not specifically

mentioned or described in the various pages hereof, nevertheless if directed by the
Engineer the Contractor is to supply at his own expense all apparatus and equipment of
whatever kind necessary to carry out any test mentioned in or required by the
provisions of the various clauses in this specification and the British Standard
Specifications incorporated in this Specification.

The Engineer shall be the final arbitrator on which tests are necessary for the
proper execution of the works.

NOTICE OF TESTS 1046.

Where the Contractor is responsible for the carrying out of any control test, he
shall first give notice of his intention to carry out such a test to the Engineer's
Representative to enable him to be present during the test. Where the Engineer or his
Representative conducts any control test, he shall give the Contractor sufficient notice to
enable him, should he so wish, to be present during the test. Should the Contractor not
wish to witness any control tests conducted by the Engineer or his Representative, the
Contractor shall be deemed to accept the validity of the results of such tests.

SAMPLING 1047.

All samples of materials to be tested shall be selected according to the method

laid down in the appropriate Nigerian Industrial Standards or British Standard
Specification or where there is no such standard it shall be by the method to be
mutually agreed between the Engineer's Representative and the Contractor in so far as
the selection has not been prescribed below.

SAMPLING OF MATERIALS FROM BORROW PIT 1048.

Trial pits in proposed borrow pit areas shall be dug from original ground level.
Trial pits shall be at least one metre by one metre in size, dug to such a depth that
the full extent of the material intended for incorporation in the works is exposed.

Materials for testing shall not be taken from the spoil of the trial pit but shall be

18
made up of increments taken from each face of the pit, each increment to be a
representative sample of the entire depth of a horizon. The four increments shall be
mixed three times and quartered or riffled down to the size required for testing. Visual
examination will be made to ensure that sampling more than one horizon in any sample
is avoided.

SAMPLING OF MATERIALS FROM STOCK PILES 1049.

The surface material of a stock pile shall be removed before sampling. At least
twelve samples shall be taken from different parts of the stockpile, avoiding
segregated material, and thoroughly mixed by hand before quartering down to required
size.

TEST TO BE CARRIED OUT 1050.

In addition to the specific requirement of the various clauses of this

specification, the Engineer may direct that any or all of the following procedures and
tests be carried out.

(A) The following tests and procedures as described in B.S.1377 (1975)

"Methods of Tests for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes":-

Item 1.5 Preparation of disturbed soil samples for Testing.

Test 1 (A) Item 2.1.1

Determination of moisture content (Standard Method).

Test 2 (A) Item 2.2.1

Determination of Liquid Limit (CONE Penetrometer
method)

Test 2 (B) Item 2.2.2

Casagrande apparatus method

Item 2.3 Test 3

Determination of Plastic Limit, using the following
modifications:

(1) Materials for testing shall be moisturized, mixed for 15 minutes and
sealed in an approved air tight container for a minimum period of 24
hours before testing.

(2) After the above period of curing, the material shall be removed from the
container and remixed with 10mm spatula for an exact period of fifteen
minutes.

(3) For the method of determining the liquid limit as laid down in B.S. 1377

19
 at least five points in the range 10-60 blows, evenly distributed when
plotted on a logarithm scale, shall be made. Consecutive tests with
respect to moisture content shall form a wetting and not a drying curve.

(4) Alternatively the one point method of determining the liquid limit may be
used.

LL = W [N] tanß LL = W [N] x 0.10

[25] [25]

Where W is the moisture content %, N number of blows and tan ß

= 0.10 this is the slope of the calculated flow line. The value of N shall
lie in range 20-30. The liquid limit shall be taken as the mean of at least
two such tests.

(5) The plastic limit of material shall be taken as the mean of at least three
tests.

2.6.1 Test 6 (A) : Determination of the specific gravity of soil

particles suitable or fine, medium and
coarse grained soils

2.6.2 Test 6 (B) : Suitable for fine grained soils

2.7.1 Test 7A Determination of particle size distribution in

soils, using the wet method with following
modifications:-

WET SIEVE ANALYSIS

All materials passing 5mm sieve shall be sampled for moisture to

determine the natural moisture content of the sample for wet sieving. For
different sizes of materials the weight of soil sample to be used is as
listed in Table I-1:-
TABLE I-1 WEIGHT OF SAMPLE FOR WET SIEVING
Maximum Size of Particle present in
Minimum weight of Sample to be taken for
substantial proportion (more than 10%)
Testing
retained on Standard Test Sieves
Kg
Mm
63 50
50 35
37.5 15
28 5
20 2
14 1
10 0.5
6.3 0.2
Passing 2mm to 63µm 0.1

20
(A) All material passing the 5mm sieve shall be sampled for moisture content,
weighed, wet sieved through the No. 75m sieve oven dried, and sieved
through the full nest of sieves. The portion retained on each sieve shall
be weighed. The weight of the original sample shall be adjusted for
moisture content.

(B) Material retained on the 5mm sieve if it is porous or tends to retain fine
particles on the surface shall be wet sieved as described in the paragraph
above full allowance being made for the air dry moisture content.

(C) If the material retained on the 5mm sieve is clean of clay and contains no
pores or adhesions, the coarse fraction may be dry sieved.

(D) Pre-treatment and the analysis of the fraction passing 75(m sieve may be
omitted.

Item 4.1.12: Determination of Density/Moisture Content Relation of Soil

(B.S. Compaction Test)

Item 4.4.1, 4.4.2, Field Density by sand &

4.4.3:15 A, B & C Replacement Method.

Item 15 D Determination of Dry Density by Core

Cutter Method (for fine grained soils).

(B) THE WEST AFRICAN COMPACTION TEST:

This test is identical with Test 13 in B.S.1377, (1975) except as follows:

(I) The size of the mould shall be, 150mm internal diameter, and 125mm
internal effective height and a volume of 2210cm3.

(II) The weight of the metal rammer shall be 4.5kg instead of 2.5kg (the
diameter of bottom face remaining at 50mm

(III) The drop of the rammer shall be 450mm instead of 300mm

(IV) The moist soil shall be compacted in the mould in five equal layers each
layer being given twenty five blows.

(V) The percentage moisture content corresponding to the maximum density

on the moisture content dry soil density curve shall be reported as the
optimum moisture content for West African Compaction.

(VI) Separate materials shall be used for each compaction point, i.e. materials
only air dried previously and not oven dried, mixed with water and

21
 allowed to moisturize for 12 hours before compaction.

THE MODIFIED A.A.S.H.O. (AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF

STATE HIGHWAY OFFICIALS) COMPACTION TEST:

This test is identical with Test 13 in B.S.1377, except as follows:

(I) The size of the mould shall be 150mm internal diameter, and 125mm
internal effective height and a volume of 2210 cm².

(II) The weight of the metal rammer shall be 4.5kg instead of 2.5kg (the
diameter of bottom face remaining at 50mm

(III) The drop of the rammer shall be 450mm instead of 300mm

(IV) The moist soil shall be compacted in the mould in 5 equal layers, each
layer being given 61 blows from the rammer dropped from a height of
450mm above the soil.

(V) The percentage moisture content corresponding to the maximum density

on the moisture content dry soil density curve shall be reported as the
"Optimum Moisture Content for Modified A.A.S.H.O. Compaction".

(VI) Separate materials shall be used for each compaction point, i.e. materials
only air dried previously and not oven dried, mixed with water and
allowed to moisturize for 12 hours before compaction.

(3rd) LABORATORY C.B.R. TEST:

To be carried out in accordance with the method laid down by "The

Materials Testing Conference, February 1961" as follows:

(I) Different samples of materials shall be used for each point in the
compaction for C.B.R. Test.

(II) The materials for testing shall be moisturized and sealed in an airtight
container for a minimum period of 12 hours before testing.

(III) The Standard Compaction used for C.B.R. Tests shall be as follows:

(a) Sub Grade Materials and all Filings:

The British Standard Compaction.

(Two) Sub Base Course Material:

The West African Standard Compaction.

(c) Base Course Material: The West African Standard or Mod.

22
 A.A.S.H.O. Standard as directed by the Engineer may be used for
laterite, stone or Mechanically Stabilized Base Course and the B.S.
Compaction for Cement Stabilized Base Course. For other type of
Base Course Compaction shall be decided by the Engineer.

(E) SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MINERAL AGGREGATES

The following procedures and tests shall be as described in B.S. 812

"Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregates, Sands and Fillers":

Section One: Sampling and Submission of Samples.

Section Three: Determination of Particle Size and Shape.

Section Four: Determination of Specific Gravity, Density, Voids

and Absorption.

Section Five: Organic Impurities.

(F) METHOD OF TESTING CONCRETE

The following procedures and tests as described in B.S. 1881

"Method of Testing Concrete":

Part 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete in the Field.

Part 2. Slump Test.

Part 3. Compacting Factor Test

Part 6. Making and Curing of Compression Test Cubes in

the Laboratory.

Part 7. Making and Curing of Compression Test Cubes in

the Field.

UNSATISFACTORY TEST RESULTS 1051.

Should in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative any of the results of the
specified tests on materials be unsatisfactory, the Engineer's Representative may order
the work to be stopped pending his further instruction. Executed work for which test
results are unsatisfactory shall be liable to be rejected, and, if so directed by the
Engineer, the work represented by the tests shall be cut out and re
executed at Contractor's Expense.

The cost of all such cutting, preparation of specimens, testing, and of making
good the portions of the works affected shall be borne by the Contractor.

23
TRIAL SECTIONS OF ROAD 1052.

One or more trial stretches as directed by the Engineer's Representative shall

be constructed with the proposed materials prior to the start of the main construction to
determine the most efficient compaction technique, the suitability of the proposed
materials and of the plant. Each of these trial sections shall be at least 30 metres in
length, at a site and in the alignment as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The
results obtained from these trial rolling stretches shall be used as guide and complement
with laboratory test results for subsequent construction and control.

It is likely that these stretches will be incorporated in the works. Should one or
all of these stretches or a part thereof be rejected the Contractor will be reimbursed for
the rejected work in accordance with the rates at which the relevant items have been
priced in the Bill of Quantities.

ROLLING TEST

1052A. DEFINITION

Rolling Test shall be used to establish the optimum moisture and maximum dry
density of the proposed plant for a particular type of soil material. In addition it shall be
used to determine the economic number of passes of the plant that may be required to
achieve the maximum dry density at a known moisture. This test is a corollary to
laboratory tests already carried out using CBR mould and specified compactive effort.

1052B. TEST PROCEDURE

(a) Prepare a formation of a reasonable length (about 48m) adequately

compacted to serve as a good platform for the rolling test.

(b) Spread the loose material on the prepared platform to a desired loose
depth. (Between 200mm to 300mm for laterite)

(c) Divide the test section into at least five bays (each bay not less than 8m)
and leaving a gap of two metres between bays to avoid intermixing of
materials from adjacent bays. Determine the moisture of the material in
each bay. This may be done by using the speedy method and sampling in
various points, taking the mean result of four as the moisture content.

(d) Adjust the moisture content in each bay with a view to straddling the
optimum moisture content. This could be achieved by progressively
increasing the passes of the water tank in different bays as shown in the
Table 1.2

TABLE I-2 SHOWING THE NUMBER OF PASSES OF WATER TANK

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3 Bay 4 Bay 5

24
 4 6 8 10 12
Passes Passes Passes Passes Passes

(e) Mix the loose soil and water to ensure thorough moisturization using
either hand, pulvimixer or rotovator. (To ensure uniform moisturization
the watered material could be left over night before mixing).

(f) Compact to refusal the loose material whose OMC and MDD is required
with the available plant. For practical purposes fifteen to twenty passes of
10 to 15 tonnes of a three wheel roller or ten or fifteen passes of a
vibrating roller will be adequate for a lateritic material. For the three
wheel roller the rear wheel is the compacting wheel while the front is the
compacting wheel for he vibrating roller.

(g) Determine the insitu dry density and moisture content of each bay based
on the mean of four tests. Concentrating the measurement on the wheel
path of the rear or front wheel as the case may be.

(h) Plot results of the dry density and moisture content and determine the
optimum moisture content and dry density appropriate to the plant.

1052C DETERMINATION OF ECONOMIC PASSES

(a) Prepare another test section as in clause 1052B and bring the moisture
content to the optimum moisture content earlier determined.

(b) Divide the section into bays and vary the number of passes of the roller
on each bay as shown in Table 1.3

TABLE I-3 NUMBER OF PASSES OF THE ROLLER

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3 Bay 4 Bay 5

4 6 8 10 12
Passes Passes Passes Passes Passes

(c) After rolling determine the dry density of each bay (based on mean of
four tests)

25
(Four) Plot the dry density and number of passes relationship to determine the
minimum number of passes that will achieve the maximum density.

TABLE 1-4 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN COMPACTION PLANT AND

LABORATORY TEST: MDD AND OMC

SOIL TYPE
GRAVELLY
HEAVY SILTY SNADY
SAND SANDY
COMPACTION CLAY CLAY CLAY
CLAY
MD OM MD OM MD OM MD OM MD OMC
D C D C D C D C D
B.S. 155 166 184 193 206
26 21 14 11 9
2.5Kg. 4 6 2 8 7
B.S.
181 192 205 208 221
(Heavy) 17 14 11 9 7
0 2 1 3 1
4.5 Kg.
2800Kg.
152 176 182 203 214
S.W. 21 17 16 10 8
2 2 6 4 7
Roller
8000 Kg.
166 177 185 211 221
S.W. 20 16 14 8 7
6 8 8 5 1
Roller
Pneumatic
157 166 173 203 201
Tyred 25 20 19 11 7
0 6 0 4 8
Roller
Sheepsfoot
(Tapper-Foot) 1714 15 1842 14 1927 12 2051 5
Roller

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS 1053.

All materials to be used in the works shall be handled with due care and
whenever not in immediate use shall be adequately stored and protected having
particular regard in all cases and throughout to the nature of the material and its
susceptibility to damage, breakage, deterioration, attack by weather or any act of
abuse.

(CLAUSES 1054 1059 NOT USED)

PART (C) MISCELLANEOUS: 其余

ASSISTANCE FOR ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE 1060.

The Contractor shall provide at all times during the continuance of the contract

26
all equipment and instruments for the exclusive use of the Engineer's Representative
on the scale as set out in detail in Schedule No. VI. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for all such instruments and shall ensure that they are at all times in good
repair and adjustment.

The Contractor also shall supply such workmen as may be deemed necessary by
the Engineer's Representative, from time to time during the continuance of the contract,
to assist the Engineer's Representative in carrying out his duties. These workmen shall
be selected for their intelligence and knowledge of the English language, and where
possible the same men shall be provided throughout the period of the Contract.

Payment for furnishing workmen and instruments, etc. to assist the Engineer's
Representative shall be charged against provisional sum item "Payment of Wages to
Engineer's Daily Paid Staff". All instruments and equipment so furnished become the
property of the Federal Ministry of Works on the completion of the Works.

OFFICE ACCOMMODATION 1061.

The Contractor shall provide air-conditioned office accommodations and

equipment for the sole use of the Engineer's Representative and his assistants. The
extent of the office accommodation and equipment to be provided as set down below
unless specified in Schedule No. VI.

The offices shall be 28.95 metres long by 5.55 metres wide with 2.45 metres
headroom all measured internally complete with ceiling and smooth concrete or wooden
floor, and a 2.02 metres wide covered veranda on all sides. The office shall be divided
into three rooms each 3.6 metres long. The rooms shall be adequately ventilated and
lighted and through ventilation shall be provided in the roof space. The walls must be
constructed of either prefabricated timber sections or sand cement blocks. All doors and
windows shall be arranged so that they can be securely fastened on the inside. All
doors shall be provided with cylinder locks with two keys.

The following furnishings shall be supplied for each site office:

6 Desks 1.5 metres x 0.75 metres with 2 chests of drawers

6 Chairs with arms
1 Table 1.5 metres x 0.75 metres with two drawers and chairs
1 Typist's table with one chest of drawers and chair
1 Typewriter, standard office size 3 Draughtsman's tables and stools
3 Sets of Normal Equipment for a Draughtsman
1 Six-drawer steel filing cabinet
3 Four-drawer steel filing cabinets
2 Cupboards 2.0 x 1.0 x 0.5 metres with 4 shelves
2 Clerk's tables 1.2m x 0.75m with 12 chairs
2 Pairs of set squares 600 and 450
2 Planimeters
3 Sets of Engineer's scales, metric
1 Set of shelves and hooks as required

27
2 Stainless Steel straight edges 1 metre long
1 Refrigerator
1 Conference Table with 8 chairs
4 Small Tables with chairs
1 Set of Applicable British Standards, Current Edition
1 Copy of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Method of
Sampling and Testing Volumes 1 & II, Current Edition.
1 Civil Engineer's Radius Guide
1 Set of transparent plastic railroad curves
1 Electronic calculator
1 Electric adding machine
1 Electric erasing machine
1 Photocopy machine with accessories and supplies.

Adjacent to the two ends of the building the Contractor shall erect a board
750mm x 600mm bearing the following inscriptions.

Principal Resident's Engineer's Office

(Project Designation)

Section No. or Description

In addition each door of the building shall be lettered in accordance with the
instructions of the Engineer's Representative.

These building(s) shall be erected at locations as directed by the Engineer's

Representative. The offices shall be separate from those of the Contractor and shall be
fenced off and provided with a separate entrance.

The Contractor shall provide two water closets and two wash hand basins with
mirrors in rooms attached to the use of the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor
shall keep clean and maintain this lavatory accommodation. He shall also provide soap,
towels and all necessary fittings and cleaning materials.

The Contractor shall arrange for the offices to be connected to a water and
electricity supply.

The Contractor shall provide a roofed shelter for six cars which shall be built
adjoining the offices.

The cost of providing the offices, water, electricity supply and maintenance
during the whole period of the contract shall be deemed to be included in the price
inserted under the appropriate item in the Bill of Quantities. The buildings and
equipment shall be for the sole use of the Engineer's Representative during the period of
the Contract and shall remain the property of the Employer after the completion of the

28
Contract.

FENCING 1062.

The Contractor shall provide and erect fencing or walls complete with access
gates along the land acquisition boundaries during the period of construction as and
where directed by the Engineer's Representative.

Payment for fencing and walling will be made from the appropriate item in the
Bill of Quantities.

No payment will be made for fencing or walls erected by the Contractor for the
purpose of making secure his own working areas, yards, stores, as this will be deemed
included in this pricing.

COMPLIANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS OF THE NIGERIA RAILWAY

CORPORATION AND GOVERNMENT INSPECTOR OR RAILWAYS 1063.

Where the works abut, enter into or pass over property or properties belonging
to the Nigerian Railway Corporation, the Contractor shall comply with all the
regulations laid down and give all notices required by the Nigerian Railways Corporation
and the Government Inspector of Railways.

COMPLIANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS OF THE NIGERIAN PORTS

AUTHORITY 1064.

Where the works are sited in, or operations connected with the works in any way
whatsoever pass through, waters controlled by the Nigerian Ports Authority the
Contractor shall abide by all the regulations laid down, and give all notices required, by
the Nigerian Ports Authority.

TAKING OVER OF SITE BY CONTRACTOR 1065.

The site shall be handed over to the Contractor in minimum lengths of sixteen
kilometres. The date on which each portion is taken over shall be recorded and certified
in writing by both the Engineer's Representative and the Contractor's Agent and from
the date on which each portion is taken over the Contractor shall be responsible for
maintaining that portion of road in good condition and for repairing damage of any kind
to the road culverts or bridges arising from whatever cause save and except the
excepted risks as defined in Clause 20 of the "General Conditions".

(CLAUSES 1066 1099 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

29
 SPECIFICATION

SECTION II - CONCRETE: MASS AND

REINFORCED

30
 SECTION II MASS AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 大体积钢筋混凝土
GENERAL 2000.

In addition to any other relevant clause of this specification, the following shall
be deemed to apply in particular to mass and reinforced concrete work, and shall be
read in conjunction with all other relevant clauses of the conditions of Contract and this
Specification.

PART A - MATERIALS

2001.
(1) GENERAL

The Cement shall be ordinary or rapid hardening portland cement and shall
conform to the requirements of NIS 11 or B.S. No. 12 portland cement (ordinary and
rapid hardening) and B.S.C.P.114 and shall be supplied by manufacturers of good repute
to be approved by the Engineer.

(2) SULPHATE RESISTING CEMENT

Where the use of a sulphate resisting cement is indicated as specified or in the

bills it shall be a sulphate resisting portland cement of approved type and manufacture
complying with B.S. 4027.

(3) COLOURED CEMENT

White or coloured cement shall be of approved quality and chemical composition

and shall comply with the physical requirements of NIS 11 or B.S. No. 12

(4) BLENDING

There shall be no blending or mixing of cements, and the use of any air-
entraining, wetting agents, or accelerators such as calcium chloride will only be
permitted if called for by the Engineer.

31
(5) EXTRA PAYMENT

The Contractors shall not receive extra payment for using rapid hardening
portland cement unless they do so under the specific instructions of the Engineer.

(6) TEST CERTIFICATE FOR CEMENT

Each consignment of cement intended for use in the works shall be accompanied
by a manufacturer's test certificate showing that the cement offered has been tested
and analysed, the date and results of such tests and analyses, and that the cement
conforms in all respects with NlS 11 or B.S.12.

Where such a certificate is not available due to exceptional circumstances which,

in the opinion of the Engineer are acceptable, then the Contractor shall arrange for each
consignment of cement to be tested and analyzed strictly in accordance with NIS 11 or
B.S.12 by a tester to be selected by the Engineer and the tester shall supply a certificate
satisfying all the requirements laid down for the manufacturer's test certificate.
Irrespective of the results of these tests, the Contractor shall bear all costs in connection
with or arising out of them.

(7) INDEPENDENT TESTS ON CEMENT

In addition to any tests mentioned elsewhere in this specification, the Engineer's

Representative may require cement to be sampled at the manufacturer's works and
subsequently tested by an independent tester. No cement shall be despatched until the
results of such tests and analyses are known and have been approved in writing by the
Engineer's Representative. Payment for these tests shall be the employer's responsibility
and charged against the appropriate provisional sum, except as detailed in Clause 36 (4)
of the Conditions of Contract.

(8) PACKING AND MARKING OF BAGS FOR CEMENT

After each consignment of cement has been tested and approved as complying
with B.S. No. 12 and unless approval is given by the Engineer's Representative for the
handling of cement in bulk, all cement shall be packed into bags of an approved type.
The bags of each consignment shall be given a distinctive mark, to be agreed between
the Contractor and the Engineer's Representative, also a consignment number, so that
each consignment can be easily identified on being delivered to the site and when being
used subsequently in the works.

(9) NOTICE OF DESPATCH AND DELIVERY OF CEMENT

Before ordering the despatch from the manufacturer of a consignment of cement

for use in the works,the Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer's
Representative of the number of the consignment, the name of the manufacturer and
the number of tonnes in the consignment.

When each consignment is delivered to the site, the Contractor shall issue to the

32
Engineer's Representative a written statement showing the number of the consignment,
the name of the manufacturer, the number of tonnes in the consignment, the number of
bags and enclosing the respective test certificates. The statement shall also show where
the consignment is stored. Cement may be shipped in bulk or in 50 Kg bags subject to
approval of the Engineer and subject to such requirements as he may deem necessary.
Railroad cars or trucks in which cement is shipped shall be loaded under the supervision
of and sealed by the Engineer. Cars or trucks with broken seals may be unloaded, but
the cement shall not be used until retested and approved.

(10) STORAGE OF CEMENT ON SITE

On delivery at the site, the cement shall be stored in suitable, thoroughly dry and
well ventilated lock up sheds to be erected by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer's Representative. Great care must be taken to provide a perfectly dry floor of
timber or concrete for each shed so as to prevent damp rising to the cement. Small
quantities left at the site shall be stored on suitable platforms and protected with
waterproof covering to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Each consignment, brand and type of cement shall be kept separate in the sheds
and suitable labels are to be provided for each consignment, brand and type, on which
shall be entered the consignment number, date of despatch, date of delivery at the site,
the number of bags, the date when using commenced and the date when using finished.
All these labels shall be handed to the Engineer's Representative when the cement has
been used and will be retained by him.

No cement shall be used without the permission of the Engineer's Representative

and each consignment must be used singly and in order of delivery at the site, or as
may be directed by the Engineer's Representative.

(11) STOCK OF CEMENT AND MONTHLY RETURNS

The Contractor shall at all times maintain at the site such a stock of cement as
will ensure due and proper progress of the works.

Each month, on the date corresponding to the interim certificate date, the
Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's Representative, a return of the various
consignments in store, giving the total tonnage at site, the quantity received during the
month, from whom it was obtained and in what sheds it has been deposited.
Also the quantity issued during the month, from what consignment and sheds it
was issued and in what portions of the works it was used.

(12) TESTS ON CEMENT AFTER DELIVERY

After delivery on the site the Engineer's Representative may require each
consignment of cement to be subjected to any or all of the tests and analyses required
by B.S.12

33
 Payment for these tests shall be the Contractor's responsibility and deemed to be
included in the tendered rates and prices.

(13) REJECTION OF CEMENT

Notwithstanding the production of test certificates whether from manufacturer

tester or independent tester, the Engineer's Representative shall reject any cement
found not to comply with this specification, at any time. He shall also reject any cement
which has been damaged or which has deteriorated owing to inadequate protection
during storage or transport or any other cause. Cement containing lumps of hardened
cement or which has been stored for more than 6 months shall not be used.

The Contractor shall remove all rejected cement from the site without delay and
at his own expense.

(14) ADMIXTURES

Admixtures for accelerating or retarding the setting of the cement, etc., shall not
be used in any circumstances except with the written permission of the Engineer. When
such permission is sought, the Contractor must supply full details of the admixture he
wishes to use.

WATER 2002.

Water used for mixing and curing concrete shall be clean, fresh water from an
approved source and it shall be free from injurious oils, chemicals, vegetable matter,
organic and other impurities and shall comply with the requirements of B.S.3148

The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes, tanks and other receptacles for the
storage of water intended for use in the makings of concrete are kept in a clean
condition.

2003.
(1) GENERAL

The aggregates (fine, coarse and all in) for all grades of concrete and mortar
shall comply in all respects with B.S.882 (1973) and the Contractor shall test all samples
as described therein and in B.S.812 (1967) as often as the Engineer's Representative
may require,to ensure that they are continuously up to these standards. All aggregates
shall be hard, strong, durable, perfectly clean and free from organic matter and
deleterious coatings such as clay. They shall contain no harmful material in such
quantities as to affect adversely the strength or durability of the concrete, or attack the
reinforcement as ascertained by tests on concrete cubes as described hereafter and by
tests as described in B.S.882 (1973).

(2) THE SOURCES OF ALL AGGREGATES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE

ENGINEER'S REPRESENTATIVE

34
 All aggregates whether fine or coarse if considered unsuitable by the Engineer's
Representative shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own expense.

(3) TESTING

As soon as possible after receiving the Engineer's Authority to commence the

works (and before commencing any concreting) the Contractor shall have delivered
upon the site sample loads of aggregate representative, of those proposed for the
works, and shall forward samples prepared in accordance with the method laid down in
B.S. 812. The moisture content of aggregates shall be determined using the siphon can
procedure notwithstanding the foregoing, Speedy Moisture Content Apparatus may be
used for measuring the water content of fine aggregates. Each sample shall consist of
not less than 45 Kg weight of fine aggregate and 90 Kg of coarse aggregate in
accordance with the specification. No aggregate shall be used in the works until the
results of these tests shall have been submitted to the Engineer's Representative and his
approval in writing obtained.

The minimum frequency of testing at each concrete mixing plant shall not be less
than the following:

(I) TESTS OF COARSE AGGREGATES

(i) Sieve analysis 7 weeks

(ii) Determination of clay, fine silt and fine dust (Method B

Determination of amount of aggregate passing a 75 microns 3 days

(iii) Determination of flakiness index 2 weeks

(iv) Moisture Content Immediately prior to

commencement of mixing of
concrete for each cast, and
thereafter every half hour during
which concrete is being mixed.

(v) Determination of "ten per cent fine value" 2 weeks

(II) TESTS OF FINE AGGREGATES

(i) Sieve analysis 2 weeks

(b) Determination of fine silt and fine dust

(Method C - Field settling test 3 days

(iii) Estimation of organic impurities 3 days

35
(iv) Moisture content Immediately prior to
commencement of mixing
concrete for each cast thereafter
every half hour during which
concrete is being mixed.

(III) TESTING DRYING SHRINKAGE

(i) Drying shrinkage 8 weeks

Notwithstanding the foregoing additional tests shall be

carried out as and when directed by the Engineer's
Representative

(4) WASHING

Washing of aggregate may only be carried out using clean fresh water obtained
from an approved source. The Contractor is to provide adequate storage facilities and
arrange to obtain this water at times chosen so as to cause the minimum of
inconvenience to other consumers.

(5) STORAGE OF AGGREGATES

The Contractor shall provide proper means of storing the aggregates at each
point where concrete is made and in such a manner that there is no possibility of the
various aggregates mixing one with the other. Effective precautions shall be taken to
prevent the aggregates segregating in the storage heaps and from being contaminated
by the ground and other foreign matter.

Storage heaps shall be capable of draining freely. Wet aggregates shall not be
used until, in the Engineer's Representative's opinion, they have completely drained.
Where aggregates are damp, the Contractor must measure the moisture contents of the
aggregates continuously and adjust the amounts of aggregates and added water in each
batch of concrete mixed to allow for the water contained in the aggregates. If
necessary, to meet the requirements of this Clause, the Contractor shall protect the
heaps of aggregates from inclement weather.

(6) METHOD OF CALIBRATING SPEEDY MOISTURE TESTER

(a) Procedure

Sufficient fine aggregate passing sieve 1.25mm and retained on pan shall be
prepared and dried to constant weight. Weigh 3 kg to make 20 separate number of
specimen.

(b) Air-tight moisture content tins shall be weighed empty and to each shall
be placed 200 g of the dried soil and weighed again.

36
 (c) Varying quantity of water as indicated in the table below shall be added
to each pair of container and allowed self moisturization for 24 hours and
weighed thereafter before placing in the oven or for speedy tester
method.
TABLE II-1 OVEN METHOD

Tin Number A b c d E
No. of
2 2 2 2 2
Specimen
Weight of dry
200 200 200 200 200
soil, g
Volume of
20 24 28 32 40
water cc

Note: After weighing, place all oven method tins into

a
Standard oven with temperature not greater than
105ºC and dry the specimen to constant weight and
thereafter determine the moisture contents.

TABLE II-1A SPEEDY

TESTER METHOD

Tin Number A b C d E
No. of
2 2 2 2 2
Specimen
Weight of dry
200 200 200 200 200
soil, g
Volume of
20 24 28 32 40
water cc

Note: For the speedy tester, use the apparatus to

determine the moisture content of each pair of specimen
to constant moisture reading. The average reading of each
pair shall be the moisture of the specimen. Same holds for
the oven method.

(d) Calibration

Plot a straight line graph of oven moisture against speedy tester

results. By using the plotted graph, speedy test results can be
converted to oven method results.

FINE AGGREGATES 2004.

37
 (1) GENERAL

Fine Aggregate shall either comprise natural quartz sand or be obtained by

crushing clean granite or shall consist of naturally occurring sand obtained from fresh
water river deposits or a combination thereof and shall comply with Grading Zone 1 or
Grading Zone 2 of B.S.882 or such other grading as may be approved by the Engineer.
(see Table II-2)

(2) FINE DUST

The total quantity of fine dust passing through a 75 µm mesh sieve in fine
aggregate derived by crushing rock shall be determined by the method described in
B.S.812. and shall not exceed 8% by weight.

(3) QUANTITY OF CLAY AND SILT

The total quantity of clay and silt in natural sand shall not exceed 4% by weight
when determined by the field settling test decantation method described in B.S.812.
The quantity of organic impurities present in natural sand shall not be such as to
produce a reaction as dark as the standard solution when the organic impurities are
determined by the method described in B.S.812 (1975).
TABLE II - 2

FINE AGGREGATE GRADING ENVELOPES.

BS 410 PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT PASSING B.S. SIEVES

Test Sieve Grading Zone Grading Zone Grading Zone Grading Zone
1 2 3 4
10.00mm 100 100 100 100
5.00mm 90 – 100 90 – 100 90 – 100 95 – 100
2.36mm 60 – 95 75 – 100 85 – 100 95 – 100
1.18mm 30 – 70 55 – 90 75 – 100 90 – 100
600µm 15 – 34 35 – 59 60 – 79 80 – 100
300µm 5 – 20 8 – 30 12 – 40 15 – 50
1.50µm 0 – 10* 0 – 10* 0 – 10* 0 – 15*

* For crushed stone sands, the permissible limit is increased to 20% because of its
non clay nature of the fine materials. The 5% tolerance permitted may be applied to
the percentages. In the last three sets of sieves, it can be applied as follows: 1% on
the first of the three sieves and 2% on the others or 4% on one sieve and 1% on
others. The application of tolerance will depend upon the shape of the grading graph.

COARSE AGGREGATE 2005.

(1) GENERAL

Coarse Aggregate shall comprise natural gravel or crushed granite obtained by

38
crushing sound hard granite taken from a source approved by the Engineer's
Representative and shall contain no harmful material in sufficient quantity to adversely
affect the strength or durability of the concrete or in the case of reinforced concrete to
attack the reinforcement. All coarse aggregate shall be washed after crushing if
necessary to comply with the specification. The flakiness index when determined by the
method described in B.S.812 (1975) shall not exceed 30 per cent. The individual pieces
shall be roughly cubical or spherical in shape and have neither glassy nor powdery
surfaces.

(2) CRUSHING VALUE

The aggregate crushing value of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 45 per cent
when determined by the method described in B.S.812.

(3) THE GRADING

The grading of coarse aggregate particles is required to satisfy strictly the

percentage stated for 20 mm to 5 mm nominal sizes stated in the B.S. 882 with a
content not exceeding 1% passing the B.S. 2.4mm sieve size. The percentage passing
through 75µm sieve shall be determined by the method described in B.S.812. Sieves
shall comply to the requirements of B.S.410.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT 2006.

(1) GENERAL

The reinforcement shall be one of the following:

(I) Rolled steel bars or hard drawn steel wire complying with the
requirements of B.S.785 "Rolled steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement" and B.S.4449 (1969) Hot rolled steel bars for the
reinforcement of Concrete.

(II) Cold twisted steel bars complying with the requirement of B.S.114 "Cold
twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement and B.S. 4461 (1969) Cold
works steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.

(III) Such other reinforcement as may be suitable having regard to the yield
stress, ductility tensile strength and other essential properties.

(2) DIAMETER OF BAR

The Diameter of any Bar for the purposes of this code should be taken as
that of a circle having an area equal to the cross sectional area of the
bar.

At the option of the Contractor, the reinforcing bars can be purchased from the
manufacturer using metric units provided that the area of required steel will not be
rounded downwards.

39
 When the diameters of the reinforcing bars are given in one system on the
contract drawings, and they do not have exact equivalent of the bar in another system,
the basic dimension must be converted to the nearest higher cross section area. The
cost arising from additional weight of the reinforcing steel shall be borne by the
Contractor.

(3) TEST CERTIFICATES

For each consignment of steel reinforcement used in the works, the Contractor
shall supply a certificate giving the ultimate strength, yield stress, elongation and result
of the cold bend test described in B.S.4449 and B.S. 4461. The Engineer's
Representative shall have power to select pieces of steel for testing if no test data are
supplied by the Contractor and the costs arising out of such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.

Reinforcement obtained from re-rolling scrap metal shall not be used.

(4) DELIVERY

When each consignment is delivered to the site, the Contractor shall issue to the
Engineer's Representative a written statement showing the number of the consignment,
the name of the manufacturer, the number of tonnes in the consignment.

(5) STORAGE

Reinforcement shall be stored on site in racks off the ground and shall be
protected from rusting, damage, oil or other deleterious matter and shall be clean and
free from all such matter before concrete is placed.

(6) MEASUREMENT AND PRICES FOR STEEL REINFORCEMENT

The prices inserted in the Bill of Quantities for steel reinforcement shall include
for supplying, handling, bending, wiring, placing, cutting, cleaning, supporting and every
other expenses necessary to complete the works as shown on the drawings or as may
be directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be paid for the net calculated weight
of reinforcement, excluding binding wire used in the work, in accordance with the
drawings, or as may be directed by the Engineer's Representative and no allowance will
be made for margins or otherwise.

WATERPROOF BUILDING PAPER 2007.

Waterproof Building Paper used as an underlay to concrete to prevent the loss of

cement or as a means of providing a non bonding joint between two parts of any
structure shall comply with the requirements of B.S.1521 (1949) with the extra provision
that the material shall not become sticky in the roll under any of the climatic conditions

40
encountered in Nigeria.

JOINT SEALING COMPOUND AND PRIMER 2008.

(1) JOINT COMPOUND

The joint sealing compound shall be hot poured material approved by the
Engineer. The material shall adhere readily to the concrete and to the primer. It shall
be ductile, not excessively soft or tacky at a temperature of 820C nor brittle at a
temperature of 20C.

(2) PRIMING PAINT

A priming paint suitable for the joint sealing compound used, shall be applied to
the concrete surfaces prior to the pouring of the sealing compound with the object of
improving the adhesion.

PART B - WORKMANSHIP

PROPORTIONS OF CONCRETE MIXES 2009.

Concrete to be used in the works shall be a mixture of cement, fine aggregate,

coarse aggregate and water and the various grades of concrete to be used shall be in
accordance with Table II -3.

CONCRETE MIX DESIGN 2010.

At the commencement of the works, the Contractor shall indicate the type of
compaction which he intends to use in the various parts of the works and obtain the
approval of the Engineer's Representative thereto. The Contractor shall then design
mixes for concretes of grade as required, each design fulfilling the following
requirements:

(A) The cement, the aggregates and the water shall all comply with the appropriate
clauses of this specification.

(B) The cement shall not be less than that shown in Table II-3 of this specification.

The water content for each mix shall be in accordance with Clause 2013 (2) of
this specification and shall be such as to give the required compacting factor
and/or slump: where different methods of compaction are to be employed for
the same grade of concrete, involving different compacting factors and/or slump,
then a separate design mix shall be prepared for each case, to satisfy the
requirements of the appropriate clause of this specification.

TRIAL MIXES 2011.

41
 Following the Engineer's Representative's approval of the mix designs, the
Contractor shall prepare, in the presence of the Engineer's Representative, a trial mix of
each design grade of concrete. The mixes shall be prepared as follows:

Before mixing, a sieve analysis of the aggregate shall be made by the method
described in B.S.812 (1975) and the weight and volume of the cement, fine aggregate,
coarse aggregate and water comprising the mix carefully determined. Each trial mix
shall be not less than half a cubic meter in bulk before mixing and shall be mixed as
specified in Clause 2012 of this specification in a mechanical mixer of the type approved
for use in the works.

The compacting factor and slump of each trial mix shall be determined
immediately after mixing as directed in NIS 12 B.S.1881 (1970)and shall not exceed the
maximum value obtained in the mix design.

Each trial mix shall be handled and compacted by the methods which the Contractor
proposes to use for that mix in the works, and the mixes shall show no tendency of
inadequate compaction by the methods proposed.

Six cubes of 150mm compression test cubes shall be made from each trial mix. The
cubes shall be made, cured, stored and tested in accordance with the requirements of
B.S.1881 (1971).

TABLE II - 3 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE FOR

STRUCTURES AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6
MINIMUM WORKS TEST
CEMENT MINIMUM
MAXIMUM CONTENT COMPREHESSIVE
GRADE OF WATER
SIZE OF PER M³ OF STRENGTH IN CEM
PURPOSE CONCRETE CEMENT
AGGREGATE FINISHED N/mm²
N/mm² RATIO
mm CONCRETE 7 28 DAYS
WORK – DAYS
Kg.
PRESTRESSED 50 20 500 0.35 – 40 50 R
CONCRETE 45 20 450 0.45 35 45 har
0.35 – Po
0.45 ce
-do- 40 20 425 0.35 – 30 40
0.45

42
 -do- 35 20 400 0.45 – 25 35
0.55
REINFORCED 0.45 –
30 20 350 20 30
CONCRETE 0.55
-do- 25 20 295 0.45 – 15 25
0.55
-do- 20 20 235 0.45 – 12 20
Or
0.55
Po
-do- 15 20 205 0.55 – 10 15
Ce
0.65
MASS 12 40 175 0.55 – 7 10
CONCRETE 0.65
BLINDING 0.65 –
10 40 150 7 10
CONCRETE 0.75

Three cubes shall be tested 7 days after manufacture and three 28 days after
manufacture. The strength requirements of the cubes at each age shall be considered
to be satisfied if none of the strengths of the three cubes tested at each age falls below
the appropriate design strength or if the average strength of the three cubes is not less
than the strength and the difference between the greatest and least strengths is not
more than 20 per cent of that average.

Failing this, the Contractor shall re-design the mix and make such further trial
mixes and test such further cubes as the Engineer's Representative may direct until the
requirements of this specification are satisfied.

The design mixes which fulfill the requirements of this specification for a
particular grade of concrete shall be called the approved mixes for that grade of
concrete and the Contractor shall only use the approved mixes where that grade of
concrete is specified, and shall not depart therefrom without the written permission of
the Engineer's Representative. The Engineer's Representative may require further trial
mixes and further cube tests to be made before such permission is given.

The Contractor shall allow ample time in his programme for designing and
making trial mixes and for the preparation and testing of compression test cubes
obtained therefrom. Should any design mix fail to satisfy the requirements of this
specification and should the Engineer consider that it is essential to commence the
production of that grade of concrete before the results of the cube tests of a further
design mix are available, he will consult with the Contractor and decide on an interim
mix for use until such time as the results of the cube tests have become known, any
extra cost involved being borne by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself that the materials on
which he has quoted will produce a concrete which, with the specified nominal
proportions and subsequent adjustments as indicated by trial mixes, will develop the

43
cube strengths specified and at same time have the desired workability in the work
itself.

The cost of all trial mixes, test cubes and their testing shall be deemed to be
included in the tendered rates for concrete.

MIXING OF CONCRETE 2012.

(1) GENERAL

Concrete shall be mixed in mechanical mixers of the weigh batch type as stated
in the Contractor's mix design proposal, complying with the requirements of B.S. 1305
(1967) and fitted with an approved weight measuring device. No hand mixing will be
permitted. Mixing shall continue until there is a thorough distribution of the materials,
and the mass is of uniform colour and consistency. The period of mixing, judged from
the time that all materials including the water are in mixer, shall be not less than that
or should not be more than 2 minutes per m3 or as recommended by the
manufacturer. The concrete mixer shall revolve at the speed recommended by the
manufacturer, or as ordered by the Engineer's Representative. The entire contents of
the drum shall be discharged before materials for the next batch are fed in. Should
there, for any reason, be a stoppage of greater than 30 minutes duration, the drum of
the mixer shall be thoroughly washed out with clean fresh water before mixing is
resumed. Stationary mixers shall be equipped with an acceptable timing device that will
not permit the batch to be discharged until the specified mixing time has elapsed.

(2) RE MIXING OF CONCRETE

No partly set concrete shall be placed in the works. Concrete which has
commenced to set shall not be re-mixed either with or without additional water and in
no case shall such concrete be used in the works.

QUALITY OF CONCRETE 2013.

(1) APPROVAL OF MATERIALS ETC.

Before their use in the works, the Contractor shall show, to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative that all materials and methods of storage and mixing to
be employed in the production of concrete, conform in every way with the requirements
of this specification.
Such deliveries of materials to the site as the Engineer's Representative may
designate shall be tested and analyzed to ensure that they do so comply and the tests
shall be carried out sufficiently in advance of their intended use in the works to allow the
results to be studied and the materials approved, modified or rejected by the Engineer's
Representative as the case may be. The Contractor shall remove all rejected materials
from the site without delay and at his own cost. Permission to use any material shall not
be construed as an approval of its source, nor any acceptance as continued acceptance.

(2) COMPACTING FACTOR

44
 Workability of concrete shall be measured by compacting factor. The Contractor
shall provide a compacting factor apparatus conveniently accessible to each concrete
mixer and shall measure the compacting factor by the method described in B.S.1881 at
frequent intervals or as frequently as the Engineer's Representative may direct, but in
any case, tests shall be carried out at least once every halfhour during which concrete is
being mixed. Whenever the compacting factor varies from that of the approved mix the
quantity of water added to the mix shall be immediately adjusted to counteract the
variation. The successive values of the compacting factor and the quantity of water
added shall be recorded on a suitable quality control chart, which shall be kept near the
mixer and submitted to the Engineer's Representative for his inspection as he may
direct. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the "V-B" consistometer test may be used in
place of the compacting factor test and in such cases tests shall be carried out in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the "V-B" Consistometer;
see B.S 882 part 19.

The Contractor shall ensure that all their concrete mixer operators are aware of
the importance of maintaining uniform controlled quality of the concrete and that they
are experienced in detecting variations in concrete quality and workability and in rapidly
correcting the same.

(3) TESTS ON AGGREGATES

In addition to the tests mentioned above, as frequently as the Engineer's

Representative may decide and at least once each day when concreting is in progress,
the Contractor shall sample and test the aggregates due shortly for incorporation into
the works as follows:- the tests being carried out in accordance with B.S. 812 (1975).

(I) SIEVE ANALYSIS OF BOTH COARSE AND FINE AGGREGATE

The gradings of all aggregates must be within the respective limits specified in
Clause 2004; failing which the Engineer or his Representative shall instruct the
Contractor to make such modifications to the proportions of aggregate in the mix as will
allow for such difference, and the Contractor shall immediately do so.

(II) DETERMINATION OF CLAY, FINE SILT

AND FINE DUST IN THE FINE
AGGREGATE - FIELD SETTLING TEST

Should the amount of clay, fine silt and fine dust exceed 4% by volume, then the
Contractor shall refrain from using the aggregate until he satisfies the Engineer's
Representative of its suitability for making concrete of the quality required.

(III) DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES

Should the colour produced by the test be as dark as the standard

solution, the aggregate shall not be used until further comparative compression tests
specified in B.S.882 (1973) have been carried out and given satisfactory results.

45
 (5) PROTECTION OF CEMENT

During windy weather, effective precautions shall be taken to prevent the

cement from being blown away during the process of apportioning and mixing. One
method of checking this, is by use of wide planks as wind breakers in the direction of
the wind, During wet weather both cement and concrete shall he adequately protected
either by covering with polythene or tarpaulin.

(6) PRELIMINARY CUBE STRENGTH TESTS

(I) Prior to the commencement of any concreting work and subsequently

whenever a change is intended in the materials or in the proportions of the materials to
be used, preliminary cube strength tests shall be made in accordance with B.S.1881,
"Methods of Testing Concrete", to establish that the mean strength of the mix conforms
with the design requirement. Reliance shall not be placed on the strength obtained
from only one set of three test specimens, but separate samples of the material to be
used, taken on three occasions at intervals of not less than one day, shall be forwarded
to the testing authority for preliminary cube strength tests. From each sample of
material, six cubes shall be made, three for test at seven days and three for test at
twenty eight days.

(II) WORKS CUBE STRENGTH TESTS

Works Cubes, whether required for the normal method or for the
special method of quality control described respectively hereunder, shall
be made and cured in the manner described in B.S.1881. Where the
concrete is vibrated, the cubes shall be compacted by similar means in
such a way that full compaction of the concrete with neither segregation
nor excessive latex is obtained. Samples of concrete from which works
test cubes shall be made shall be taken in accordance with B.S.1881 and
in particular at the time and place of deposition of the concrete and at
such other times and places as the Engineer's Representative will direct.

(III) The frequency of sampling for each concrete mixing plant used for the
Contract shall be as follows:-

(1) When each mix is first made for use in the works, batches shall be
sampled at the rate of 8 batches per day for the first 5 days of using that mix or
at such other times as directed by the Engineer's Representative until a total of
40 batches have been sampled, with a minimum requirement that

(i) one batch shall be sampled each day particularly when any
concrete of a particular mix is made.

(ii) one batch shall be sampled for each cast of concrete to be

post tensioned.

(2) Thereafter one sample shall be taken on each day any grade of

46
 concrete is made.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, additional samples shall be taken by the

Contractor as and when directed by the Engineer's Representative.

From each sample of concrete and at the place where the sample was taken six
test cubes shall be made; 3 shall be tested at an age of 7 days and 3 at an age of 28
days. The test cubes shall be made cured and tested in accordance with B.S.1881. If
cured at a mid point temperature of 270C, then the 200C strengths will be assumed to
be 0.80 times the 270C strength.

For the strength of concrete to be acceptable to the Engineer, the following shall
be achieved:

(1) Each test cube shall have compressive strength of not less than that
specified on the drawings.

(2) Notwithstanding the provision of sub-clause (1) above, should the 200C
compressive strength of a test cube or cubes tested at an age of 7 days
be below the minimum specified strength, then if the other test cubes of
the set tested at 28 days comply with the Specification, the concrete shall
be deemed to have passed the tests.

(3) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of the Clause, the quality

control exercised at each mixing plant and for each mix shall be such that
the overall average 200C compressive strength achieved (measured in
N/mm2) minus 1.64 multiplied by the standard deviation achieved
(measured in N/mm2) shall be more than or equal to the specified
minimum 28 days 200C compressive strength.

Overall average compressive strength and standard deviation shall be calculated

from the results obtained from the latest forty consecutive sets of 3 test cubes of any
one mix and from any one mixing plant.

∑x )²
∑ ( x - N
N-1

(∑x )²
∑( x)² - N
N - 1

47
where N = Number of cubes tested
x = 28 day compressive strength
of 150mm cube in N/mm²
S= Standard deviation in N N/mm²

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the standard deviation shall not be calculated for
a mix until there are at least 40 sets of 3 test cube results available.

Test reports shall include the following information:

(1) Reference number of test cubes

(2) Class of concrete

(3) Location of concrete in works from which the sample was taken

(4) Time and date test cubes were taken

(5) Age of test cubes at test and curing conditions

(6) Workability

(7) Cement/fine aggregate/coarse aggregate ratio by weight

(8) Water/cement ratio by weight

(9) Individual and average compression strengths of the 3 test cubes and
assumed 200C values if different

(10) Individual and average densities of the 3 test cubes

(11) Average compressive strength and standard deviation for which the mix
has been designed

(12) Overall average 200C compressive strength and standard deviation

achieved using the results obtained from the latest forty consecutive sets
of 3 test cubes made from the same mix and the same mixing plant.

(13) Overall average compressive strength from (12) minus 1.64 multiplied by
deviation from (12).

If results of the cube tests do not comply with the Specification, such remedial
works as the Engineer may accept or direct shall be carried out.

If results of cube tests do not comply with the Specification and/or if the

48
figure from item (13) of the test report is less than the specified minimum 28 day
compressive strength, then either the quality control at the relevant mixing plant shall
be improved to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative or the mix shall be
redesigned to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. If directed by the
Engineer, redesign of the mix shall include carrying out further preliminary laboratory
tests in accordance with the Specification with the redesigned mix.

(IV) INDEPENDENT TEST CUBES

The Contractor shall arrange for the Engineer's Representative to be present

during the sampling of the concrete and the manufacture, storing and curing of the
cubes to ensure that there is complete agreement between himself and the Engineer's
Representative that the said cubes are entirely acceptable as test cubes. Should the
Contractor fail to arrange for the Engineer's Representative to be present when
required, or decline to do so, the cubes so manufactured will not be accepted as test
cubes. Should the Contractor wish to make independent test cubes he may do so at his
own expense, but the results will not be valid unless the cubes are manufactured in the
presence of the Engineer's Representative and tested by an approved Agency, all in
accordance with B.S. 1881.The approved form, giving the reference number of the
cube, its size and weight, the grade of concrete from which it was made, the
compaction factor, the date on which it was made, the date on which it was tested, the
total load in kN at which it failed, the stress in N/mm² and the location of structure at
which the sample of concrete was taken. Two copies of each test certificate, containing
all the information mentioned above, shall be forwarded to the Engineer's
Representative for his retention and a third copy retained in the Contractor's laboratory.

(V) FAILURE OF TEST CUBES FOR STRENGTH REQUIREMENT

Should either the test cubes crushed at 7 days or those crushed at 28 days or
both, fail to satisfy the specified requirements, the Contractor shall, on the Engineer's
Representative instructions, take one or more of the following steps:

(A) He shall alter the design of the mix to increase its average compressive
strength

(B) He shall alter the method of making the concrete and controlling its
quality to reduce the variability of the concrete.

(C) He shall cut out and replace concrete placed in the works on any day in
which a cube (was made and failed if, in the opinion of the Engineer's
Representative, such concrete is likely to be incapable of fulfilling its
purpose.

The Engineer may require the Contractor to cut out defective concrete from the
works even though test cubes made from that concrete have not failed. This
may arise if the concrete failed to meet other salient features and quality
standard like the following:

49
 (i) Honey combing
(ii) Cold joint

(7) CORRELATION OF TESTS

Tests on concrete materials and concrete shall be made as often as directed by

the Engineer's Representative and at instances such that the test results can be directly
correlated to the works test cubes for a particular batch of concrete.

(8) COST OF TESTS

The Contractor shall bear the cost of carrying out and supplying all labour,
materials and equipment for the sieve, silt, organic impurities, bulking, compacting
factor and slump tests mentioned above and any other tests required by the Engineer or
the Engineer's Representative to ensure proper quality control of the concrete. He shall
also bear the cost of supplying all labour, materials and equipment necessary for the
preparation of the compression test cubes and their subsequent storing, curing, packing,
transportation and testing. All costs arising out of modifications to the concrete mixes,
cutting out and replacing of defective concrete and all other work carried out in
accordance with this Clause shall be borne by the Contractor.

TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE 2014.

Concrete shall be taken from the place of mixing to the place of deposition by
methods which will prevent the drying out and consolidation of the concrete, the
segregation and loss of the ingredients, and which are sufficiently rapid to ensure that
the concrete does not commence to set before it is finally compacted in position. During
transportation, the concrete shall be protected from all adverse effects of sun, wind and
rain. The concrete shall be deposited as near as possible to its final position in the
works, and no concrete shall be dropped freely or deposited by means of chutes
through a depth exceeding 3 metres. All mixers, barrows, spades and other mixing and
distributing equipment will be thoroughly clean before commencing each period of use
and shall be kept free of partly set concrete which shall not be used in the works. No
concrete shall be transported over or near to new work that has insufficiently hardened,
in order to prevent harmful vibration of the new work and no planks or ways for skips,
etc., shall be supported on either formwork or reinforcement for the same reason.

PLACING AND COMPACTION 2015.

No concrete shall be placed in any part of the works until written permission to
do so has been obtained from the Engineer's Representative. Well in advance of the
intention to place concrete, the Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's
Representative for his approval full information about the order in which he proposes to
place concrete in the various parts of the works, the height of each lift of concrete,
details of the shuttering which he proposes to employ with relevant calculations, and
positions of all construction joints.

All construction joints shall be formed as specified in Clause 2019 and there shall

50
be no stoppage of the placing of concrete except at such proper construction joints.

The Contractor will be required to furnish the Engineer's Representative with

satisfactory evidence that all preparations, precautions and provisions have been made
to ensure that the concrete shall be placed and compacted in accordance with this
specification before the Engineer's Representative will give his permission for concreting
to proceed.

For members involving "vertical" placing of the concrete, (e.g. piers) each lift
shall be deposited in layers extending for the full width between shuttering and of such
depth that each layer can be easily and effectively incorporated with the layer below by
the means of compaction being employed. The layers shall be placed horizontally,
sloping beds not being permitted unless particularly so specified.

For members involving "horizontal" placing of the concrete (e.g. deck slabs), the
concrete shall be placed along the line of the starting point, in such quantities as will
allow the member to be cast to its full depth along the full width between side
shuttering and then gradually brought towards the finishing point along its entire front,
parallel to the starting line, the tampers for giving the required surface and compaction
following as closely behind as practicable.

All members shall be concreted at such a rate as will eliminate any possibility of
fresh batches of concrete being deposited immediately adjacent to batches which have
commenced to set, and all members shall be poured in one continuous operation until
completed, no interval being allowed to lapse while the work is in hand.

Care shall be taken to ensure that the process of placing concrete does not
cause any harmful vibration to adjacent work that has insufficiently hardened.

Should any unforeseen occurrence result in a stoppage of concreting for such a

time as might allow the concrete already placed to begin to set before the next batches
can be compacted into place, the Contractor shall immediately insert, at his own cost, a
proper end shutter to form a proper tongue and groove construction joint as specified in
Clause 2019 normal to the work at that point which will ensure that the section already
cast is formed complete in accordance with this specification. Any additional
reinforcement required as a result of the joint shall be provided by the Contractor at his
own expense.

No concrete for work which will present a large exposed surface (e.g. deck slab)
shall be placed in the direct rays of the sun and the Contractor shall erect shades to
protect such work therefrom.

Compaction of the concrete shall be effected by either hand or mechanical

means and all compacting tools must be approved by the Engineer's Representative
before being used in the works. The concrete shall be worked well up against whatever
surface it adjoins and compacted to such a degree that it reaches its maximum density
as a homogeneous mass, free from air and water holes, and penetrates to all corners of
the moulds and shuttering and completely surrounds the reinforcement. Care shall be

51
taken to ensure that neither hand pounders nor mechanical vibrators come into contact
with the formwork, reinforcement, or any embedded fittings and to prevent the
operation of compaction from transmitting any harmful vibrations or shocks to concrete
which has not yet hardened sufficiently.

Compliance with the conditions of this clause may require working longer hours
than usual and the Contractor must allow for this in his schemes for concreting and in
the rates for the work inserted by him in the Bill of Quantities.

CONCRETE PLACED UNDER WATER 2016.

Concrete shall be placed under water only where particularly so specified and
approved by the Engineer's Representative. The quantity of cement in any concrete
placed under water shall be increased by at least 25 per cent above the cement content
of the appropriate approved mix. Concrete shall be placed in still water only and every
precaution shall be taken to prevent the cement and fine materials from being washed
out of the concrete. Concrete shall be placed either with a tremie or a bottom opening
box of a type approved by the Engineer's Representative. Bottom opening boxes shall
not be opened until they are resting on the work and the lower ends of tremie pipes
shall always be kept below the surface of the wet concrete already deposited. No
concrete shall be allowed to fall through water at any time. Concrete shall be placed
evenly over the whole area enclosed by the shuttering and must not be raked over, only
the minimum of screeding being allowed once the concrete has been replaced.

Concrete under water shall be placed in accordance with the provisions of the
British Standards Code of Practice 2004 (8.2.2.3 or 8.2.2.3.4).

PROTECTION AGAINST CHEMICAL ACTION 2017.

In cases where concrete is to be deposited against ground known or suspected

to contain sulphate salts or other deleterious chemical agents, sulphate resisting
portland cement shall be used instead of ordinary portland cement. The sulphate
resisting portland cement shall be of approved manufacture and in accordance with
B.S.12 (1958) and in such situations where its use is required, particular care shall be
taken to keep the ground water level below the level of the concrete being placed until
that concrete has hardened and has been cured as specified in Clause 2022.

ATTENDANCE OF JOINER AND STEEL FIXER 2018.

During all concreting operations, the Contractor that a competent joiner and a
competent shall ensure steel fixer (in the case of reinforced work most especially in
work in which fittings are embedded) are in attendance on each concreting operation. It
shall be their duty to ensure that the formwork is maintained in accordance with the
specification, temporary construction joints inserted as necessary, and reinforcement
and fittings maintained in place as the work proceeds.

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 2019.

52
 All construction joints in all classes of work shall be formed by inserting stopping
off boards normal to the work to form a tongue and groove joint as detailed on the
drawings and against which the concrete can be properly compacted. They shall be
formed in the position shown on the drawings or as directed and approved by the
Engineer's Representative. There shall be no construction joints in precast members nor
in the reinforced concrete deck slabs of minor spans. In the case of tee beams the rib
and slab shall be cast together in one continuous operation. In other work, construction
joints shall be located at points where shear stresses or tensile concrete stresses are a
minimum and at place where they will least affect the appearance and properties of the
finished works, but no construction joint may be inserted without the written approval of
the Engineer's Representative. All reinforcement required by the Engineer's
Representative as a consequence of the position selected for any proposed construction
joint shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost, unless, in the opinion of the
Engineer's Representative, the joint is absolutely necessary and there is no alternative
position for such joint.

When work is resumed against a horizontal surface which has hardened or

recently set, the surface of the concrete shall be roughened by hacking and all laitance,
loose and porous material and poorly compacted concrete shall be removed from it.
When reinforcement or fittings project from the older concrete, these shall be carefully
cleaned, utmost care being taken not to break the bond, and freed from all adherent
coatings of concrete and other matter likely to reduce the bond between the steel and
the concrete about to be poured. The surface of the concrete (and steel if applicable)
shall then be swept clean, brushed with a steel wire brush to remove all loose material,
saturated with water, thoroughly cleaned and all surplus water removed. A 12mm layer
of stiff, freshly mixed mortar containing the same proportions of cement and fine
aggregates as the grade of concrete used, shall be applied to the damp surface of the
concrete immediately before concreting commences and the fresh concrete carefully
pounded into it without delay.

When work is to be resumed against a vertical face which has hardened or

recently set, the surface of the concrete (and projecting steel and fittings if any) shall be
treated exactly as described above for horizontal surfaces, but the application of the
12mm layer or mortar shall be omitted and the fresh concrete shall be thoroughly
compacted against the damp vertical surfaces after the final saturation with water and
the final thorough cleaning.

All costs incurred in complying with the requirements of this clause shall be
deemed to be included in the tendered rates for concrete.

JOINTS TO PREVENT BONDING OF ADJACENT SURFACES 2020.

Where it is specified on the drawings that a joint is to inserted to prevent

bonding between two adjacent parts of the structure, the Contractor shall insert two
layers of approved building paper between those parts as specified. The paper shall be
tailored to fit the surfaces of the structure in the positions accurately without any folding
or wrinkling, and cut overlapping edges shall be covered with adhesive tape to prevent
any turning or movement during concreting operations. Throughout the area of the

53
joint, there must be not less than two thicknesses of approved waterproof building
paper. Concreting operations and pounding etc., shall be carried out carefully to ensure
that no damage shall be done to the paper.

SURFACE FINISHES 2021.

All concrete surfaces not requiring shuttering shall be smooth finished with
approved floats to give a dense surface with a minimum of cement and fine materials
being brought to the surface. The top surface of deck slabs shall be tamped to a smooth
finish, aided by floats if necessary, to the levels, falls and cambers shown on the
drawings or as instructed. The tamping shall not be done to the extent of bringing an
excess of fine materials to the surface.

Shuttered surfaces of work in mass concrete which will always be in contact with
the ground and more than 0.5 meter below finished ground level on the external
surfaces of abutments and piers may be cast against sawn timber shuttering. All other
surfaces, including all reinforced work and all precast and prestressed, shall be cast
against steel or planed timber formwork. Any surfaces, irrespective of the shuttering
employed, which show honeycombing or voids shall be made good by cutting back the
concrete to behind the reinforcement in the case of reinforced work or to such depth as
the Engineer's Representative may specify in the case of mass work, and in either case
to sufficient depth to remove all defective concrete, but no repair work shall be started
until after the defective surfaces have been inspected by the Engineer's Representative.
The cut shall be slightly belled to ensure that the new surface will be keyed to the sound
concrete, and the new surface will be cast in accordance with the requirements of this
specification and against shuttering which has been carefully aligned with the sound
concrete on either side and tightly secured in position by wedging etc.

All exposed concrete surfaces shall be fair finished to the entire satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative.

All concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage and disfigurement due to
the subsequent pouring of concrete or the carrying out of other work in the vicinity or
any cause whatsoever, and the Contractor shall remove all blemishes and repair all such
damage to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

All costs for making good honeycombed and defective concrete and repairing
damaged surfaces shall be deemed to be included in the rates for concrete and
shuttering inserted in the Bill of Quantities.

CURING OF CONCRETE 2022. (1) GENERAL

During curing of the concrete, all precautions shall be taken to ensure a slow
heat evolution and the absence of cracks. The temperature of the hot concrete surfaces
should not be subjected to sudden changes by spraying of cold water and the concrete
must be protected from sunshine and wind. Freshly placed concrete must be protected
from rain.

54
 If low heat portland cement is preferred, the cement shall conform to the
requirements of B.S.1370.

(2) WATER CURING

Very great importance is attached to the proper curing of the freshly placed
concrete and the Contractor must ensure that is effectively done. All newly placed
concrete shall be protected from the effects of rain, drying winds and the sun by
suitable screens of damp hessian, or damp sand after the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to support them directly without marking. The ends and sides of the screens
shall be held down at the edges to prevent draughts from getting underneath. As soon
as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to support the coverings without marking. It
shall be covered with clean sacks, hessians, or a 50mm thick layer of clean sand or
other approved material which shall be kept continuously in a wet condition by frequent
spraying with fresh clean water. Where the concrete to be cured is enclosed by
shuttering, the shuttering shall be covered with clean sacks or hessian which must be
kept continuously in a wet condition When the shuttering is removed, the damp hessian
or sacks shall be hung directly around the concrete member and kept continuously wet
by spraying with clean fresh water. Providing that the shuttering has been covered with
approved mould oil which will prevent the timber from absorbing water from the
concrete, the time that the concrete remains in formwork under the conditions herein
specified shall count as part of the curing period. Curing of all concrete shall continue
for at least 7 days, or as directed by the Engineer's Representative, or as otherwise
specified. On no account must the surrounding sacks, hessian, etc., be allowed to dry
out during the curing period. The cost of curing shall be deemed to be included in the
tendered rates for concrete

(3) RESINOUS CURING

As an alternatived method of curing, the surface may be protected, where

approved by the Engineer's Representative by treating with an approved resinous curing
compound, mechanically sprayed on the surface of the finished concrete at a rate
approved by the Engineer's Representative as soon as it is possible to produce a
membrane of uniform thickness. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer's
Representative, the compound shall be applied immediately after completion of the
laying and finishing of the concrete. Any groove over a joint shall be protected from the
entry of curing liquid.

FORMWORK 2023. (1) GENERAL

All Formwork shall be adapted in every respect to the structure and to the
required surface finish for the concrete. It shall be fixed in perfect alignment and
securely propped and braced so as to withstand without displacement, distortion or
movement of any kind the weight of construction and the movement of persons,
materials and plant.

It shall be sufficiently watertight to prevent any loss of liquid from the concrete

55
and shall be capable of being removed without shock, vibration or damage to the
concrete.

Where wrot shuttering is specified, the faces to be in contact with the concrete
shall be planed perfectly smooth and true, to form in all the surfaces, curves or shapes
specified and joints shall be planed and perfectly watertight.

Where rough shuttering is specified the faces to be in contacted with concrete

shall be planed smooth and true to form. All joints must be true and perfectly tight.

All Formwork for new lifts of concrete shall be tightly and accurately fitted
against the concrete already cast to ensure that the surface of the new work will be
quite flush and in line with that of the old.

Wedges and clamps shall be used wherever practicable instead of nails and
where it is proposed to employ mechanical vibration the formwork shall be strengthened
accordingly by increasing the number of bracing and props, nailing wedges in position
and using screws instead of nails where necessary. Particular care shall be taken to
ensure that joints remain tight during the process of vibration.

All forms for beams and kindred members shall be designed and constructed so
that the sides may be removed without disturbing the bottom boards or supports
thereto. The bottom of each form shall be set with a camber of l/300th of the span or as
otherwise specified or required according to the dimensions of the beams. The
supporting struts shall be adjusted and securely fixed in position by approved means.

Formwork for encasing steel joists shall be suspended from the joists to relieve
the concrete of dead load stresses.

Unless otherwise specified, fillet strips shall be fixed in the shuttering to form a
chamfer 12mm by 12mm on all external corners of the finished work.

Should the Contractor wish to erect the formwork by passing ties through the
work, or embedding bolts therein, he must first obtain the approval of the Engineer's
Representative and when seeking such approval, shall forward full details of the type of
fitting proposed for use, and show how it will be employed in the work. No type of
fitting will be permitted which cannot be removed easily after use or which does not
allow easy and effective making good of the concrete surface. The use of wires, etc.,
requiring subsequent cutting into, and plastering over, of the concrete will not be
permitted.

Where steel shuttering is to be used, it shall be of approved manufacture and

panels shall fit tightly and accurately to form a true surface and joints which will not
allow the escape of liquid from the concrete. All rivet and bolt heads must be
countersunk on the inside face and finished flush so as to leave no mark on the resulting
concrete surface. The provisions for timber shuttering specified above shall also apply to
steel shuttering as applicable.

56
 If metal forms are used, the metal shall conform to the provisions of the
B.S.4360. For prestressed units the additional 10KN/m² shall be added to the weight of
the wet concrete in the design of horizontal areas of the formwork.

All side forms for the prestressed units shall be eased as early as possible and
the soffit forms shall permit deformation of the member when the prestress is applied.

The formwork should be designed to withstand the additional forces due to the
vibrations during concrete placing. The soffit shutter should be adequately supported to
prevent any settlement which might cause cracking of the concrete. On the soffit
shutter, provision should be made for the elastic shortening of the concrete under
prestress.

An upward camber shall be given to ensure that the girders do not sag under
working loads. The Contractor shall make measurement before and after concreting
each section, and submit the results to the Engineer.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of the time he proposes any
adjustments to the forms prior to concreting next section, should any adjustments be
needed.

All surfaces of the formwork which will come into contact with the wet concrete
shall be painted with an approved non-staining mould oil, to prevent adhesion between
concrete and formwork. The mould oil shall be insoluble in water, unharmful to the
concrete, non-flaking and shall not be removable by rain or wash water. The Contractor
shall ensure that the oil shall be kept from contact with the reinforcement or embedded
fittings.

Before placing any concrete, all shavings, loose binding wires, soil, rubbish and
all foreign matter shall be removed from the formwork and the formwork shall be
carefully and thoroughly washed with water. Loose planks shall be incorporated in the
bottom of panels of shuttering to facilitate the removal of rubbish from the section to be
concreted, as necessary.
No concrete shall be placed until the Engineer's Representative has inspected the
formwork and props and given his approval to do so.

(2) STRIPPING

No formwork shall be removed without the prior approval of the Engineer's

Representative and in no case shall any shuttering or props be removed before the
periods mentioned in Table II-4 have elapsed after placing the concrete:

TABLE II-4 FORMWORK MINIMUM STRIPPING TIME

TYPE OF WORK PART OF WORK ORDINARY

PROTLAND
CEMENT

57
 CONCRETE
SLABS SOFFIT BOARDS 5 DAYS
PROPS 14 DAYS
BEAMS SIDE BOARDS 3 DAYS
BOTTOM BOARDS 14 DAYS
PROPS 28 DAYS
COLUMNS 7 DAYS
WALLS, MASS CONCRETE 3 DAYS
PIERS AND REINFORCED 7 DAYS
ABUTMENTS CONCRETE

Where props are to be left in position under slabs and beams the formwork shall
have been made in such a fashion that it can be removed without disturbing the props
in any way, otherwise it must be left in position for the full period that the props are left
in position.

The formwork shall be removed by gradual easing without jarring and only under
competent supervision. Before removal of the shuttering, the concrete shall be
examined and removal shall only be proceeded with if the concrete has attained
sufficient strength to sustain all the loads to which it will be subjected. The Contractor
shall be responsible for any injury or damage to the work caused by or arising out of the
removal of formwork and props and any advice, permission or approval given by the
Engineer's Representative, relative to the removal of formwork and props shall not
relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.

(3) MEASUREMENT AND PRICES FOR FORMWORK

All timber or metal moulds inclusive of all necessary supports and stagings
(unless billed separately), bolts, nuts, straps, clamps, wedges and other fixings also all
cutting and waste and cost of all labour and materials in making, erecting and removing
the formwork and for any other work required to construct the forms to shapes and
dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer, shall be included in
the rate for formwork.

Formwork shall be measured as the nett area in contact with the finished
concrete surface. No measurement will be allowed for formwork for temporary
construction or day-work joints.
REINFORCEMENT SCHEDULES 2024.

Schedules of steel reinforcement giving the location, bending, diameter, length

and number of the various bars may be incorporated in the drawings or prepared on
separate sheets. These schedule have been prepared for the convenience of the
Contractor, but their accuracy is not guaranteed. It will be the Contractor's responsibility
to check all the schedule against the drawings and to satisfy himself as to errors,
omissions and all other things regarding their suitability for the work before such work is
put into operation. All discrepancies shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer's
Representative immediately and well in advance of placing the reinforcement in the

58
works. Where new schedules are required or existing ones require to be amended, the
Contractor shall prepare such new or amended schedules in accordance with B.S.4466
(1969) and forward three copies of each to the Engineer's Representative well in
advance of placing reinforcement in the works. The Contractor shall be responsible for
his own ordering sheets.

The cost of checking all new and amended schedules as specified above shall be
deemed to be included in the tendered rates for reinforcement.

BENDING AND FIXING OF REINFORCEMENT 2025. (1) GENERAL

All reinforcing bars shall be carefully bent with an even and gradual motion to
the correct dimensions by experienced steel benders and in a manner which will not
injure the material. In particular, no reinforcement shall be heated before bending.
Unless stated to be otherwise in the schedules, all bends and bending shall be in
accordance with B.S. 4466.

Unless otherwise directed or authorized by the Engineer, the number, size, form
and disposition of all reinforcing bars shall be strictly in accordance with the drawings.
Bars generally must be of the required lengths and lapping and welding of main bars will
not be permitted unless so indicated on the drawings.

All reinforcements shall be rigidly in position. To prevent displacement before

and during concreting the bars shall be bound together at all intersections with annealed
soft black iron wire of 1.5mm diameter and the ends of the wire shall be turned inwards,
away from the surface of the member.

Where necessary, upper layers of reinforcement shall be maintained in position

by "chairs" made from bars of suitable size and supported on the lower layers of
reinforcement. The chairs shall be securely tied to both upper and lower layers of
reinforcement and shall be of such shape as will produce a frame of sufficient stiffness.

Details of the chairs showing their size, bending and disposition in the work shall
be forwarded to the Engineer's Representative for his approval before incorporation into
the work. The use of temporary supports will not be permitted.

Any parts of metal supports that are left in place within 50mm of an exposed
surface of the concrete shall be non-rusting metal or coated with non-rusting metal.
Galvanizing of such parts will be acceptable provided the weight of the zinc coating per
1000cm² of actual surface shall average not less than 56 grams and no individual
specimen shall show less than 50 grams.

Splicing of reinforcement steel, except where shown on the drawings or

approved by the Engineer, will not be permitted. Splices shall have a length sufficient to
develop the full strength in bond of the bar, and shall not be made at points where the
section is insufficient to provide at least 50mm between the splices and the nearest
adjacent bar or the surface of the concrete. At splices, the bars shall be rigidly clamped
or wired together in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Where practicable,

59
reinforcement shall be assembled as rigid cases before placing in the formwork.

Concrete blocks shall be used to maintain the correct distance between the
reinforcement and the formwork i.e. to maintain the correct concrete cover to the
reinforcement. Such blocks shall not exceed 50mm in width nor 50mm in length and
their thickness shall be exactly that required to give the cover specified on the drawings.
Binding wires shall be securely embedded into each block to permit adequate fastening
to the reinforcing bars. The number and location of the blocks used in the work shall be
to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

All reinforcement shall be perfectly clean and free from loose scale, rust, oil,
grease and any other matter which might reduce the bond between the steel and the
concrete. Loose pieces of binding wire and other foreign matter shall be removed.

The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffolding, boards, runways, etc., to

ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced during concreting by being walked upon.
No runways, etc., shall be supported on the reinforcement. The ends of bars which will
project beyond the limits of the section being concreted shall be adequately supported
and protected to prevent them from being damaged or,removed by collision, wind, or
any other cause which might result in a reduction of the bond between the steel and
concrete or any movement of those portions of the bars lying within the freshly poured
concrete.

No concrete shall be poured until the Engineer's Representative has inspected

and approved the reinforcement and the arrangements for placing the concrete and the
Contractor has ensured that competent steel fixers and carpenters are in attendance
See Clause 2015.

(2) ELECTRIC ARC WELDING

Electric Arc Welding may be permitted for joining bars, provided the approval of
the Engineer has been obtained, and for work of this type the use of electrodes of the
covered alloy or shielded arc type will be permitted, provided that they conform to the
requirements for Class A electrodes, as described in B.S.639 "C"Covered Electrodes for
Metal Arc Welding Wrought Iron and Mild Steel". Workmanship shall conform to the
general requirements of B.S.693 (1960), 1856 (1964) and 2642 (1965) as applied to
general building construction. All such connections shall be butt
welded with standard Double V or Double U welds.
PART C - PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS 混凝土预制件
(NOT TO BE PRESTRESSED)

PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS 2026. GENERAL

The requirements of the foregoing clauses for concrete will apply to all precast
work where applicable and in addition the following special clauses are to be observed.
Rapid hardening portland cement shall conform to the requirements of B.S.12 and may
only be used with the approval of the Engineer or his Representative.

60
 (1) FORMWORK

All formwork is to be such as to ensure true arris and sound surfaces and metal
lining formwork will generally be required by the Engineer.

(2) DIMENSIONS

Units are to be formed to the dimensions and tolerances shown on the drawings.

(3) MOULDS

Units are to be made in strongly constructed moulds which are closely jointed,
perfectly smooth and true in alignment. The moulds must be constructed so that no
bulging or distortion can occur during consolidation of the concrete, and should be fitted
with suitable fastenings to facilitate easy removal without injury to the units.

(4) MANUFACTURE

The Contractor shall provide facility for the Engineer or his Representative to
carry out any tests or inspection during all stages of manufacture as may be required to
ensure the quality and soundness of the units. The proposed method of manufacture is
to be approved by the Engineer before production of the units commences. All units
shall have impressed upon them in some convenient position the date of manufacture
and such distinguishing letters as the Engineer may direct.

(5) CURING

The moulds will be struck at such a time so that the units are not subject to risk
or damage or distortion. All concrete shall be kept damp for seven days and protected
from the direct rays of the sun for a further period of 14 days. This can be achieved by
covering roof or tent.

(6) CURING AND LIFTING OFF MOULDS

Concrete surfaces and moulds shall be protected during casting and for 14 days
thereafter from the effects of sun, wind and rain etc., and the concrete shall be cured
for a period of 7 days after casting, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative. The striking of moulds shall be without damage to or distortion of the
concrete surfaces.
(7) REJECTED UNITS

Units which show signs of honeycombing or are badly pitted on any of

the faces or are otherwise defective will be rejected and must be
immediately broken up.

(8) STACKING

Units are to be stacked to the approval of the Engineer's Representative

61
 and arranged so that they are available for use in order of age.

(9) TRANSPORT AND DELIVERY

The methods of transporting and delivery of the units to site must be

such that the units are protected from severe shock and any damage
whatsoever. The proposed methods of loading, transporting and off
loading must be approved by the Engineer or his Representative before
delivery commences.

(10) STANDARD FOR PRECAST CONCRETE WORK

Precast concrete goods, whether they have been purchased for use in the
works, or manufactured by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the following British Standards, as applicable:

B.S.340: Precast Concrete Kerbs, Channels, Edgings and Quadrants

B.S.368: Precast Concrete Flags

B.S.556: Concrete Cylindrical Pipes and Fittings

B.S.1194: Concrete Porous Pipes

B.S.2028: Precast Concrete Blocks

(11) RECONSTRUCTION OF FAULTY WORK

Should any portion of the work give evidence, in the opinion of the
Engineer or his Representative that the concrete is of inferior quality,
insufficiently compacted, segregated or improperly deposited and
rammed in the forms or that any of the reinforcement or fittings has been
omitted, incorrectly placed or subsequently displaced or that it suffers
from any defect, omission or injury from any cause whatsoever which
may adversely affect the strength or durability of the construction, the
Contractor shall, on the written instructions of the Engineer, remove and
reconstruct that portion of the work in such manner as the Engineer shall
direct or approve to ensure that the requirements of this specification are
fulfilled.

No repairs shall be made to any faulty work until it has been inspected by
the Engineer's Representative and his permission to proceed obtained. All costs
involved in the reconstruction of faulty work shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART D - CEMENT MORTARS AND GROUTS 水泥砂浆

CEMENT MORTARS AND GROUTS 2027.

62
 Mortar and Grouts shall be composed of portland cement, sand and water
satisfying the requirements of this specification and mixed together in the proportions
indicated in Tables II-5 and II-6. The cement and sand shall be measured by volume in
gauge boxes of approved size. The common size is 0.03m³. The gauge boxes shall be
filled with the respective materials without compaction, and struck level, proper
allowance being made for any bulking of the sand due to moisture content. Mixing shall
be done in an approved mechanical mixer, the amount of water added being just
sufficient to give the consistency and workability desired by the Engineer's
Representative for the use to which the mortar is to be put. Mixing shall be carried out
as specified for concrete.

Hand-mixing of mortar will only be permitted where very small quantities are
required and the approval of the Engineer's Representative has been obtained. In such
cases, the dry sand and cement shall first be mixed together by turning over with a
clean shovel or trowel on a clean steel platform or other approved surface until a
mixture of uniform colour has been obtained.

Water shall then be added, a little at a time, the mixture being turned over after
each addition, until a homogeneous paste has been obtained. This process shall be
repeated until the required consistency has been obtained. Only perfectly clean
implements and surfaces shall be used in hand mixing and care shall be exercised to
ensure that no cement is washed away during the addition of the mixing water.

All mortar must be in its final position in the works within 30 minutes of the
initial mixing together of the sand, cement and water.

TABLE II - 5 MORTAR - CEMENT/SAND MIXING PROPORTIONS

MORTA NOMINA PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME

R L MIX PORTLANT CEMENT SAND
QUALIT
Y
M1 1:1 1 1
M2 1:2 1 2
M3 1:3 1 3
M4 1:4 1 4

NOTE: Allowance should be made for moisture content of sand.

BUILDING IN FOUNDATION BOLTS, FITTINGS KERBS ETC. 2028.

All foundations, bolts, fittings, kerbs, etc., are to be built into the work as
concreting proceeds by supporting them either from the formwork in their correct
position or grouted into recesses cast in the work as specified or directed by the
Engineer or his Representative. Recesses to accommodate such item shall be cast

63
against properly constructed formwork and in no circumstances shall they be formed by
cutting out green concrete. Similarly, no fittings shall be positioned in the works by
inserting into concrete which has commenced to set.

The Contractor shall set the metal work which is to be embedded into position
before concreting. All items shall be carefully cleaned, placed and firmly secured to
ensure that it will not be displaced during concreting operations. Anchor bolts shall be
placed by means of templates supplied by the Contractor. All threads shall be carefully
greased after the bolts are firmly in position, but prior to concreting. The position of all
embedded items shall be carefully observed during and at the completion of concreting
operations to ensure they are in the proper position upon completion of the work.

EMPLOYMENT OF CONCRETE MORTARS AND GROUTS 2029.

The grade of concrete, mortar or grout to be used in the various parts of the
work shall be as specified on the drawings. Where no specification is given on the
drawings as to the grade of concrete, mortar or grout to be used, it shall then be as
given in the following Table II-6 below.

TABLE II-6 MORTAR FOR GROUTING MIX PROPORTIONS

GRADE MIX USE

M1. 1:1 GROUTING IN HOLDING DOWN
BOLTS,
BEDDING GIRDER BEARINGS;
PACKING BETWEEN STEEL JOISTS
AND EXISTING DECKS, MAKING
GOOD CONCRETE SURFACES, PIPE
JOINTING ETC

M3 1:3 BEDDING & JOINTING PRECAST

KERBS

M4 1:4 STONE PITCHING

The materials shall be mixed to a consistency suitable for the purpose intended.
All mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the mixing water has been added.

Admixtures of hydrated lime, fire clay, diatomaceous earth or other approved

inert material may be used in the mortar to facilitate workability if the Contractor elects.
The amount of admixture to be added shall be of the quantity permitted by the
Engineer.

64
PART E - GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHED

CEMENT 2030.

All cement used in the works shall be from an approved source, and shall comply
with the latest appropriate Nigerian Industrial Standards or British Standards.

The type of cement to be used in portland high alumina cement: is to comply

with the latest revision of B.S. 915.

The provisions of foregoing clauses relating to ordinary portland cement shall

apply to high alumina cement where applicable.

AGGREGATES 2031.

Concrete shall be made with specially selected aggregates of a hardness surface

texture and particle shape suitable for use as a wearing finish to floors, all to be to the
latest B.S.1201.

All aggregates fine and coarse shall comply with the requirements for aggregates
for concrete work and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative.

GRANOLITHIC TOPPING 2032.

Granolithic Topping shall be composed of portland high alumina cement, fine

aggregate as specified and granite chippings as specified. The water/cement ratio shall
not exceed 0.45 and shall be kept as low as possible compatible with workability.

Typical mixes are:

2 parts of portland high alumina cement to 5 parts of fine granite chippings by

volume, graded as to B.S.1201 (1954).
Or 1 part of portland high alumina cement to 1 part of sand, to 2 parts of fine
aggregate, the aggregate passing a 150 microns (100 mesh) sieve but free from
dust.

THE SUB-FLOOR 2033.

The Granolithic Topping shall be laid and floated on a new concrete sub
floor within 12 hours of laying the latter. Where the sub-floor consists of an existing
concrete surface, this shall be hacked, thoroughly cleaned, wetted and brushed over
with cement grout prior to laying granolithic topping.

65
LAYING 2034.

The Contractor shall ensure that successive trowellings are applied at appropriate
times by skilled workmen.

The topping shall be rendered with a wood float and struck off with a steel
trowel after the set has commenced. The topping shall be laid to a thickness of 25mm to
40mm Slightly increased thicknesses are necessary when the topping is laid on matured
concrete sub-floors.

The toppings shall be divided into bays not larger than about 3.5m. x 3.5m. laid
alternately or as directed.

CURING 2035.

Granolithic topping shall be cured for a period of seven days after laying all as
for normal concrete.

RETARDATION OF DUSTING 2036.

A solution of calcium chloride added integrally or a solution of sodium silicate or

other surface hardener as approved by the Engineer's Representative shall be used to
retard dusting. The amount of solution added shall be as specified by the respective
manufacturers or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

CARBORUNDUM FINISH 2037.

For non-slip finish to treads of stairs and to landing surfaces, carborundum

thickly sprinkled in the proportion of 1.50Kg. per square meter of paving shall be used,
being well trowelled in before the granolithic sets.

GRANOLITHIC MONOLITHIC TOPPING 2038.

Where granolithic monolithic topping is ordered, it shall be applied in the

following manner:

Concrete shall be laid to finished level and while it is still wet and soft shall be
sprinkled with a mixture of 1 part of chippings to 1 part of high alumina portland cement
mixed together in a dry state and applied at a rate of spread of 8Kg/m² of surface. The
chippings shall consist of a suitably graded material 6mm to dust with not more than
20% content of fine material.

This mixture shall be tamped in with a wooden float and twice trowelled with a
steel trowel to a smooth and fine finish. After the topping is dry it shall be treated with
one application of 10% solution of silicate of soda.

66
DAMP PROOFING 2039. MISCELLANEOUS

The surface to be damp proofed shall be primed and then thoroughly mopped
with waterproofing asphalt.

The mastic asphalt shall be laid in two courses in the manner described in British
Standard Code of Practice CP 144 Part 2. Joints shall be staggered at least 150mm
between courses.

When the first mopping of asphalt has set sufficiently, the entire surface shall
then be mopped with a second coating of hot asphalt. Special care shall be taken to see
that there are no skips in the coatings and that all surfaces are thoroughly covered. The
two sides of all joints shall be intimately bonded. The surfaces of any gullies and other
features with which the waterproofing will be in contact shall be clean and painted with
bitumen.

The cost of all materials, labour, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing
all the work involved in applying the damp proofing, complete in place as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer, shall be deemed to be included in the tendered
rates for concrete.

67
 SPECIFICATION

SECTION III - CONCRETE: PRESTRESSED

68
 SECTION III - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 预应力混凝土

GENERAL 3000.

In addition to any other relevant clause of this Specification, the following shall
be deemed to apply in particular to prestressed concrete work, and shall be read in
conjunction with all other relevant clauses (especially those referring to mass and
reinforced concrete) of the conditions of Contract and this Specification.

This work shall consist of prestressing precast concrete by furnishing, placing

and tensioning of prestressing steel in accordance with details shown on the drawings,
and as specified in the specifications.

This work shall include the furnishing and installation of any appurtenant items
necessary for the particular prestressing system to be used, including but not limited to
sheaths, anchorage assemblies and grout used for pressure grouting sheaths.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval plans and working
drawings. The working drawings, of the prestressing system shall contain details and
substantiating calculations of method and materials the Contractor proposes to use, in
the prestressing operations including any additions or rearrangement of reinforcing steel
from that shown on the drawings. Such details shall outline the method and sequence of
stressing and shall include complete specifications and details of the prestressing steel
and anchoring devices, working stresses, anchoring stresses, type of sheaths, and all
other data pertaining to the prestressing operation, including the proposed arrangement
of the prestressing steel in the member.

Working drawings shall not exceed 594mm x 841mm in size and each drawing
and calculation sheet shall include the job site, name of the structure as shown on the
contract drawings.

Working drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the start of the

affected work to allow time for review by the Engineer's Representative and correction
by the Contractor of the drawings without delaying the work. In no case shall such time
be less than six weeks.

Throughout the prestressing work the Contractor shall employ on the works at
least one suitably qualified engineer who shall be experienced in the systems of
prestressing being used. His duties shall be as follows:

(1) Supervision of the storage and fixing of prestressing components

(2) Calibration of prestressing equipment

(3) Supervision of tensioning operations

(4) Supervision of grouting operations

(5) Compilation of tensioning records

69
 (6) Such other duties as the Engineer's Representative may direct.

All personnel operating the stressing equipment shall have been properly trained
in its use. In addition to the normal precautions against accident which should be taken
at all times for the whole of the Works, special precautions shall be taken when working
with the tendons which have been tensioned or are in the process of being tensioned.

The personnel should not stand in line with the tendons, their anchorages or
jacking equipment. Simple protective measures such as stout timber shields sheathed
with steel should be placed in line with tendons and behind the jacks to protect
personnel passing in the usual course of their duties, if applicable.

PART (A) - MATERIALS

CEMENT 3001.

The Cement shall be rapid hardening portland cement in accordance with the
latest B.S. 12 with all latest amendments or portland blast furnace cement conforming
to the requirements of B.S.146 with all latest amendments. The use of high alumina
cement will not be permitted.

The cement is to be packed in waterproof bags or steel drums and delivered to

the site in first class condition. Each consignment is to be clearly marked with the date
of manufacture and the date of arrival. The drums of cement are to be lifted and
handled with care so as to avoid damage; and stored in a damp free location ready for
use. The consignment is to be used in the order of arrival to the site.

Cement is to be stored on site under cover from the weather and is to be

protected from deterioration. Each drum is to be fully used once opened, and no cement
is to be stored in drums which have previously been opened.

AGGREGATE 3002.

All concrete aggregates to be used for prestressed concrete work shall be

properly cleaned and graded strictly to the requirements of the latest B.S. No. 882 to
which end the Contractor shall provide washing and grading equipment on the site.

Materials which are rejected from the grading process may be used up in 10
N/mm² grade concrete in other parts of the works at the discretion of the Engineer's
Representative. Any rejected material is to be removed forthwith from the site by the
Contractor at his own expense.

(1) FINE AGGREGATE

70
 Fine Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring sand obtained from fresh
water river deposits approved by the Engineer's Representative. The grading of sand
particles shall satisfy the percentages stated for Zones 1 or 2 in B.S. 882, and as given
in Table III-1

(2) COARSE AGGREGATE

Coarse Aggregate shall consist of natural gravel or crushed granite rock obtained
from a source to be approved by the Engineer or his Representative. The grading of
coarse aggregate particles shall strictly satisfy the percentages for l9.0mm - 4.76mm
nominal size stated in B.S. 882 as given in Table III-1 with a content not exceeding 1%
passing the 2.36mm sieve size.

TABLE III-1 GRADING OF FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES

PERCENTAGE PASSING
AGGREGATE
SIEVE SIZEZ
150 300 600 1.2 2.4 4.76 9.5 19.0 38.
µm µm µm mm mm mm mm mm 1
m
m

FINE
AGGREGA 0-10 5-20 15-34 30-70 60-95 90- 100 - -
TE 100
ZONE 1

FINE 0-1 8-30 35-59 55-90 75- 100 - -

AGGREGA 100 90-
TE 100
ZONE 2
- - - - 25-55 95- 100
COARSE 0-1 100
AGGREGA 25-55
TE

(3) TESTS

Samples of the chosen aggregates shall be delivered to site and prepared by the
Contractor at his own expense. Methods of testing shall be in accordance with Clause
2003 (3) of these specifications. Samples of each aggregate are to be submitted by the
Contractor to a testing authority approved by the Engineer or his Representative. The
Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer or his Representative written approval of the
tests and types of aggregate chosen, together with the proposed arrangement for use

71
on the works.

WATER 3003.

The Water to be used for concrete manufacture shall be clean water free from
chemical or organic impurities and dissolved salt solutions, which may have a harmful
effect on the concrete. The Ph value shall range from 6.8 - 7.5. Periodic test on water
used for concrete should be carried out on site in accordance with B.S. 3148.

UNTENSIONED REINFORCEMENT 3004.

Such reinforcement is to be of mild steel or high yield steel as specified in the

drawings. Mild steel reinforcement shall be rolled mild steel bars as for reinforced
concrete works and shall comply in all respects with the latest B.S. 4449.

Untensioned high tensile steel reinforcement shall be hard drawn pre-stressing

wires as specified hereunder, hot rolled high yield deformed bars complying with B.S.
4449 or cold worked deformed bars complying with B.S. 4461.

PRE-STRESSING STEEL 3005.

For the purpose of this specification the term "Pre-Stressing Tendon" or

"Tendons" shall mean a single wire, bar or strand or a number of wires or strands
grouped into a cable or a group of bars.

(1) The prestressing steel should be one of the following:

(I) Plain hard-drawn steel wire complying with the requirements of B.S.2691,
"Steel for prestressed concrete, Part 1 Plain hard drawn steel wire".

(II) Indented or crimped hard-drawn steel wire complying with the

requirements of B.S.2691 in all respects except that for the bend test.

(III) High tensile steel bars of open hearth steel with sulphur and phosphorus
contents each below 0.05 per cent.

Bars whether plain or deformed should have a tensile strength of not less
than 926 N/mm2 with a 0.2 per cent proof stress of not less than 75 per
cent or more than 92 per cent of the actual ultimate strength. For
methods of testing see B.S. 18, "Tensile testing of metals".

(IV) Such other wires, strand, or bars having properties not inferior to those
laid down in B.S. 2691 or Sub Clause (III) above respectively.

Seven wire steel strand for prestressed concrete shall comply with B.S. 3617.

Notwithstanding the foregoing strand shall comply with the following:

72
 (1) It shall contain no welds

(2) It shall be at least low relaxation strands complying with Section 3 of B.S.
3617.

TABLE III-2 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF PRESTRESSING STEEL

MINIMUM
NOMINAL BREAKING ELONGATION
PRSTRESSED
DIAMETER LOAD KN TO FRACTURE REMARKS
STEEL IN GAUGE
mm (1000kgf)
LENGTH
Wire 7 65 (6.63) to 69(7.038) 6% Tensile Testing is
to be carried out
35 (3.57) to 38(3.876) as per
5 6%
25 (2.55)
4 6%
Strands 8 67 (6.834) 10% BS 5896
Mechanical
10 94 (9.588) 10% Testing of Steel
Wires.
13 160 (16.320) 10%
22 480 (48.960) 10%
Bars 25 650 (66.30) 12% Additional
Mechanical
28 800 (81.60) 12% Properties which
are not specified
in this Table shall
be subject to the
approval of the
Engineer.

All bars in any individual member shall be of the same grade. When bars are to
be extended by use of couplers, the assembled units shall have a tensile strength, of not
less than manufacturer's minimum guaranteed ultimate tensile strength, when tested in
accordance with Test Method No. California 641, or equal. Failure of any sample to
meet this requirement will cause for rejection of the heap of bars and lot of couplers.
The location of couplers in the member shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

(V) The Engineer may permit the use of prestressing steel manufactured to
standards equivalent to those mentioned above provided that minimum
strength requirements are complied with, as indicated in this
specification.

(2) CERTIFICATES

Copies of Manufacturer's Test Certificates and stress/strain diagrams shall be

73
furnished by the Contractor and given to the Engineer or his Representative for each
consignment of prestressing steel reinforcement. These certificates must be submitted
to and approved by the Engineer or his Representative before the prestressing steel
reinforcement is used in the works.

(3) DELIVERY

All prestressing steel shall be protected against physical damage and rust or
other exposures that will result to corrosion at all times from manufacture, to grouting
or encasing in concrete. Prestressing steel that has sustained physical damage at any
time shall be rejected. The development of visible rust or other results of corrosion shall
be cause for rejection, when ordered by the Engineer.

Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or shipping forms for the

protection of the steel against physical damage and corrosion during shipping and
storage. A corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other results of corrosion shall be
placed in the package or form, or shall be incorporated in a corrosion inhibitor, carrier
packaging material type, or when permitted by the Engineer, may be applied directly to
the steel. The corrosion inhibitor shall have no deleterious effect on the steel or
concrete or bond strength of steel to concrete. Packaging or forms damaged from any
cause shall be immediately replaced or restored to original condition.

The shipping package and the form shall be clearly marked with a statement that
"PACKAGE CONTAINS HIGH-STENGTH PRESTRESSING STELL, PLEASE HANDLE WITH
CARE." The type, kind and amount of corrosion inhibitor used, including the date when
placed, safety orders and instructions for use shall be indicated.

(4) STORAGE

Coils and bundles of prestressing steel shall be stored flat on a floor raised off
the ground and under full cover from the weather. They shall be protected from
damage, oil, corrosion or any deleterious matter, and shall not be opened until required.
Before being manufactured into prestressing cables, the wire shall be cleaned free from
loose rust and any deleterious matter, and inspected by the Engineer's Representative
for approval. Prestressing steel reinforcement which shows signs of pitting or has any
surface defects such as splits, roughness or necking is not to be used, and any lengths
of wire or strand so affected are to be cut out of the coil and rejected.

(5) TESTS

Tests on prestressing steel in addition to those of the manufacturer, may be

required by the Engineer and the Contractor is to make all arrangements to supply
samples for testing to a nominated testing authority.

74
SHEATHING 3006.

Sheathing to prestressing tendons is to be of corrugated type such as

"hydrarigid" or similar, approved by the Engineer. Sheathing enclosures for prestressing
steel shall be mortar tight, and accurately placed at the locations shown on the drawings
or approved by the Engineer. All sheathings or anchorage assemblies shall be provided
with pipes or other suitable connections for the injection of grout after prestressing.
Sheathings for prestressing steel shall be securely fastened in place to prevent
movement.

After installation of the forms, the ends of sheathings shall at all times be
covered as necessary to prevent the entry of water or debris.

The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the
sheathings are free of water and debris immediately prior to installation of the steel.

All sheathing for continuous structures, shall be vented over each intermediate
support, and at additional locations as shown on the drawings. Vents shall be 12.5mm
minimum diameter standard pipe. Connections to sheathings shall be made with metallic
structural fasteners. The vents shall be mortar tight, taped as necessary, and shall
provide means for injection of grout throughout the vents and for sealing the vents.
Ends of vents shall be removed 25mm below the roadway surface after grouting has
been completed. Grout vents shall be provided at crests and valleys in the duct profile
and at intervals of not more than 15 metres in straight ducts.

All sheathings for continuous structures, except sheathings in bent or pier caps,
shall consist of rigid galvanized ferrous metal. Transition couplings connecting the rigid
sheathings to anchoring devices need not be galvanized. At the Contractor's option,
such rigid sheathings may be used in simple spans prestressed members. Rigid
sheathings may be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams. Galvanizing of
the welded seam will not be required.

Rigid sheathings shall have sufficient strength to maintain their correct alignment
during placing of concrete. Joints between sections of rigid sheathings shall be positive
metallic connections, which do not result in angle changes at the joints. Waterproof
tape shall be used at the connections.

Corrugated sheathing is to be delivered to the site coiled on to large diameter

wooden drums, securely fastened and protected from damage, or stored straight in
containers.

Corrugated sheathing is to be stored on site under cover from the weather, and
shall be protected from rusting, damage, oil or any other deleterious matter and shall be
clean and free from all such matter before being used in the works.

PART B - WORKMANSHIP

75
CONCRETE PROPORTIONS 3007. (1) PRELIMINARY TESTS

Preliminary Tests to determine the grade 50 N/mm², 45 N/mm² or 35 N/mm²

concrete mix proportions for prestressed work shall be undertaken as soon as the
ources and qualities of cement, water and aggregate have been chosen.

(2) PROPORTIONS

The Contractor shall deliver, to a testing authority to be approved by the

Engineer, sufficient quantity of cement and prepared aggregates to enable concrete
cubes to be made. Such cubes shall be manufactured under laboratory conditions,
using dry aggregates and proportions calculated to give the desired workability and 10%
more than the average 28 days works cube strength given in Table II-3 Clause 2009. At
the same time the Contractor shall arrange to make two concrete mixes on site using
the same proportions of cement, water and aggregates as used in laboratory tests, with
the methods to be adopted for the whole of the works. Six cubes shall be made from
the second batch of concrete out of the mixer, and subsequently tested by the approved
testing authority. The amount of water used for mixing under site conditions shall take
into account the weight of water contained in the wet aggregates stored at the mixer
and the weights of aggregates used shall be adjusted accordingly.

(3) PROCEDURE

The results of these preliminary tests shall give cube strengths of not less than
10% more than those stated in Table II-3 Clause 2009 in the case of cubes made under
laboratory and at least the values stated in Table II-3 Clause 2009 in the case of cubes
made under site conditions.

All cubes shall be 150mm x 150mm x 150mm and made in standard steel moulds
according to the procedures described in B.S. 1881 and shall be vibrated. As a result of
these tests, the mix proportions for the prestressed concrete work shall be chosen and
approved by the Engineer. Thereafter these proportions shall be adhered to throughout
the works and may be varied only on instructions given by the Engineer's
Representative.

(4) WATER CEMENT RATIO

The Water Cement Ratio shall be chosen from the laboratory tests, and shall be
taken as the total weight of water added to the mix using completely dry aggregates,
divided by the total weight of cement. The amount of water to be added to each batch
of concrete under site conditions, shall be calculated from the results of moisture tests
on the aggregates and the weight of cement used for each batch, using the same total
water cement ratio as used in the laboratory tests. No deviation from this water cement
ratio shall be made except with written approval of the Engineer's Representative. Strict

76
adherence to established water cement ratio can be maintained during the manufacture
and placing of concrete by using slump value established during mix design exercise.

FIELD TESTS 3008.

The Contractor is to provide the following apparatus on site for the testing of
aggregates and concrete mixes which, where applicable, shall comply with the
requirements of B.S. 1881 and 812.

1. Sampling pans for aggregate moisture tests.

2. Electric ovens for drying out samples of wet aggregates.

3. Accurate compensating balance weighing up to 10 Kilograms with weights.

4. 12 No. steel moulds for 150mm cubes, with base plates.

5. Kango hammer vibrator for making cubes.

6. 2 No. slump cones with base plates and tamping rods.

7. 1 compacting factor apparatus.

8. Water tank for curing concrete cubes.

9. Concrete cube testing apparatus

10. Check weights for mixer weigh batchers.

11. Copper sampling tube for extracting cement samples.

12. Apparatus for testing contents of silt, clay, organic impurities in fine aggregates.

13. Airtight tins or jars for dispatch of cement samples.

14. Two sets of B.S. 410 test sieve listed below.

Size

mm
25
12.5
10
5
Цm
2.8 Цm
1.25 Цm

77
 600 Цm
300 Цm
150 Цm

15. Complete apparatus for gamma-ray inspection of grout in ducts for pre
stressing tendons.

16. Cover-meter for inspection of concrete cover to reinforcement pre-stressing steel

or ducts.

17. Load cell for directly reading tension in prestressing tendons during stressing.

All the equipment listed as above shall be supplied and maintained in perfect
condition by the Contractor at his own expense for the duration of the works. After
completion of the works all equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor.

BATCHING AND MIXING 3009.

All materials used for concrete manufacture shall be batched by weight.

Before the casting of each prestressed beam the quantity of aggregates to be

used shall be separated from the stockpiles at the mixer and thoroughly turned over by
hand, to produce uniformly moist aggregate. Samples shall then be taken of each
aggregate and moisture contents tests carried out to determine the percentage of water
content of each aggregate by dry weight method.

From these results the weights of wet aggregates and water to be used in mixing
shall be calculated for the chosen quantity of cement to be used for each mix, using the
dry weights proportions determined from the preliminary concrete mix design.

During the casting of each beam strict control shall be maintained at the mixer to
ensure that the correct weights of materials are consistently used for each mix of
concrete. The workability of the concrete shall be frequently checked using the
compacting factor test so that the consistency of the concrete is kept uniform. Mixes
which show large variation from the workability aimed at, due to varying aggregate
conditions or errors in batching, will be rejected and the necessary corrections are to be
made to the mix immediately after this is observed. Stockpiles of aggregates at the
mixer must always be maintained so that no fresh aggregates are fed in while casting of
the beam is taking place. The mixer and adjacent aggregate stockpiles shall be placed
under temporary roofing so as to be fully protected from the direct rays of the sun and
rain. Where compacting factor test apparatus is not available, slump test may be used
to control the consistency of the concrete being produced and placed.

PLACING OF CONCRETE 3010.

Casting of prestressed beams shall be carried out on specially prepared casting

beds, which are to be constructed under a temporary roofing so as to be fully protected
especially from the direct rays of the sun and rain.

78
(1) VIBRATION

The methods of vibration to be used shall be carefully designed to ensure full

compaction of the concrete, thus producing first class appearance without subsequent
patching of concrete faces. Full details of the Contractor's proposed methods of
manufacturing the beams shall be submitted to the Engineer's Representative for
approval.

(2) PRELIMINARY TESTS

When a design mix has been approved by the Engineer's Representative, the
Contractor is to allow for a preliminary casting of a short length of beam complete with
prestressing cables and reinforcement, using the proposed methods of vibration for the
whole works.

(3) CASTING

Each prestressed component shall be cast in one continuous operation and no

construction joints will be allowed.

CURING 3011.

Curing of the prestressed components shall ensure a slow heat evolution in the
concrete so that shrinkage cracks may be avoided.

Prestressed components shall be completely covered with hessian, which shall be

kept continuously wet for a period of seven days. If tensioning of the prestressing
tendons takes place before this time, the hessian shall be retained in position until the
period of seven days has expired.

The prestressed components shall then be cured in air for a further period of
seven days or enough time to achieve the necessary strength before being erected into
position on the bridge.

FORMWORK 3012.

Formwork shall be of purpose made steel moulds or plywood panels, and shall
be rigidly fastened together so that no displacement can take place during casting.
Formwork shall be designed so that it can be removed without shock or damage to
concrete, and must be braced and held in position so as to avoid any holes or fastenings
through the prestressed component.

Moulds shall be of such a nature as not to allow the concrete member to deform
when the prestress is applied. The bottom portions of the moulds shall be prevented
from adhering to the concrete.

79
 Subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative, stripping of side
formwork may take place 24 hours after casting or as soon as is convenient after the
concrete has reached its final set. Stripping of bottom formwork shall not be carried out
until after transfer of prestress to the prestressed component.

SURFACE FINISH 3013.

Prestressed concrete work shall, unless otherwise specified, have a smooth

finish on all surfaces exposed in the completed work. Surfaces which will be in contact
with concrete cast in place to form a composite construction shall be purposely left very
rough, in order to provide an adequate key. The valleys and ridges of any roughening
system shall be transverse to the direction of stressing.

TOLERANCE 3014.

The Contractor shall provide continuous, experienced supervision during all

mould assembly and concreting operations, in order to ensure that the tolerance in
longitudinal dimensions for all concrete work shall remain within the following limits:

(1) For Component about 9m Long ± 6mm

(2) For Component about 18m Long ± 10mm

(3) For Component about 36m Long ± 13mm

The tolerance for lack of straightness on plan or variation in camber shall also be
of the same order as shown above for the respective lengths of the components.

The dimensional tolerances on web steel shall be of the order of 3mm.

PRESTRESSING 3015.
(1) GENERAL

Wires shall be straightened if necessary to produce equal stress in all wires or

wire groups or parallel lay cables that are to be stressed simultaneously or when
necessary to insure proper positioning in the sheathings.

When wires are to be button-headed, the buttons shall be cold formed

symmetrically about the axes of the wires. The buttons shall develop the minimum
guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of the wire. No cold forming process shall be used
that causes indentations in the wire. At transfer of the prestress the concrete shall have
a minimum cube strength of 30 N/mm².

80
 In order that any applied force may be maintained after the tensioned tendons
have been anchored, an allowance must be made in assessing the value of the applied
force for loss of stress due to the yield in the anchorages and for slip when the tendon is
wedged after tensioning. At transfer of the prestress, the concrete shall have the cube
strengths as shown on the drawings, or as specified. These requirements shall be
ascertained from works tests on three cubes manufactured and cured under the same
conditions as the concrete member.

Sufficient cubes shall be made so that if the stipulated strength is not achieved,
further cubes will be available for such additional testing as may be required.

At transfer of prestress, the measured deflection of the beam shall not exceed
the limits given on the drawings, or as specified.

(1) POST TENSIONING

(I) The system of prestressing and the magnitude of the post tension in a
structural component shall be as shown on the drawings.

(II) MANUFACTURE OF CABLES

Prestressing cables shall be preassembled in the factory or manufactured

on site from coils of wires or strands. The cable consisting of a number
of high tensile steel wires or strands shall be formed in the manner as
directed by the Engineer or his Representative. In estimating the length
of all cables, extra allowance must be made for attaching either one or
two tensioning jacks as instructed by the Engineer. The method of
measurement for the purpose of payment shall be the length of the
finished cable placed, positioned, tensioned, anchored, cut and grouted
complete as in the finished structure.

(III) SHEATHING

Sheathing shall be carefully examined prior to use and any damaged

lengths shall be cut away and rejected. Joints in corrugated sheathing
shall be formed by the use of couplers and/or by wrapping the joints with
tape. They shall be so designed as to prevent the ingress of cement,
concrete or other material during casting. All joints in sheathing shall be
approved by the Engineer's Representative.

(IV) PLACING OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND SHEATHING

Tendons shall be carefully handled so as to avoid sudden bends or kinks,

and threaded into the flexible sheathing before being placed into the
beam formwork. The sheathing and the prestressing tendon shall be
rigidly supported in the exact positions as shown on the drawings so that
no movement can take place during casting of the beams.

81
(V) PLACING OF ANCHORAGES

The anchorages shall be placed accurately in accordance with the

drawings and firmly fixed to resist displacement during vibration of the
concrete. The anchorages shall be fixed so as to be perfectly collinear
with the axis of the tendons and to remain so throughout the casting of
the component.

(VI) SYSTEM OF POST TENSIONING

All post-tensioned prestressing steel shall be secured at the ends by

means of approved permanent type anchoring devices.

All anchorage devices for post-tensioning shall hold the prestressing steel
at a load producing a stress of not less than 95 percent of the guarantee
minimum tensile strength of the prestressing steel, when tested in
accordance with Test Method No. California 641 or equal.

When headed wires are used, the outside edge of any hole for
prestressing wire through a stressing washer or through an unthreaded
bearing ring or plate shall not be less than 5mm from the roof of the
thread of the washer or from the edge of the ring or plate.

The load from the anchoring device shall be distributed to the concrete
by means of approved devices that will effectively distribute the load to
the concrete.

Such approved devices shall conform to the following requirement:

(a) Bending stresses in the plates or assemblies induced by the pull of

the prestressing steel shall not exceed the yield point of the
material or cause visible distortion in the anchorage plate when
100 percent of the ultimate load is applied as determined by the
Engineer.

(b) Materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements in

Section V Bridgeworks, Part (B) Structural Steelwork.

(VII) JOINTS

Joints in the spaces between a series of precast elements which are to be

prestressed together shall be made precisely in accordance with the
requirements shown on the drawings.

Suitable extensions or connections of the ducts through the gaps shall be

82
 provided and steps taken to ensure that the jointing material does not
enter the duct or press against the prestressing steel. The holes for the
prestressing steel shall be accurately made and meet one another in true
alignment at the ends and shall permit unobstructed passage of the
grout.

The stressing operation shall not take place until the filling material in the
joint has attained a strength equal to at least 1½ times the stress at
transfer of prestress. The time lag is to be established during design
process.

(VIII) TENSIONING

(1) No post-tensioning of pre-stressing tendons shall take place until

the concrete has attained the specified stress as ascertained from
tests on cubes cured and hardened under the same conditions as
the concrete of the member. Before the stressing, single wires or
strands, the wires or strands in each cable shall be of equal length
in tension.

(2) Tensioning shall be carried out with the approved type of jacks.

(3) Before tensioning the anchorages shall be carefully cleaned on all

surfaces, removing heavy dirt.

(4) The amount of tension given to the tendons shall conform to a

schedule of tendon tensions, to be supplied by the Engineer, and
will be based on the test data for prestressing steel.

(5) Measurement of the force shall be by an accurate gauge

indicating the force on the hydraulic jack and also by the
elongation of the steel after allowing for any initial slip in the
wedges or jaws of the grips. The Engineer may also specify the
use of a load cell to determine the tendon tension directly.

(6) Approval shall be obtained from the Engineer's Representative

before each tendon is anchored. The contractor shall provide
printed sheets and supply the Engineer's Representative with a
record of all extension and pressure readings for each tendon in
every prestressed structural component.

(7) No tensioning of tendons can commence until permission is

obtained to do so from the Engineer's Representative.

(8) The order and sequence of tensioning shall be as specified on the

drawings or as instructed by the Engineer's Representative.

(9) The prestressing force should be applied from one or both ends as

83
 specified on the drawings.

(10) Each wire, pair of wires, cables, strand, or bar shall be attached in
such a manner as to ensure that the elongation is uniform
throughout its length. Should any tensioned steel or anchorage
break or be damaged, it should be replaced if so ordered.
Throughout all tensioning operations a spare jack capable of
maintaining the designated load should be available.

(11) All tensioning shall be carried out in the order specified or

approved. After tensioning, the wires, strands or bars shall be
secured in position and cut off as directed.

(12) Immediately before tensioning, the Contractor shall prove that all
tendons are free to move between jacking points and that
members are free to accommodate the horizontal and vertical
movements due to the application of prestress.

(13) The Contractor shall establish the datum point for measuring
extension and jack pressure to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

(14) The tendons shall be stressed at a gradual and steady rate until
they attain the force described in the Contract.

(15) The Contractor shall keep full record of all measured tensioning
operations, including the extensions, pressure gauge or load cell
readings and the amount of pull in at each anchorage. Copies of
records shall be supplied to the Engineer within 24 hours of each
tensioning operation.

(IX) GROUTING

(1) After tendons have been tensioned and anchored they shall be
grouted up solid throughout. Suitable outlet with plugs being
provided to prevent air locks unless otherwise specified. Grouting
trials shall be undertaken when required by the Engineer.

The method of mixing and injecting the grout shall be approved

by the Engineer before grouting is commenced. The pressure at
which the grout is to be pumped into the duct shall be approved
by the Engineer and shall not normally exceed 552 kN/m².

(2) Grout shall be either a neat cement grout with a water cement
ratio not exceeding 0.4 or cement mortar (1:1 by weight). An
expanding plasticizing admixture should be used. All ducts and
holes shall be thoroughly washed out with water, immediately

84
 before grouting and after the stressing operation has been
completed. Grouting is to be carried out continuously, the
discharge from consecutive air holes being observed throughout.
The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned before grouting is
commenced. A complete spare grouting plant for immediate use
in case of emergency or breakdown of the equipment operation
shall be available.

(3) Care shall be taken to avoid lumps in the cement, and sieving
shall be carried out before mixing the grout. It is essential to mix
up a quantity of grout sufficient for a particular duct immediately
prior to its injection and to use only this batch on the duct.

(4) During the grouting operation grout shall be continuously added

to the bucket from which the grout is being pumped and the
bucket shall not be changed otherwise air may enter the
sheathing with the grout.

(5) Before the commencement of grouting and after the completion

of it, reports shall be made to the Engineer's Representative in
writing. The duct shall be plugged when grout is issued freely
from the outlet end, and once plugged the pressure shall be
gradually reduced to prevent blow backs or air pockets. The
Contractor shall keep full records of grouting including the date
each duct was grouted, the proportion of the grout and any
admixtures used, the pressure, details of any interruption and
tapping up required. Copies of these records shall be supplied to
the Engineer within 3 days of grouting.

Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide

facilities and attendance for the radio graphic testing of ducts.

(6) The grout mixer shall produce a grout of colloidal consistency.

The grout injector shall be capable of continuous operation with
sensibly constant pressure up to 690 kN/m² and shall include a
system of circulating or agitating the grout whilst actual grouting
is not in process. All baffles to the pump shall be fitted with sieve
strainers size 1.2mm.

(7) The equipment shall be capable of maintaining pressure on

completely grouted ducts. It shall be fitted with a nozzle which
can be locked off without loss of pressure in the duct.

(8) The pressure gauges shall be calibrated before they are first used
in the works and thereafter as required by the Engineer. All

85
 equipment shall be thoroughly washed with clean water at least
every 3 hours during the grouting operations and at the end of
use for each day.

(X) FINISHING OFF TENDONS

After grouting, the ends of the anchorages and any protecting ends of cut
off tendons shall be covered over by a 1:1 mix mortar packed hard into the recesses on
the beam.

(2) PRE-TENSIONING

(I) In long line beds for pre-tensioning, due consideration shall be

given to the friction caused by the varying shape and number of
diaphragms which will affect the magnitude of the applied pre-
stressing force.

(II) In order to obtain concrete of uniform strength, where members

are cast in a long line bed, the difference in strength at transfer
between components of the same type cast in the same line shall
not exceed 15 per cent. The Contractor shall satisfy the
Engineer's Representative by tests on special cubes cured under
the same conditions, as the members that this condition is
complied with.

(III) With pre-tensioning, the specified force shall be maintained by the

use of approved fixing devices, at the ends of the tensioned steel
during concreting and curing, until the concrete has attained the
strength specified. The tensioned steel shall then be released
gradually and uniformly.

(3) TRANSVERSE PRE-STRESSING

(I) GENERAL

Transverse pre-stress shall be as specified and shown on the drawings.

(II) JOINTING

Joints between precast concrete units are to be made in accordance with the
drawings or instructions from the Engineer's Representative. They shall consist of dry or
wet joints. In the case of dry joints they shall be filled with dry concrete quality 50
N/mm² which shall be mechanically rammed into position and in the case of wet joints
they shall be filled with wet concrete quality 50 N/mm² and fully vibrated into position.
In both cases joints shall be finished flush with, the pre-cast concrete faces. During
jointing, protection and continuation shall be given to the transverse cable holes, using a
method to be approved by the Engineer's Representative.

86
(III) TRANSVERSE CABLES

Transverse pre-stressing tendons, shall be as indicated on the respective

drawings and threaded through the transverse holes after the structural components are
in position. Tensioning will be carried out to a schedule of tendon tensions, to be
supplied by the Engineer, and must be commenced at the centre working towards the
ends symmetrically. The tendons are to be grouted in the same way as for the
longitudinal pre-stressing.

Permission shall be obtained from the Engineer's Representative prior to the

commencement of stressing and grouting and the completion of stressing and grouting
shall be reported to the Engineer's Representative all as for the longitudinal pre-
stressing.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 3016.

The following additional requirements shall be complied with:

No cracks will be permitted due to:

(1) Shrinkage, settlement of formwork, or damage in handling before

application of pre-stress.

(2) Local weakness of concrete at or immediately following pre-stressing or

(3) Improper handling and transporting after application of pre-stress.

Where grooves are provided in which tendons have been placed, they shall be
cleaned before the mortar is inserted.

Mortar shall consist of one part by weight of cement to three parts of sand with
a water cement ratio not exceeding 0.4 and shall be thoroughly compacted in the
grooves, preferably by the use of vibrators, and subsequently cured.

Alternatively, mortar comprising one part of cement to one part by weight of

sand together with an approved expanding plasticizing agent and less water may be
used. External cables shall be embedded in mortar of these proportions, an upper cover
being placed over the cables after vibration is completed to ensure that expansion
occurs uniformly within the original profile.

Any tension and retensioning procedure when allowed for offsetting losses shall
be strictly in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer's Representative.

The procedure to be adopted for all operations, using large diameter single
strands used as prestressing tendon shall be specially approved by the Engineer.

87
LIFTING AND HANDLING 3017

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer's Representative with full details of the
proposed method of transporting and erecting, prestressed beam for his approval,
before commencing this work. Should any cracking or other damage to components
during transport or erection render the components unfit for use the Contractor shall
replace the same at his own expense.

The method of lifting and handling prestressed beams is to ensure that the design dead
weight bending moment is not exceeded at any point in the beam throughout the whole
operation. Lifting from casting beds shall not take place until grouting is completed and
at least 24 hours old. Erection of the beams on to the bridge spans shall not take place
until the concrete has attained a cube strength as specified on the respective drawings.
The lifting of the beams shall be made using temporary lifting devices provided by the
Contractor to the Engineer's Representative's approval. Initial lifting from casting beds
and final lowering on to bearings shall be carried out using hand operated chain blocks
so as to avoid sudden shock in the beam.

(2) STORAGE

Beams shall only be stored on specially prepared temporary bearings, which

must be such that the design dead weight bending moment is not exceeded at any
point. Beams shall only be stored singly, and not on top of each other.

(3) TRANSPORTING OF BEAMS

Transporting of beams from place of storage to point of erection shall be carried

out using a purpose made conveyance which will ensure that the design dead weight,
bending moment is not exceeded at any point over the length of the beam, this can be
done by in-built pad into the vehicle which actually come into contact with and support
the structural units. Frame may be introduced into the vehicles to support particular
structural units. All units must be coupled directly to the frame to eliminate movement
of units in transit and shall be designed so as to avoid winching or dragging the beams
in a horizontal direction over rough ground. The transporting of other structural
components shall be as approved by the Engineer.

QUANTITY AND PAYMENT 3018.

No separate payment will be made for prestressing precast concrete members.

Payment for prestressing precast members shall be considered as included in the
contract price for furnishing precast members.

The contract lump sum price paid for prestressing precast members shall include
full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals
and for placing and tensioning the prestressing steel in precast concrete structures,
complete in place, as shown on the drawings, as specified in these and the special
provisions and as directed by the Engineer.

88
 Full compensation for furnishing and placing additional deformed bar reinforcing
steel required by the particular system used, ducts, anchoring devices, distribution
plates or assemblies and incidental parts, for furnishing samples for testing, working
drawings and microfilms, and for pressure grouting ducts shall be considered as
included in the Contract Lump Sum Price paid for in prestressing cast-in-place concrete
or in the contract price for furnishing precast members, and no additional compensation
will be allowed therefore.
(CLAUSES 3019 - 3999 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

SPECIFICATION

SECTION IV - PILING

89
 SECTION IV – PILING 桩

GENERAL 4000.

In addition to any other relevant clause of this specification, the following shall
be deemed to apply in particular to piling works, and shall be read in conjunction with
all other relevant Clauses of the Conditions of Contract and this Specification.

PART (A) - GENERAL

TYPES OF PILES 4001.

Piles used in the works shall be one of the following types:

(I) Type "A": Precast reinforced concrete bearing and sheet piles.
(II) Type "B": Cast-in-place reinforced concrete bearing piles formed driving a
steel shell which is filled with concrete and left in place.
(III) Type "C": Cast-in-place reinforced concrete bearing piles formed by driving a
steel pipe casing, inserting a permanent steel shell, filling it with
concrete and then withdrawing the driving casing.
(IV) Type "D": Cast-in-place reinforced concrete bearing piles formed by driving a
heavy steel pipe casing, filling the casing with concrete and
withdrawing the casing during or after concreting.
(V) Type "E": Prestressed concrete cylinder bearing piles driven in.
(VI) Type "F": Prestressed concrete cylinder bearing piles bored in.
(VII) Type "G": Steel sheet piles.

APPROVAL OF TYPE 4002.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval, details of all the
types of piles intended for use in the works. These details shall comprise complete
detailed drawings and specifications, a comprehensive list of the equipment to be used
and a full description of the methods to the employed.

The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that no equipment or material

intended for use in the construction or driving and/or boring of piles shall be imported
on to the site until the Engineer's approval has been obtained.

CONTRACTOR TO DRIVE OR BORE PILE 4003.

90
 Should the Contractor elect to carry out the pile drive or boring from his own
resources he will be required to satisfy the Engineer that the personnel he intends to
employ in the operation have had sufficient experience in similar installations under like
sub-surface conditions.

SUB-CONTRACTOR 4004.

Should the Contractor elect to employ a Sub-Contractor for the piling, he shall
satisfy the Engineer that the Sub-Contractor is sufficiently experienced in similar
operations under like sub-surface conditions.

MANUFACTURE OF REINFORCED AND PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE PILES

4005.

In addition to the particular requirements of this part of the specification, all the
relevant clauses of the specification shall apply to the manufacture of reinforced or
prestressed concrete piles.

CEMENT 4006.

The Cement used in the manufacture of all reinforced or prestressed concrete

piles shall be sulphate resisting portland cement in accordance with B.S. 4027 unless
otherwise shown on the drawings.

SETTING OUT OF PILES 4007.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of all piles and the
establishment of all lines and levels.

ALIGNMENT 4008.

Piles shall be driven or bored as accurately as possible to the vertical or to the

specified batter. Any pile deviating from its proper alignment to such an extent that its
load carrying capacity cannot, in the opinion of the Engineer, be corrected by the
strengthening of the foundations, pile cap or pile ties, shall be replaced or supplemented
by an additional pile at the Contractor's expense. In general the allowable tolerances will
be in the case of piles type "A" "D" within 75mm of the position shown on the
drawings and within 1½ of the inclination shown on the drawings, and in the case of
piles type "E" and "F" within 150mm. of the position shown on the drawings. No
wedging or drawing into line of piles that have wandered will be allowed.

DRIVING WITH DROP HAMMERS OR SINGLE ACTING STEAM HAMMERS 4009.

Piles shall be driven with a drop hammer or with a single acting steam hammer. The

91
weight of the hammer and the drop to be used shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer and shall conform to the recommendations of CP 2004 and will depend on the
type of pile to be used. In general the energy per blow will be of the order as follows:-

(I) For piles types "A", "B", "C" and "D" - at least 26,500 Joules or 35,000 Joules
depending upon cross-sectional dimensions of the piles, the lighter hammer
being used up to 300mm diameter piles and the heavier from 300mm diameter
to 400mm diameter.

(II) For piles of type "E" at least 54,300 Joules with a ram weight of not less than
6,800 Kg.

DRIVING WITH DOUBLE ACTION STEAM HAMMERS 4010.

Double Acting steam hammers may be used when driving piles to refusal but
shall not be used for other piles except with specific permission of the Engineer.

PROTECTION OF PILE BUTTS 4011.

Suitable anvils or cushions, depending on the type of the pile, shall be used to
prevent damage to the pile butts.

LEADS AND FRAMES 4012.

Unless otherwise specified or directed driving shall be done using fixed leads
which will hold the pile firmly in position in axial alignment with the hammer.

Raking piles shall be held in position during driving right down to the level at
which the piles enter reasonably solid ground and to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative.

Piles shall be driven from an approved type frame.

DRIVING TO BE CONTINUOUS TO FINAL SET OR LEVEL 4013.

When the driving of any pile commences it shall be continued without cessation
for any avoidable cause until the pile has been driven to the required set or level as
directed by the Engineer's Representative. Where levels or sets are indicated on the
drawings these may be varied, at the Engineer's discretion, in accordance with the
results of test piles driven in representative areas.

JETTING 4014.

Where water or air jetting is contemplated to assist the driving of the piles, the
permission of the Engineer must be obtained. The jetting shall be carried out in a
manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative and must be discontinued

92
when the toe of the pile is 3 metres short of the estimated final depth of penetration.
Driving shall be completed by hammer only, without jetting, to the required set or as
indicated by the Engineer's Representative. Where it is intended to employ water or air
jetting to assist the driving of a number of piles in a group, the jetting of piles in the
group must be completed before the driving of any pile to its final penetration is
commenced.

DRIVING TO FINAL SET AND RECORD OR DRIVING 4015.

All piles shall be driven to the specified final set in the presence of Engineer's
Representative.

A record of the driving of each pile shall be kept in the form of the "Daily Pile
Driving Record" as set out in the British Standard Code of Practice No. 8004. Four copies
of each of these records shall be forwarded to the Engineer's Representative for his
retention.

RE-DRIVING HEAVED PILES 4016.

Observations and measurements shall be made in the field during the process of
driving piles, by any suitable method satisfactory to both the Contractor and the
Engineer to determine whether a driven pile has been lifted from its original seat during
the operation of driving adjacent piles. The Contractor shall provide the necessary tools
such as tell tale pipes and instruments, to make these measurements. Such
measurements shall be properly corrected for any temperature variations that might
exist in the case of the pile shell or instrumentation.

Where such observations or measurements indicate that a pile has been

unseated, it shall be driven to the resistance specified.

DAMAGED AND MIS-DRIVEN PILES 4017.

Broken or shattered piles will not be accepted. Should any pile be damaged
by over driving or not conform to the tolerances of the specification, an extra pile or
piles shall be driven in its place, at the Contractor's expense unless in the opinion of the
Engineer the pile is out of place or plumb as the result of an underground obstruction.

Piles rejected after driving may remain in the ground at the descretion of the
Engineer, in case of shell piles the shell shall be filled with concrete, and be cut off as
directed. When rejected piling is withdrawn, the space, if another pile is not driving into
it, shall be filled solid with gravel or broken stone without payment thereof.

OBSTRUCTIONS 4018.

Where boulders or other obstructions make it impossible to drive certain piles in

93
the location shown and to the proper bearing strata, the Contractor shall resort to all
usual methods to install the pile or steel pipes as required, including spudding, jetting,
or other feasible means. If, in the judgement of the Engineer, the Contractor is unable
to complete the pile driving properly by resorting to such methods, the Engineer may
order an additional pile or piles driven for which the Contractor will be paid in
accordance with the tendered rates. Piles abandoned because of obstructions
encountered before reaching the accepted bearing strata shall be left in position or
shells filled with concrete and be paid for as a complete pile for the length driven.

Where directed by the Engineer, excavation operations shall be carried out to

remove obstructions and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for such operations at rates
and prices to be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer.

CUTTING OFF PILE HEADS ETC. 4019.

The tops of piles shall be cut off true and level at the elevations indicated on the
drawings, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. All portions which are
battered, split, wrapped or buckled, or damaged or imperfect in any way shall be
removed.

Shells and casings shall have sufficient excess length to allow the complete
removal of working tops.

BORED PILES OR CASINGS 4020.

The method of boring steel casing or pipes into the ground shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer.

PAYMENT 4021.

Payment for piling shall be made as detailed hereunder in the parts of this
section of the specification dealing with the particular types of piles.

(CLAUSES 4022 - 4029 INCLUSIVE NOT USED.)

PART (B) - TEST DRIVING AND TEST LOADING OF PILES

GENERAL 4030

(i) Test piles shall be driven or bored as appropriate and loaded in the manner
detailed hereunder in the numbers and locations indicated on the drawings
and/or in the contract documents and/or as directed by the Engineer.

(ii) Unless otherwise directed the test piles shall remain as working piles
under the completed foundations.

(iii) Test piles shall be driven or bored using the equipment and methods

94
 approved by the Engineer for the remaining working piles.

(iv) Before any load test is made, the proposed apparatus, structure and
method to be used, in making the load test, shall be approved by the
Engineer. All load tests shall be made under the supervision of the
Engineer's Representative.

RECORDING OF TESTS RESULTS 4031.

The results of all piles loading tests shall be set out in a report the form of which
shall be as directed by the Engineer. This report shall include a description of the pile
and its driving record; type and size of hammer used, a tabulation of the load time,
settlement and rebound data; and remarks concerning unusual circumstances during the
driving or boring or loading of the pile and any other information which the Engineer or
his Representative may require.

PROCEDURE FOR TESTING PILES OF TYPES A,B,C, AND D 4032.

The following procedure shall be adopted for the testing of piles referred to
above as types "A", "B", "C" and "D"

(i) Piles shall be load tested to twice the design load with the test load applied in
seven increments equal to 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75 and 2.0 times the
design load with a minimum of two hours between the addition of load
increments. Increments shall not be added until the rate of settlement is less
than .25mm per hour, or if each increment thereafter for the test load shall
remain in place until there is no settlement in a 2 hr. period.

(ii) If the full test load can be applied without failure of the pile, this load shall
remain on the pile for 48 hours, after which the test load shall be removed in
four equal decrements with a minimum of one hour between decrements.

(iii) Readings of settlements and rebounds shall be made with a minimum of two
dial gauges mounted on an independent framework and positioned on opposite
corners of the test plate. Readings shall be recorded to the nearest 250 μm and
shall be made every 30 minutes during the loading cycle and every hour during
the application of the full test load. Readings of rebound shall be made before
and after each decrement and 24 hours after entire load has been removed.

(iv) The load test shall be considered satisfactory provided that the net settlement
(after rebound) does not exceed 10% of the pile diameter.

(v) Piles to be load tested will be contract piles driven in their proper location.
During the load testing of piles, the driving of contract piles may be continued at
the Contractor's option provided the testing process is not affected by the pile

95
 driving. Should the results of the load test indicate that longer piles are
necessary, the Contractor will be required to further drive piles driven during the
load testing operation without additional cost to the owner except for the added
pile length. Piles driven during the testing operation shall not be filled with
concrete until the required length and/or resistance has been determined by load
test.

PROCEDURE FOR TESTING OF TYPES “E” AND “F” 4033.

The following procedure shall be adopted for the piles referred to above as types
"E" and "F":-

Pile driving or sinking requirement as to depth of embedment and/or requested

final driving resistance shall be determined in each area of similar soil conditions by load
testing at least two piles selected by the Engineer. The total applied load shall equal
150% of the design dead load, plus 200% of the design live load. The test load shall be
applied in six increments equal to 25, 40, 55, 70, 85 and 100% of the total test load.
Time interval between increments shall not be less than two hours and increments of
load shall not be added until the rate of settlement has dropped below .25mm per hour.
The full load shall remain on the pile for 48 hours, after which a test load shall be
removed in four equal decrements allowing one hour between decrements. Readings on
settlements and rebound shall be taken before and after each increment or decrement,
every two hours during the 48 hours the full load is on the pile and 24 hours after the
full load is removed from the pile. The test shall be considered satisfactory if the net
settlement (after deduction of rebound) does not exceed 10% of the pile diameter.

LATERAL DISPLACEMENT TESTS 4034.

The Engineer may order, if he so desires, that lateral displacement tests be

carried out by jacking between adjacent piles to a given lateral displacement. The
method of carrying out lateral displacement test shall be as directed by the Engineer.

ASSESSMENT OF RESULTS OF PILE LOADING AND DRIVING AND TEST 4035.

The information obtained from the driving of the test piles shall be applied to a
suitable dynamic pile formula or formulae. The formula or formulae to be employed shall
be as selected by the Engineer. The results of this application or these applications shall
be considered in conjunction with the results obtained from the loading test and lengths
of the remaining piles in a particular area or group shall then be agreed between the
Contractor and the Engineer.

PAYMENT FOR TEST AND LOAD TESTS 4036.

Payment for the fabrication and driving or boring of the test piles shall be made
at the tendered rates and prices for working piles of the same type entered in the bills

96
of quantities.

Payment for the pile load tests shall be made at the unit price quoted for load
test on the particular type of pile in the bills of quantities, except where the Contractor
should have made any kind of guarantee as to safe bearing capacity of any particular
type of pile in any location, payment for load test shall only be made for tests which are,
in the opinion of the Engineer, successful.

The price by the Contractor for the carrying out of a load test shall be deemed to
be inclusive of all the cost involved in the carrying out of the load test and also of the
cost of obtaining the stipulated information during the driving of the test pile.

(CLAUSES 4037 - 4049 INCLUSIVE NOT USED.)

PART (C) - PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BEARING AND SHEET PILES -

TYPE "A".

In addition to any other requirements of other parts of this section of the

specification the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of precast
reinforced concrete bearing and sheet piles.

GENERAL 4050.

The piles shall be manufactured at the site of the work in which they are to be
used and in an area entirely free from the harmful effects of shock and vibration. They
shall be cast in lengths as determined by test.

MOULDS AND CONCRETING 4051.

The moulds shall be so supported that the pile is not distorted during or after
casting and shall be such as to ensure that the resulting pile is straight and true on each
face. The sides of the moulds shall be capable of being removed without shock or
jarring of the pile. Shoes, reinforcement, links, toggle hole tubes and all other fittings
shall be fixed accurately in the positions shown on the drawings. Shoes shall be of the
type shown on the drawings and of approved manufacture. They shall weigh not less
than as shown on the drawing, and shall have chilled hardened cast iron bases and mild
steel straps cast in, i.e. The straps shall run continuously through the cast iron bases.
All castings shall be of clean, grey, tough metal, free from sand, honeycombing, porous
places, air holes or other defects and shall be delivered to the site without being
painted, stopped or plugged in any part, otherwise they will be rejected. Shoes shall be
fixed accurately to the piles with the points truly on the longitudinal axis and the lower
ends of the reinforcing bars shall bear on the top of the shoe. Forks for retaining the
longitudinal reinforcing bars in position shall be of cast iron or pressed steel and of
approved shape and length.

Each pile shall be poured in one continuos operation. During concreting and

97
subsequently, the pile shall be protected from the effects of sun, wind and rain by
covering with screens of clean, damp sacks or hessian, care being taken to prevent
contact with the wet concrete until it has hardened sufficiently to prevent marking.
When so hardened, the concrete and moulds shall be intimately and completely covered
with the damp sacks or hessian and these shall be kept in a continuously wet condition
for a period of not less than 10 days after casting.

STRIPING AND HANDLING 4052.

The sides of the moulds shall not be removed before two days after casting and
the piles shall not be disturbed on the bottom boards for at least 10 days after casting.
The piles shall be removed from the bottom boards only by canting sideways and shall
be rolled carefully to the stacking ground for final curing. The runners and other
supporters upon which the piles are canted and rolled shall not be more than 2 metres
apart and shall be perfectly level one with the other so that during the operations of
canting and rolling each pile shall be fully supported at each interval of 2 metres along
its length. Each pile shall have the date of manufacture painted on one side and this
date shall determine the sequence in which the piles are driven. The piles must on no
account be lifted at this stage and, until ready for driving, must be adequately supported
at each 2 metres interval throughout their length. The Contractor shall keep the piles in
a continuously wet condition until a period of at least 14 days has elapsed since
manufacture.

Otherwise than as aforesaid, the piles shall not be handled, lifted, slung, pitched
or driven before 6 weeks after manufacture and then shall be slung only from the toggle
holes provided in the positions shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineers
Representative.

Should the Contractor wish to use rapid hardening cement he shall first obtain
the approval of the Engineer's Representative. Where approval has been given, and
rapid hardening cement used in the manufacture of the piles, the sides of the moulds
shall not be removed earlier than 2 days after casting, and the piles shall not be
disturbed on the bottom boards for at least 4 days after casting. Curing shall continue
for the full period of l4 days, and the piles shall not be driven before three weeks after
manufacture.

Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible

for any damage done to the piles due to the sides of the moulds being removed too
soon or the piles being moved from the bottom boards too soon or from any other
cause and all piles damaged during manufacture, handling, driving or at any other time
shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

LENGTHENING OF PILES 4053.

In every case where it is found to be necessary to increase the length of a pile

98
after it has been driven, the head of the pile shall be cut off to expose the reinforcement
for a length not less than 1.2 metres below the top of the steel reinforcement. The joint
shall be made by butting the lengthening bars to the pile bars with the addition of a
supplementary bar to every pile bar and of equal area. These supplementary bars shall
extend at least 1.2 metres on each side of the joint and shall be secured to both pile
and lengthening bars by No. 16 S.W.G. wire, links being provided as directed. The
extension shall be carried out vertically so as to form a true continuation of the pile. Butt
welding of reinforcement may be allowed by the Engineer's Representative and where
so allowed shall be carried out in strict compliance with the instructions of the Engineer's
Representative.
STRIPPING HEADS OF PILES 4054.

After the piles have been driven, the concrete shall be cut away from those
portions of the piles extending above a level of 75mm minimum above the bottom of the
pile cap, without damaging the reinforcement and leaving exposed a minimum length of
0.90m of the main bars. The binders, links, forks and toggle hole tubes within this
portion shall be removed and the main bar reinforcement shall be bent into the base of
the foundation as shown on the drawings.

PAYMENT FOR PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE 4055.

Payment for precast reinforced concrete bearing and sheet piles shall be made
on the basis of the length of the pile per linear metre measured from the tip to the cut
off elevation at the tendered rates and prices entered in the bills of quantities for the
sheet piles particular type and dimensions of pile.

The tendered rates and prices shall be deemed to include for all materials,
equipment, labour and supervision involved in the completed pile driven and in place.
No payment shall be made for withdrawn or ejected piles.

(CLAUSES 4056 4059 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (D) - CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE

PILES. TYPES "B" AND "C"

ln addition to any other requirements of any other parts of this section of the
specification the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of cast
place reinforced concrete piles of types "B" and "C".

CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES TYPE ‘B’ 4060.

These piles shall be formed by driving a shell to the required bearing, leaving the
shell permanently in place, and filling it with concrete. Shells shall have sufficient
strength and rigidity to permit their being driven and not to be distorted by soil pressure
or the driving of adjacent piles; they shall be sufficiently watertight to exclude water
during placing of concrete. No concrete is to be placed until all piles in a cluster have
been driven and approved.

99
CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES TYPE “C” 4061.

These piles shall be placed by driving a heavy steel pipe casing with an interior core or
point to the required depth, removing the core and inserting a permanent steel shell,
filling it with concrete, and then withdrawing the driving casing. Shells shall have
sufficient strength and rigidity not to be distorted by soil pressure or the driving of
adjacent piles and they shall be sufficiently watertight to exclude water during placing of
concrete. Shells shall be cylindrical with a minimum diameter of 315mm.No driving
casing shall be withdrawn until all piles within 3 metres centre to centre, have
been driven.

Pile shells may be step tapered, cylindrical or a combination of such shapes and may be
plain or corrugated. Plain cylindrical shells and shells driven without an internal mandrel
shall have a minimum diameter of 325mm. and a minimum wall thickness of 8mm. with
steel meeting respective B.S. requirements. Piles driven with an internal mandrel shall
have a minimum top diameter of 255mm. and a minimum butt diameter of 355mm. For
the step taper portion of any pile, the maximum distance between changes of diameter
shall be 3.6 metres for shells driven with an internal mandrel, the Contractor shall
assume responsibility for providing shells of sufficient strength and thickness to
withstand proper driving without injury, to obtain proper penetration and to resist
harmful distortion and/or buckling due to soil pressure.

The lower end of each pile shell shall be closed by a butt steel plate or shoe
firmly welded to the shell.

EQUIPMENT 4062.

Pile driver leaders shall be of the rigid or fixed type to insure accurate alignment
of the pile and hammer during driving. The use of swinging leads will not be permitted.

The cushion block used shall be a one piece hardwood block with grain parallel
to the pile axis and enclosed in a close fitting steel housing, except that subject to the
approval of the Engineer, a cap block of other materials may be used providing the
hammer energy transmission characteristics of the proposed capblock are equal to or
greater than the wood capblock specified herein. The use of wood chips, small wood
blocks, rope or other material which permits excessive loss of hammer energy shall not
be permitted. The introduction of fresh capblock material just before or during the final
driving of the pile shall not be permitted.

CONTROL OF INTERNAL PRESSURES 4063.

Observation shall be made during driving to determine whether or not the soil
and/or water is rising inside the pile. If this occurs to such an extent that soil and/or
water is trapped in the pile under the follower, provision shall be made for the escape or
removal of such soil and/or water before driving is continued.

CONCRETE 4064.

100
 No concrete shall be placed in any pile shell until the shell has been inspected
and found to be free of water, debris or other foreign matter.

Concrete for cast-in-situ piles shall have an ultimate compressive strength of not
less than 20 N/mm² at the end of 28 days and shall be composed of approved portland
sulphate resisting cement, clean sharp sand and gravel or crushed stone of maximum
25mm diameter. Care shall be taken to ensure that the concrete is thoroughly
compacted and that the minimum cover of 38mm to the main reinforcing bars is
maintained throughout.

After driven shells have been inspected and found satisfactory, approximately
0.03 cu.m. of 1:2 cement grout shall be deposited in each pile followed by concrete of
100 to 125mm slump deposited in the pile in a continuous operation through a funnel
hopper having a discharge opening not greater than 200mm. in diameter.

Concrete strength shall be determined from Standard Cube Test made from each
day's pour as specified for reinforced concrete.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT 4065.

All Steel Reinforcement shall be in accordance with the drawings prepared by

the Contractor or the Engineer whichever is applicable. It shall comply with the latest
issue B.S.785, B.S.4449 or B.S.4461 depending on the type specified. All bars bending
to be in accordance with B.S.1468. Reinforcement shall not be welded except where
indicated on the drawings.

PAYMENT FOR CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES TYPES “B”

AND “C” 4066.

Payment for Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Piles of Types "B" and "C" shall
be made on the basis of the length of the pile per linear metre, from the tip to the cut-
off elevation at the tendered rates and prices entered in the Bill of Quantities for the
particular type and dimension of pile.

The tendered rates and prices shall be deemed to include for all materials,
equipment, labour and supervision involved in the complete pile driven and in place.

No payment shall be made for withdrawn or rejected piles.

(CLAUSES 4067 4069 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (E) - PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES TYPE "D"

In addition to the requirements of any other parts of this section of the

specification the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of cast
place reinforced concrete piles of type "D".

101
GENERAL 4070.

Cast-in-place reinforced concrete piles of type "D" are formed by the driving of a
heavy steel pipe casing closed at the lower end by a cast steel pointed shoe firmly fitted
to the casing so as to provide a watertight joint. Reinforcement steel is then placed
within the casing and concrete poured, the casing may be removed whilst the concrete
has being poured or may be removed after the concrete has been poured. Alternatively
the casing may be filled with the concrete aggregate mix and cement sand grout
injected after the casing has been removed.

DETAILED METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION 4071.

Where this type of piling is proposed for the works, the Contractor shall submit,
in detail, his proposed method of carrying out the piling, to the Engineer for his
approval, and shall carry out the work strictly in accordance with the method as
approved by the Engineer.

PAYMENT FOR CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES OF TYPE “D”

4072.

Payment for cast-in-place reinforced concrete pile of type "D" shall be made on
the same basis as for piles of types "B" and "C" at the tendered rates and prices.

(CLAUSES 4073 4079 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (F) - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PILES TYPE "E"

In addition to any other requirements of any other parts of this section of the
specification the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of prestressed
concrete cylinder piles of types "E" AND "F".

GENERAL 4080.

Prestressed concrete cylinder piles of type "E" shall have outside diameter and
minimum dimensions as indicated on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
Prestressing cables of the composition, number and type as indicated on the drawings
or approved by the Engineer, shall be uniformly placed in the wall of the piles.

MANUFACTURE 4081.

(I) All materials shall be as stated in the relevant parts of the specification.

(II) Metal forms shall be used and they must be well braced and stiffened
against deformations under pressure of the wet concrete. They shall have

102
 smooth joints and inside surfaces accessible for adequate cleaning. The
portions of the form which form the end surfaces of the pile (or sections)
must be a true plane and perpendicular to the axis of the pile with the
following tolerances: Maximum allowable deviation for abutting end
surfaces 3mm, for head end surfaces, 13mm and for the point end 76mm

Forming tubes for the longitudinal holes for the prestressing cables shall
be 35mm nominal diameter and shall be positioned so that there will be a
minimum cover of 38mm to the outside finished surface of the pile, shall
be inside the spiral steel reinforcement and shall be uniformly spaced
around the pile circumference.

HANDLING 4082.

Piles shall not be handled or moved in any manner that would result in cracking
or permanent damage to the concrete or to the grout surrounding the wires.

EQUIPMENT 4083

Piles shall be driven with an approved hammer which shall develop a rated
energy per blow of not less than 54,300 Joules and which shall have a ram weight of
not less than 6,800 Kg. A solid hardwood cushion block, at least 150mm thick, shall be
used in the base of the hammer between the hammer ram and the follower. A
laminated ring
shaped cushion block at least 150mm thick made up of 25mm hardwood boards and cut
to fit the head of the pile, shall be used between the follower and the top of the pile.
Both cushion blocks shall be inspected periodically during driving and blocks that have
been unduly worn and compacted with use shall be replaced before driving is continued.

Piles may be driven without guides or leaders except that the hammer shall be
kept in accurate alignment with the axis of the pile.

REINFORCING STEEL 4084.

Each pile or pile section shall have a cage of non prestressed reinforcing steel of
the size, dimension and arrangement shown on the contract drawings or as approved by
the Engineer. This reinforcing cage shall be securely held in position during the casting
and spinning of the concrete. The spiral steel reinforcement shall have a minimum
concrete cover of 25mm to the outside surface of the finished pile.

CONCRETE 4085.

Concrete used shall be not leaner than Grade 35 N/mm2 or as indicated on the
Contract drawings. The concrete mix shall be such as to give the most uniform possible
distribution of the aggregates across the wall of the pile. The fine and coarse
aggregates shall be as nearly as possible of the same specific gravity.

CASTING 4086.

103
 Piles shall be centrifugally cast and shall be cast in convenient sections as
approved by the Engineer.

CURING 4087.

Piles or pile sections may initially be steam cured. After removal of forms,
membrane curing may be applied to all surfaces except abutting end surfaces and core
holes.

METHOD OF HANDING 4088.

The Method of Handling piles or pile sections shall be such that no permanent
damage to the concrete will occur. If piles are made up of sections, any section which
has more than 10% of the end surfaces spalled to a depth of more than 3mm shall be
rejected.

ASSEMBLY OF SECTIONS 4089.

In making up the full length pile, the abutting surface of each section shall be
covered by a sealing material of sufficient thickness to fill all voids (except at the cable
holes) when the sections are brought together under compression as later specified.
This sealing material must attain a minimum ultimate strength of at least equal to or
greater than that of the concrete and must be as resistant to exposure and weathering
as is the concrete. After the sealing material is applied, the pile sections shall be
brought into contact and held together by a force equivalent to not less than 0.79
N/mm2 on the gross concrete area while the sealing material sets. The individual
sections shall be lined up so that the maximum deviation in the alignment of the outside
surfaces of two adjacent sections at the joint will not exceed 6mm and the maximum
deviation in the alignment of the prestressing cable holes at the joint will not exceed
6mm

STRESSING OF PILES 4090.

Piles shall not be stressed until the compressive strength of the concrete is at
least 30.0 N/mm2 after the prestressing cables have been threaded through the cable
holes to make up cables of the required number of wires; the cables shall be tensioned
to an average cable unit stress as indicated on the drawings or approved by the
Engineer. This tension shall be measured by the elongation of the wires and checked by
the jack pressure. The tension in the wire shall be transferred to mechanical end
locks or anchors. Aggregate stress losses through transfer of the stressing force from
the jack to temporary anchorage shall not exceed an average of 10% on one cable or an
average of 5% on all cables in any one pile.

GROUTING OF CABLES 4091.

104
 All cables holes shall be grouted with a mixture of cement and water in such a
manner that the interstices are completely filled with the grout material. The cable
tension shall be maintained by the mechanical anchors while the holes are grouted and
until the grout attains sufficient strength to hold permanently the tension in the cables.
During this period, the piles shall not be moved or handled in any manner that would
result in permanent damage to the grout. The grout curing period must be sufficient to
permit the removal of the temporary anchors without slippage of the wires in the grout
except that the stress loss through transfer shall not exceed an average of 10% on one
cable or an average of 5% on all cables in any one pile. During removal of end anchors,
if the wires do not part under stress with a "Cup and Cone" fracture, but can be burned
completely through with a cutting torch, no slippage is considered to have occurred.

DRIVING RESISTANCE 4092.

Piles shall not be driven until the concrete has attained the minimum strength as
specified on the drawings.

The piles shall be driven to a resistance or tip elevation as determined by load

test to be satisfactory for the required design load, but the final resistance shall not
exceed 10 blows per 25mm with the approved hammer. In no case shall the stroke of
the hammer exceed 1200mm.

TENSION FORCES DURING DRIVING 4093.

When the point of the pile is passing through soft soil so that there is little or no
resistance to penetration at the bottom of the pile, the stroke of the hammer shall be
reduced to approximately 600mm

CONTROL OF INTERNAL PRESSURES 4094.

Observation shall be made during driving to determine whether or not the soil
and/or water is rising inside the pile casing. If this occurs to such an extent that soil
and/or water is trapped in the pile under the follower, provision shall be made for the
escape or removal of such soil and or water before driving is continued.

PRE-EXCAVATION 4095.

The Contractor may use any combination of driving and drilling approved by the
Engineer to obtain the required pile embedment. Jetting or pre excavation shall be done
below the pile tip elevation and the final seating of the pile shall be done by driving only
for the last 3 metres.

TOLERANCE 4096.

Piles may be driven with the use of template or other method approved by the
Engineer. The top of each pile shall not vary more than 150mm from the required plan
location.

105
CUT-OFF 4097.

Where piles are required to be cut off, cuttings may be performed with
pneumatic tools, sawing, or other method approved by the Engineer. In no case shall
explosives be used for cutting off piles.

PILE SPLICES OR BUILD UPS 4098.

If pile tops are driven below the established cut off elevation, or if pile tops are
damaged below the cut off elevation, the pile shall be built up to the required elevation
using a cast-in-place concrete extension of the cylinder or by use of an acceptable
length of cylinder pile section. The pile splice shall consist of a poured plug or
reinforced concrete extending at least l.4 metres into the original pile and, where
possible, the same length into the added section as detailed on the drawings. This
concrete plug may be an extension of the plug connecting the pile to the cap.

DEFECTIVE PILES 4099.

Piles damaged by improper driving or manipulation to force them into proper

position shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Any pile damaged by handling or in transit shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer or shall he replaced all at the Contractor's expense.

PAYMENT 4100.

Payment for prestressed concrete cylinder piles of type "E" shall be made on the
same basis as for piles of types "D" or "C" at the tendered rates and prices.

(CLAUSES 4101 4109 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (G) - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES OF TYPE "F"

In addition to any other requirements of any other parts of this section of the
specification the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of prestressed
concrete cylinder piles of the types "F"

GENERAL 4110.

Prestressed concrete cylinder piles of type "F" are formed by the forcing into the
ground of heavy steel casing and the removal of the earth from its inside. After the
casing has been installed to the required depth a precast prestressed concrete cylinder
pile is inserted into the casing either in sections and stressed insitu or as a complete

106
unit. The space between the steel casing and the prestressed concrete shall be grouted
with sand-cement grout as directed and approved by the Engineer.

METHOD OF MANUFACTURE 4111.

Where prestressed concrete cylinder piles of Type "F" are proposed for use in the
works, the method of manufacture and construction shall be as approved by the
Engineer and the Contractor shall comply strictly with this approved method.

PAYMENT 4112.

The payment for prestressed concrete cylinder piles shall be made on the same
basis as for piles of type "E".

(CLAUSES 4113 4119 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (H) - STEEL SHEET PILES

STEEL SHEET PILES 4120.

All steel sheet piles shall be of an inter locking section as shown on the drawing
and shall be a type and manufacture approved by the Engineer.

Steel sheet piles, tie rods, rivets, and bolts shall conform to the minimum
requirements of B.S. 4360, Parts 1 & 2 and B.S. 449. If cofferdams for foundation
construction are used, the steel sheet piling for the cofferdams shall be carried well
below the bottom of the footings and shall be well braced and as watertight as
practicable.

The interior dimensions of cofferdams shall provide sufficient clearance inside the
walls for constructing forms and driving pile and to permit pumping outside the forms.

For purpose of constructing the cofferdam, any enlargement in excess of 50mm

outside the dimensions of the footing as shown on the drawings shall be considered as
being for the sole purpose of expediting the work of the Contractor as is of no value to
the F.M.W.H. and quantities of such excavation and backfill will not be included in the
quantities to be paid for.

In tidal waters or in streams at a time of probable flood, cofferdam walls shall be

vented at low water elevation to ensure equal hydrostatic head both inside and outside
of the cofferdam during the period of placing and setting of seals.

No shoring will be permitted in cofferdams which will induce stress, shock, or

vibration in the permanent structure.

107
 When permitted by the Engineer, cross struts or bracing may extend through
foundation concrete. Such struts or bracing below low water will be permitted to remain
in place, or when specified in the special provisions or shown on the drawings, to be
removed. Struts or bracing above low water shall be removed and the resulting space
filled with concrete of the same mix as that specified for the surrounding concrete.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, drawings showing his
proposed method of cofferdam construction and other details left open to his choice or
not fully shown on the drawings. The drawings shall be submitted at least two weeks in
advance of the time the Contractor begins construction of the cofferdams.

After completion of the substructure, the cofferdams with all sheeting and
bracing shall be removed at least to 1 metre below the level of the stream bed, by the
Contractor at his own expense, and such removal shall be performed in a manner that
will not disturb or mar the finished concrete or masonry.

WELDING ELECTRIDES 4121.

Electrodes used for welding shall comply with B.S. 639 or B.S.693 depending on
the type employed.

PROTECTIVE PAINTING 4122.

Where directed on the drawings or in the specifications, steel sheet piles shall be
coated before driving with two coats of an approved bituminous paint, in a manner as
directed by the Engineer's Representative.

DRIVING ETC. 4123.

The piling shall be driven either singly or in pairs vertically and to true lines and
even planes in the position shown on the drawings and to the levels indicated thereon.
Should there be any defect in the horizontal or vertical alignment of the piling or should
a break, through any cause whatsoever, occur in the continuity of the piling, the
Contractor shall withdraw such defective pile or piles and drive such further piles as may
be necessary to remedy the defect. Should any distortion, fanning or creep occur in the
alignment of the piling the Contractor shall immediately take steps to rectify the defect
and shall, where necessary, supply and drive suitable tapered piles to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative. All costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out the
necessary remedial measures shall be at his own expense.

Should any tapered piling have to be manufactured locally they shall have along
the joint 22mm diameter rivets at 150mm pitch except for a length of 600mm 150mm at
each end the pitch shall be 75mm

All necessary holes for tie rods shall be neatly drilled and for drains they shall be
neatly burnt out, all in the positions shown on the drawings.

108
THE RODS AND ROPES 4124.

The steel sheet piling shall be connected to the anchor piles by mild steel tie
rods or ropes as approved by the Engineer. They shall be in lengths as indicated and
coupled together with forged steel coupling boxes or turnbuckles. Each end of each rod
shall be threaded for a distance of 230mm with standard whitworth right and left
handed threads as the case may be. Mild steel bearing plates and washers of approved
sizes shall be provided for the outer end of the tie rods, the washers being tapered. The
tie rods and ropes coupling boxes or turn buckles and other fittings shall be cleaned
with wire brush or other approved means to remove all millscale, rust, etc., and shall
then be given one coat of the bituminous solution and the tie rods and ropes shall, after
fixing in position, be wrapped in approved hessian and, with all fittings, be given a
second coat of the approved solution. Where possible the coupling boxes or turnbuckles
shall also be wrapped in hessian.

PAYMENT 4125.

The quantity of sheet piling to be paid for under this item in this section except
for cofferdams, will be the number of square metres of sheet piling placed in its final
position. The unit price bid for this item shall include the cost of furnishing all labour,
materials and equipment necessary to complete the work, including the cost of
furnishing and placing, if necessary removing, all wales and braces. No separate
payment will be made for providing cofferdams unless it is called for on the drawings.

When Cofferdams are called for on the drawings they shall be paid for at the
contract lump sum price bid for the item COFFERDAM in the proposal.

This price shall constitute full compensation for constructing cofferdams,

controlling, removing water from excavation, all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and
incidentals.

(CLAUSES 4126 – 4999 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

109
 SPECIFICATION

SECTION V - BRIDGEWORKS

110
 SECTION V - BRIDGE WORKS 桥梁工程

GENERAL 5000.

In addition to any other relevant clause of this specification, the following shall
be deemed to apply in particular to bridge works, and shall be read in conjunction with
all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this specification.

PART (A): PRELIMINARIES. EXCAVATIONS, FOUNDATION, DEMOLITIONS,

TEST LOADS ETC.

GENERAL 5001.

The Contractor shall himself obtain full and accurate information in connection
with the existing structures, traffic, periods of flow and non-flow in the waterways,
normal water levels, whether above or below ground level, flows and frequencies,
floods, nature and condition of soils and sub-soils etc., And generally acquaint himself
with all factors influencing the construction and maintenance of the works as shown on
the drawings and specified herein, and shall be deemed to have allowed for all such
conditions in the rates inserted by him in the bill of quantities.

TRAFFIC DIVERSION 5002.

Before commencing any operation of construction, the Contractor shall forward

to the Engineer's Representative, and obtain his approval of, his proposals for avoiding
interference with the existing traffic-way, rail road and water, and for providing, and
maintaining alternative ways for all such traffic. All diversions shall be of dimension,
capacity and standard at least equal to those of the traffic-ways which they replace
when such traffic-ways are maintained in a good condition and they shall be maintained
continuously to this standard during the period they are in use.

Where the use of temporary bridge spans is involved the Contractor shall submit
complete and detailed drawings and calculations for the scheme to the Engineer's
Representative. The Engineer's decision on whether such methods may be adopted or
not shall be absolutely final.

Notwithstanding the approval or modification by the Engineer's Representative of

any schemes, drawings or calculations, the Contractor shall remain wholly and entirely
responsible for the sufficiency of all traffic diversions and temporary works and for all

111
obligations and risks in regard to such works specified or implied in the contract and he
shall reinstate the same at his own cost should any mishap or accident occur causing
damage or injury thereto subject to such provisions of the conditions of contract as may
be applicable.

Payment for all such diversions including for temporary bridging or converting as
necessary shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices, unless
elsewhere expressly allowed for.

5003.

The site of the works shall be cleared completely to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative. Generally, the waterway shall be cleared of all obstructions
to the flow of water. All fallen trees, bushes and accumulations of debris shall be
removed and deposited as directed. Trees which are to be retained shall be indicated
by the Engineer's Representative.

WATER TRAINING AND PROTECTION WORKS 5004.

Such details of training works and protective works to the banks and protection
beds of waterways as may be shown on the contract drawings are schematic only.
Exact details of the training and protective works shall be supplied by the Engineer's
Representative after consideration of the final disposition of the works, local site
conditions etc.

EXCAVATION AND BACK FILLING 5005 (A) GENERAL

Excavations shall be of the widths and lengths necessary for the construction of
the works and shall be taken down to the depths shown on the drawings. Or as
otherwise specified hereafter or to such other depths as the Engineer's Representative
may require. When the final level of the excavation has been reached, the Contractor
shall so inform the Engineer's Representative, and together they shall inspect, measure
and agree in writing all particulars on which measurements of the works are to be
based. No back filling or construction shall be undertaken until after the final levels and
dimensions of the excavation have been surveyed and agreed. Failing such surveys and
agreements being signed by the Contractor, the surveys of the Engineer's
Representative, shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

Any obstacle encountered in the course of excavations shall be reported to the

Engineer's Representative and dealt with as directed by him. Excavations shall, where
necessary, be properly shored and supported and the Contractor shall provide pumps,
cofferdams, sheet piling etc., as necessary to ensure that all construction is carried out
in the dry. Should any slips or falls result from the omission by the Contractor of any
precaution, all loose and disturbed material shall be completely removed and the ground
made up at the Contractor's own expense with approved material which shall include
concrete grade 10 N/mm² should the Engineer's Representative so require. Should the
material forming the bottom of any excavation, whilst acceptable at the time of
excavation, become puddled, soft or loose during the progress of the works, the

112
Contractor shall remove such damaged, softened or loosened materials and replace
them with concrete grade 10 N/mm² or as directed by the Engineer's Representative, at
the Contractor's own expense. Sumps dug in the bottom of excavations shall be cleaned
out, all soft and puddled material removed, and the hole made up with approved
material as described above. Should excavations be taken to a depth greater than that
required by the Engineer's Representative such extra depth shall be made up at the
Contractor,s expense with concrete grade 10 N/mm² or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.

The Contractor shall not leave any item or temporary works in position in the
excavations after back-filling, without the permission of the Engineer's Representative.
Permission will only be given in cases where the Engineer's Representative is satisfied
that no adverse effect will result to the finished works. No payment shall be made to
the Contractor for any item of temporary works so left in position, unless such item was
left in on the explicit instructions of the Engineer's Representative.

Excavations shall be backfilled with approved materials in layers not exceeding

150mm compacted thickness, and shall be thoroughly compacted by approved methods.
Where such material lies below a roadway or will form part of an embankment it shall be
selected and compacted entirely in accordance with the requirements of all relevant
clauses of this specification. Back-filling of excavations for reinforced concrete culverts,
open drains and any other structure shall be brought up equally on either side of the
structures to eliminate unbalanced earth pressures.

Earth and other material taken from excavation shall be set aside for selection
for re-use as filling materials, and materials unsuitable for this purpose shall be disposed
of by the Contractor at his own expense, as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

Selected material shall be free draining-material. The material shall have

Plasticity Index (PI) of not more than 5, and shall meet the following gradation
requirements when tested in accordance with B.S. 410:-

Sieve Size Total Per cent Passing

(by weight)

50mm 100
25mm 60 - 100
1.1mm 20 - 100
500m 10 - 70
255m 8 - 40
75m 5 - 10

When tested for bearing capacity, selected material shall have a California Bearing Ratio
(CBR) of not less than 20% when compacted to 95% of maximum density, using BS
compactive effort up to a depth not more than 600mm to formation level; there after
compaction shall be 100% MDD of the material using BS effort.

Free draining shall be defined as a material having coefficient of permeability of

113
not less than 1x 10-2mm/sec.

Before driving piles, the common embankment material shall be placed and
compacted to the top elevation of the prism of selective material.

No payment for placing of selective material will be made, but the cost thereof
shall be included in the price bid for the item "Excavation and Backfill" scheduled in the
proposal.

(B) ROCK

The term "solid rock" shall mean rock found in ledges or masses in its original
position, which would normally be removed by blasting and pneumatic tools or by
wedges and sledge hammers if removed by hand, and all solid boulders or detached
pieces of rock exceeding 0.2 Cubic metres in size trenches and 0.3 Cubic metres in size
in general excavations, to the classification of which the Engineer's Representative is
satisfied. Should any difference of opinion arise between the Contractor and the
Engineer's Representative as to whether any material is rock, the Engineer's decision
shall be final and shall be made before the material is disposed of or covered up. Should
the Contractor wish to use explosives for the excavation of rock, he must obtain the
permission of the Engineer's Representative. When permission is granted the Contractor
shall proceed as directed in, and satisfy all the requirements of, clause 99 of the
conditions of contract and clause 5010 of this specification.

PAYMENT FOR EXCAVATIONS FOR FOUNDATIONS 5006.

Excavations for foundations shall be paid for on the actual quantities measured
on site by multiplying the horizontal area of the base of the foundations by the mean
depth from surface level, and at the appropriate rates for excavation inserted in the bill
of quantities. The rate shall include for all shoring, pumping, backfilling and
compactions, and for all pumping, digging, backfilling of sumps and for all other things
necessary to allow the proper placing of the foundations. No payment shall be made to
the Contractor for any item of temporary works left in position unless it has been left on
the instruction of the Engineer's Representative. No item of temporary works shall be
left in position without the approval of the Engineer's Representative.

EXCAVATIONS FOR FOUNDATIONS BELOW WATER LEVEL 5007.

Where excavations have to be made and foundations formed below water level,
suitable arrangements shall be made to exclude the water from the site, and the
Contractor shall, when tendering, submit a full and clear description, supported by
drawing and sketches, of the methods he proposed to use in respect of each foundation
where these conditions will be encountered. The methods proposed shall be directed in
all cases to permit the execution of the whole of the work in the dry unless this is shown
in the method statement to be entirely impracticable or uneconomical. The Contractor
must satisfy himself absolutely as to what water levels may be experienced at and
during the period of construction, whether such water levels be above ground level or
below and as to what flows and water levels will be attained during flood and high tide

114
periods and as to the condition of soils and subsoils and all other matters pertaining to
the adequacy of the temporary works and the efficient and proper construction of the
works themselves. The Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent flooding of the
works and shall make good any loss or damage to the temporary works and the works
themselves caused thereby at his own cost and to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative.

If Contractor chooses to use steel cofferdams for the below water level
foundation excavations, the materials shall conform to SECTION IV, Clause 4120 "STEEL
SHEET PILES."

No separate payment for cofferdams will be made, but the payment shall
conform to the applicable portion of the SECTION IV, Clause 4125 "PAYMENT."

PREPARATION FOR FOUNDATIONS: NORMAL 5008.

The depths to which foundations are to be taken, and their dimensions as

shown on the drawings are an indication only of the anticipated requirements. The
actual depths and consequently the dimensions are to be finally determined on site by
excavating through the various strata until a material is reached, which is capable, in the
opinion of the Engineer's Representative, of safely sustaining the pressure exerted and
of providing complete security against the effects of scour. All excavations shall be
taken out as nearly as possible to exact dimensions to minimize back- filling, and in
accordance with clause 5005 of this specification.

No concrete shall be placed in any foundation until the Engineer's Representative

has inspected and approved the excavation and the arrangements for transporting and
depositing the concrete, and given permission in writing to proceed. The sides of the
excavation shall be such as to eliminate any possibility of loose material falling into the
work as concreting proceeds. The bottom of the excavation shall be clean and levelled
off and free from all loose material. Contractor shall draw the attention of the
Engineer's Representative to any soft spots which may occur and these shall be cut out
as directed, measured in conjunction with the Engineer's Representative, and afterwards
filled with concrete grade 10 N/mm2. No payment shall be made for cutting out and
filling soft spots which have not been measured in conjunction with the Engineer's
Representative. When foundations are to rest on rock, all adherent clay, etc., drummy,
soft and loose rock, shall be cut away until the hard solid rock is exposed and the base
left approximately horizontal or to a slight fall or stepped, as may be directed by the
Engineer's Representative. Immediately before concreting is commenced, the surface of
the rock shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted and the concrete shall be poured
directly on to the rock and against shaped side-shuttering. The filling of the hollows
with rubble, broken rock etc., will not be permitted.

It is the intention that all concrete shall be placed in the dry, and the Contractor
shall direct all his efforts towards this end.

115
REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURE 5009.

Before any part of any existing structure is removed the Contractor shall forward
to the Engineer's Representative for approval, full details of the method by which he
proposes to dismantle the structure and provide an alternative way for traffic during the
subsequent works. (See also clauses 90 of the conditions of contract and 5002 of this
specification).

Such details shall be accompanied by drawings and calculations as required by the

Engineer's Representative showing that no part of the structure which may be required
for re-use in another part of the works or by the Engineer elsewhere under another
contract, shall be over stressed or damaged in any way during the operation. Such
details shall be submitted to the Engineer's Representative sufficiently in advance of the
intention to commence the work as this will allow the proper study of the proposals and
the incorporation of any amendments which the Engineer may require. Notwithstanding
the incorporation of any such amendments or any approval given by the Engineer's
Representative to any method proposed, the Contractor shall remain wholly and entirely
responsible for the safety of the work and for all obligation and risk specified or implied
in the contract and shall make good at his cost any damage resulting from any mishap
or accident arising from the operation, subject to such provisions of the conditions of
contract as may be applicable. The demolitions and dismantling shall be carried out in a
workmanlike manner and the Contractor shall observe all rules, regulations and orders
which may have been made or may be made by the government or any other
responsible authority with regard to the safety of all persons, whether employed by him
or not during such operations.

Before removing any superstructure or sub-structure, the Contractor shall bring

to the notice of the Engineer's Representative any existing damage to the structure and
point out any missing parts and the Engineer's Representative and the Contractor shall
together agree in writing that such damage did exist and that such parts were missing
before the commencement of operations by the Contractor. Should the Engineer then
require the Contractor to repair such damage or to replace such missing parts, the
Contractor shall do so as directed and he shall be paid for the work at rates to be
mutually agreed between him and the Engineer. Should the Contractor fail to bring
such damage or missing parts to the notice of the Engineer's Representative it will be
deemed for the purpose of subsequent payment that the Contractor accepts that the
structure is complete and entirely free from damage before the commencement of
dismantling operations. After dismantling, the Contractor shall spread out all the
components and advise the Engineer's Representative that they are ready for inspection.
Any damage or loss discovered in addition to that previously agreed shall be made good
at the Contractor's own cost and to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.
Parts which have been lost shall be replaced by entirely new material and members
which have been damaged shall be repaired or completely replaced as required by the
Engineer, who shall consider the degree of damage in relation to the importance of the
member, and the Engineer's decision in these matters shall be final.

EXPLOSIVES 5010.

116
 Should the Contractor wish to demolish any part of the existing structure by
using explosives, he must first satisfy the Engineer's Representative that this is the most
economical and satisfactory way of performing the work and obtain his permission to
proceed. The Contractor shall provide proper buildings or magazines in suitable positions
for the storage of the explosives in a manner and in quantities to be approved.

He shall also be responsible for the prevention of any un-authorized issue or improper
use of any explosive brought on to the works, and shall employ experienced and
responsible men by whom only shall explosives for the purpose of the works be handled,
all to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative and in conformity with the
statutory regulations. During blasting, the greatest care shall be taken by the Contractor
that no injury be done to persons or property or to any finished work or any work which
is to remain untouched. The shots shall be properly loaded and covered and only
moderate charges shall be used, and where directed by the Engineer's Representative,
the Contractor shall provide heavy mesh blasting nets. Blasting shall be restricted to
whatever hours the Engineer's Representative shall prescribe. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer's Representative, blasting would be dangerous to persons or adjacent
structures, or is being carried on in a reckless manner he may prohibit it, and order that
the demolition be carried out by other means see also clause 99 of the Conditions of
Contract.

REMOVAL OF EXISTING SUPER STRUCTURES AND SUB-STRUCTURES STEEL

AND CONCRETE 5011.

Existing concrete deck, where required to be remove shall be demolished in a

manner which will ensure that no damage whatever shall be caused to the supporting
steel troughing joists, trusses, bracing, or any other member or part of the structure.
The use of explosive is forbidden.

Before dismantling any part of any structure which is to be re-used either wholly
or in part either by the Contractor in another part of the works or by the Engineer
elsewhere under another contract, the Contractor shall mark each part of the structure
with a distinguishing mark which shall be assigned to it in a marking plan to be prepared
by him, in figures or letters not less than 50 mm. high and in such a manner that the
pieces may be readily identified and put together again in their proper positions when
required. The figures and letters shall be painted on, in at least two places on each
member, and on a surface which has first been thoroughly cleaned and freed from all
rust, loose paint, grease, dirt and other deleterious coatings and given one coat of
protective paint. The colour of the paint to be used for the letters and figures shall be
such as to make them readily visible against the background of protective paint. Where
more than one bridge is to be marked in any contract, the Contractor shall ensure that
no combination of figures and letters employed in the marking of one bridge is repeated
in the marking of another. All markings shall be to the approval of the Engineer's
Representative and dismantling of the structure shall not be proceeded with until the
Engineer's Representative has checked and approved the marking on the structure and

117
compared them with those on the marking drawings and given his permission to
proceed. The drawings showing the markings shall conform to the requirements of
Clause 5020 hereinafter.

The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's Representative one set of hand-
made negatives on best quality linen, one set of velograph negatives on best quality
linen and one set of prints on linen showing black lines on a white ground, of the
marking drawings and the cost of producing and supplying all these negatives and prints
shall be deemed to be included in the rates for dismantling.

Troughing, joists, trusses, trestle, piers, cylinders, etc., shall be dismantled with
great care. Temporary supports, horses, jacks, wedges, stiffening, bracing, etc., being
provided to ensure that there will be no overstraining or buckling of any member or
connection during the operation. Bolts and other fastenings shall be removed without
causing damage to or elongation of the holes from which they are withdrawn.

Where required for re-use by the Engineer under another contract the Contractor
shall, after dismantling and satisfying the requirements of clause 5009, scrape, clean
and free all parts of the dismantled structure from all loose paint, grease and other
deleterious coatings. Areas of rust should be cleaned down to the bare metal and all
thick edges, fins, blistering etc., due to previous coats of paint removed. The surfaces,
when thoroughly dry, shall be given one coat of protective paint, particular attention
being given to surfaces which have been in contact or inaccessible whilst the structure
was erected. Care shall be taken to ensure that the distinguishing marks are not
obliterated during this operation. Surfaces which have been galvanized shall be
examined by the Engineer's Representative who shall direct whether the whole is to be
cleaned thoroughly, freed from all deleterious matter and given one coat of protective
paint or whether only the bad spots are to be touched up with an approved proprietary
galvanizing commodity (aluminium paint is not to be used for this purpose). All bright
and machined surfaces shall be cleaned and well coated with a mixture of white lead
and tallow free from acid, or with other approved coating which will not readily melt
when exposed to the sun in the tropics. Exposed machined surfaces shall be further
protected by timber casings or other approved means. Free ends of members shall be
stiffened to prevent distortion during transit, and the ends of members with turned bolts
connections suitably protected. A full set of new bolts, nuts and washers, rivets and all
other fastenings should be supplied together with spares in accordance with clause 5066
of this specification, and in addition a complete set of erection tools (drifts spanner,
screw-drivers etc., but not riveting apparatus) in accordance with clause 5065 of this
specification. Turned bolts, nuts and washers shall be covered with a mixture of white
lead and tallow free from acid and black bolts, nuts and washers, and field rivets shall
be thoroughly cleaned, heated to about the melting temperature of lead and whilst hot
dipped into boiled linseed oil.

Straight bars and plates shall be bundled and temporarily bolted together. If this
is not possible they shall be bound in at least three places with annealed steel wire of
not less than 6mm diameter which must be tightly fastened. All rivets, bolts, nuts,
washers, screws small plates and small article generally shall be packed in bags. A
separate bag being used for each diameter and length of rivet, bolt etc., and each bag

118
having a metal label wired on indicating its contents. The bags shall be packed into
strong wooden cases or casks whose gross weight shall not exceed 300 kilograms. Each
case, cask etc., shall be clearly marked with its weight and an indication of its contents.
Bundles shall have a metal label, stamped with similar information, attached to each
end, the label being secured at each of the end by a separate wire so that it lies flat
with the bundles. All marking and labellings shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative.

All parts of the structure protected, marked and packed as above specified shall then be
stacked in a position indicated by the Engineer's Representative to await collection by
him and transport to his store, and all operations mentioned in this clause up to and
including this final stacking shall be deemed to be included in the rates for dismantling
the structure. Should the Engineer require the Contractor to transport the structure to
his store, the Contractor shall do so without delay and payment shall be made in
accordance with the rates in the day work schedule referred to in the bill of quantities
or as mutually agreed before transporting.

Where the structure is to be incorporated elsewhere into the works, either wholly
or in part, the Contractor shall proceed as follows. On the marking drawings specified
above, he shall indicate

(i) Those parts of the structure which are not required for incorporation into
the works and which will be stacked in readiness for transport to the
Engineer's store, and

(ii) Those parts of the structure which will be required for incorporation
elsewhere into the works.

Those parts covered by (i) shall be treated entirely as specified above for
structure required for incorporation elsewhere into the works.

Those parts covered by (ii) shall be treated entirely as specified above for
structures required by the Engineer for re-use under another contract, with the following
amendments. After dismantling, the required items shall be spread out and the
Contractor shall inform the Engineer's Representative that they are ready for inspection.
The Engineer's Representative shall then examine the items with respect to length,
quality weight and condition and shall pronounce upon their suitability for incorporation
into the works and shall advise the Contractor as to what cuts etc., should be made to
permit their proper fitting, and they shall together agree as to where such work shall be
carried out. The items shall then be transported to that part of the works unto which
they are to be incorporated and the Contractor shall then proceed as directed in clause
5071 of this specification. The cost of all operations involved in complying with these
requirements shall be deemed to be included in the rates for dismantling and re-
erection.

All paint and painting shall be in accordance with clause 5049 of this
specification.

119
REMOVAL OF EXISTING SUPER STRUCTURE AND SUBSTRUCTURE: ALL
TIMBER 5012.

Existing decks, trestles, mud sills, piles etc., in timber shall be removed as
carefully as possible. The use of explosives is forbidden. Timber piles shall be withdrawn
completely, or sawn off, as directed by the Engineer. All timber, fastenings etc.,
shall be cleaned and stacked neatly as directed in a place to be indicated by the
Engineer's Representative.
Unless particularly so mentioned in the drawings no distinguishing marks,making plans,
painting or protective coatings will be required.

TOTAL DEMOLITION OF EXISTING ABUTMENTS PIERS AND LANDINGS 5013.

The demolition of existing abutments, piers and landing will be permitted only
after the superstructure has been removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative. The demolition shall be carefully carried out and the use of explosives
will be subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative. Generally, abutments
and piers which are specified in the drawings to be completely removed, shall be
completely removed above the lowest level of the ground in contact with the abutments
or piers as approximately indicated in the drawings and in the bill of quantities, or as
directed by the Engineer's Representative, below this level only so much will be removed
as is required for the proper construction of the new abutments and piers. Reinforced
concrete piles shall be completely withdrawn or cut away above the levels stated in the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

PARTIAL DEMOLITION OF EXISTING ABUTMENTS, PIERS AND LANDINGS

5014.

Abutments, piers and landings which are required to be only partially demolished
in a manner which will ensure that no damage whatever will be caused to that portion
or the structure which will remain. The use of explosives for this work will not be
permitted. The demolitions shall be carried out to the lines and levels shown on the
drawings or to such lines and levels as the Engineer's Representative may determine
after examination of the material exposed. The surfaces remaining after demolition shall
be freed from all loose stones, rubble, mortar or other material and left in a perfectly
sound condition, to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Under no
circumstances shall any new work be constructed upon or against any part of the
structure that remains until the Engineer's Representative has inspected it and given his
permission to proceed.

DISPOSAL AND RE-USE OF RUBBLE RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION 5015.

All concrete and masonry rubble and all other such material resulting from
demolition shall be tipped as directed. No debris shall be allowed to block, interfere with
or hinder the flow of water under the new structure, or along any part of the
watercourse or through any drain, gully or water course, in the vicinity of the work, nor
shall any debris be allowed to obstruct the passage of traffic or cattle or other animals

120
along recognized paths. The rubble may be re-used as plums in the construction of the
new abutments and piers should these be of mass concrete, at the discretion of the
Engineer's Representatives.

PREPARATION OF SURFACES OF EXISTING ABUTMENTS, PIERS, ETC. , PRIOR

TO CONSTRUCTION OF NON-BONDING JOINT 5016.

After demolition operations have been completed the surfaces of the remaining portions
of the substructures which are to receive new concrete shall be thoroughly hacked and
freed from all loose plaster, mortar and other material and random stones shall be
removed in the case of masonry walls as directed by the Engineer's Representative to
provide an efficient key between the new work and the old. Immediately before
concreting begins, the surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with clean fresh water to
remove all deleterious matter, all surplus water being then removed. The wet
horizontal surfaces shall be covered with a 12mm layer of stiff, freshly mixed mortar
class M1 which shall be thoroughly worked into all interstices to ensure intimate contact
with the old structure and the fresh concrete shall be poured and carefully pounded into
it without delay. The fresh concrete shall be carefully worked into all corners, crevices
and interstices in the wet vertical surfaces to ensure complete bounding with the old
structure.

PREPARATION OF SURFACES OF EXISTING ABUTMENTS, PIERS, ETC., PRIOR

TO CONSTRUCTION OF NON-BONDING JOINT 5017

Where the drawings require a non-bonding joint or a gap to be left between the
surfaces of the remaining portions of the existing substructure and those of the new
work, the relevant surfaces of the existing structure shall be thoroughly cleaned and
freed from all loose material. Irregularities in the surfaces shall be filled in with concrete
Grade 10 N/mm² or the whole rendered with a minimum 12 mm thickness of plaster of
a grade to be approved by the Engineer's Representative, to give a smooth surface over
the whole area of the joint. The non-bonding joint shall then be constructed as directed
by the Engineer's Representative or a gap left as directed in the drawings.

TEST ON COMPLETED STRUCTURES 5018 (A) CONCRETE STRUCTURES

The Engineer may instruct that a loading test be made on the works or any part
thereof if, in his opinion, such a test is deemed necessary for one or more of the
following reasons:-

(a) The site made concrete tests cubes failing to reach the specified strength,

(b) The shuttering being prematurely removed,

121
 (c) Overloading during construction of the works or part thereof,

(d) Concrete improperly cured.

(e) Any other circumstances attributable to alleged negligence on the part of

the Contractor which, in the opinion of the Engineer may result in the
works or part thereof being of less than the expected strength.

(f) Any reason other than the foregoing.

If the loading test be instructed to be made solely or in part for the reason (a)
the test shall be made at the Contractor's own cost. If the test be instructed to be made
for one or more of the reasons (b) to (e) inclusive, the Contractor shall be reimbursed
for the cost of the test if the result thereof is satisfactory. If the test be instructed to be
made for the reason (f) the Contractor shall make the test and shall be reimbursed for
all costs relating thereto unless the result of the test is unsatisfactory in the opinion of
the Engineer.

The test load shall not be applied within eighty-four days of the completion of
placing of the concrete in the part of the structure to be tested, and the latter shall not
be supported during the test by the shuttering or other non-permanent support. Means
shall however be taken to ensure that in the event of failure under the test, temporary
support of the loaded members shall be immediately available. The test shall proceed
strictly as directed by the Engineer.

If the result of the loading test is not satisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer,
the Engineer shall instruct that part of the works be taken down or cut out and
reconstructed to comply with this specification, or that other remedial measures be
taken to make the work secure.

All remedial measures shall be carried out expeditiously by the Contractor at his
own expense.

The test load to be applied shall be a series of tractors, lorries, or road rollers
equivalent to the 1.10 times the design load of the particular structure, disposed of in
one or more arrangement so that the maximum bending moments, thrusts, tensions and
shear forces due to the test load are produced at the critical sections. During the test a
record of the sequence of all cracks and deflections at mid-span will be kept together
with any other observations which the Engineer may elect to record. The residual
deflection if any shall be recorded and if required by the Engineer the test will be
repeated. The period of loading shall be one hour in any particular case or as otherwise
directed by the Engineer.

(B) STEEL STRUCTURES

If, through any negligence or bad workmanship or carelessness or default on the

part of the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor or for any other reason whatsoever, the
Engineer shall deem the strength of any steel span or any part thereof to be adversely

122
affected, the Engineer shall order such tests to be carried out as shall indicate the real
strength of the structure. The test may follow that specified above for reinforced
concrete structures or any other form that the Engineer may consider desirable.

If in the opinion of the Engineer, the result of the test is not satisfactory the
Engineer shall order such remedial measures to be carried out as may be necessary in
his opinion, and the Contractor shall carry out such remedial measures without delay
and at his own expense.

LOADING OF STRUCTURES: CONSTRUCTION, BACKFILLING, TRAFFIC, ETC.

5019.

Under no circumstances shall any part of any structure included in the works be
loaded in any way until permission to do so has been obtained in writing from the
Engineer's Representative.

The Contractor shall arrange his programme of construction so that the loads of
subsequent construction shall not be imposed upon work already completed until, in the
opinion of the Engineer's Representative, that work has developed sufficient strength to
withstand safely the resulting stresses.

No backfilling of earth against or on top of any part of any structure shall be

commenced until the Contractor has sought and obtained the written permission of the
Engineer's Representative so to do. This will be given after the Engineer's
Representative has inspected and measured the work to be covered and the Contractor
has carried out all repairs, and all other work that the Engineer's Representative may
require to ensure that the work complies with this specification. Additionally, no
backfilling shall be undertaken until the requirements of the preceding paragraph of this
clause are satisfied and the following conditions fulfilled:-

(i) No earth shall be backfilled against or on top of a mass concrete

structure until at least 14 days have elapsed since the pouring of the last
concrete, without the approval of the Engineer's Representative.

(ii) No earth shall be backfilled against or on top of a reinforced concrete

structure until at least 28 days have elapsed since the pouring of the last
concrete and the results of the 28 days compression cube tests have
been studied and proved acceptable

(iii) No earth shall be backfilled against the walls, nor placed on top of the
roof slab, of a reinforced concrete culvert until at least 28 days have
elapsed since the pouring of the last concrete in the complete structure,
including wingwalls should these be monolithic with the barrel, and the
results of the 28 days compression cube tests have been studied and
proved acceptable. No earth shall be placed on to the roof slab unless
this is so specified on the drawings, and then strictly within the limits
shown thereon.

123
(c) Backfilling of all excavations for abutments, piers, culverts, etc., shall be brought
up equally and simultaneously on all sides to eliminate unbalanced earth pressures,
filling to open-type abutments shall likewise be brought up equally and simultaneously
around supporting columns, walls, etc., to eliminate unbalanced earth pressures. All
backfill shall be done in layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness, and in
accordance with the requirements of all relevant clauses of this specification.

During backfilling operations, the Contractor shall take every care to ensure that
no undue loads shall be imposed upon the structure and he shall furnish the
Engineer's Representative in advance with full details of his proposed method of
performing the task, showing that the structure will not be overstressed in any
way.

In no case shall any structure be used for the passage of constructural traffic,
storage of materials etc., without the written permission of the Engineer's
Representative, whose decision in these matters shall be final.

AS-MADE-DRAWINGS 5020.

On completion of the work, and after it has been approved by the Engineer's
Representative, the Contractor shall prepare as-made drawings of each bridge, showing
complete, fully dimensioned details of the foundations, material on which they are
founded, ground levels, road levels, protection works, superstructure and all other work
carried out under the Contract. The drawings shall be originals prepared from records
taken as the work progresses and agreed with the Engineer's Representative, and shall
not be merely amended prints of the contract drawings. Draughtsmanship shall be of a
high standard, to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. The drawings shall
be by CAD (Computer Aided Designed) or handmade drawing ink, on best quality tracing
linen and shall be 594mm by 841mm overall including a margin of 50mm on the left
hand side, and a margin of 10mm on the other three sides and the title box shall follow
the form shown on the contract drawings. These original tracings together with one
black and white print of each on linen shall be forwarded to the Engineer for his
permanent retention.

The cost of preparing and supplying all these negatives, velographs, prints etc.,
shall be deemed to be included in the rates for carrying out the works to which they
refer.

SETTLEMENT OF BRIDGE AND APPROACHES 5021

The Contract shall include:-

(a) The return to site and carrying out of a survey of settlement of bridge
and approaches at a time just prior to the completion of the maintenance
period and the submission of a report of the results of this survey to the
Engineer. The cost of this survey shall be deemed to be included in the
tendered rates and prices.

124
 (b) The carrying out of any jacking operation or other remedial works
deemed necessary by the Engineer as a result of this settlement to re-
establish the bridge and approaches to the proper levels. The cost of any
such operation shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and
prices.

BEARINGS 5022.

Bearing devices expansion or fixed, shall be constructed in accordance with the

details shown on the drawings and approved by the Engineer.

Metal bearing shall comply in all respects with the requirements of B.S 5400 and
as specified on the drawings.

The masonry plates shall be set level. The expansion devices shall be set to
conform to the temperature at the time of erection or to the setting specified.

When masonry plates are shown on the drawings to be placed (not embedded)
directly on concrete, the concrete bearing area shall be constructed slightly above grade
and shall be finished by grinding or other approved means to a true level plane which
shall not vary perceptibly from straight edge placed in any direction across the area. the
finished plane shall not vary more than 3mm from the elevation shown on the plan.

ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS 5023.

Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform to the requirements of B.S. 1154 and the
special provisions.

Where elastomeric bearing pads are shown on drawings, the concrete surfaces
on which pads or packing are to be placed shall be wood float finished to a level plane
which shall not vary more than 1.5mm from a straight edge placed in any direction
across the area. The finished plane shown on the drawings.

Pads 12mm and less in thickness may be either laminated or all elastomer.

Pads over 12mm in thickness shall be laminated. Laminated pads shall consist of
alternate laminations of elastomers and metal or elastomer and fabric bonded together.

The outside laminations shall be metal or fabric. The outside and edges of
metal laminations shall be coated with elastomer not more than 3mm in thickness.

Laminations of elastomer shall be 12mm ± 3mm in thickness. Variation in

thickness of an individual elastomer lamination shall not exceed 3mm within the width or
length of a pad and the variation in thickness of all elastomer laminations within a pad
shall be such that each metal or fabric lamination will not vary by more than 3mm from
a plane parallel to the top or bottom surface of the pad.

125
 The total out to out thickness of pad shall not be less than the thickness shown
on the drawings nor more than 6mm greater than that thickness. Variation of total
thickness within an individual pad shall not exceed 3mm.

The length and width of a pad shall not vary more than 3mm from the
dimensions shown on the drawings.

Pads containing metal laminations shall be fully moulded. Pads of all elastomer
or with fabric laminations may be cut from large sheets. Cutting shall be performed in
such a manner as to avoid heating of the material and to produce a smooth edge with
no tears or other jagged areas and to cause as little damage to the matter as possible.

Corners and edges of moulded pads may be rounded at the option of the
Contractor. Radius at corners shall not exceed 9mm and radius of edges shall not
exceed 3mm.

The bond between elastomer and metal or fabric shall be such that, when a
sample is tested for separation, failure shall occur within the elastomer and not between
the elastomer and metal or fabric.

Metal laminations shall be rolled mild steel sheets not less than 1.0mm thick.

Fabric laminations shall be either (1) a long chain synthetic polymer containing at
least 85 percent of polyester from ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid or (2) a long
chain synthetic polymeric amide from hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid. Each ply
of fabric shall have a breaking strength of not less than 12.5 N/mm². Fabric laminations
shall be single ply at top and bottom surfaces of the pad and either double ply or double
strength within the pad.

The sole polymer in the elastomeric compound shall be neoprene and shall be
not less than 60 percent by volume of the total compound.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a certification by the manufacturer

that the elastomer, and fabric (if used ) in the elastomeric bearing pads to be furnished
conforms to all of the requirements specified in the British Standard. The certification
shall be supported by a certified copy of the results of tests performed by the
manufacturer upon samples of the elastomer and fabric to be used in the pads.

Where elastomeric bearing pads over 12mm in thickness are shown on the
drawings, such pads may be manufactured as a moulded laminated pad, or at the
option of the Contractor, may be made up by stacking individual laminated pads.
Individual laminated pads used for stacking shall be normally 12mm in thickness. When
laminated parts are stacked, their contact surfaces shall be cleaned prior to stacking and
a positive method shall be used to hold the individual parts in the stack in proper
alignment.

The quantity of Elastomeric Bearing pads for which payment will be made, will

126
be the number of pads actually constructed and installed as prescribed.

Payment for the Elastomeric Bearings pads shall be made for the quantities as
above determine, at the unit price shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price shall
include the cost of bearing pads, dowels, hardware, setting, all material, equipment,
labour, and all else necessary thereof and incidental thereto.

(CLAUSES 5024 - 5029 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (B) - STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

GENERAL: MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 5030.

All materials and workmanship involved in the fabrication of steelwork shall

comply with the requirements of B.S. 5400 together with the additional requirements
and modifications specified hereinafter. All materials and fittings shall be the best of
their respective kinds and free from defects. Accurate workmanship is essential and all
work shall be neatly finished.

WORKING DRAWING 5031.

Before any part of the work is put in hand, the Contractor shall prepare working
drawings in accordance with clause 1010 of this specification.

The working drawings shall be submitted as mechanically reproduced prints on

medium weight paper showing either black lines on a white background, or white lines
on a blue background, and all costs involved in supplying them shall be deemed to be
included in the rates for steelwork.

SCHEDULE OF PARTS 5032

As soon as possible after the signing of the contract, the Contractor shall prepare
schedules of all parts which go to make up the work, including bought-out material, and
shall forward a copy, to the Engineer's Representative, the duly authorized inspector for
guidance during inspection.

MILD STEEL FOR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ETC. 5033.

Unless otherwise specified in the contract, structural steelwork shall comply with
the provisions of B.S 4360 (1990) "Weldable Structural Steels" and shall be of the grade
indicated on the drawings. All sections shall conform to British Standard dimensions.

ROLLED STEEL PINS, KNUCKLE PINS, ROLLERS 5034.

Steel for rolled steel pins, knuckle pins, rollers etc., shall be of the minimum
tensile strength as specified on the drawings and finished as indicated. (Not rivet steel)

STEEL CASTINGS FOR BEARINGS 5035.

127
 Steel casting for bearings shall comply with the requirements for B.S. 3100: and
shall be Grade A steel except where noted on the drawings.

PATTERNS OF CASTINGS 5036.

Patterns of all castings are to be submitted to the Inspection Engineer, and shall
be approved before moulding is commenced and the casting are run. Where this cannot
be done on account of their large size the pattern shall be kept available at the
manufacturer's works for approval by the Inspection Engineer.

Each casting shall be legibly marked with a number or identification mark by

which it can be traced to the cast from which it was made. All castings shall be subject
to tensile and bend tests and wherever possible the test samples shall be attached to
the castings. No casting shall be repaired or welded without the previous sanction of
the Engineer's Representative. If permission be given to effect repair by welding, the
Engineer's Representative shall decide whether further heat treatment is necessary and
such treatment shall be carried out to his satisfaction. All surfaces to be machined shall
have adequate allowance left on to enable the castings to be machined to the plan
dimensions but in no case shall the allowances be less than 3mm. Unless otherwise
specified or shown on the drawings all holes in castings shall be boldly filiated and free
of all faults affecting their strength and value for the service intended.

GUNMETAL FOR BEARING 5037.

Gunmetal for girder bearing strips etc., shall be made of the following mixture:

Copper 88 per cent, tin 10 per cent, zinc 2 per cent, and shall show a tensile
strength of not less than 215 N/mm² with 7.5% elongation on 50mm.

FORGINGS 5038.

Forgings shall comply with B.S.29 and the steel shall have a minimum tensile
strength of 430 N/mm² or as indicated on the drawings.

RIVETS 5039.

Steel for high tensile steel rivets shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 548
"High Tensile Structural Steel for Bridges, etc., and General Building Construction",
Amendments CE 52, May 1936; CE6854 February 1938: CG 715 June 1942 and current
amendments.

Steel for mild steel rivets shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 15 1948
"Structural Steel", Amendment PD 3346, April 1959 or latest edition.

128
BOLTS 5040.

All bolts must comply with the requirements of B.S. 1083: 1965 (Precision
Hexagon Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Plain Washers), and of B.S. 1968: 1963 (Unified
Precision Hexagon Bolts, Screws, Nuts (Unc and Unf Threads) and Plain Washers Normal
Series), Amendment PD5706 November 1968 and PD 6623 or latest edition.

High strength bolts and nuts washers for high strength bolts shall comply with
B.S. 3139 and B.S. 3294, part 1.

All galvanized bolts shall conform wit

th requirements of B.S. 729, Part 1. Minimum zinc coating shall be 90m.

HANDRAILING AND GUARD RAILING 5041.

Hand-Railing and Guard-Railing shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed

by the Engineer.

HIGH TENSILE STEEL FOR WELDING 5042.

High Tensile Steel to be used for plates and rolled sections that are specified to
be welded must comply with the requirements of B.S. 4360 with the following
additional requirements:

(A) The chemical composition shall be as specified in tables 6, 8, 11, 13 and

16 of B.S. 4360 and upon request, the supplier shall supply details of the
ladle analysis to the Engineer.

(B) The steel to be used for plates shall be delivered in a normalized

condition.

(C) The high tensile steel (welded quality) for plates shall be subjected to the
V-Notch Charpy 2 millimetre impact energy test. The average of three
test specimens and the average impact energy at 00C shall not be less
than 35 joules

(D) As a result of the V-Notch Charpy test the crystalline area in the fractures
of the high tensile steel (welded quality) test pieces shall be measured. In
general the average crystalline area in the fractures of the test pieces
shall not be greater than 80 per cent of the original area of the test piece
below the notch.

(E) The high tensile steel (welded quality) for plates shall be subjected to the
Vicker's test for hardness. For the hardness control test of the steel; a
single welded bead shall be deposited on the outer surface on the plate
with 4mm diameter welded electrode, and a cross section of the bead
and the plate shall be cut and etched. The hardness in the heat affected

129
 zone shall be measured by the Vickers method and shall not exceed 350
Vickers.

(F) The frequency of the tests described in (C), (D) and (E) above shall be
the same as those for tests for the control of tensile strength, yield point
and elongation as specified in B.S. 4360.

(G) Should the results of the tests described in (C), (D) and (E) above not
reach the requirements specified then the steel may be re-normalized
and re-submitted for inspection. The cost of re-normalizing the steel
shall be borne by the manufacturer.

If the steel is re-normalized then all the tests required under this
specification shall be repeated if after re-normalizing the results of the
tests do not reach the requirements specified then the inspection
Engineer will reject the steel and the costs of the rejected shall be borne
by the manufacturer

HIGH TENSILE STEEL: NOT TO BE WELDEDE 5043.

High Tensile Steel to be used for plates and rolled sections and welding will not
be permitted except where shown on the drawings.

HIGH TENSILE STEEL: MARKING 5044.

All High Tensile Steel shall be marked strictly in accordance with the
requirements of B.S. 4360. All steel not correctly marked and identified may be rejected
by the Inspection Engineer.

CAST STEEL 5045.

Steel castings are to be true and clean and shall comply as regards quality and
tests with the requirements of B.S. 3100 for Steel Castings for General Engineering
Purposes, 1967. The casting shall be thoroughly annealed and stress relieved and tested
as per the above for cracks. They are to be well fettled and dressed where necessary to
remove roughness or inequalities. All holes for bolts shall be drilled unless shown on the
drawings to be cored.

CAST IRON 5046.

Cast Iron shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1452: (1961) for Grey Iron
Castings. All holes in cast iron for bolts shall be drilled unless shown to be cored.

ELECTRODES 5047.

The Electrodes to be used for welding steel must be of the best heavily coated
type and of such make as the Inspection Engineer may approve. They shall be kept in a

130
dry store in unbroken packets and shall be accompanied by the Maker's Certificate of
date of manufacture and guarantee that they fulfil in all respects the requirements of
B.S. 639, B.S 1856 and B.S 2642 depending upon the grade of steel employed in the
Contract.

1. Electrodes shall not be used in a damp condition. The inspection

Engineer shall have access at all times to inspect the store at the works
and may reject electrodes which he considers unsuitable.

2. The Contractor shall submit to the inspection Engineer the name(s), and
all relevant particulars of the electrodes he proposes to use.

3. The quality and type of the electrodes to be used for the submerged arc
welding of high tensile steel must be approved by the Inspection
Engineer and will depend on the submerged arc welding process that will
be used.

GREASE FOR BEARINGS 5048.

Grease for bearings shall be such as will ensure adequate lubrication of the
bearings under tropical conditions. The following is the approximate analysis of a
suitable grease:-

high-class viscous mineral oil 78.0 Per cent

pure soap (dry) 5.0 Per cent
best flake graphite 17.0 Per cent

The melting point of the grease shall be not less than 1380C

The grease shall be packed for shipment in strong airtight metal drums.

PAINT AND PAINTING 5049.

All paint used in the works, whether applied in the shop or in the site shall be the
best of its kind and all ingredients used in its manufacture shall comply with the
appropriate British standards. In any paint system (viz: primer, undercoats and
finishing coats) each coat of paint shall be compatible one with the other, and to ensure
this, all paint shall be obtained from the same approved manufacturer with a guarantee
of compatibility. The paints shall be used as specified for the various parts of the work.

PRIMING PAINT All priming paint shall be in accordance with B.S.2523.

UNDERCOAT Exterior quality aluminium paint tinted with sufficient blue

pigment to distinguish if from the finishing coat.

FINISHING COAT Exterior quality aluminium paint

PROTECTIVE PAINT Where steel is specified to be given one coat of

131
 protective paint, such paint shall be of priming paint, as
specified by the Engineer's Representative. Where the
paint has to be applied to a surface already painted with a
bituminous paint, the protective coat shall be of
bituminous paint of best approved quality and colour.

The aluminium content of the paint used for undercoat

and finishing coat shall comply with B.S 388 and shall
constitute not less than 20 per cent by weight of the total
paint. The approved volatile matter of the paint shall not
exceed 45 per cent. The paint shall be of the type in
which the aluminium paste is mixed with the vehicle
immediately prior to application and the date of
manufacture shall be marked on each container. Mixing
of the paint and its application to the work shall be strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and this
specification. During painting, the paint shall be stirred as
necessary to keep the pigment in suspension.

Prior to shop painting all surfaces of steelwork shall be cleaned and de-sealed to
bare metal by steel grit or sand blasting.

Before the application of any paint, the surfaces to be treated shall be

thoroughly cleaned and freed from all scale, loose paint, grease, rust and other
deleterious coatings. Surfaces shall be protected in accordance with CP 2008. The
paint shall not be applied to any surface which is not thoroughly dry and shall be applied
entirely by hand brush and thoroughly worked into all crevices, corners and splices and
around all bolt heads, nuts, rivets, etc. Successive coats of paint shall differ in colour
and each coat shall be thoroughly dry before the next is applied. All paintings shall be
carried out in accordance with the standards laid down in British Standard Code of
Practice C.P 231 and all testing, where directed by the Engineer shall comply with B.S
3900.

Before the application of any paint, the surfaces to be treated shall be

thoroughly cleaned and freed from coatings. The paint shall not be applied to any
surface which is not thoroughly dry and shall be applied entirely by hand brush and
thoroughly worked into all crevices, corners and splices and around all bolt heads, nuts,
rivets, etc. Successive coats of paint shall differ in colour and each coat shall be
thoroughly dry before the next is applied all painting shall be carried out in accordance
with the standards laid down in British Standard code of practice C.P.231 (1952)

INTERCHANGE – ABILITY OF PARTS 5050.

Corresponding parts of each unit should be Inter-changeable as far as economic

manufacturing conditions permit.

132
PREPARATION OF EDGES AND ENDS 5051.

When single universal plates are used with their edges flush with heels of angles
or channels, as in box girders, end posts etc. the edges shall be planed. The edges of
universal plates shall also be planed when used as web plates of riveted plates girders
and there are flange plates. Where two or more universal plates or flats of the same
nominal width are used in tier (excluding covers to a single plate) the edges shall be
machined to make them straight and flush.

HOLES FOR BOLTS AND RIVETS 5052.

All holes for rivets and black bolts shall be 1.5mm larger than the nominal
diameter of the cold rivet or bolt as manufactured and all hole shall be drilled, or drilled
small and reamed. Punching and sub-punching and reaming shall be permitted only for
floor plates and troughing and only when these do not exceed 12 millimetre in
thickness.

Holes for turned bolts shall first be drilled at least 3.0mm small in diameter and
afterwards when the structure is assembled, they shall be reamed or drilled to the
correct size through all thicknesses in one operation. Sub-punching will not be
permitted.

RIVETS AND RIVETING 5053.

Rivet heads shall be of standard shape, unless otherwise specified, and of

uniform size for the same diameter of rivet. They shall be full, neatly made, concentric
with rivet holes, and in full contact with the surface of the member.

Rivets shall be heated uniformly to "light cherry red colour" and shall be driven
while hot. Any rivet whose point is heated more than the remainder shall not be driven.
When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall be free from slag, scale, and other adhering
matter. Any rivet which is scaled excessively, will be rejected.

All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed or otherwise defective shall be
removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Any rivet whose head is defective, in size
or whose head is driven off centre, will be considered defective and shall be removed.
Where required, rivets shall be cut for examination by the Engineer's Representative and
afterwards replaced free of charge. Stitch rivets that are loosened by driving of adjacent
rivets shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Caulking, recupping, or
double gunning of rivet heads will not be permitted.

WASHERS 5054.

All bolts shall be provided with washers, those for turned bolts being bright
finished. Round washers shall not be less than 6mm thick for turned bolts and not less
than 3mm thick for black bolts. Tapered washers of the correct angle shall be provided
under all heads and nuts bearing on bevelled surfaces and where tapered washers are
required for turned bolts, round washers shall also be supplied. Tapered washers shall

133
be not less than 5 mm mean thickness. All washers shall comply with the requirement
of B.S 3410.

WELDING 5055.

No welding of any description will be permitted except where shown on the

drawings.

Unless otherwise described in the Contract, metal-arc welding shall comply with
B.S 1856 and B.S.2642 as appropriate except for tack welds and temporary attachments
for which the procedures laid down in B.S. 2642 shall be followed.

The temperature of steels welded in accordance with B.S 2642 shall be not less
than 10°C when welding is commenced.

Electrodes and fluxes shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions. The use of welding processes other than those covered by B.S. 1856 and
B.S. 2642 shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

The general welding programme for shop; and site welds, including particulars
of the preparation of fusion faces, the method of pre-heating where required, the
methods of making the welds, and the types of electrodes shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his approval before the work is put in hand. No departure from the agreed
welding programme or from the details shown on the drawings shall be made without
the agreement of the Engineer. Electrodes and fluxes shall be so chosen that the
properties of the deposited metal are not inferior to those of the parent metal.

The position of welds required for temporary attachments shall be agreed by the
Engineer before the work commences.

Where automatic or semi-automatic processes are used back gouging of the

deposited weld will not be required where the Engineer is satisfied that the root is free
from imperfection.

The cost of furnishing materials, labour, equipment and all else necessary
thereof and incidental thereto.

JOINTS 5056.

Joints shall not be made in any plate or section or in any part of the
bridgeworks, except where shown on the drawings. Abutting joint in compression
members and girder flanges and where shown on the plans shall be faced and brought
to an even bearing.

NOTCHING OF PLANGES AND WEBS 5057.

134
 When the flanges or webs of any member have to be cut or notched to enable
the section to be trimmed into another member,a hole of suitable diameter shall first be
drilled through the flange or web so as to leave a fillet at the intersection of the cut
lines.

BENDING AND PRESSING 5058.

Troughing up to 8 mm thick may be pressed cold. Over 8 millimetre and up to 12

mm thick cold pressing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer's
Representative.

SHOP ASSEMBLY 5059.

Members shall not be riveted up until the parts have been thoroughly scraped,
cleaned and freed from all scale and other deleterious matter. Thereafter, surfaces
which will be in permanent contact after shop assembly shall be given one coat of
priming paint on each face and the parts drawn firmly together with bolts whilst the
paint is still wet. All rivet holes shall be thoroughly brushed out and all burrs and
exuded paint removed before rivets inserted and riveting commenced. Surfaces not in
contact but which will be inaccessible after shop assembly shall receive the full
protective painting treatment before assembly viz one coat of priming paint, one
undercoat and assembly viz: one coat of priming paint, one undercoat and one finishing
coat. All paint and painting shall be in accordance with requirements of clause 5049 of
this specification. All reamering of holes shall be carried out in the manufacturer's
works and the edges of all holes on the outside faces of members shall be slightly
arrised.

MACHINING 5060.

The bearing surfaces of bearing plates etc., shall be planed level, the cut being
made in the direction of expansion of the girder. Surfaces which require machining
shall be indicated on the drawings.

ERECTION AT MANUFACTURER’S WORKS AND MARKING UP FOR RE-

ERECTION 5061.

Before being despatched, all bridge spans shall be temporarily erected complete
in the manufacturer's works so that the Inspection Engineer can be satisfied as to both
the alignment and fit of all connections.

After the work has been passed by the Inspection Engineer and before it is
dismantled, each part shall be stamped with the distinguishing mark, assigned to it on
the marking drawings, in figures not less than 16 mm high, in such a manner that the
pieces may be readily identified on arrival at site and put together in their proper
positions. The marking shall also be stencilled on each part in one or more places after
it has received the coat of paint mentioned in Clause 5062 and a circle of white paint
shall be placed round each stamped erection mark. No marking other than that
specified shall be put on the steelwork.

135
 The drawings showing the markings shall be as set forth in Clause 5020. The
Manufacturer shall forward to the Engineer one set of hand made tracings on best
quality polyester or tracing linen, one set of mechanical copies on tracing linen (e.g.
velograph) and one set of prints showing black lines on white background of the
marking drawings. The cost of producing and supplying all these tracings and prints
shall be deemed to be included in the rates for steel work.

SHOP PAINTING PROTECTIVE COATINGS 5062.

After approval by the inspection Engineer but not before, the whole of the work
shall be thoroughly wire brushed, scraped, cleaned and freed from all scales, grease and
coatings. Areas of rust shall be cleaned down to the bare metal. The surfaces shall be
thoroughly dried and given one coat of priming paint. All paint and painting shall be in
accordance with requirements of clause 5949 of this specification. See also clause 5059
for the treatment of surfaces which will be in permanent contact or inaccessible after
shop assembly.

All machined surfaces, turned bolts, nuts and washers, and all bright surfaces
shall be well coated with other approved coating which will not readily melt when
exposed to the sun in the tropics. Exposed machined surfaces shall be further protected
by timber casings or other approved means.

Field rivets, black bolts, nuts and washers shall be thoroughly cleaned, heated to
about melting temperature of lead, and whilst hot, dipped in boiled linseed oil.

GALVANIZING 5063.

Items which are shown on the drawings to be galvanized shall first be cleaned by
pickling and then galvanized by the hot process. The smelter used in this process shall
comply with B.S 222 and the manufacturer shall produce evidence to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative that this is so, and at his own cost. In addition, samples
of metal from the batch may be taken by the Inspection Engineer for independent
analysis and if found to contain less than 98.5 percent of pure zinc, the galvanized parts
represented will be rejected. The cost of this independent analysis will be borne
according to clause 36 (4) of the conditions of contract.

The galvanized surfaces shall be evenly covered, clean and free from drops or
spelter, spots and blemishes of every kind. After coating, all traces of flux shall be
removed. The coating shall weigh not less than 34 grams per square metre of surface
treated.

All cutting, holing, threading etc. shall be carried out before galvanizing. Cutting,
holing, threading etc., after galvanizing will only be permitted where the written

136
approval of the Inspection Engineer has been first obtained. Where such permission has
been given, the cut edges shall be protected by an approved proprietary galvanizing
commodity, aluminium paint must not be used for this purpose.

All materials shall be stored for a period of 7 days after galvanizing in such a
manner that air comes freely in contact with the surfaces. At the end of this period each
article will be examined by the Inspection Engineer and those showing signs of acid
spot, cracks, blisters or other defects will be rejected.

At the discretion of the Inspection Engineer the quality of the galvanizing may be
tested by the copper sulphate test as described in B.S 729: 1961 and the ductility and
adhesion of the zinc coating tested by bending or otherwise. For the purpose of these
tests more than 1 per cent of the articles will be selected for testing and the cost of the
tests and replacement of the articles thus destroyed shall be borne by the Contractor.

DRIFT, SPANNERS ETC. 5064.

Drifts for rivets and bolts shall be supplied to the extent of one per cent (with a
minimum of six for each size) of the net number of rivets or turned bolts used in the
work. Drifts for use with turned bolts shall be turned to suit the holes. Spanner, the
handles of which shall be made in the form of a podger and joggled, shall be supplied
in the proportion of 1 in every 500 or less for each size of bolt and nut. Where
necessary, brace spanners, screw drivers etc., shall also be supplied. The Contractor
shall ensure that an adequate number of all tools necessary for the proper and efficient
erection of the work at site are provided; the above requirements are regarded as a
minimum.

NUMBERS OF SITE RIVETS, BOLTS, NUTS SERVICE BOLT ETC. 5065.

The full number of rivets, bolts, nuts, washer etc., required to complete the work
shall be supplied and in addition, the following spares shall be provided for each span:-

Black bolts, nuts 10 percent of the full

and washers number of each size required.

Turned bolts, nuts 10 per cent of the full

and washers number of each size required.

Foundation bolts 5 per cent of the full number with a minimum of 2% of

each size required.

Rivets 15 per cent of the full number of each size when the
number is 250 or less plus 10 per cent of the number of
each size in excess of 250.

Service bolts complete with nuts and washers shall also be supplied equal to 25

137
per cent of the net number of site rivets for all girder work and 10 per cent of the net
number of site rivets for trough and plated floors.

There shall be no reduction in any of the above number in the case of multiple
spans.

The bolt lists including all lengths of rivets to be provided shall be submitted on
acceptable reproduced prints, and all costs involved in suppling them shall be deemed to
be included in the rates for steelwork.

MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT OF STEEL WORK 5066.

Payment for steelwork shall normally be made on the computed weight of the
structure as determined from the dimensions given on the drawings, on the basis given
in B.S. 5400, if however the weight of any materials falls short of the calculated weight
by more than 2½ per cent, but nevertheless be accepted, the actual weight of such
material only shall be paid for. If there is any difficulty in obtaining the B.S. section
specified or shown on the drawings, the nearest B.S. section may be submitted for
approval. Should the weight of the substituted section differ from that of the specified
section the weight to be taken for the purpose of payment shall be the lighter of the
two.

For the purposes of payment and unless otherwise shown on the drawings,
castings, forgings, special alloy steels, wrought iron and all structural shapes and plates
of expansion joints, pier protection, access manholes, steel deck drains and other
miscellaneous steel members, shall be considered as structural steelwork except that
when specific items of the above are called for in the Bill of materials, the weight or
unit of measurement of each selected item as specified therein, will be paid at the
respective contract unit price as named in the bid schedule.

PACKING AND MARKING FOR SHIPMENT 5067.

All works shall be protected from damage in transit, full allowances being made
for handling under difficult conditions. Particular care shall be taken to stiffen free ends
and to prevent distortion and to adequately protect all machined surfaces, the ends of
members with turned-bolt connections etc.

Straight bars and plates, when bundled, shall be temporarily bolted together. If
this is not possible they shall be bound in at least three places with annealed steel wire
of not less than 6 millimetre diameter which must be tightly fastened. All rivets, bolts,
nuts, washers, screws, plates and small articles generally shall be packed in bags, a
separate bag being used for each diameter and length of rivet, bolt, etc., and each bag
having metal label wired on indicating its contents. The bags shall be packed into
strong wooden cases or casks, whose gross weight shall not exceed 300 kilograms.

Each case, cask, or drum, shall be clearly marked with the shipping marks, and
indication of its contents and its weight. Bundles shall have a metal label, stamped with

138
similar information, attached to each end, the label being secure at each of its ends by a
separate wire so that the label lies flat with the bundles.

All marking and labelling shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative:-

ERECTION AT SITE 5068.

The steelwork shall be erected at site in accordance with B.S.153: with the
following amendments and additional requirements.

All lines and levels shall be as shown on the drawings or as specified by the
Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting out and
shall give all necessary assistance and facilities for checking by the Engineer's
Representative (see clause 1013). Any stakes or marks set out by the Engineer's
Representative on site shall be carefully preserved.

In addition to the requirements given under clause 7 of B.S. 153, the Contractor
shall comply with the requirement of Clause 1012 of this specification relating to
drawings and calculations for temporary works and stagings etc. The Contractor shall
obtain the prior approval from the Engineer for the method of erection and he shall
forward to the Engineer's Representative complete details, drawings and calculations
for the proposed method of erection at the time of seeking such prior approval.

SITE PAINTING 5069.

Surfaces which will be in permanent contact after site assembly or erection shall
be thoroughly clean and freed from all scale, loose paint, grease and other deleterious
coatings. Areas of rust shall be cleaned down to the bare metal. The surfaces shall be
thoroughly dried and one coat of priming paint applied to each face. The parts shall
then be drawn firmly together whilst the paint is still wet. All rivet holes shall be
brushed out and exuded paint removed before the rivets are inserted. Similarly for
bolts and bolt holes.

Surfaces which will be inaccessible after site assembly or erection shall be

thoroughly cleaned and freed from all scale, loose paint, grease and other deleterious
coatings. Areas of rust shall be cleaned down to bare metal. The surfaces shall be
thoroughly dried and then given one priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat
of paint.

Care shall be taken to ensure that no paint shall be applied to or allowed to foul
any reinforcement or other steelwork which is to be embedded in concrete. In the case
of steel joists which will be so embedded and steel troughing which will be concrete
filled, and all other such surfaces, those surfaces which will be in contact with the
concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and freed from all rust, scale, loose paint, grease
and other deleterious coatings before the concrete is poured against them.

Where concreting or any other operation likely to foul the steelwork has to be

139
carried out (e.g. pouring of concrete deck slabs supported on R.S.Js.), preparation
and painting of surfaces shall not be undertaken until such time as the cause of likely
fouling or damage no longer exists.

All paint and painting shall be in accordance with clause 5049 of this
specification.

ADDITIONAL STEEL WORK IN THE STRENGTHENING OF EXISTING BRIDGES

5070.

Before embarking on the strengthening of any bridge the Contractor shall

forward to the Engineer's Representative for approval full details of the method

he proposes to employ to carry out the work. Such details shall be accompanied
by drawings and calculations showing that no part of the existing structure shall be
overstressed or likely to suffer any damage during the strengthening operations and to
ensure that this will be so, the Contractor shall provide temporary supports, bracing,
struts etc., as necessary. In no case shall any part of an existing bridge be removed to
facilitate strengthening until a temporary substitute has been fixed in place to the
complete satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall amend his
proposals for undertaking the strengthening of the bridge as required by the Engineer's
Representative and shall not commence the work until the Engineer's Representative
has given his approval to the scheme and his permission to proceed.

Before ordering the additional steelwork, the Contractor shall completely satisfy
himself in all respect as to the dimension and positions of all fastenings and members
of the existing structure and shall be responsible for ensuring that all new plates, joists
etc., required for the strengthening shall avoid or accurately pick up all such existing
fastenings and members as the case may require. The Contractor shall also check
existing spans as indicated on the drawings to ensure that the lengths of new joists
etc., are adequate for the work proposed, and before ordering any such material shall
inform the Engineer's Representative of the dimensions, weights etc., which he proposes
to obtain and obtain his approval therefore. Any indications of the sizes or positions of
any part of any existing structure as are shown on the drawings are of a general
nature only and the Contractor must on no account regard such indications as accurate.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected each and every structure and to have
taken all necessary information and measurements required for the proper carrying out
of the work, and to have allowed for such in his rates.

The additional steelwork shall be manufactured, fabricated, protected,

transported, fixed in position and be in all respects in accordance with requirements of
this specification and the drawings. All fabrication which can be done in the shop shall
be done there and only the absolutely necessary minimum, as approved by the
Engineer, shall be done at the site, where the additional steelwork comes into

140
permanent contact with the existing steelwork, the contact surfaces of both shall be
thoroughly scraped and cleaned and freed from all loose paint, scale, grease and other
deleterious coatings. Areas of rust shall be cleaned down to the bare metal. The contact
surfaces shall then be given one coat of priming paint and brought together and
fastened whilst the paint is still wet. Surfaces of both existing and additional steelwork
which will be inaccessible after strengthening measures are complete shall be prepared
as described above and given the full protective paint treatment viz:- one priming coat,
one undercoat and one finishing coat, before assembly is begun. Where site welding is
to be employed, paint and other coatings shall be removed from the areas to be welded
for a suitable extra distance to ensure that the quality of the welds will not be impaired.
When strengthening is complete, the surfaces of all added steelwork, and those of the
existing steelwork which have been damaged during the operation shall be prepared as
above and given one coat of priming paint, one undercoat and one finishing coat. All
paint and painting shall be in accordance with the requirements of clause 5049 of this
specification.

The cost of fulfilling all the requirement of this clause shall be deemed to be
covered by the rates for supplying, fixing and painting additional steelwork.

RE-USE OF GIRDERS, JOIST ETC. OBTAINED FROM DISMANTLED

STRUCTURES 5071.

Girders, joists etc., from a dismantled structure which are to be re-used in the
strengthening or reconstruction of another structure are thus indicated on the drawings.
The Contractor shall check the dimensions of such girders, joists etc., against those of
the structure into which they are to be incorporated and obtain the approval of the
Engineer's Representative as to their suitability for such use before commencing any
cutting, drilling etc., that may be necessary. (See also clause 5011).

All work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer's Representative, and in compliance with this specification.
When the work on the girders, joists etc., has been completed, and before they are
incorporated into the structure, they shall be submitted to the Engineer's
Representative for approval and when this has been obtained and not before, the
Contractor shall forthwith incorporate them into the works as directed on the drawings.

The Contractor shall ensure that during fabrication, assembly and subsequent
incorporation into the works, the girders, joists etc., are given the paint treatment
specified in clause 5069.

GROUTING OF BASE PLATES, ETC., OF BEARINGS 5072.

The base plate, etc., shall first be located accurately with respect to both line
and level, by careful tapping, levering, wedging etc., as approved by the Engineer's
Representative. Care shall be taken to ensure that no damage is done to any item,
especially machined surfaces. Immediately before the operation of grouting in, the
entire area covered by the bearing, including pockets for holding down bolts, and a
sufficient extra area around to prevent contamination, shall be thoroughly cleaned by

141
washing with water from hose pipes, compressed air etc., and all dust,loose and
deleterious matter shall be removed. All surplus matter shall then be dried off by
mopping and the use of compressed air and the surfaces left damp. Freshly mixed
mortar, as directed and of suitable consistency shall then be introduced to fill the
pockets for the holding down bolts, and the space beneath the bearing plates. the
mortar shall be well pounded into the space, working from one side with suitable
pounders until the mortal appears on the opposite side and every care should be taken
to ensure that the mortar appears on the opposite side and every care shall be taken to
ensure that the entire void is filled, giving complete support to the bearing over the
entire area, without air holes etc. To ensure this, wooden screed shall be introduced
around the edges of the grouting space to contain the mortar during the pounding
operations. Any mortar which may foul the threads of bolts, nuts, or affect their bearing
on washers and plates shall be carefully removed without disturbing the mortar already
placed, and on completion of the operation, the edges of the mortar shall be trimmed as
shown on the drawings. The whole shall then be covered with wet sacks or hessian
which shall be kept continuously damp for a period of not less than 7 days, after which
they shall be removed and all loose, adherent or projecting mortar liable to reduce the
efficiency of the bearings carefully removed. After 28 days all holding down and other
bolts shall be tightened as directed.

EXPANSION JOINT 5073.

Expansion joints shall be provided where shown on the drawings and be of the
type specified.

Detailed working drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

The drawings shall be supplemented by the materials specifications not covered

in the GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF THE FEDERAL MINISTRY OF WORKS or specified on
the drawings.

Expansion joint sealant as shown on the drawings shall be produced from

neoprene compound and conform with the requirements of ASTM Specifications D2628-
67T, (see Clause 6269). Expansion joint sealant shall be placed in correct position.
When nosing type construction will be used the expandite expoform or equal epoxy
resin special mortar shall be used for forming the joint nosing for joint sealant. The
epoxy shall comply with DOE requirements for nosing materials contained in Technical
Memorandum (Bridges) BE3/72. The expansion joint sealant, shall conform to the
following:

Density 1350 kg/m3

Hardness 50 to 60, Shore A
Tensile strength 13.8N/mm² (minimum)
Elongation at break 250% (minimum)

The size of the gap shall be compatible with the mean bridge temperature at the
time of installation. This temperature shall be determined in accordance with
arrangements agreed with the Engineers.

142
 The position of all bolts cast into concrete and holes drilled in plates shall be
accurately determined from templates.

The mixing, application and curing of all proprietary materials shall comply with
the manufacturers requirements.

During the placing and hardening of concrete or mortar under expansion joint
components, relative movement shall be prevented between them and the supports to
which they are being fixed.

When one half of the joint is being set, the other half shall be completely free
from longitudinal restraint. In particular where strongbacks or templates are used to
locate the two sides of a joint, they shall not be fixed simultaneously to both sides.

Screw threads shall be kept clean and free from rust. Ramps shall be provided
and maintained to protect all expansion joints from vehicular loading. Vehicles shall
cross the joints only by means of the ramps until the Engineer permits their removal.

(CLAUSES 5074 - 5099 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

143
 SPECIFICATION

SECTION VI - ROADWORKS

144
 SECTION VI ROADWORKS 道路工程

GENERAL 6000.

In addition to any other relevant clause of this specification, the following shall be
deemed to apply in particular to roadworks, and shall be read in conjunction with all
other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this specification.
除本规范其他有关条款外，下列内容应特别适用于道路工程，并应结合合同条
件和本规范的其他有关条款进行阅读。
PART (A): DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT 6001. 平曲线

For new roads, the horizontal alignment must be carefully chosen as this is cost
related. A good alignment shall provide good drainage, minimum and balanced
earthworks and must avoid swampy and high water table areas, where this is possible.
A good horizontal alignment allows straight portions of the road on the horizontal plane
to be connected with horizontal curves which may be circular or transitional.

For the rehabilitation of roads in general, the proposed new alignment shall
follow closely on that of the existing road, except where necessary to effect realignment
to conform with the current standards of the Federal Ministry of Works and Housing or
to effect the most economical sitting of new bridges. It shall consist of a series of
straights joined by circular curves. All gradients, vertical and horizontal curves, sight and
passing distances, rate of super-elevations etc., shall conform with the accepted
standards of the Ministry for the particular terrain and adopted design speed as follows:-

TERRAIN LEVEL ROLLING HILLY

ADOPTED DESIGN
SPEED, KM/H 100 80 60

145
HORIZONTAL CURVES AND SUPER-ELEVATION

Radii of horizontal curves and super-elevation rates shall comply with the
following formula:-

E = V²/2.25R

Where V = design speed in km/h

R = Radius of circular curve in metre
E = Super-elevation, this is normally limited to an absolute maximum of 8%.

DEFINITIONS:-

(I) TANGENT RUN-OFF That distance in which the level of the outer edge of the
pavement is brought to the level of the crown of the road section.

(II) SUPER-ELEVATION RUN-OFF That distance in which the super-elevation is

brought from zero to its maximum value.

Super-Elevation shall be achieved by rotating the pavement about the profile of

the inside edge of the pavement in flat terrain where the drainage of the inside edge of
the curve is likely to present a problem.

In cases where the inside edge of the curve may be easily drained, then the
super- elevation shall be achieved by the rotation of the pavement about the centre-line
profile. The sequence of operations is as follows:-

(a) The outer half of the pavement width is brought to the same horizontal
plane with the crown of the cross section. This is done within the
distance called the tangent run-off.

(b) The outer half of the pavement is then brought to the same inclined
plane as the inner half of the pavement.

(c) (i) For rotation about the inner edge, the pavement shall then be
finally rotated about its inner edge to the required full super-
elevation. No cut is involved along the inner edge in this
operation.

(ii) For the rotation about the centre-line, the pavement shall be
rotated about its centre-line to the required full super-elevation.
This operation involves "cut" along the inner edge of the
pavement.

TABLE VI-1 DESIGN SPEED WITH CORRESPONDING SUPER-ELEVATION AND

MINIMUM LENGTH SUPER-ELEVATION RUN-OFF

146
 DESIGN SPEED KM/H 100 80 60
MAXIMUM GRADIENT OF SUPER-ELEVATION
RUN OFF RELATIVE TO CENTRE-LINE OF ROAD 0.45 0.5 0.57
(PERCENT)
MINIMUM LENGTH OF SUPER-ELEVATION RUN-
55 45 40
OFF (METRE)
MAXIMUM RATE OF CHANGE OF SUPER-
0.05 m/m PER 30 METRE
ELEVATION RUN OFF
LENGTH OF SUPER-ELEVATION RUN-OFF
20%
WITHIN THE CURVE (CIRCULAR)

The proposed Road shall be constructed in accordance with the horizontal

alignment, formations and levels and other details as in the DRAWINGS or as directed
by the Engineer's Representative.

VERTICAL ALIGNMENT 6002. 竖曲线

The straight portions on the vertical plane which are connected by vertical curves
are called gradients. Two cases of vertical curves occur with gradients either meeting at
summits or meeting at sags. The choice of gradient will affect construction costs, vehicle
operation cost, road capacity and passenger's comfort. With these considerations, the
vertical alignment shall conform with adopted standards of the Ministry. The finished
work shall be to even gradients joined by vertical curves. The lengths of vertical curves
shall be calculated using the formula:-

L = K(G1-G2) = KA

Where L = length of vertical curve in metre, recommended minimum value of

100m for all speeds.

A = (G1 - G2) = change in gradient (algebraic difference) percent. The ultimate

sign of A should be ignored, i.e. A is always positive.

K = constant for any particular speed

TABLE VI-2 DESIGN SPEED FOR VERTICAL, SUMMIT OR SAG CURVES WITH
CORRESPONDING K VALUES

DESIGN SUMMIT VERTICAL SAG VERTICAL

SPEED CURVE CURVE
KM/H 100 80 60 100 80 60
K 50 26 12 35 23 13

147
 The level of any point along the vertical curve shall be equal to the level at the
tangent point plus

G1X/100 + AX2/200L

where X = distance of the point from the tangent point in metre.

G1 = gradient of the road section (per cent).

A = change in gradient (algebraic difference) i.e. (G1 - G2) per cent.

L = length of the vertical curve in metre

AX2 should be positive for a sag vertical curve and

200L negative for a summit vertical curve.

ROLL-OVER 6003.

Roll Over is the algebraic difference in cross falls of two adjacent lanes of
pavement area. The Roll Over shall be in accordance with the details as shown on the
DRAWINGS or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

CONTRACTOR TO CALCULATE LEVELS 6004. 承包商计算水平

The Contractor will be responsible for working out all levels of the pavement,
shoulders, ditches etc., that are necessary for the setting out of the works and will, if
required to do so, furnish the Engineer's Representative with lists of these levels for his
approval prior to setting out. The Contractor shall locate and preserve where directed all
concrete land markers, beacons, benchmarks etc.

CONSTRUCTION STANDARD 6005.施工标准

The road shall be constructed to the following standards:-

(I) WIDTH 宽度

The formation width between drains comprising a carriageway, hard-shoulders

and soft shoulders shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the drawings or as
ordered by the Engineer.

(II) BASE COURSE 基层

The base course of the carriageway, which may be continued over the hard
shoulders or extended a minimum of 300mm at either side of the surfaced width as
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer shall be constructed of approved

148
material having a finished compacted thickness of not less than 150mm and complying
in all respects with this specification. The base course to the hard shoulders if different
from that of the carriageway, shall be constructed of such other approved material as
directed by the Engineer's Representative, but also having a finished compacted
thickness of not less than 150mm.

(III) SUBBASE COURSE 底基层

The Subbase Course of the carriageway, which may be continuous over the hard
shoulders as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative,
shall be constructed of approved material having a finished compacted thickness as
shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer depending on the C.B.R. value of
the subbase in question.

(IV) GEOMETRY 几何

The horizontal and vertical alignments, superelevations and cambers of the road
shall be constructed in accordance with the DRAWINGS or as directed by the Engineer.

(V) BITUMINOUS SURFACING 沥青面层

The surfacing of the roadway shall be two coat bituminous surface dressing or
hot asphaltic concrete pavement as shown on the DRAWINGS or as directed by the
Engineer.

(VI) SIDE SLOPES TO EMBANKMENTS

Side slopes to embankments and cuttings shall be constructed in accordance

with the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The co-efficient of
resistance of the material shall be the determinant factor for the embarkment slope.

(VII) SIDE DRAINS

Unless shown otherwise on the drawings the invert of the side drains shall be not
less than 900mm below the finished level of the crown of the road. All side drains
shall, where shown, be excavated to the profile and dimensions shown on the drawings,
but the Engineer's Representative may direct that the side drains be constructed to such
lesser profiles consistent with drainage capacity as he may think fit due to the existence
of rock or other obstruction. Where the height of the embankment exceeds 900mm
above the existing ground, and the natural gradient of the surrounding area is towards
the roadway, then catch water drains shall be constructed as shown on the drawings or
as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

(VIII) CULVERTS

Generally culverts shall consist of precast concrete pipes laid either as single or
multiple culverts, and where shown shall be bedded and haunched with a minimum of
150mm of concrete. In cases where sufficient cover is not available the Engineer's

149
Representative may direct that culverts be surrounded with a minimum of 150mm of
concrete.

(IX) JUNCTION WITH ROADS 被交路

A Minor Roads 小路

At all junctions with minor roads where shown on the DRAWINGS or directed by
the Engineer's Representative, bell mouth shall be constructed carrying the construction
and drainage to a minimum of 15.0 metres from the edge of the proposed roadway
along the minor road as shown in details on the DRAWINGS or as directed by the
Engineer's Representative.

B. Major Roads 大路

All junctions with major road culverts shall be constructed as shown on the
DRAWINGS or as ordered by the Engineer's Representative.

(X) WIDENING OF ROADWAY THROUGH VILLAGES AND AT RECOGNIZED

LORRY HALTS 农村公路拓宽

Where the roadway passes through villages and at recognized lorry halts, the base
course and the asphalt concrete pavement shall be widened. Concrete side drains shall
be constructed. All as shown on the DRAWINGS or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.

(XI) HARD SHOULDERS

Surface dressed hard shoulders shall be constructed on both sides of the

roadway as shown on the DRAWINGS or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

(XII) SOFT SHOULDERS AND EMBANKMENT SLOPES

Soft shoulders and embankment slopes shall be constructed so as to have the

top 75mm consisting of top soil and shall be grassed throughout unless otherwise
directed. At the discretion of the Engineer's Representative, the top 75mm may consist
of a compacted layer of approved lateritic material in lieu of top soil.

(XIII) SUBGRADE

A. Cuts

The subgrade of the road shall be shaped to the dimensions, formations and
levels as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and the
top 150mm subgrade shall be watered and compacted to 100% B.S. standard
compaction at optimum moisture content (OMC).

150
B. Embankments

The subgrade of the roadway shall be shaped to the dimensions formations and
levels as shown on the DRAWINGS or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

(CLAUSES 6006 - 6099 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (B) - EARTHWORKS, DRAINAGE, ETC. 土方排水

(1) MATERIAL

GENERAL 6100.

The materials used in the works shall be new and/or of the qualities and kinds
specified, and no materials shall be used in the works unless approved. Materials
delivered to the works shall be equal to the approved samples. Deliveries shall be made
sufficiently in advance of constructional requirements to enable samples to be selected
by the Engineer's Representative for testing before using the materials in the works.

Materials failing to comply with the specification shall be immediately removed

from the works at the Contractor's expense.

These specifications on materials shall be read in conjunction with latest

amended report of "the Lagos materials testing conference", a copy of which will be
made available to the Contractor on request.

No material shall be used until it has been approved by the Engineer or his
Representative. Permission to use any material shall not be construed as an approval of
its source nor any acceptance as continued acceptance.

UNSUITABLE MATERIAL 6101. 不合格材料

In no case will material which contains organic matter or other deleterious

substance be used.

FILLING MATERIAL 6102. 填料

Material for filling in the embankment shall be obtained from sources approved
by the Engineer's Representative and no slurry, mud, soft or otherwise unsuitable
materials shall on no account or under any circumstances be placed in embankments.
Large pieces of rock, or other materials shall be properly broken up and beaten down
and no accumulation at the foot of side slopes of embankments of boulders or lumps
having no cohesion will under any circumstances be permitted. The Engineer's decision
regarding the suitability of any material shall be final, and any material of which more
than 35% passes the No 75µmsieve may be rejected depending on the plasticity
characteristics of this material, provided good quality fill materials are available,
otherwise such material may be modified for use.

151
 The material to be used for the forming of embankments shall generally be
obtained from cuttings which may be widened as agreed with the Engineer's
Representative.

The material shall be spread evenly over the area of embankment and
compacted in uniform layers to the specified density and moisture using B.S. compactive
effort. Each compacted layer shall not be greater than 150mm.

SELECTED LATERITIC MATERIAL FOR SOFT SHOULDERS 6103. 土路肩材料

Where directed by the Engineer's Representative under the provisions of clause

6163 the material selected for the upper 75mm of the soft shoulder shall or preferably
be a well graded lateritic soil with a Plasticity Index of not less than 10 and not more
than 20.

GRASS OR GRASS SEED 6104. 植草防护

The seed, or the grass used for sowing or planting on the verges, the slopes of
embankments and cuttings shall be daub grass (cynodon dactylion) or bahama grass.
Tall, quick growing or tussock grasses shall not be used without the consent of the
Engineer. The Contractor must anticipate the requirements for the supply of suitable
grass.

RUBBLE AND PITCHING STONES 6105.

Stones for filling behind retaining walls or walls of culverts shall be angular and
graded from 12mm to 75mm with a fine content below 12mm not exceeding 20%
stones, for pitching the inverts and sides of ditches embankment slopes and culvert
inlets, and outlets, shall be of durable natural broken rock of approximate cubical shape
225mm x 225mm x 225mm or 150mm x 150mm x 150mm as appropriate.

(CLAUSES 6105 6119 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

(II) WORKMANSHIP

SITE CLEARANCE 6120. 现场清理

The Contractor shall fell, grub-out roots and clear from the site all trees
occurring within the boundary of the works as directed. In addition all bushes, ant hills,
ants' nests, grass, stumps and other vegetation shall be cleared from the site and roots,
grubbed up, holes made in grubbing up, removing the ant hills, roots, stumps and the
like shall be backfilled and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the
surrounding ground except that all holes, cavities, and wells within the road width shall
be backfilled with approved soil which shall be thoroughly compacted throughout by
power rammer to a density not less than the dry density of the surrounding ground.

152
 Outside the above limits, on the inside of bends, bushes and trees shall be felled
and their roots grubbed up as directed to give an unobstructed sight distance of 150
metres. For purposes of measurement, the girths of the trees shall be taken 900mm
above ground level except that where a tree has a buttress the girth shall be taken
immediately above the buttresses. No economic trees or crops shall be removed prior
to their enumeration and valuation for compensation purposes.

The Contractor shall remove gates, gate posts, manhole covers, kerbs, signs,
water mains and other items to the extent directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Foundations shall be broken up and removed to a depth of 900mm below natural
subgrade level or finished grade level, whichever is lower.

Structures to be demolished shall be broken up and removed. Prior to

demolition the Contractor shall ensure that services have been disconnected to the
satisfaction of the appropriate authorities and/or owners. Foundations shall be broken
up and removed to a depth of 900mm below Natural Subgrade Level or finished grade
level, whichever is lower.

Pits, tanks, underground chambers and the like shall be demolished to a depth of
900mm below Natural Subgrade Level or finished grade level, whichever is lower and
the remainder shall be properly cleaned out.

Clearing limits for this Contract shall be the entire length of the project within
widths as hereinbelow defined.

I. Buildings, walls and other man-made items

Clear everything within the Right Way limits.

II. Compound walls reconstruction

Any and all existing compound walls located within the Right Way limits shall be
cleared and removed as part of the appropriate item in the Bill of Quantity. Also
included as part of this item shall be the reconstruction of all such walls, equal to
the removed wall, along the Right Way line connecting to the points at the start
and end of the removed section. The cost of such reconstruction shall be
considered included in this item. Reconstruction of compound walls may be
required anywhere along the alignment.

III. Wells

Working wells outside the limit of grading shall be maintained in a condition

equal to their present condition.

Working wells within the limits of grading shall be filled as herein above
required. Replacement wells equal to the existing wells shall be constructed outside the
limits of grading. The cost of all replacement wells shall be considered as included in
Item "Clear Site as specified..... etc;."

153
 Non-working wells within the Right Way lines, shall be filled as hereinbefore
required.

IV. Trees and All Other Erosion Resisting Vegetation

All trees shall be cleared within a strip fifty (50) metres wide, (25 metres to each
side of the centre line). To ensure that future falling trees do not clog road side drains,
all trees outside this 50 metre strip whose height is such that, if they fell would reach to
the nearest roadside drain, shall be cleared.

All other erosion resisting vegetation shall be cleared only within the limits of
grading.

Outside the above limits and within the Right of Way lines all vegetation shall be
selectively thinned and/or trimmed.

A. Selective thinning shall include the removal of live and dead trees both standing
and fallen, shrubs, and other vegetation and debris in the areas shown on the Drawings
and designated for removal by the Engineer.

The trees, shrubs and other vegetation to be removed will be so designated by

the Engineer's Representative. Trees shall be carefully felled to prevent damage to
adjacent vegetation, structures and property. Trees, stumps and all debris shall be
removed in a manner that will not compact or disturb the soil adjacent to trees and
shrubs to remain.

B. Trimming existing trees shall include the complete removal of all defective or
undesirable limbs and the repair of all injuries or wounds on existing trees as directed by
the Engineer's Representative.

All diseased, dead, broken and seriously injured branches shall be removed.
Healthy low branches shall not be removed except as otherwise directed by the
Engineer's Representative. All wounds over 25mm diameter shall be painted with tree
paint. The bark around all wounds and other injuries shall be traced and treated in
accordance with approved arboricultural practice. All pruning tools and methods
employed shall be in accordance with arboricultural practice and shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.

All trees to remain within the areas designated for selective thinning shall be
trimmed to remove all dead and undesirable limbs up to a height of 5m above ground.
The Engineer will determine which live limbs are undesirable.

Materials designated for incorporation in the Works shall be removed, marked

where necessary for future identification and stored for re
use.

The Contractor shall load, transport, unload and stock materials designated for

154
delivery to the owner's thereof.

Other materials resulting from clearing operations shall become the property of
the Contractor as soon as he takes possession of the land for the Works. The Contractor
shall remove and dispose of such materials.

Clear material shall be burnt or disposed of as directed by the Engineer's

Representative. Trees to be cut down shall have all light branches trimmed off and
burned and useful trimmer shall be cut in suitable lengths and stacked at the roadside
ready for removal as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

Payment will be made under this for the net areas cleared and shall include for
the satisfactory removal of anthills and ants' nests and for any backfilling and
compacting required and for disposal of material, but shall not include any areas of
grass on the road vergers or otherwise, which is subjected to periodic cutting and
maintenance.

SCARIFYING EXISTING SURFACE 6121. 现存表面的反松

Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer's Representative, the existing road

shall be scarified, shaped to required formation level, and compacted as specified,
where the average difference between the proposed formation levels and the existing
ground levels does not exceed 75mm. Payment shall be made once only under the
appropriate item in the Bills of Quantities and shall include for all operations required to
bring the existing road to the required formation levels.

Where ordered in writing by the Engineer's Representative, existing bituminous

surfaces shall be scarified, re-shaped and compacted as specified and all surplus
material shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer's Representative. Payment
shall be made under the appropriate item, in the Bill of Quantities and shall include for
all operations as required herein.

Except as provided above, the removal of existing bituminous surfacing by

scarifying and roughening of existing unsealed roads and vergers etc., shall be deemed
to be included in the tendered rates and prices for earthworks.

EARTHWORKS 6122. 土方

In the Contract the following words and expressions shall have the meanings
hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires:-

(1) "Existing Ground Level" means the ground level shown on the Drawings as
existing at the start of the Works.

(2) "Finished Ground Level" means the ground level after the completion of the
Works.

(3) "Natural Subgrade Level" means the level at the completion of excavation for

155
 roadworks.

(4) "Formation Level" means the level at the completion of earthworks for roadworks
prior to top soiling.

(5) "Stripped Ground Levels" means the ground levels after the completion of
clearing operations.

(6) "Specified Finished Excavation Levels" means the levels of the completed
excavation after trimming, compacting and preparation of the surface of the
excavation as calculated from the levels shown on the Drawings, or the levels
directed by the Engineer's Representative.

(7) "Specified Finished Fill Levels" means the levels of fills after trimming,
compacting and preparation of the surface of the fill (excluding top soiling)
placed in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.

Excavated material shall be classified by the Engineer's Representative as

suitable material, or unsuitable material.

Unsuitable material shall include the following:-

(1) Material from swamps, marshes and bogs.

(2) Peat, logs, stumps, roots and other perishable or combustible material.

(3) Top soil and highly organic clay and silt.

(4) Clay having a liquid limit exceeding 80% or plasticity index exceeding 55.

(5) Highly micaceous materials.

Suitable material shall exclude the foregoing unsuitable materials and shall
comprise all other natural material acceptable for use in the Works, whether obtained
from within or without the Site.

Top soil shall mean soil which can be seen to have been broken down by
agricultural cultivation and/or is seen to be capable of supporting vegetable growth. It
shall include turf.

Solid rock shall mean rock found in ledges or masses in its original position,
which can only be loosened by blasting or by pneumatic tools, or excavated by hand, by
using wedges and sledge hammers. Rock which is in a shattered condition and/or is
capable of being loosened by rippers or earthmoving plant is excluded from the
definition of solid rock. Boulders or detached pieces of rock each exceeding 2 cubic
meter size in trenches or 6 cubic meter size in general excavation, shall be regarded as
solid rock.

156
 Where embankments are to be constructed on steeply sloping ground, including
the side slopes of existing embankments, existing sloping surfaces shall be excavated to
form benching as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.

Materials for filling shall comprise the following:-路堤填料

(1) General Fill

General fill shall consist of suitable material as defined herein. Subject to the
requirements regarding the forming of embankments isolated boulders not
exceeding 3 cubic metres in size may be included in general fill.

(2) Rock Fill

Rock fill shall consist of sound igneous rock or other sound rock acceptable to
the Engineer's Representative or such strength that when compacted an excess of fines
will not be produced. It shall be free draining and reasonably well graded and shall
have a maximum size of 3 cubic metres. The percentage of material by weight passing
a 5mm sieve shall not exceed 30%. It shall be free from silt, clay and organic material.
Such material may be deposited below water without the associated use of compaction
plant.

(3) Granular Fill

Granular fill shall consist of an approved granular material of maximum, size not
greater than 38mm which is inert in water and which on analysis by sieving complies
with the following requirements.

Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing

10mm up to 100

5mm not more than 85

600µm not more than 45

75µm not more than 5

(4) Special Granular Fill

Special granular fill shall be hard and durable and shall consist of broken rock or
gravel. It shall be well graded with a maximum size of 38mm. The percentage
of material by weight passing 75m sieve shall not exceed 10. It shall be free

157
 from silt, clay and organic material.

(5) Granular Bedding

Granular bedding shall consist of crushed rock or gravel having a smooth grading
curve within the limits specified for l9mm nominal size all in aggregate to Table 3
of B.S 882. The fraction passing the 425μm sieve shall be non-plastic when
tested in accordance with B.S 1377 (1975) Sections 2, 3 and 4 unless such
fraction constitutes less than 2 per cent of the whole by weight.

Earthworks shall be measured by super imposing the specified finished formation

levels on initial cross sections taken by the Contractor at 30 meter intervals or closer if
necessary along the centre line. The levels of such cross sections shall be agreed by the
Engineer's Representative.

A maximum quantity of material excavated from cuttings shall be placed to fill

and the utmost advantage shall be taken of the natural moisture content of the soil in
placing such fill provided the materials meet the qualities for use as such see clause
6102. Fill shall be placed and compacted in layers of a compacted thickness 150mm or
such thickness that may be found necessary to achieve the required density over the full
width of the formation. The Contractor shall route his earth moving equipment in such
a manner over the full width of the filling as to achieve a uniform compaction over the
entire width by this method. All fill including subgrade and vergers shall then be
compacted to 100 per cent of the maximum dry density obtained in the British Standard
Compaction Test. In the case of extension to existing embankments benching will be
required as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineers's Representative
and such benching shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates for earthworks.

PAYMENT FOR EARTHWORKS 6123.

Payment for earthworks shall be made once on the basis of the total quantity of
measured fill by the Contractors together with the quantity of unsuitable material and/or
of excess cut placed to spoil, all as determined from the cross sections referred to in
clause 6122. The depth of unsuitable material, if any, to the placed to spoil shall be
agreed between the Contractor's Agent and Payment for this material will be on the net
volume as measured in situ.

The quantity of suitable excess cut placed to spoil shall be determined as

follows:-

(i) The net volume of suitable material excavated from cuttings or side drains shall
be determined by deducting the quantity of unsuitable material placed to spoil
from the total quantity of cut as determined from the cross sections.

(ii) The total volume of filling placed in embankment shall be found from the cross
sections.

158
(iii) The volume of suitable excess cut placed to spoil shall be taken as the volume
found in (i) above less the volume found in (ii) above with an adjustment made
to the latter to allow for compaction.

The adjustment which shall be made for compaction shall be based on the ratio
of the maximum dry density of the filling at 100% B.S. Compaction to the in situ dry
density of the material in the cutting or side drain.

Haulage rates will he assessed on the basis of the use of the nearest acceptable
road making materials to the section of work under construction.

Stripping of topsoil will not be measured as roadway excavation. The quantity of

stripping topsoil for which payment will be made will be the area stripped in accordance
with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, measured in units as specified in the
bill of quantities.

SELECTION OF SOIL FOR FILL 6124.

Soils shall be obtained from areas of cut including ditching or from approved
borrow pits. All grass and vegetation shall be removed from the surface of the areas of
cut or borrow pits before excavation of the fill material is commenced and no such grass
or vegetation shall be included in the fill. In borrow pits the top soil, shall be carefully
removed and stockpiled.

Topsoil shall not be removed from any area until excavations or filling operations
are about to start in that area. Topsoil on the sites of cuttings and embankments shall
be excavated to the average depth directed by the Engineer's Representative or as
specified hereinafter.

The Contractor shall, at his own expense and to suit his own convenience, make
arrangements for and provide such temporary storage sites as may be required for
heaps of topsoil.

If any materials suitable for subbase, base or aggregates as specified herein are
encountered in material removed as roadway excavation, and the Contractor elects to
use such material for constructing items, payment for the various items shall be as
follows:

If the Contractor elects to use materials removed from cuttings for constructing
items of subbase, base or aggregates, payment will be made for such material
excavated under the appropriate roadway excavation item and for such material so
placed under the appropriate item of subbase or base, provided that the Contractor
furnishes and places borrow excavation material, in embankment without cost, in an
amount equal to the value of the material used in the base, subbase or as aggregate in
place prior to excavation.

The Contractor shall at his own expense, make arrangements for and provide

159
such spoil dumps as may be required for the disposal of excavated materials which are
not to be incorporated in the Works.

The spoil dumps shall be located and shaped in accordance with the Contractor's
proposals as and shall be finished with neatly trimmed slopes, adequately surface soiled,
all to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

During the course of the excavation from an area of cut or borrow pit or other
approved source of fill material, the Contractor shall provide adequate supervision to
ensure that only soil of a type approved by the Engineer's Representative is excavated.
Care shall be taken during such excavations to avoid any pockets of heavy clay,
vegetation or other unsuitable material and if any such unsuitable material or soil of an
unapproved type is included in the fill it shall be dug out and made good with approved
material where directed by the Engineer's Representative and at the Contractor's own
expense.

Where a sandy soil is encountered in the excavation of a cut or borrow pit, the
Engineer's Representative shall have the power to instruct the Contractors to place this
sandy soil to the top layer of fill.

Any material which in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative is not suitable
for fill shall be tipped to spoil as and where directed.

After removal of fill material from borrow pits etc., The area shall be levelled and
top soil replaced all to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

The Contractors shall arrange and pay for any compensations and other
payments whatsoever required for their access to and occupation and use of the borrow
areas for fill material.

Payment for all arrangements, compensations and other costs, clearance,

removal and replacement of topsoil, excavations and disposal of unsuitable materials
and all other operations and requirements of this clause shall be deemed to be included
in the tendered rates and prices for earthworks.

COMPACTION 6125.

Compaction shall be measured by expressing the dry density of the sample as a

percentage of the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content.

Compaction of all material shall be carried out at a moisture content optimum for
the compaction effort of the plant used. The Engineer's Representative may, however,
direct that the moisture content at compaction be further controlled in order to reduce
as far as possible any subsequent consolidation or swelling.

Where it is necessary to add water to the material to achieve the dry density
specified, the cost of obtaining, transporting or pumping, spraying and mixing sufficient

160
water must be allowed in the Contractor's prices for compaction. Water shall be added
as and where necessary by a water carrier fitted with an approved sprinkler and the
uniform wetting of the layer to be compacted shall be achieved. Under no
circumstances will compaction solely by construction or other traffic be accepted.

Fill materials shall be placed, spread and levelled in layer of loose depth not
exceeding 230mm of general fill, 460mm of rock fill, 230mm of special and granular fill.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, where rock fill or granular fill is placed below water level
there shall be no restriction on the depth of layers.

The material of each layer, of whatever type, shall be uniform throughout the
layer. Except as otherwise necessary to conform to the zoning of the various types of
materials, each layer of material shall extend over the full width of the filling. No layer
of fill material shall be placed until the Engineer's Representative is satisfied that the
underlying layer is properly compacted.

Rock fill (including solid rock excavated from cuttings) shall be placed, spread
and levelled by a track laying tractor, and large voids shall be filled with broken
fragments before compaction.

Isolated boulders and isolated large fragments of solid rock forming part of
general fill shall be evenly distributed throughout each layer, but no stone exceeding
150mm in size shall be placed within 300mm of formation level.

During the construction of embankments the Contractor shall control and direct
construction traffic uniformly over the full width. Unless permitted by the Engineer's
Representative, fill materials shall not be stockpiled on embankments.

Embankments shall be constructed in such a manner that the completed

formation is not damaged by construction traffic. The Contractor may elect to construct
embankments to such higher levels as may be necessary to protect the formation and in
such cases shall delay removal of the surplus material until preparation of the formation
can immediately proceed. The provision, placing, compaction and subsequent removal
and disposal of such material shall be at the Contractor's expense.

All road materials shall be incorporated in the works by an approved sequence of

operations namely the dumping of materials, spreading by grader, watering and mixing
as specified above and compacting by approved means. The Contractor shall keep the
delays between consecutive operations to a minimum.

All compaction equipment must operate over the whole area to ensure uniform
compaction by it. All filling including the subbase course and base course shall be
compacted in layers of a compacted thickness of 150mm or such other thickness as may
be found necessary to achieve the required density. Longitudinal and transverse joints
in any two successive layers shall be staggered to a minimum distance of 3 metres.

At the beginning of the Works and from time to time as may be necessary in the

161
opinion of the Engineer's Representative, the Contractor shall carry out, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, field trials, supplemented by any necessary
laboratory investigations to determine types of compaction equipment, suitable layer
thickness and moisture contents all within the requirements of the specification for the
placing and compaction of the various materials to be used in the earthworks. The sites
of trials shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer's Representative.
Copies of the full records of all such trials shall be provided promptly to the Engineer's
Representative. If compaction trial fill is placed as part of the permanent work, such fill
shall conform to the requirements of the specification and if it does not it shall be
removed or reworked until it does conform. Extra work required either to rework or
remove the trial section shall be at the Contractor's expense.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer's Representative his proposals,

based on the rolling test result's for the compaction of each variety of material to be
used in the earthworks, including proposals in relation to types of plant, numbers of
passes and loose depth of layers. Work (other than rolling test) shall not start on any
particular variety of material until the Engineer's Representative has signified in writing
his agreement to the Contractor's proposals for that material.

The Contractor shall not modify the agreed methods without the consent of the
Engineer's Representative.

Work in compaction of fill materials shall be carried out only when the moisture
content is within the range shown by the field or by laboratory tests whichever is
appropriate on that material to be suitable for the attainment of the densities specified
below.

(i) For material which is within 600mm Formation Level or in the filling adjacent to
structures (including backfilling), not less than 100 percent of the maximum dry
density for the material obtainable by B.S standard compaction.

(ii) For all other material, not less than 95 per cent of the maximum dry density for
the material obtainable by B.S standard compaction.

The foregoing compaction requirements shall also apply to the subgrade material
which is within 600mm of formation level in cuttings.

The Contractor and the Engineer's Representative shall from time to time agree
upon field compaction methods and relevant plant for the various materials such that by
correlation using the relative density and ISO CBR control tests, the need for the
extensive tests on the finished road section may be reduced.

The Contractor and the Engineer's Representative shall also agree on procedures
for determining the areas of fill to which particular sets of test results should be deemed
to be applicable. Such areas shall include clay or peat deposit where consolidation test
may be necessary.

162
 All sections of the works shall be protected from damage by plants, rainstorms or
other cause. All such damage should it occur, shall be made good by the Contractor at
his own expense.

In particular the exposed surface of each lift of fill or sub base course or base
course material, after compaction, shall be protected by a cambered surface from
excessive moisture content changes due to rainstorms until the next lift is placed. If
such changes in moisture content do take place and the surface of the compacted layer
softens, the Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer's Representative, remove and
replace the material affected at his own expense. Should the material used for subbase
or base course be prone to drying from the surface the Contractor shall from time to
time keep the finished surface slightly dampened. This process will continue until
another layer is placed.
Should there be patches of unsound ground, excessive sand or clay, which are,
in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative unsatisfactory, then such areas shall be
rectified by admixture of suitable materials or by cutting out and replacement to ensure
a uniformly compacted formation.

Tests for the control of compaction shall be carried out at regular intervals as
directed by the Engineer's Representative. If any test result from a particular area falls
below the minimum specified, then the Contractor shall at his own expense scarify,
water and recompact that area to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative,
provided the constituency of the material will not be adversely affected as double
compaction may increase percentage passing 75m sieve to more than 35% thus
reducing the strength of the material.

The Contractor shall allow in his construction programme time for such tests and
for the results to be made known, before the next stage of the works.

BORROW PITS 6126.

The Contractor shall at his own expense clear bush, topsoil and other inferior
materials from the site of borrow pits. The Contractor shall also bear the cost of
compensation for borrow pits outside the area of the site. Borrow pits for road
materials shall be excavated only where the natural slope of the ground is away from
the road, except that where he considers it essential for the proper execution of the
works the Engineer's Representative may approve the excavation of borrow pits in
ground above road level.

Generally in rural areas the nearest edge of the pit shall be not less than 15
metres from the centre line of the road. The Contractor shall so plan his method of
execution of the works that the haul of road materials from borrow pits is reduced to a
minimum. The Contractor may be allowed to form "side borrow trenches" for fill material
wherever it is required providing such trenches are self draining, having a minimum fall
along the line of the road of 1 in 120. All other pits shall be properly drained to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative by the construction of turnouts or other
approved methods.

163
 In build up areas, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, his proposals for
obtaining fill materials and shall furnish details regarding the locations, sizes and owner
of all borrow areas, together with his proposed method of working and all measures
proposed to eliminate damage or nuisance to persons or property. He shall be required
to submit his proposed method for the reinstating such borrow areas at the same time.
The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's written approval for the above before
commencing work on any borrow area. In addition the Contractor shall comply with all
other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this specification.

No borrow pit shall be abandoned until the area has been levelled, topsoil
replaced and the sides battered to a slope of 1 in 1½ so that no animals may be
trapped, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. The cost of all
operations detailed under this clause shall be deemed to be included in the tendered
rate for earthworks.

Regulations under the mineral ordinance must be observed by the Contractor.

SAND FILL 6127.

Where sand fill, either hydraulic or otherwise, is specified, it shall be obtained

from a source or sources approved by the Engineer. Where such sources occur in
waters or areas under the jurisdiction of the Nigerian ports Authority or the inland
waterway department of the Federal Ministry of Transport or other appropriate
authority, then the Contractor shall first obtain written permission to remove material
from the authority concerned and shall comply, in all respects with all regulations laid
down by such an authority.

The quality of the material intended for use as sand fill shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. For hydraulic sand fill the grading of the material shall be
such that not more than 15% passes the 75μm sieve and in no case will isolated
pockets or layers of silt, clay or other organic impurities be accepted. For sand fill
placed by any method other than the hydraulic, the grading shall be such that not more
than 15% passes the 75μm sieve, and in no case will isolated pockets or layers of silt,
clay or other organic impurities be accepted.

The relative density of hydraulics sand fill placed in embankment shall be as

follows:

(A) Top 600mm 90%

(B) Next 600mm 80%
(C) Below the Top 1200mm 70%

Sand fill placed by any method other than the hydraulic shall be compacted in
layers by a method approved by the Engineer's Representative to a density of not less

164
than 100% of the maximum dry density obtained in the British Standard Compaction
Test. Vibrative system of compaction is recommended.

In the case of hydraulic sand fill the Contractor shall construct all drains, ditches,
spillways, marginal bonds necessary for the proper protection of the works. Such drains,
marginal bonds etc., shall be constructed sufficiently in advance of the deposit of the
sand fill, so as to effectively drain and retain the sandfill and to prevent any of the
material from flowing into any harbours, creeks, canals, drains etc., or from causing any
damage or nuisance to persons or property. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
slip or settlements which may occur during the construction of the sand fill or the bunds,
drains, etc., and shall also be responsible for same during the maintenance period. The
Contractor shall make good such slips and settlements to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the full and efficient drainage of water resulting
from the hydraulic sand fill operation and shall construct such open drains as may be
necessary to drain all surface and rainwater, so as to avoid all ponding. The Contractor
shall make due allowance for settlement and drying out of the sand fill and for the
making good of same.

Before any hydraulic sand fill is commenced, the Contractor shall, in conjunction
with the Engineer's Representative, survey the site and mutually agree the surface
levels, and such agreement shall be recorded in writing by both parties. The levels shall
be taken on a grid with points at not exceeding 15 metres centres and the Contractor
shall construct concrete pilot pillars to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative
to enable the grid lines to be located during the filling operations. The Contractor shall
construct sufficient tell tales, consisting of 50mm x 50mm x 10mm angle of adequate
length with a flange of 900mm in diameter fixed at one end, all in non corrosive metal,
to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, to enable any subsidence of the
original ground level to be measured. The method of measurement of hydraulic sand fill
shall be on the basis of the volume of material placed as determined from the area filled
and the depth of fill to the finished level from the original ground level or the subsided
original ground level, as applicable. Should any dispute arise as to the subsided original
ground level, as indicated by the tell tales, then the same shall be determined by the
taking of borings or by the digging of trial pits. Payment for trial pits shall be from the
appropriate item, in the bills of quantities. Where no such item is included, payment will
be from appropriate provisional sum. If option of trial pit is chosen shuttering shall be
provided to check the collapse tendencies of sand fill.

Hydraulic sand fill shall be deposited in layers as directed by the Engineer, but in
any case the thickness of such layers shall not exceed the limits stipulated as follows:
(A) First Layer not exceeding 450mm in thickness

(B) Second Layer not exceeding 750mm in thickness.

(C) All subsequent Layers not exceeding 900mm in thickness

The finished level shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the

Engineer, and shall be agreed as the result of a joint survey carried out by the

165
Contractor and the Engineer's Representative. A tolerance of 75mm above or below
the finished level may be permitted during pumping operations, but the same shall be
made good by subsequent grading or dozing to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative and to the tolerances stipulated for the sub grade. Without limiting his
commitments under the terms of the contract, the Contractor shall not be required to
make good any normal expected settlement of the original ground levels after
completion of the sand fill. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all the
foregoing provisions in his rates and prices for sand filling. Should the Engineer so desire
the Contractor shall place stock piles of material in quantities and areas as directed.
Payment for theses stock pile shall be made at the tendered rates and prices for
hydraulic sand fill.

EXCAVATION TO BE KEPT FREE FROM WATER 6128.

The Contractors shall keep all excavations free from water and shall at their own
expense construct such temporary grips and ditches and provide and maintain pumps as
may be found necessary for this purpose. Excavation free from water may be possible
if underground design formation level is not close to the water level.

SLIPS 6129. 滑坡

During the carrying out of excavations the Contractors shall limit vertical and
other temporary faces to such heights as are suitable to the nature of the soil exposed.
If in the course of the works, any slips, slides, or subsidences occur and such slips,
slides or subsidences extend beyond the lines and slopes and below the levels shown
on the drawings, the excess excavation will not be paid for and the Contractors shall at
their own expenses carry away such materials and make good in a manner satisfactory
to the Engineer's Representative and without extra charge.

UNSUITABLE MATERIAL BELOW FORMATION LEVEL 6130.

Where unsuitable ground or other unsuitable material is found below formation

level or below the slope of cuttings under areas of fill, this shall be excavated and
disposed off as directed by the Engineer's Representative, and the space left void shall
be backfilled with selected fill and compacted to at least 100% of the M.D.D. achieved in
the British Standard compaction test.

Payment shall be made under this clause for any material removed as unsuitable
soil only on the written direction of the Engineer's Representative provided such
unsuitable material could not have been discovered during the tendering period.

Measurement for this item shall be on the compacted backfill only and payment
for this work will be at the rates entered in the bill of quantities for earthworks.

SWAMP AREAS 6131.

Certain existing swampy areas on the proposed line of reconstruction may have

166
been delineated on the drawings.

The attention of the Contractor is particularly drawn to the fact that, under the
provisions of this specification, he is responsible for the safe passing of traffic in such
areas and that the cost of any diversions which may be required for this purpose are
deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.

The Contractor shall programme and execute his earthmoving operations such as
to complete the embankments in swamp areas prior to initiating work or other
embankments and to allow minimum settlement periods as specified in volume III, or as
agreed by the Engineer to elapse between first raising the embankments to the specified
finished surface level in the area or such other level as may be required and the start of
the construction of any part of the pavements, drainage or other permanent works in
the area.

Prior to, during and subsequent to the settlement periods specified above the
Engineer's Representative will carry out investigations in filled sections of swamp areas
to collect information on which to base predictions of the magnitude and rate of
settlement which will occur after completion of the works. Such investigations will be
undertaken, to ascertain, inter alia, the strength, compressibility of ground beneath
embankment, ground water levels and vertical settlements and they will be made by
means of various measuring devices. The results of such tests shall be used by the
Engineer's Representative to predict the equitable surcharge to facilitate early maximum
settlement.

The measuring devices shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor using
methods approved by the Engineer. They shall be read by the Engineer's
Representative. The Contractor shall supply such skilled and unskilled assistance as the
Engineer may direct.

The Contractor shall take all practicable precautions to prevent damage or

disturbance to measuring devices. Should any damage or disturbance occur the
Contractor shall make good same at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any reduction in the
efficiency of his operation and for any delays or stoppages caused thereto by the
installation, testing and reading of the various measuring devices and the avoidance of
damage or disturbance thereto.

As a result of the investigations described above, The Engineer may direct the
Contractor to take measures to reduce or to compensate for settlements which will
occur in filled sections of swamp areas after completion of the Works. Such measures

167
shall consist of :

(i) the surcharging of filled areas so as to accelerate the consolidation of foundation

materials and/or

(ii) providing settlement allowances in the finished levels of the pavements, drainage
and other permanent works constructed in the filled sections of swamp areas.

If so ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct surcharge loads of

fill in such locations and to such dimensions and levels as the Engineer directs. The
Contractor shall reschedule his filling operations in other parts of the Site to compensate
for the fill materials so diverted and to provide for the incorporation in the works of fill
material made available on subsequent removal of the surcharge loads.
Except as provided hereunder, surcharge loads shall remain in position for such
periods as the Engineer directs, after which the Contractor shall remove the surcharge
loads, incorporate the fill material in the works and make good to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative the area on which the surcharge load was formed; provided
that in no case will the Engineer direct that surcharge load in any area should be left in
position for a period extending beyond the end of the settlement allowed for that area in
accordance with Volume III.

The Contractor shall incorporate such settlement allowances as the Engineer

considers necessary in the finished levels of the pavement, drainage works and other
permanent works in filled sections of swamp areas. Settlement allowances shall be
provided by the addition or removal of fill material and not by varying the dimensions of
pavements, drainage works or other permanent works.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any reduction in the
efficiency of his operations and for any delays, stoppages or inconveniences caused
thereto (directly or indirectly) by the operation of this Clause.

The Contractor will be required to lay a satisfactory running surface of gravel or

other approved material on the completed earthworks. Further construction shall not be
permitted until all settlement has effectively ceased to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Before further construction continues the road formation shall be made up to the
specified levels. The extent of such areas shall be defined by the Engineer's
Representative before construction starts, and the measurement of earthworks within
the area declared by the Engineer's Representative to be a settlement area shall be the
net cubic contents of the voids formed by the removal of the material excavated in
accordance with the specification and drawings, no allowance being made for bulking.
The rates entered in the Bill of Quantities under the various items for excavation shall
include for the excavation of material and the loading, transport, deposition and
compaction as specified, as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.

FORMATION LEVEL 6132.

The formation level shall be the level of the embankment or cutting in its final

168
shape after completion of the earthworks and before the superimposition of the sub
base course, base course, or hard shoulder, and before the surface material is applied.

PREPARATION OF FORMATIONS 6133. 路床顶部准备

All earthworks shall be graded to provide the required formation profile. The
Contractor may elect to leave sufficient material above formation level to protect the
formation and to delay the excavation of this material until preparation of the formation
can follow immediately. The subsequent removal and disposal of such material shall be
at the Contractor's expense. Cuttings other than those in rock shall not be excavated to
formation level in wet weather. If suitable material below formation level is damaged by
any cause such material shall be removed and replaced by properly compacted general
fill and such operations shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Not less than 150 metres of completed subgrade shall be maintained in advance
of the paving operations at all times. Failure to comply with the provisions of this
paragraph will be deemed sufficient cause for stopping the paving operations until this
provision is met.

During the preparation of the formation, suitable motor graders shall be used
and shall be operated by highly experienced operators. Payment for work done under
this clause will be deemed to be included in the tendered rates for earthworks.

TRIMMING OF SLOPE 6134.

All slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be trimmed to the batters specified
by the Engineer's Representative with a permissible tolerance of plus or minus 50mm
measured at right angles to the batter. Payment shall be deemed to be included in the
tendered rates for earthwork.

EXCAVATION IN ROCK 6135.

When solid rock is encountered in excavations, the Contractor shall excavate and
dispose of such material as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor
shall not use explosives for excavations in rock without the prior written approval of the
Engineer. Where such approval is given, the Contractor shall provide proper magazines
in suitable positions for the storage of explosives and take all necessary precautions to
prevent any unauthorized issue or improper use of any explosives, to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall comply with any regulations
regarding the times for blasting, sizes of blasts, loading of shots, provision of blasting
nets, etc., that the Engineer's Representative may prescribe.

Blasting may be prohibited if, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, it

will be dangerous to persons or property or to any finished or existing work.

"Solid Rock" shall mean any material having a volume greater than 0.30 cubic
metres that, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, can only be removed by
the use of sledge hammers and wedges (if removed by hand) or explosives and
pneumatic tools (if removed mechanically). Soft or decomposed material or boulders in

169
excess of 0.30 cubic metres which can be removed by dozing, pushing, rooting, ripping,
scarifying or by the use of other normal earth
moving plant shall not be classified as "Solid Rock".

Payment will be per cubic metre of "solid rock" excavated and disposed of as
directed by the Engineer's Representative. Should any difference of opinion arise
between the Contractor and the Engineer's Representative the matter shall be referred
to the Engineer, whose decision shall be final and shall be obtained before the material
is disposed of or covered up. If the Contractor is still not satisfied, the matter may be
referred to an Arbitrator.

Any material having a volume of less than 0.30 cubic metres or material, which
in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative can be removed by dozing, pushing,
rooting, ripping scarifying or by the use of other normal earthmoving plant shall be
classified as earthworks, and the cost of such operations shall be deemed to be included
in the tendered rates and prices for earthworks.

BACKFILLING OF EXISTING BORROW PITS 6136.

Existing borrow pits adjacent to the roadway shall be backfilled as and where
directed by the Engineer's Representative.

Such areas shall be backfilled with approved soil which shall be thoroughly
compacted throughout by power rammers or other approved methods, to a density not
greater than insitu density of the soil to promote vegetation growth as obtained in the
British Standard Compaction Test.

Measurement for this item shall be on the compacted backfill only, based on
initial and final levels, and payment under the relevant items of the bill of quantities,
shall include for benching and providing, placing, watering and compacting the material
to the required density as specified herein.

EMBANKMENT IN BAD GROUND 6137.

The Contractor shall bring to the notice of the Engineer’s Representative cases
where embankments are required to be sited over swamp or unstable ground. Where
such conditions exist the Engineer's Representative may direct that the first lift of fill
material before compaction can be increased to 450mm in order to establish firm ground
for the compacting plant. This may not be done without the written approval of the
Engineer's Representative and even if such approval is given, the Contractor is not
relieved of his responsibility to provide a well compacted stable embankment of the
same standard as the rest of the works.

BACKFILLING 6138.

No backfilling shall be carried out until the Engineer's Representative has

170
inspected and passed the culverts and other structures which will be covered up.

The excavation containing culverts will be backfilled in layers not exceeding

150mm thickness with materials approved by the Engineer's Representative.

When existing pipes and conduits have insufficient earth cover during
embankment construction, the Contractor shall protect them against damage by his
equipment and operations. The embankment above and for a distance of not less than
600mm each side of such facilities shall be compacted by such means as the Contractor
may choose so as to prevent damage to such facilities. The Contractor shall repair or
make good any damage to such facilities that may be caused by his operations.

Embankments constructed in the vicinity of bridges and culverts prior to the

completion of abutments and wing walls shall terminate temporarily on slopes 5:1 or
flatter which shall be located so as to allow ample space for construction of the structure
and for placing and compacting the backfill and remaining embankment adjacent
thereto. Embankment around and adjacent to abutments, culverts and piers shall be
placed simultaneously on both sides thereof to approximately, the same elevation.

Any space over the culverts and between the sides of the culvert and the walls of
the excavations shall be filled with selected material in a damp state approximating to its
optimum moisture content. The material shall be thoroughly compacted by hand or
power rammers to not less than the dry density specified in Clause 6125. The cost of all
backfilling as specified herein shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and
prices.

GRASSING OF EMBANKMENTS CUTTINGS, VERGES, ETC. 6139.

On completion of the verges, margins, embankments, etc., or at such other

times as may be approved for the purpose of planting, all areas specified to be grassed
shall be sown with broadcast seed or individual planting at 225mm centres and running
parallel to the centre line of the road. The Contractor shall be responsible for watering
and maintenance and for ensuring that the grass takes root, spreads and forms a thick
mat.

Except where otherwise directed, the Contractor shall keep grassed areas
mowed or cut until the commencement of the period of maintenance. The grass shall
be cut three times during the growing season, or as often as it may be necessary.

The condition of grassed areas will be assessed by the Engineer's Representative

immediately after the third cutting. Areas which have not become established to his
satisfaction for any reason whatsoever shall be made good to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative.

ROADSIDE DRAINAGE DITCHING 6140.

Roadside drainage ditches shall be constructed to the lines, grades and levels

171
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative. Where ditches
collect surface water along their length and if he considers it necessary, the side at
which the water enters the ditch shall be protected by constructing a bund and by
allowing the water to enter the ditch only at specific points through the bund.

Where the gradient of the road is flatter than 1 in 120 the ditch shall be
deepened to provide an adequate drainage slope. All ditches with a gradient steeper
than 1 in 120 shall be paved in the invert with small stones embedded in the bottom of
the ditch and for a height of 150mm up the sides. Pitching with small stones if ordered
by the Engineer' Representative shall be paid for separately.

Payment for roadside drainage ditches is covered under earthworks and shall
include for all trimming, shaping and bunding required.
Spoil excavated from drains shall, where suitable be incorporated in the filling,
and the quantity so used shall be deducted from the quantity of fill. No spoil shall be
placed within 2 metres of the drain.

Use shall be made of suitable roadside ditches at the discretion of the Engineer's
Representative.

CONCRETE DRAINS 6141.

Concrete drains shall be constructed to the lines and levels shown on the
drawings, or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and shall comply in all
respects with the requirements stipulated for mass and reinforced concrete. The grade
of concrete and quantity and size of reinforcement to be used shall be as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The invert of drains shall be trowelled to a
smooth finish and the inside face of walls shall be left with a fair finish as obtained from
wrot shuttering.

Where possible, spoil excavated for the construction of the drains, if suitable,
shall be incorporated in the filling and payment will be made, once only, under the
appropriate item for earthworks in the Bill of Quantities. Otherwise, the material
excavation shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer's Representative, and paid
for under the appropriate item in the Bill of Quantities.

SUB-SOIL DRAINS 6142.

All water appearing on the formation as surface water held in depressions and
potholes and sub-soil water which in any way affects the stability of the formation or
pavement shall be carried to the side drains in rubble or stone filled drains, to the
approval of the Engineer's Representative.

Graded stone filling shall be hard and durable and shall consist of broken rock or
gravel. It shall be well graded with a maximum size of 75mm and the percentage
passing a 38mm sieve shall not exceed 5%. Graded stone filling shall be placed in layers
not exceeding 225mm loose depth and shall be well rammed as filling proceeds. Stone
filled drains on side slopes shall be constructed prior to any surface soiling and grassing

172
 Pipes for sub soil drains shall be mainly slotted flexible PVC pipes or perforated
concrete pipes with ogee joints or perforated corrugated metal pipes. They shall be laid
with dry joints. The pipe trenches shall be filled with graded stone filling which shall be
carefully placed and packed in layers not exceeding 225mm in loose depth.

Stone filled pipe drains on side slopes and margins shall be constructed prior to
any surface soiling and grassing. Payment for work done under this clause shall be at
the rate entered in the Bill of Quantities.

CONSTRUCTION IN PERCHED WATER AREAS 6142A.

A sure way of avoiding drainage problems of perched or spring water is to carry

out a proper soil survey of the area concerned and modify or re-adjust either the vertical
or horizontal alignment or (both) to make the formation level far away as much as
possible from the perched water table or under ground springs. If circumstances make
this impossible the following procedure may be useful:

Once the formation has been prepared water should be pumped out of the
section to allow perforated pipes to be laid across the section in close proximity to
enable water flow into it, and get channelled out of the roadway. Thereafter the pipes
are to be covered with specially selected granular materials which will serve as weep
holes over and above the perched water level, before approved fill is laid and compacted
to not less than 95% MDD at a moisture not less than 2% above OMC using sheepsfoot
(Taper-foot) roller up to a depth of 600mm below formation level, thereafter 100%
compaction at OMC of compactive effort will apply. Compaction depth shall not be
greater than 150mm per layer.

In the alternative water proof material of uniform thickness (gauge) polytene

sheets may be used to wrap the fill placed after the application of the weep pipes and
selected fill to prevent ingress of water into the pavement. This method

may be necessary particularly if the crown of the road is within one metre from
the level of the perched water table.

CUT-OFF DITCHING 6143.

Cut-off ditching, metre drains turn-outs and culvert outfalls, including bunding as
and where required by the Engineer's Representative shall be constructed where shown
on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer' Representative and will be paid for
under the appropriate items of the bill of quantities. Payment shall include for all
trimming, shaping and bunding.

EXCAVATION FOR CULVERTS 6144.

Excavation for drainage works shall be carried out to the lines, levels and depths
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and in such a

173
manner that the stability of the sides and bottom of the excavation is ensured.
Excavation shall be kept from water until, in the opinion of the Engineer's
Representative, concrete or other works therein are sufficiently set and any filling has
been completed.

Trenches shall be excavated through natural ground, or, where pipe culvert
structures are to be placed under embankment, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise
directed, complete the construction of the embankment to a minimum elevation of
300mm above the elevation of the top of pipe. The pipe trench shall then be excavated
and the pipe placed in the trench. The width of trenches at any point below the top of
the pipe shall not be greater than the outside diameter of the pipe at the bell or bank
plus 900mm to permit satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding
material under the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed within
the trench width as specified. Care shall be taken not to over excavate. Where trench
widths are exceeded, redesign with a resultant increase in cost of stronger pipe or
special installation procedures will be necessary. Cost of this redesign and increased
cost of pipe or installation shall be borne by the Contractor.

The width of trench for structural concrete pipe culverts shall not exceed the
widths shown on the Drawings or as specified above, and these widths shall be
maintained to a height of at least 300mm above the top of the barrels of the pipes.

Where directed by the Engineer's Representative soft material below the

required levels of excavation shall be removed and filled to the required level with
compacted granular bedding material or concrete grade 15N/mm².

Where excavation is taken out to a greater depth than is necessary or there is

over excavation at the sides of the trench, the Contractor shall fill in the excess
excavation at his own expense with 10 N/mm2 concrete or with compacted granular
bedding as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

Rock encountered in trenches for pipes shall be excavated to the depths shown
on the Drawings. Where no depths are shown it shall be excavated to a depth 150mm
below the intended level of the bottom of the pipes and replaced with granular bedding
or concrete grade 10 N/mm2 as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

For measurement purposes, depths shall be measured from formation level in

the case of cuttings and from the original ground level where the new carriageway is on
embankments.

The rate for excavation shall include for any extra width over the net width
which the Contractor may consider to be necessary. The rate for excavation shall also
include for any timbering, shoring, strutting, or pumping if required, backfilling and
compaction and for the disposal of surplus material as directed by the Engineer's
Representative to a distance not exceeding 1.6 kilometres. Soft yielding material shall
be dug out and replaced with approved selected material compacted to 100% of its
maximum dry density obtained in the West African Compaction Test. All backfilling shall
be compacted to 100% of its maximumdry density obtained in the West African

174
Compaction Test.

DEMOLITION OF EXISTING CULVERTS 6145.

The Contractor will be required to excavate and demolish existing culverts as and
where directed by the Engineer's Representative. Materials from the demolition will be
disposed off as directed by the Engineer's Representative. Where the culvert has been
demolished the area will be backfilled with suitable material as specified in the relevant
clause of the specification.

Payment will be made under the appropriate items in the Bill of Quantities, and
shall include for excavation, demolition and disposal of materials and backfilling, all as
specified herein.

NEW PIPE CULVERTS 6146.

Where specified on the drawings, all pipe culverts shall be bedded on and
haunched with a minimum of 150mm thickness of Grade 15 N/mm² Quality Concrete.

(a) Unreinforced concrete pipes shall comply with B.S 556. They shall be
unreinforced standard pipes and the following shall apply:-

(1) Joints shall be ogee type

(2) High alumina or sulphate resisting cement will not be required.

(3) Samples of aggregate will not be required.

(4) Tests other than the manufacturer's quality control tests will not be
required.

(5) No variation will be allowed in the time of maturing.

(6) Certificates in accordance with Clause 8 of Appendix A will be required.

(7) Admixtures will be prohibited.

Unreinforced concrete pipes shall be surrounded with concrete and the pipe
trenches shall be filled to natural subgrade level with special granular fill.

No concrete shall be placed around any length of pipe until the Engineer's
Representative has approved the laying and jointing of same.

Special granular fill shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not
exceeding 250mm loose depth.

175
(b) Structural concrete pipes shall comply with B.S 556. They shall be reinforced
extra strength pipes of the Class specified on the Drawings and the following
shall apply:-

(1) Joints shall be flexible spigot and socket type with rubber gaskets and
performance data will not be required.

(2) High alumina or sulphate resisting cement will not be required.

(3) Samples of aggregate will not be required

(4) Tests other than the manufacturer's quality control tests will not be
required.

(5) Certificates in accordance with Clause 8 of Appendix A will be required.

(6) Admixtures shall be prohibited.

Pipes shall be laid true to line and level and each pipe shall be separately boned
between sight rails. Immediately prior to laying, pipes shall be examined for defects
and no defective materials shall be incorporated in the Works. Where non
standard lengths of unreinforced concrete pipe are required at catch pits, headwalls,
outfalls and the like, the pipes shall be cut and the ends made good. Where it is
necessary to cut structural concrete pipes, they shall be sawn and the cut end shall be
cast into the manhole catch pit headwall etc. so that at least 75mm concrete cover is
provided.

Ogee joints shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying and 1:2 cement sand
mortar shall be evenly applied to the ends so as to completely fill the joint. The pipes
shall then be properly drawn together, the outside of the joint shall be neatly pointed
and any surplus mortar on the inside of the joint shall be removed.

Structural concrete pipes shall be laid and joined in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and the methods recommended for flexible jointed
pipes in National Building Studies Special Report 35 'Pipe Laying Principles'.

Care shall be taken to ensure that excess cement mortar and earth or other
material is thoroughly cleaned out of the pipes. Cleaning shall be carried out during the
laying of the pipes by drawing a timber badger through the pipes at a distance of 2
pipes lengths from the last made joint or by other means acceptable to the Engineer's
Representative. The timber badges shall be not less than 450mm long and shall have a
diameter 12mm less than the internal diameter of the pipe. The badger shall only be
removed from the pipe in the presence of the Engineer's Representative.

If for any reason, the invert level of a pipe culvert is such that the depth of cover
at the edge of the pavement is less than 600mm or the diameter of the pipe, then, on
the instruction of the Engineer's Representative the culvert shall be given a complete

176
surround 150mm thickness, of Grade 15 N/mm² quality concrete in place of a concrete
haunch, and payment shall be made for same at the appropriate rates in the Bills of
Quantities.

The outlets of pipe culverts shall be pitched with stone to a minimum length of 2
metres from the face of the culvert or as directed, and the level of the pitching shall be
at least 75mm below the culvert invert. The width of pitching shall be decided on site
by the Engineer's Representative. The inlets of culverts shall be pitched only where
directed by the Engineer's Representative. In cases where pitching is unobtainable the
Engineer's Representative may order a 150mm thick apron of Grade 15 N/mm² concrete
to be constructed.

Where directed catchpits of the required internal dimensions shall be constructed

at the inlets of culverts. The inverts and walls shall be of Grade 15 N/mm² quality
concrete, reinforced if directed.

The backfilling shall be of approved material, compacted as specified in the

relevant clauses of this specification.

a. Backfilling trenches: After the bedding has been prepared and the pipe
installed, selected material from excavation or borrow pit, at a moisture content that will
facilitate compaction, shall be placed along both sides of the pipe in layers not
exceeding 150mm in compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both
sides of the pipe for its full length. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction
of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted
with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting shall
continue until the fill has reached an elevation of at least 300mm above the top of the
pipe. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and
rolling, or compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in compacted layers not
exceeding 150mm. Tests for density will be made as necessary and directed by the
Engineer, at no expense to the Contractor.

b. Backfilling pipe in fill sections: The fill material shall be uniformly spread
in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not exceeding 150mm in compacted
layer and shall be compacted by rolling parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or
ramming. Prior to commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a
height of 300mm above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of not less than twice
the outside diameter on each side of the pipe, or 4m whichever is less. After the
backfill has reached at least 300mm above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill
shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm.

c. Construction machinery: In compacting by rolling or operating heavy

equipment parallel with the pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided.
Movement of construction machinery over a culvert or a storm drain at any stage of the
construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any pipe damaged thereby shall be
repaired or replaced at the option of the Engineer's Representative and at the expense
of the Contractor.

177
EXTENSION OF EXISTING PIPE CULVERTS 6147.

Existing pipe culverts shall be extended to the lengths shown on the drawings or
as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The extension shall be of a similar
diameter to the existing culvert, and constructed in a like manner. Where existing
headwalls occur within the carriageway width they shall be removed to a minimum
depth of 300mm below new road level and the new road constructed to the profile
shown on the drawings.

The existing culvert and the new extensions shall be cleaned out and flushed as
necessary on completion to clear all dirt, cement mortar and other obstruction to allow
the free passage of water through its full internal area.

If so directed by the Engineer, the existing culverts which are to be retained and
do not already have a complete surround or haunch of concrete as required, shall be
dug out and the surround or haunch completed by 150mm of concrete as specified for
new culverts.

ACCESS CULVERTS 6148.

Access culverts shall if sufficient cover is not available for pipe culverts, be
constructed in the form of a small slab or box culverts to the grade, sizes and
dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
The roof and floor slabs shall consist of grade 25 N/mm² concrete reinforced as shown
on the drawings. The walls shall consist of grade 10 N/mm² mass concrete.
Construction shall comply with all relevant clauses of the specification or such
modifications as the Engineer may decide. The headwalls shall be constructed of
precast concrete blocks with a 6:1 sand cement mix.

BOX CULVERTS 6149.

Box culverts shall be constructed to the grades, sizes and dimensions shown on
the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer's Representative, and the finished surface
shall be smooth and regular free from flaws, air holes and excrescences and with a
constant grade.

The grades of concrete and quantity and size of reinforcement to be used shall
be as shown on the drawings and shall comply in all respects with the requirements
stipulated for mass and reinforced concrete.

Culvert construction shall comply in all respects with the requirements of this
specification or such modification thereof as the Engineer may decide.

EXTENSIONS TO EXISTING BOX CULVERTS 6150.

The Engineer shall provide the Contractor with additionaldrawings for the
construction of the extensions to the existingsmall section box culverts. Measurement of
the works incorporated in these extensions shall be as for new reinforced concrete box

178
culverts.

The existing culvert and the new extensions, shall be cleaned out and flushed as
necessary on completion to clear all dirt, cement mortar and other obstructions to allow
the free passage of water through its full internal area.

CORRUGATED METAL OR “ARMCO” CULVERTS 6151.

Where corrugated metal culverts are specified, they ORshall be of galvanized

corrugated metal pipes or pipe arches of the"armco" or other approved type complying
with the cross-section and gauge specified. The pipes or pipe arches shall be assembled
in convenient lengths in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or as directed
by the Engineer's Representative. Before laying, care must be taken to ensure that the
bottom of the trench or if laid under embankments, the prepared bed, is accurately
graded and compacted to provide a solid uniform bearing for the pipes or pipe arches
and to ensure this the Engineer's Representative may direct that a 300mm thick
compacted layer of approved material be constructed. The width of the trench shall be
such that a minimum of 300mm is left between the pipe or pipe arch and the side of the
trench. Back filling shall be of approved material laid in uniform layers of 150mm in
depth and compacted to 100% of its maximum dry density achieved in the West African
Standard Compaction Test.

For multiple structures, the minimum clearance between each pipe or pipe arch
shall be not less than half of the maximum cross
sectional width of the pipe or pipe arch. The minimum depth of compacted cover
(excluding the base course) over any pipe or pipe arch shall be at least 300mm. The
maximum depth of fill over any pipe or pipe arch shall not exceed the manufacturer's
recommendation for the particular gauge of culvert used.

Corrugated metal pipes culverts and channels shall comply with the materials
section Standard Specification for Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe, Designation M36
60 of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials except
that:
(i) The pipes culverts and channels shall be manufactured from steel
complying with B.S 1449: Part Al, or Part l B with copper content when
required at 0. 2 per cent minimum.

(ii) The pipes culverts and channels shall be coated with spelter complying
with B.S 729: Part l, alternatively the pipes may be manufactured from
steel sheet complying with B.S 2989.

(iii) The pipes and culverts shall be bitumen coated in the course of
manufacture as specified hereinbelow.

Where available, all culverts shall be factory coated with a double layer of
protective bitumen. Where the culverts are not factory coated, i.e. in the case of the
large diameter or multiple culverts, the Contractor shall apply two coats of approved
bitumen, as a protective measure, to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative,

179
and the Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for this in his tendered rates and
prices. If for any reason, such as the acidity of the sub soil water, the Engineer
considers any further protective measures to be necessary, the Contractor shall carry
out same as directed and shall be paid at rates to be mutually agreed between the
Engineer and the Contractor.

The Contractor shall take every precaution to ensure that the protective
coatings, including galvanizing, are not damaged in any way during transporting,
storing, assembling or laying of the culvert, and he shall make good any such damage to
the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative and at his own expense.

(1) Bitumen - Bitumen for coating shall have the following properties: as
in Table VI -3 below:

TABLE VI-3 QUALITY OF BITUMEN COATING

TEST TYEPE LIMIT PERCENT TEST METHOD

Bitumen soluble in cold

Carbon tetrachloride, not
less than 99.5 AASHTO T45

Loss in weight on heating

To 163ºC, not more than 1 AASHTO T47

Penetration of residue after

Heating compared with
Penetration of same sample
Before testing for loss on
Heating, not less than 85 AASHTO T49

INLETS AND OUTLETS OF CULVERTS 6152

The positions, lengths, dimensions and levels of all culverts including aprons shall
be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The
culvert shall be cleaned out and flushed as necessary on completion to clear all dirt, and
other obstructions to allow the free flow of water through its full internal cross
sectional area.

The outlets of all culverts shall be protected from erosion by stone pitching or
concrete to a minimum length of 2 metres from its face. The width of the pitching or
concrete shall be decided by the Engineer's Representative and a toe
wall 450mm deep shall be constructed at the edge of such pitching or concrete. The
inlets to culvert shall be similarly protected, only where directed by the Engineer.

Where the gradient of the roadside drainage ditch would be excessive if the ditch

180
were graded to the invert level of culverts, catchpits or balancing ponds shall be
constructed as and where directed by the Engineer's Representative. The catchpits shall
be constructed of mass concrete to such dimensions as required by the Engineer's
Representative.

CLEARING DRAINS AND CULVERTS 6153.

Before any drain or culvert is brought into use the Contractor shall ensure to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative that it is free from all extraneous material,
all such material being completely removed from the site.

During the period of maintenance the Contractor shall ensure that the drains and
culverts shall be kept clear of all obstructions and before the maintenance certificate is
granted all drains and culverts must be cleaned out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All costs incurred shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.

PITCHING 6154.

Pitching will be provided where shown on the drawings or as directed by the

Engineer's Representative. The stone used for pitching shall comply in all respects with
the requirements of this specification.

The pitching shall be either 150mm or 225mm thick as appropriate and if

directed or shown on the drawings shall be set in mortar comprising 1 part of cement to
4 parts of sand. The ground on which the pitching is to be placed shall be shaped and
compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative before the pitching is
laid. At the extremities of the pitching, toe
walls shall be formed in the same construction and they shall be carried down to a
depth of 450mm, or to such greater depth as may be specified on the drawings or by
the Engineer.

Pitching shall be measured per square metre of complete pitching and payment
will include for the supply of all materials, labour etc., and the construction of the
completed pitching shall be as specified in this Clause. Catchpits where required may
also be constructed in pitching stone laid in cement mortar as directed on site by the
Engineer's Representative, and measurement shall be per square meter of wall.
Payment for toe walls shall be based on the length of wall constructed and shall include
for excavation and backfilling.

APPROVAL OF METHOD 6155.

The Contractor shall not commence work on the sub grade, sub base course,
base course or surfacing until he has obtained the Engineer's Representative's approval
of the plant, materials and methods that he proposes for clearance, excavation, mixing,
transporting, heating, spreading, grading and compacting the same as appropriate
compaction tests will be required before such approval is granted.

181
 The foregoing provisions shall not prevent the Engineer from requiring the
Contractor to vary his plant, material or methods at any time during the execution of the
works, should he considers this essential for carrying out the contract. The Contractor
shall not vary plant, material or methods which have been approved by the Engineer's
Representative without previously obtaining his approval of such variation.

The Engineer or his Representative's approval of any of the Contractor's plants,

material or methods shall not at any time imply responsibility for the execution of the
work involved and the Contractor shall at all times be solely responsible for constructing
the sub grade, sub base, base and pavement surfacings in accordance with the
specification and drawings.

PREVENTION OF DAMAGE TO COMPLETED PAVEMENT 6156.

The Contractor shall ensure that the passage of any vehicle or plant over the
partially completed pavement or over the sub grade, sub base or base does not occasion
any rutting or other damage or disturbance to the partially completed works, and should
such rutting or other damage or disturbance occur, the Contractor shall make the same
good as directed by the Engineer's Representative at his own expense.

Vehicles and plant passing repeatedly over the partially completed pavement or
over the sub grade, sub base or base shall not be allowed to travel in a single track, but
such traffic shall be spread out over as great a width as practicable. There shall be no
storage or stockpiling of materials on top of partially completed pavements or on the
base, sub base or sub grade.

WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION 6157.

The Contractor shall provide all water necessary for the construction of the sub
grade, sub base, base and pavement surface. Such water shall be clean and free from
organic matters, waste matter or other harmful or deleterious substances, and shall be
obtained from an approved source.

The Contractor shall provide all plant necessary for conveying and distributing
water. Where it is necessary to increase the moisture content of materials comprising
the sub grade, sub base or base, the water shall be evenly sprinkled on the surface of
the soil by spraying machine of a type or types to be approved by the Engineer's
Representative, such machines being capable of uniformly distributing the water at a
known predetermined and constant rate.

ROLLERS 6158.

Smooth wheeled, sheepsfoot and pneumatic tyre rollers where employed

for compacting soils and pavement materials as detailed in subsequent clauses shall be
of a type and compacting effort approved by the Engineer's Representative and shall be
capable of achieving the specified degree of compaction. The compactive effort shall be
designated as the weight per centimetre width of rolling wheel, for the smooth wheeled
and pneumatic type rollers. The compactive effort of the sheepsfoot roller shall be

182
expressed dividing the total load of the roller by the foot area (square centimetre) in
contact on hard ground.

The distribution of wheels on any roller shall be such that the whole of the
ground surface within the width of the roller is loaded during each pass of the roller.

VIBRATORY COMPACTORS 6159.

Where vibratory compactors or power rammers are used on the works they shall
be of the type approved by the Engineer's Representative and shall be capable of
obtaining the specified degree of compaction approved.

TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR WIDENING OF EXISTING PAVEMENT 6160.

Where the exiting carriageway is to be widened on its existing alignment, the

Contractor shall excavate a trench with neat and vertical sides to each side of it to
contain the additional pavement construction required for the new carriage way width.
Each edge of the existing surfacing shall be cut-back as directed by the Engineer's
Representative on site, but such cut back will be kept to the minimum compatible with
the provision of a straight and clean sharp edge to the surfacing on the inside edge of
the trench. Payment for the excavation of the trenches including for the trimming back
of the existing surfacing and the disposal of all excavated material shall be made per
cubic metre of material excavated under the appropriate item for earthworks in the Bill
of Quantities.

Measurement shall be based on sections taken before and after excavation of the
trenches but payment shall not be made for excavation in excess of that specified and
required to receive the specified pavement.

The maximum amount of trench excavation shall be placed to fill and payment
shall be made once only as decided above.

PREPARATION OF SUB-GRADE 6161.

The sub grade whether in trench excavation or construction shall be graded and
compacted to such level as will permit the works to be constructed to the required
thickness and specified finished levels and tolerances.

Before it is compacted, the Engineer's Representative will inspect the sub-grade

and the Contractor shall notify the Engineer's Representative when each area of sub-
grade is ready for inspection, and shall allow reasonable time for the inspection to be
made. Wherever ordered by the Engineer's Representative, the Contractor shall
excavate any unsuitable material from below the sub-grade and shall deposit the same
as and where directed by the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall replace
the void with fill material approved by the Engineer's Representative. Payment will be
made in accordance with the relevant clause of this specification, excepting where the
unsuitable material has been imported by the Contractors.

183
 All loose pieces of stone or other material exceeding 75mm in size in any
dimension shall be removed from the surface of the subgrade before compaction is
commenced and disposed of as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

The Contractor shall then compact the whole of the subgrade by the use of
approved smooth wheeled, sheepsfoot or pneumatic tyred rollers, static or vibratory
type as approved by the Engineer's Representative.

Final compaction shall be by smooth wheeled roller. The density required shall
be 100 per cent of the maximum dry density obtained in the British Standard
Compaction Test.

Payment for compaction of sub grade will be made once only either through
earthworks items, or other appropriate items in the Bill of Quantities.

COMPLETION AND SHAPING OF SUB-GRADE 6162.

Immediately before the construction of the subbase course, the upper surface of
the sub grade shall be tested for smoothness and accuracy of formation and if any areas
are found to lack the required smoothness or accuracy, such areas shall be scarified,
reshaped, re-compacted as specified, or otherwise treated as the Engineer's
Representative may require until the required smoothness and accuracy is obtained.

The finished surface of the sub grade shall be left as smooth as possible and the
accuracy of finish in the longitudinal direction shall not vary at any point by more than
12mm from a 50 metre straight edge, placed in any position on the finished surface
parallel to the centre line. The transverse profile shall conform to the same accuracy
using a correctly shaped template instead of the straight edge. The level of any point
on the aforesaid surface shall not vary by more than 12mm from the finished level of
the pavement less the specified thickness of the pavement construction. Payment for all
of the work required by this clause shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates
and prices.

The requirements of this clause shall not be held to apply to the existing
bituminous surfacing scarified, shaped and recompacted on lengths of strengthening of
the existing alignment. Payment for all of the operations required under this clause
shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.

COMPLETION OF VERGES AND MEDIANS 6163.

On completion of the carriageway and hard shoulders, the verges and medians
shall be brought to finished level, shaped to the cross falls as shown on the drawings
and compacted so that the upper 150mm has a dry density of not less than 100% of the
maximum dry density as determined by the West African Standard Compaction Test.

Where the material forming the verges or medians is of such a nature that it is
liable to erosion, the Engineer may direct that the top 75mm of the verges or medians
be formed of cohesive lateritic soil, or other approved material, and the 75mm of filling

184
material below it shall be compacted in one operation to 100% of the maximum dry
density as determined by the West African Compaction Test. The selected lateritic soil
for the verges or medians shall be preferably a well graded lateritic soil with a plasticity
index of not less than 10 and not more than 20. Payment for this selected compacted
75mm of topping to the verges or medians shall be made under the appropriate item in
the Bill of Quantities.

The verges or medians shall be cleared of any windrows or heaps of material and
shall be graded evenly, as directed, so that water drains in the required manner. The
verges and medians shall be grassed, sealed or paved where directed by the Engineer.

STRIPPING TOPSOIL 6164.

Stripping topsoil shall apply only to those sections of the roadway to be

realigned; that is, where the proposed roadworks will not fall within the limits of the
existing roadworks. Only those areas of the new construction outside the existing
roadworks will be stripped of topsoil.

Before grading work is commenced the vegetation and underlying topsoil within
excavation and embarkment areas shall be stripped off to a depth of not less than
100mm and not more than 150mm below the existing ground surface. Stripped material
which is or may be made suitable for topsoiling shall be stored and used therefore if
needed. Stripped topsoil in excess of the quantity required for the Project topsoiling
shall be stored at locations specified for future use of the Engineer. Topsoil shall not be
stored in areas where it will interfere with surface drainage or with the conservation of
trees, shrubs and other vegetation that are to remain.

CATCHPITS AND CASCADES 6165.

Catchpits and cascades shall be constructed of in-situ concrete Grade 15N/mm²

as shown on the drawings. Unshuttered exposed concrete surfaces shall be finished with
a wooden float. The ends of pipes shall be properly built into the catahpits and
unreinforced concrete pipes shall be cut off flush with the inner surface of catchpits.

Excavation not occupied by the catchpit cascade or by adjacent pipe drains shall
be backfilled with the excavated material which shall be placed and compacted in layers
not exceeding 225mm loose depth to a dry density equivalent to that of the surrounding
ground. Should the excavated material become unsuitable for backfilling due to any
cause, the Contractor shall provide other suitable material for filling at his own expense.

(CLAUSES 6166 - 6179 INCLUSIVE NOT USED.)

TESTS

TESTS FOR THE SELECTION OF FILLING MATERIAL 6180.

The following tests shall be carried out on all material proposed for use as fill:

185
 (I) PLASTICITY TESTS

(II) GRADING TESTS

(III) DENSITY/MOISTURE CONTENT COMPACTION TESTS

(IV) LABORATORY C.B.R. TESTS.

Unless otherwise stated to the contrary, these tests shall be carried out as
described in section 1 of this specification.

TESTS FOR THE CLASSIFICATION OF COMPACTED SUB-GRADE AND FILLING

6181.

The tests listed below will normally be required to be carried out for each 2
kilometres of sub grade or each layer of fill. The numbers and types of tests listed
however, are given only as a guide to the Contractor for tender purposes and the actual
number and type of tests which will be carried out during the construction of the works
will be determined entirely at the discretion of the Engineer.

(I) CLASSIFICATION TESTS

2 NO. LIQUID LIMIT TESTS

2 NO. PLASTIC LIMIT TESTS

2 NO. SIEVE ANALYSIS TESTS

4 NO. BRITISH STANDARD COMPACTION TESTS

2 NO. LABORATORY C.B.R. TESTS AT THE SPECIFIED DENSITY AND

MOISTURE CONTENT.

(Il) CONTROL TESTS

20 NO. INSITU DRY DENSITY TESTS.

Except where otherwise stated to the contrary, these tests shall be carried out as
described in section 1 of this specification, or where no such description is given in
accordance with the appropriate British Standard, AASHTO and ASTM Standards.

The sieve analysis shall be carried out in accordance with the standards laid
down in the latest amended report of the "Lagos materials testing Conference", a copy
of which shall be made available to the Contractor on request, or as per the latest B.S
1377.

TRIAL SECTIONS TO DETERMINE TECHNIQUE 6182.

186
 The Contractor's attention is particularly drawn to the necessity for carrying out
trial sections with each type of proposed filling material prior to the start of the main
construction for the particular type of material, to determine the most efficient
technique, the most suitable compacted thickness of each layer and the suitability of the
proposed materials and plant, all as described in the Clause 1052 of this specification.

(CLAUSES 6183 - 6199 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (C) SUB-BASE COURSE, BASE COURSE ETC.

(1) LATERITE

GENERAL 6200.

In addition to any other clause of this specification, the following shall be

deemed to apply in particular to laterite sub base course and base course work, and
shall be read in conjunction with all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract
and this specification.

MATERIALS

MATERIALS FOR COMPACTED SUB-BASE COURSE AND BASE COARSE 6201.

All materials for the sub base course, base course and hard shoulders shall be
selected by the Contractor. Where a preliminary soil survey has been carried out by the
Engineer, a copy of the report on the soil survey shall be made available to the
Contractor. Where no such soil survey has been carried out the Contractor shall make
his own arrangements for the location of borrow pits and sources of materials, and the
cost of any survey shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices. The
soil survey report of the Engineer, when available, shall be used for guidance only, and
shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for executing the works in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract and this Specification. All selected material
shall be free of roots, vegetable matter, and other deleterious material and shall be
approved by the Engineer's Representative before its incorporation into the works.

Normally the minimum strength of such base course material shall not be less
than 80% C.B.R. value being determined at maximum dry density and optimum
moisture content unsoaked with either West African or Modified A.A.S.H.T.O.
compaction. However, where the Engineer's Representative considers it necessary on
account of perched water table or any other reasons, he may specify that a C.B.R. value
of 80% be obtained after at least 24 hours soaking. For construction on perched water
area see clauses 6142 and 6142A.

Base Course

187
The requirements below in Clauses 6250, 6251, and 6252 shall apply herein.

Sub-base Type 1

The sub-base material shall consist of pit run laterite, sand, or screening, and soil
of other similar binding or filler material and shall be obtained from approved sources.
The maximum dimensions of any particle shall not be greater than two thirds of the
compacted thickness of the layer in which it is to be placed. Oversize material shall be
removed by screens, grizzlies or by hand picking.

The gradation and soil constants shall comply to the requirements specified herein. The
material shall be free from vegetable matter, and excessive amount of lumps of clay,
and other objectionable or foreign substances.

Table VI-4 Gradation of Subbase Material:

Sieve Percent Passing by Weight

75mm 100
600µm 25-60
425µm 10-40
75µm 5-20

The percent by weight passing the No-75µm sieve shall be less than but
not greater than 35%. The material passing the 425µm sieve shall have a liquid
limit of not more than 35% and a plasticity index of not more than 12, as
determined by American Society for Testing Materials methods, serial designation D
432-39 and 424-39 respectively or as determined by test No 2 or 2A and test Nos 3 of
B.S 1377 (1975). Prior to approval of the subbase material a test section shall be
constructed to the thickness shown on the typical pavement section and compacted to
100 percent of maximum density. When the test section is compacted to 100
percent maximum density at optimum moisture content, the subbase material shall be
of such quality that it shall have the minimum CBR of 30% after at least 24 hours
soaking. Once established that the subbase meets the CBR quality requirement at 100
percent maximum density it shall be placed and compacted in the field to that density.

Subbase course, Type 2 轻交通使用

The minimum strength of material for Subbase Course type 2, shall not be less than
20% CBR after at least 24 hours of soaking, for light traffic.

The C.B.R. values shall be assessed in the same manner as for base course, at the
optimum moisture content and maximum dry density of the West African Compaction
Test.

At the Engineer's Representative discretion material with a liquid limit greater than 35%,
and a plasticity index greater than 12 may be disallowed for use as subbase course or

188
base course.

Subbase Course Type 3 不合格材料

The use of Substandard Material for Sub-base

If the Engineer's Representative is satisfied that good materials for base or subbase
course are not available, sub standard materials may be used adopting the following
guide lines.

Class A Materials

These are materials rejected either due to too much fine, silt, or clay content but slightly
fall short of strength specified.

(i) The material may be used by compacting it to a dry density slightly less than
maximum at moisture content slightly greater than OMC, to contain the tendency
for such material to swell or shrink due to cycle of weather. To make up for
strength deficiency, a ratio of strength proportion of the material to what is
specified shall be worked out and the depth of the subbase/base course
adequately increased to account for the deficiency.

(ii) On the other hand, where sand is available at economical rate, mechanical
stabilization shall be used to reduce the fines content thus increasing the
strength of the material.

It will be necessary to determine economic percentage of the sand required before the
method is put into use.

Sub-base Course - All Types

The gravels as excavated from the pits may contain oversize material and such material
must be broken down so that all material used in base course shall pass a 25mm sieve;
and that used in subbase shall pass a 50mm sieve. The work of breaking down or
disposal of such oversize material shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates
and prices.

ROCK LATERITE FOR SUB-BASE COURSE AND BASE BASE COURSE 6202.

Rock Laterite for base course shall be hard and durable and shall be from a
source approved by the Engineer’s Representative. Samples of the stone shall be
submitted to the Engineer’s Representative for his approval and shall be tested by
soaking the specimen in water for 96 hours to ensure they do not disintegrate. The
stone shall not be less than 225mm deep, and shall be not less than 230 sq.cm. base
area, where the thickness of the course is 225mm. The percentage of wear shall not
exceed 50% as determined by ASTM C131-51 procedure.

189
 Rock Laterite for blinding shall be clean crushed laterite aggregate graded from
5mm to dust from the same source as material for pitching, free from excessive clay or
silt.

(CLAUSES 6203 - 6204 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

WORKMANSHIP

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 6205. 操作顺序

The pavement construction for the roadway shall consist of the following as specified
herein and shown on the drawings:

(A) The scarifying of the subgrade where no filling is applied.

(B) The compacting of the subgrade.

(C) The laying and compacting of the sub base course and base course.

(D) The providing of prime and first coat bituminous surface dressing to the base
course of the carriageway if applicable.

BORROW PITS FOR SUB-BASE, BASE COURSE AND HARD-SHOULDER

MATERIALS 6206.

The Contractor shall arrange and pay for any compensations or other payments
whatsoever required for access to and occupation and use of the borrow pits for course
and selected shoulder materials. The Contractor shall clear subbase, base the areas and
remove and stockpile overburden to such depths as may be required by the Engineer's
Representative. Under no circumstances will payment be made for removal of
overburden. Materials used which may include the incorporation of suitable overburden
as directed shall be taken only from such areas and to such depths and in such a
manner as the Engineer's Representative shall direct. The Contractor shall at his own
expense remove and dispose of all unsuitable materials, the removal of materials may
require prior rooting and scarification and the Contractor shall be deemed to have
allowed for this in the tendered rates and prices. The material as excavated may not fall
within the required limits of grading for the completed pavement and the Contractor
shall be deemed to have included in the tendered rates and prices for any additional
work which may be required to bring the material within the specified limits when laid
and compacted in the road bed.

Borrow pits shall be worked and drained so as to obtain the maximum quantities
of available suitable materials and shall be finally drained, levelled, and topsoil replaced
all as specified and to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

Payment for all arrangements, compensation, operations and other requirements

of this clause shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.

190
 The width of the subbase course and base course shall be as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The compacted thickness of the subbase
course and base course is dependent on the C.B.R. values of the Sub
grade and that of the material used, and shall be as shown on the drawings or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer's Representative in accordance with the following
provisions:-

The specified combined thickness for the subbase course and the base course
has been derived from the pavement design diagram, curve E(RRL.RN/2503) based on
an anticipated minimum C.B.R. value (after at least 48 hours soaking) for the compacted
Sub grade. Where a C.B.R. value in excess of the anticipated value is achieved, then
compacted thickness of the Sub base course may be reduced at the discretion of the
Engineer's Representative and in accordance with curve E(RRL.RN/2803). Under no
circumstances shall the combined compacted thickness of the pavement be reduced to
less than 150mm.

Before compaction, the subbase course and base course material shall be
brought to the optimum moisture content for the compaction effort of the plant to
achieve the density specified. Where the existing moisture content of the material is
higher than this, the soil shall be allowed to dry out by aeration; where it is lower
sufficient water shall be added to the soil such that uniform wetting of the material to
optimum moisture content is achieved.

Compaction of the subbase course and the base course shall be carried out
separately, and shall begin immediately the soil has been brought to the required
moisture content and shall be carried out rapidly until completion. The compaction of
the subbase course and base course shall be carried out to a dry density not less than
100% of that achieved in the West African Standard Compaction Test at optimum
moisture content, but the compaction of the base course may be carried out to a dry
density of not less than 100% of that achieved in the Modified A.A.S.H.O. Compaction
Test at optimum moisture content, if so directed by the Engineer.

The base course shall be finished to camber or cross fall as shown on the
drawings or as otherwise directed by the Engineer's Representative.

COMPLETION OF SUB-BASE COURSE 6207.

Immediately before the construction of the base-course, the Sub base course
shall be tested for thickness, surface finish, and accuracy, and if any areas are found to
lack the required thickness surface finish, or accuracy or specified density, such areas
shall be scarified, recompacted to the specified density or otherwise treated as the
Engineer's Representative may require until the required thickness smoothness accuracy
or density is obtained.

The finished surface of the Sub base course shall be left as smooth as possible
and the accuracy of finish in the longitudinal direction shall not vary at any point by

191
more than 12mm for a 5 metre straight edge, placed in any position on the finished
surface parallel to the centre line.
The transverse profile shall conform to the same accuracy using a correctly shaped
template instead of straight edge. The level of any point on the aforesaid surface shall
not vary by more than 12mm from the finished level of the pavement less the specified
thickness of the base construction.

The thickness of the Sub-base course at any point shall not be less than the
specified thickness by more than 12 mm The Contractor shall include in his rates the
digging of trial holes, and making good same, to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative.

COMPLETION OF BASE COURSE 6208.

Immediately before the application of the surfacing the base course shall be
tested for thickness, smoothness and accuracy as specified below and if any areas are
found to lack the required thickness, smoothness and accuracy or the specified density,
such areas shall be scarified, reshaped and recompacted with additional approved
material added where necessary or otherwise treated as the Engineer's Representative
may require until the required thickness smoothness, accuracy or density is obtained.

The finished surface of the base shall be left as smooth as possible and the
accuracy of finish in the longitudinal direction shall not vary at any point by more than
5mm from a 3.0 metre straight edge, placed in any position on the finished surface
parallel to the centre line. The transverse profile shall conform to the same accuracy
using a correctly shaped template instead of the straight edge. The level of any point
on the aforesaid surface shall not vary by more than 5mm from the finished level of the
pavement. The thickness of the base course at any point shall not be less than the
specified thickness by more than 12mm and the average thickness over a length of 0.4
kilometres shall be equal to, or in excess of the specified thickness. The Contractor shall
include in his rates for digging necessary trial holes, and making good same, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

In the process of completing the base course it may be necessary to place

material to a greater thickness than that specified and to grade it to the specified finish.
In so doing excess material will be wasted. Payment for this and for all other operations
required to obtain the specified finish shall be deemed to be included in the tendered
rates and prices.

ROCK LATERITE FOR BASE COURSE 6209.

The base course for the carriageway shall consist of approved rock laterite as
specified, laid to the required total thickness after compaction. The lumps of rock
laterite shall be tightly wedged across the prepared formation and interstices shall be
filled with approved spalls from the same source as the rock laterite before thoroughly
rolling. Rolling shall be carried out with a roller weighing not less than 58 kilograms per
centimetre width of roll and any depression or surface irregularity which occurs during
rolling shall be corrected with approved crushed quarry fines as specified, watered and

192
again rolled with a roller weighing not less than 58 kilograms per centimetre width of
roll.
No blinding shall be done until the rock laterite bottoming has been inspected and
approved by the Engineer's Representative. When completed the surface of the base
course shall be smooth and even, free from irregularities or loose material and true to
cross section, line and level as shown on the drawings.

If any clay or mud appears to the surface of the foundation, the Contractor shall
without additional charge dig out the affected areas of such depth as directed and make
good the foundation and finish in conformity with the adjacent surface.

SURFACING OF BASE COURSE 6210.

The base course of the carriageway shall, where applicable, be provided with a
prime coat and other surfacing as specified in the relevant clauses of this specification.
The surfacing shall be laid as soon as possible after the construction of the base course.

PREPARATION OF BASE COURSE TO RECEIVE BITUMEN PRIME COAT 6211.

Immediately before spraying of the prime coat, the surface of the base course
shall be swept clean, and all loose dust, dirt and the like removed. The Engineer’s
Representative may also direct that any very smooth surface to which the surfacing is
unlikely to adhere, be roughened with wire brushes or other approved means.

If any weak areas are found they shall be cut out and refilled with base course
material and rolled to correct cross-section and gradient.

The surface shall be slightly damped before the application of the prime coat
surface.

(CLAUSE 6212 - 6214 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

TESTS

TESTS FOR THE SELECTION OF LATERITE SUB BASE COURSE AND BASE
COURSE MATERIALS 6215

The following tests shall be carried out on all material proposed for use as
subbase course and base course:-

1. Plasticity Test.

2. Grading Test.

3. Density/Moisture Content Compaction Test.

4. Laboratory C.B.R. Test.

193
 These tests shall be carried out as described in Section I of this specification.

TEST FPR C; ASSIFICATION AND CONTROL OF COMPACTED LATERITIC SUB

BASE COURSE AND BASE COURSE 6216.

The tests listed below will normally require to be carried out for each 2
kilometres of subbase course and base course. The numbers and types of tests listed
are, however, given only as a guide to the Contractor for tender purposes and the actual
number and type of tests which will be carried out during the construction of the works
will be entirely at the discretion of the Engineer's Representative:

CLASSIFICATION TESTS

2 No. Liquid limit tests

2 No. Plastic limit tests

2 No. Sieve Analysis Test

4 No. West African Standard compaction tests, or

4 No. MOD A.A.S.H.T.O compaction.

CONTROL TESTS

4 No. Laboratory C.B.R Tests at specified conditions

20 No. Insitu dry density tests per 2 km in an alternate manner, i.e. Right, Centre,
Left, Centre, Right, etc.

Except where otherwise stated to the contrary these tests shall be carried out as
described in Section I of this specification or where no such description is given, in
accordance with the appropriate B.S.

The sieve analysis shall be carried out in accordance with the standards laid
down in the report of the "Material Testing Conference, February 1963" A copy of which
shall be made available to the Contractor on request.

6216A INTRODUCTION OF ISO CBR

ISO CBR is introduced because of the known factors that our pavement elements
i.e. subgrade, subbase and base courses are usually compacted at a higher moisture
content than the plant optimum moisture content (OMC). The word ISO means equal.
The procedure for establishing the control data with the working system is as follows:

1. BORROW PIT FOR FILL

When borrow pit is approved for fill after passing all necessary tests, as carried

194
out in the laboratory, three sets of moisture/density CBR tests shall be performed on the
specimen using the following levels of compactive efforts: (a) Sub-B.S., (b) B.S. and (c)
West African Standard. Each set of tests will have a minimum of five specimens. All
specimen shall be soaked ideally for 48 hours, however the following soaking periods
are recommended: for the southern part of the country 96 hours soaking whilst for the
north 48 hours to 24 hours soaking.

NOTE:- For Sub - BS compaction, the following shall apply:- Use CBR
mould, number of layers shall be three using 2.5kg rammer.
Height of fall = 300mm, Number of blows per layer shall be 25.

After determination of the dry density, moisture and CBR of each set of tests,
relevant graph of density/moisture of each shall be plotted. Thereafter the values of CBR
for compacted specimen so obtained shall be plotted as individual points on the
compaction curve of each set of specimen using corresponding dry density points.
Typical method of plotting ISO graph is shown in Fig. VI-1 while the completed
specimen of an ISO-CBR graph is show in Fig. VI-1A.

2. SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE

The above test will be performed on the materials approved for use as either
subbase or base course using the following compactive efforts: B.S., WAS and Modified
A.A.S.H.O. The results will be treated as above and relevant graphs with ISO CBR
plotted.

3. USE OF ISO CBR FOR CONTROL

In our present day control system we have no method of checking whether the
compacted layer meets the specified CBR criteria, we are only concerned with 100%
relative density and moisture content relative to the laboratory design moisture and
invariably the laboratory determined OMC do not often tally with the plant OMC. We are
aware that maximum CBR can only be obtained around OMC if this moisture is not
achieved on site the strength of the pavement will be less than specified, if plant OMC is
less than laboratory OMC: meaning that the section is compacted to a moisture over and
above the plant OMC, thus producing a compacted pavement with weak strength.
When the density and moisture of compacted layer is determined, same is plotted on
the control graph and the field CBR is read from the ISO CBR line, this being the CBR
value of the pavement. This is a surer way of ascertaining that both the density,
moisture and required CBR are obtained on site.

TRIAL SECTIONS OF LATERITE SUB-BASE COURSE AND BASE COURSE 6217.

The Contractor shall carry out trial sections with the proposed materials
prior to the start of the main construction to determine the most efficient compaction,
technique, layer thickness and suitability of the proposed materials and plants, as
described in the relevant clause of this specification. See clause 1052A for a rolling test
method.

195
(CLAUSES 6218 - 6219 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

(11) SOIL CEMENT SPECIFICATION

DESCRIPTION 6220.

Soil cement shall consist of a course or courses composed of soil stabilized with
portland cement. It shall be constructed on prepared and accepted subgrade, subbase
or existing pavement in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the
lines, grades and typical cross sections as shown on the drawings and compacted to a
specified finished thickness to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

FIGURE VI-1
FIGURE VI-1A

MATERIALS FOR SOIL CEMENT STABILIZATION 6221.

The materials used for soil-cement stabilization shall comply with the following
specifications:-

(A) CEMENT The cement used shall be ordinary portland cement and
shall comply with B.S 12 or with the latest British standard specification
for the cement specified, or NIS 11 of 1974 or NIS 15 1980.

(B) WATER: The water shall be clean and free from harmful amounts of
alkalis, acids or organic matter. No water shall be used for stabilization
without the approval of the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor
may be required to collect samples of water in an approved manner and
to arrange for an analysis of the water by an approved testing agency.

(C) SOIL: The soil shall be free from roots, vegetable matter or other
deleterious substances. It shall be the nearest available approved
material which when stabilized with 3% - 7% cement shall meet the
design criteria specified in clause 6228 of this specification.

APPROVAL 6222.
Representative samples of all materials proposed for use in the soil-cement shall
be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. The
Engineer will test the proposed materials and inform the Contractor if the tests indicate
compliance with the specifications. No material shall be used until it has been approved
by the Engineer. Permission to use any material shall not be construed as approval of
its source nor any acceptance as continued acceptance.

GENERAL METHOD OF SAMPLING MATERIALS 6223.

All materials to be tested shall be selected according to the method laid down in
the appropriate British Standard Specification and "Amended Decisions of Material

196
Testing Conference" or where there is no such standard by a method to be mutually
agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor.

SAMPLING OF MATERIALS TO BE STABLIZED FROM BORROW PITS 6224.

Trial pits in a proposed borrow pit area shall be dug from original ground level
and not from the bottom of any existing borrow pits. Trial pits shall be at least 1.2 x 1.2
metres in size and dug to such a depth that the full extent of the material intended for
incorporation in the works is exposed.

Materials for testing shall not be taken from the spoil of the trial pit but shall be
made up of increments taken from each face of the pit after the overburden soil has
been removed. The four increments shall be mixed three times and quartered or riffled
down to the size required for testing.

SAMPLING OF MATERIALS FROM STOCKPILES 6225.

The surface material of a stockpile shall be removed before sampling. At least

twelve samples shall be taken from different parts of the stockpile and the resulting
large sample shall be thoroughly mixed by hand before being quartered for testing.

SAMPLES OF MATERIALS – EXISTING MATERIAL ALREADY IN PLACE 6226.

Soil samples shall be taken by digging trenches across the full width of the
proposed pavement to the depth of processing so that soil sampled shall be the soil that
will be actually used ins oil-cement construction.

TESTS FPR THE SELECTION OF SOIL TO BE STABILIZED 6227.

The following tests shall be carried out on all materials

proposed for soil-cement stabilization:-

(i) Liquid Limit Test

(ii) Plasticity Test
(iii) Grading Test
(iv) Density/Moisture Content Compaction Test
(v) Laboratory C.B.R Test
(vi) Unconfined Compression Test.

The tests are to be performed in accordance with the relevant B.S as modified by
the latest "amended decisions of Materials Testing Conference".

DESIGN CRITERIA 6228.

The stabilized soil shall meet the following specification for C.B.R test results.
The specimens shall be cured with a wax cover for 6 days and soaked for 24 hours
before testing, after allowing the specimen to drain for 15 minutes.

197
TABLE VI-5 DESIGN CBR VALUES FOR SOIL CEMENT MIX-IN-PLACE OR PLANT
MIX

METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION
DESCRIPTION OF TEST
MIX-IN-PLACE PLANT MIX
LABORATORY TEST ON MATERIAL MIXED IN
180% 160%
THE LABORATORY
LABORATORY CONTROL TEST ON MATERIAL
MIXED EACH DAY IN THE FIELD OR ON
100% 100%
CORED SPECIMENS FROM COMPLETE SOIL-
CEMENT PAVEMENT (AVERAGE)
LABORATORY CONTROL TEST ON MATERIAL
MIXED IN THE FIELD OR ON CORED
80% 80%
SPECIMENS FROM COMPLETED SOIL-CEMENT
PAVEMENT (MINIMUM)

PROCEDURE FOR ESTIMATION OF CEMENT CONTENT 6229

(A) Classify the soil according to U.S public road Administration system

(B) The estimated range of cement content is determined using the A.A.S.H.O soil
group (shown in table VI-6 below)

(C) Material requiring high cement content should be rejected as unsuitable.

(D) Perform B.S. compaction on the material to establish M.D.D and O.M.C using the
middle cement content e.g. (4.5)% cement for A-2 as shown in table VI-6 etc..
The C.B.R and U.C.S specimens shall be moulded to this density and moisture
content.

(E) Establish the relationship between cement content vs C.B.R. and U.C.S
(unconfined compression shear) for soaked and unsoaked specimens.

(i) Moulding 3 C.B.R specimens and 6 U.C.S. at each cement content, with a
minimum of three cement contents. e.g. for A-2 3%, 4.5% and 6%.

(ii) Wax and cure all specimens for 6 days (Except 3 U.C.S specimens at each
cement content which should be cured for 7 days and tested without
soaking).

(iii) Testing all C.B.R Specimen and the 3 U.C.S specimens at each cement
content after 24 hours soaking by complete immersion in water and
allowed to drain for 15 minutes.

(iv) Plot graphs of Cement contents vs C.B.R. (soaked).

Cement contents vs U.C.S.(soaked and unsoaked).

198
 Establish the required cement content at 180% C.B.R for site mix or
160% for plant mix and the corresponding U.C.S. values soaked and
unsoaked for quality control in the field.

TABLE VI-6 MODIFIED CEMENT CONTENT

REQUIREMENTS OF A.A.S.H.O. SOIL GROUPS

ESTIMATED
PERCENT OF PERCENTAGE
CEMENT CEMENT
USUAL RANGE IN AMENDED
USED IN CONTENT BY
AASHO CEMENT CEMENT
MOISTURE / WEIGHT OF
SOIL REQUIREMENT CONTENT BY
DENSITY DRY SOIL
GROUP PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF
DETERMINA- FOR
WEIGHT OF SOIL DRY SOIL
TION BY MOULDED
WEIGHT OF SPECIMEN
DRY SOIL
A-1-4 4-6 2-4 3.0 2-3-4
A-1-B 4-7 2-5 3.5 2-3.5-5
A-2 5-8 3-6 4.5 2-4.5-6
A-3 6-9 4-7 5.5 4-5-6
A-4 7-11 5-9 7.0 5-7-9
A-5 8-12 6-10 8.0 6-8-10
A-6 9-13 7-11 9.0 6-9-12
A-7 10-14 8-12 10.0 8-10-12

Note: Heavy clay soils ranging from A-5 to A 7 should be avoided where practicable.

CONSTRUCTION 6230.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his method of
stabilization which may be based on either the mix-in place or plant mix principle.

Whichever method of mixing is used the maximum period between mixing of the
cement and final roll off of stabilized material shall be 2 hours. The lengths of the
treated sections shall be regulated to ensure that the 2 hours time limit is not exceed.

199
MULTIPASS-MIX-IN-PLACE METHOD 6231.

(A) Level pegs shall be set at 30 metres intervals and the base course
material to be stabilized imported from borrow pits, spread and shaped
to the required cross-section and longitudinal gradient. It may be
necessary to compact the base course material to obtain a fair estimate
to correct grade and cross-section. If the material of the existing
roadbed is to be used the surface shall be graded to required cross-
section and longitudinal gradient. The cross-section and grade shall be
checked by the Engineer's Representative before construction starts.

(B) The material to be treated shall be scarified to the required depth and thoroughly
pulverized (including pre-wetting the soil if necessary to aid pulverization).
Precaution shall be taken to obtain a uniform condition of the material for the full
depth and width to be treated. A pulverization of 80% (i.e. ratio of the weight of
soil mixture passing the 5mm sieve to the weight of the total representative
sample taken exclusive of the gravel retained on the 5mm sieve shall be
achieved before the cement is spread.

(C) Cement shall be spread uniformly over the pulverised soil. Cement may be
supplied in bags or in bulk. If bags of cement are used, the bags shall be placed
at calculated intervals along the verge, the bags opened and the cement spread
evenly on the pulverized soil by shovels and rakes.

If the cement is supplied in bulk, it shall be spread by an approved mechanical

cement spreader and each batch in the spreading equipment shall be weighed so
that the average rate of spread can be determined by the Engineer. The rate of
spread per linear metre shall not vary more than 10% from the approved rate.

(D) Wet Mixing is preferred to avoid

(i) Loss of cement due to formation of clouds of cement dust during dry
mixing

(ii) Loss of time in excessive adjustment of moisture content due to rapid

evaporation

(iii) Variation in cement content due to segregation caused by prolonged

mixing.

The road mixing plant shall have provision for introducing water at the time of
mixing, through a metering device or by other approved method.

The water shall be applied by means of controls that will supply the correct
quantity of water to produce a complete mixture with a uniform moisture content.
Leakage of water from equipment will not be permitted and care shall be exercised to

200
avoid the addition of an excessive amount of water.

TRAVELLING MIXING MACHINE 6232.

The procedure for construction with either windrout type or flat-type travelling
mixing plant shall be as directed by the Engineer.

COMPACTION 6233.

Compaction shall commence as soon as an intimate mixture has been obtained

and the specified degree of pulverization has been achieved. It is essential that the
moisture content at the time of rolling shall be at the optimum of the compaction plant
in use.

GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR PLANT MIX PROCESS 6234.

The mixing equipment shall be batch type mixing plant using revolving blade, or
rotating drum mixers or continuous type at the option of the Contractor. The soil, water
and cement may be proportioned either by weight or by volume.

In all plants cement shall be added in such a manner that it is uniformly

distributed throughout the soil during the mixing operation; the charge in a batch
mixer, or the rate of feed to a continuous mixer, shall not exceed that which will permit
complete mixing of the material. Dead areas in the mixer, in which the material does
not move or is not sufficiently agitated shall be corrected either by a reduction in the
volume of material or by other adjustments.

The weights or rates of feeds of soil and water shall be within 5% of the amount
specified by the Engineer and the weights or rates of feed of cement shall be such that
the cement content in samples taken from any part of a mixed batch or from different
batches or from time to time from the product of continuous mixers or from mixtures
spread on the roadbed, shall not vary more than 0.4% above or below the designed
cement content by weight of dry soil.

BATCH MIXING 6235.

The mixer shall be equipped with a sufficient number of paddles of a type and
arrangement to produce a uniformly mixed batch. The mixer platform shall be of ample
size to provide safe and convenient access to the mixer and other equipment. Mixer
and batch box housing shall be provided with hinged gates of ample size to permit ready
sampling from each of the plant bins and of the mixture from each end of the mixer.
The mixer shall be equipped with a timing device which will indicate by a definite audible
or visual signal the expiration of the mixing period. The device shall be accurate to
within 2 seconds. The plant shall be equipped with a suitable automatic device for
counting the number of batches. The time of mixing a batch shall begin after all
ingredients are in the mixer and shall end when the mixer is half emptied. Mixing shall

201
continue until a homogeneous mixture of uniformly distributed cement is produced. In
general the time of mixing shall not be less than 30 seconds, except that the time may
be reduced when tests indicates that the requirement for the variation of cement
content (±.4%) is being consistency compiled with.

WEIGHT PROPORTIONING 6236.

When weight proportioning is used the discharge gate on the weight box shall be
so arranged as to blend the different sizes of the soil as they enter the mixer. Cement
shall be weighed on scales, separate and distinct from the soil batching scales.

VOLUMETRIC PROPORTIONING 6237.

Where volumetric proportioning is used for batch mixing, the volumetric

proportioning device for the soil shall be equipped with separate bins, adjustable in size,
for the various sizes of soil. Each bin shall have an accurately controlled gate or other
device so designed that each bin shall be completely filled and accurately struck-off in
measuring the volume of soil to be used in the mix. Means shall be provided for
accurately calibrating the amount of material in each measuring bin.

CONTINUOUS MIXING 6238.

In addition to the General requirements as provided in section 15, continuous

mixing of the material shall conform to the following requirements. The correct
proportions of each soil size introduced into the mixer shall be drawn in from storage
bins by a continuous feeder, which will supply the correct amount of aggregate in
proportion to the cement, and so arranged that the proportion of each soil size can be
separately adjusted. The bins shall be equipped with a vibrating unit which will
effectively vibrate the side walls of the bins to prevent any "HANG UP" of material while
the plant is operating.

A positive signal system shall be provided to indicate the level of the material in
each bin and as the level of the material in any one bin approaches the strike-off
capacity of the feed gate, the device will automatically close down the plant instantly.
The plant shall not be permitted to operate unless this automatic signal system is in
good working order.

The drive shaft on the soil feeder shall be equipped with a revolution counter
reading to 1/100 of a revolution and of sufficient capacity to register the total number of
revolutions in a day's run. The continuous feeder for the soil may be mechanically or
electrically driven. The continuous mixing plant shall be equipped with a hopper of at
least 0.6 cubic metre capacity which is divided into as many compartments as there are
sizes of soil being proportioned. The hopper shall be suspended under the soil feeders
on a scale frame in such a manner that the discharge from each soil feeder may be
diverted into separate compartments in the hopper when the feeders are in full
operation. The weight of a loaded hopper shall be indicated on a springless dial scale of
2,278 kilograms maximum capacity with 2 kilogram graduations. Each compartment of
the hopper shall be equipped with a gate so that each size may be withdrawn separately

202
on a conveyor below the hopper in order that the total weight of each size of soil may
be determined and representative samples obtained. The material so over withdrawn
may be returned to storage.
SPREADING 6239.

Side forms shall be set to the lines and grade as shown on the drawings. Forms
shall be of steel or stout timber and shall be of sufficient strength to resist springing out
of shape during placing of soil cement.

The mixed material shall be protected by covers against moisture loss while
being transported to the spreading site and each layer shall be spread in one operation
without segregation (not more than 30 minutes shall elapse between mixing and
spreading).

Immediately prior to spreading, the area to be covered shall be moistened and

kept moist, but not excessively wet.

The mixture shall be simultaneously deposited and spread with a self-propelled

mechanical spreader ready for compaction without further shaping.

The spreader shall be provided with a screed that strikes-off and distributes the
material to the required width and thickness within 5% of the pre-determined rate. The
screed shall be adjustable to the required cross section. Screed action includes any
cutting, crowding, or other practical motion that produces a finished texture of uniform
appearance. If the spreader leaves ridges, indentations or other objectionable marks in
the surface that cannot be eliminated by rolling, or prevented by adjustments in
operation, its use shall be discontinued.

The use of motor grades, except for final trimming after compaction, will not be
permitted.

The mixed material shall be spread for the full planned width, either by one
spreader or by several spreaders operating in a staggered pattern across the subgrade
or subbase course, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer or if traffic conditions
require part width construction. Should permission be granted or part width
construction be required, for the use of one spreader operating alternately on
continuous lanes, not more than 30 minutes shall elapse between the time of placing
material in adjacent lanes at any location. If longitudinal construction joints are
necessary they shall fall on lane lines.

Where the required compacted thickness is 150mm or less, the soil cement may
be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the compacted thickness is more than
150mm the soil cement shall be spread and compacted in 2 layers of approximately
equal thickness and the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not
exceed 150mm or as directed.

Work on each layer shall be performed in a similar manner and the surface of
the compacted material shall be kept moist or prevented from drying out by a method

203
approved by the Engineer until covered with the next layer, either by using damp sand
or sacks.

Soil cement base course placed in inaccessible areas may be spread by approved
methods in one course. After spreading the material shall be thoroughly compacted to
the required lines and grades by means of pneumatic tampers or with other compacting
equipment which consistently obtains equal or better compaction than that specified.
Soil-cement shall not be mixed or placed during rain.

COMPACTION 6240.

(A) All rolling equipment shall be self-propelled and reversible and shall produce the
required compaction within the operation time. e.g. from mixing, wetting,
spreading and compaction.

(B) Initial rolling may be performed with smooth wheel steel-tyred rollers weighing
not less than 10,886 kilograms with a compression on the rear wheels of not less
than 58 kilograms of the tyre width, or with other compacting equipment which
consistently obtain equal or better compaction than that specified. Pneumatic
tyred rollers shall be the oscillating type and having a width of not less than 1.2
metres and equipped with pneumatic tyres of equal size and diameter. Wobble
wheel rollers will not be permitted. The tyres shall be inflated to 6.3 kg per sq.
cm. or such lower pressure as the Engineer may direct and maintained so that
the air pressure will not vary more than 0.35 kg per sq. cm. from the designated
pressure. Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be so constructed that the total weight of
the roller can be varied to produce an operating weight per tyre of not less than
907 kilograms. The total operation weight of the roller shall be varied as
directed by the Engineer.

(C) Rolling tests shall be carried out to establish the plant maximum dry density
(MDD) its optimum moisture content (OMC) and the number of economic passes
to achieve the MDD see Table I-4 for guidance on performance of different
plants relating to MDD, and OMC of different types of soil.

(D) Rolling shall be performed in such a manner that bumps and irregularities are
eliminated and the finished surface shall be true to the required grade and cross
section within the tolerances specified.

Rolling shall commence from the outer edge of the verge to the centre of the
roadway except on super-elevated curves where rolling shall begin on the low
side and progress to the high side.

(E) Areas inaccessible to rollers shall be compacted to the specified density by other
means, approved by the Engineer.

(F) All compaction planes shall be removed. The finished surface shall be smooth,
dense and free of ridges or cracks. The surface shall be kept moist at all times
until the curing seal is applied.

204
FINISHINGS 6241.

The finished surface shall not deviate at any point in a longitudinal direction by
more than 5mm from 3 metre straight edge laid in any position on the finished surface
parallel to the centre line. The transverse profile shall conform to the same accuracy
when tested using a correctly shaped template. The thickness shall not vary more than
± 12mm from the design thickness of base at any point.

If the finished surface exceeds the above tolerance, the excess material shall be
trimmed with the least possible disturbance of the material to remain in place. The
excess material shall be removed and disposed of immediately after trimming and no
loose material shall be left on the base and the area shall be rolled again. Filling low
spots in the cement treated base will not be permitted.

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 6242.

(A) TRANSVERSE JOINTS

At the end of each day's work or first thing in the morning a transverse vertical
construction joint shall be formed by cutting back 600mm into the compacted
soil-cement, and disposing of the material. Additional mixture shall not be
placed until the construction joint is placed. When starting the work the 900mm
section adjacent to the joint shall be thoroughly hand mixed.

(B) Longitudinal joints shall be constructed by cutting back vertically into the existing
stabilized material for approximately 75mm and the material cut away may be
disposed of in the adjacent lane to be constructed. The face of the cut joints
shall be moistened in advance of constructing the adjacent section.

CURING 6243.

The completed soil-cement shall be cured by either damp sand cover or

bituminous curing seal as directed by the Engineer.

(A) DAMP SAND

Immediately after compaction the soil cement shall be cured for a period of 7
days by a 50mm layer of damp sand spread evenly over the surface. The
Contractor shall keep the sand damp and shall close the stabilized soil to all
traffic during the curing period.

(B) BITUMINOUS CURING SEAL

The curing seal shall consist of liquid bitumen MC-O, or MC-1 unless otherwise
specified. The curing seal shall be applied at a rate between 0.68 - 1.13 litres

205
 per square meter of surface and shall provide a continuous membrane over the
soil-cement pavement. The curing seal shall be applied as soon as possible, but
not later than 8 hours after the completion of final rolling.
The surface shall be kept moist until the seal is applied. No traffic or equipment
shall be permitted on the sealed base during the first 6 days after the application
of the curing seal, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

FIELD CONTROL TESTS 6244.

In order to ensure adequate cement content, proper moisture content, adequate

compaction, adequate pulverization, intimate mixing and adequate strength, the
following field quality control tests shall be carried out during construction.

(I) MOISTURE CONTROL TEST

In each stretch, the moisture content shall be checked and adjusted to

optimum moisture content of the plant in use before compaction
commences. "Speedy" moisture tester of any type may be approved by
the Engineer for use, the speedy tester should be calibrated first before
being put into use (for calibrating procedure see clause 2003(6)).

(II) TEST FOR ADEQUATE PULVERIZATION

Before the addition of cement 80% pulverization shall be achieved and

this shall be checked for each stretch. For procedure see Clause 6231 (B).

(III ) TEST FOR INTIMATE MIXING

Intimate mixing shall be checked by examining the colour of exposed

material from a series of holes to the full depth of mixed soil-cement
made at regular intervals. Uniform colour of the exposed material
indicates thorough mixing.

(IV) STRENGTH

Samples of mixed soil-cement shall be taken in the field prior to

compaction. The samples shall be compacted into CBR and/or UCS
mould to B.S. or field density and sealed with wax. In particular UCS
specimens shall be statically compacted, to the same densities as those
of field compacted CBR specimens. The specimens shall be cured in the
laboratory and tested after 7 days ( 6 days curing and 24 hours soaking).

The frequency of these tests shall be one test for every 400 square
metres and part thereof of material laid in each layer.

(V) IN SITU DRY DENSITY TESTS

These tests shall be carried out immediately upon the completion of

206
 compaction of each section. At lease one dry density test shall be carried
out for each 350 square metres of material laid in each layer, using the
sand bottle or other in-situ density testing equipment or the nuclear
gauge testing equipment approved by the Engineer. These tests may be
located where samples for CBR and/or UCS have been taken.

(VI) THICKNESS OF PROCESSED LAYER

The thickness of the Soil-cement layer shall be measured using the in-situ
dry density holes, the thickness of cored specimens from hardened soil-
cement and any additional holes at the discretion of the Engineer.

(VII) DETERMINATION OF CEMENT CONTENT

The Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment and reagents to

enable cement extraction tests to be carried out by the Engineer. For
procedure refer to B.S 1924 (1975) test No 6.

(VIII) CBR & UCS TESTS ON CORED SPECIMENS

CBR and UCS tests shall be carried out on cored specimens taken from
hardened soil-cement. The frequency of these tests shall be at least one
test for each 400 square metres and part thereof of material laid in each
layer. Sampling shall be in staggered pattern.

TEST RECORDS 6245.

The results of all the tests mentioned in this section of the specification shall be
carefully recorded in a manner approved by the Engineer. The test results shall be
recorded in triplicate, one copy to be retained by the Contractor and the other two
copies to be handed to the Engineer's Representative.

ADDOTIONAL CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 6246.

In addition to these records required under the provision of clause 6245, above
the Contractor shall keep a record for each individual section of soil-cement construction
giving the following details:-

(I) Location, length and width of the section,

(II) In situ moisture content on scarification,

(III) Moisture content prior to addition of cement,

(IV) No. of bags of cement used.

(V) Time the cement was spread.

207
 (VI) Complete mixing time.

(VII) Moisture content prior to compaction.

(VIII) Compaction and Grading time.

(IX) Total operation time from cement spreading to completion of compaction.

(X) Location of borrow pit used.

This record shall be prepared in triplicate, one copy to be retained by the

Contractor and two copies to be handed to the Engineer's Representative.

SUPERVISION 6247.

The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the fact that he must provide
adequate experienced supervisory staff during all the stages of soil-cement construction.

(CLAUSE 6248 - 6249 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

(III) CRUSHED STONE

GENERAL 6250.

In addition to any other clause of this specification the following shall be deemed
to apply in particular to crushed stoned base course, and shall be read in conjunction
with all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this specification.

MATERIALS 6251. MATERIALS FOR CRUSHED STONE BASE COURSE

Base course aggregate shall consist of crushed Stone.

(A) PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF AGGREGATE

Materials for use as Stone base shall be classified under two categories i.e.
Coarse aggregate and Fine aggregate.

1. COARSE AGGREGATE:

Coarse aggregate shall be granite crushed stone sourced from approved Quarry
by the Engineer's Representative and shall have sizes ranging from 50mm and retained
on 5mm sieve. The aggregate shall be free from clay or silty materials, and when
subjected to 10% fine test or aggregate crushing value, the value of the results shall
range from 7.5% to 12.5% for 10% fine and not more than 35% for aggregate
crushing value. It shall also comply with other requirements under clause 2005 (1) and
(2)

208
(2) FINE AGGREGATE

Fine aggregate known as binder materials shall be materials passing sieve 5mm
and retained on 75µm sieve. It may be sourced from river bed at location
approved by the Engineer's Representative or be fines from crushed stone. It
shall be free from vegetation or other objectionable matter. Fine aggregate shall
be clean without any clay content, strong and sharp. It shall be of such grading
characteristic that when combined with coarse aggregate, the composite material
shall conform to the gradation and other requirements specified in clause 2004
(1-3).

(3) Liquid limit and Plasticity Index requirements stated herein shall apply to
any aggregate component that is blended to meet the require gradation and also
to the aggregate in the compacted base course. The portion of fine aggregate
passing the 75µm sieve shall be either non-plastic or shall have a liquid Limit not
greater than 30% and Plasticity Index not greater than 6. This index test will
only be applicable to materials for wet laying.

(4) COMBINATION PROCEDURE.

It is easier to handle gradation size by use of two categories of materials:-

Firstly, grade the gradation aggregate and plot on the stone base design
envelope, next, grade the fine aggregate and plot in the design envelope. By
simple proportion and physical examination of the two graphs, guided by
experience ,two to three combination trials may produce the required
satisfactory grading that will fall into the envelope, otherwise simple calculation
may be used to achieve the required combination proportion.

NOTE: Once an acceptable combination is produced, frequent grading

checks on both specimens must be carried out to insure that deviation in
gradation is not allowed to occur. The results of such grading test will enable
adjustment to be made on the combination proportion.

(5) COMBINATION OF DIFFERENT SIZES OF AGGREGATE.

Coarse aggregate of different sizes and the fine aggregate shall be placed in
different Bins. Each aggregate sizes and the fines shall be sieved and plotted on
appropriate log chart. Simple arithmetic calculation may be used to determine
the combination proportion. Alternatively, careful study of the graphs, coupled
with experience will enable user to guess the proportion by trial and error. Once
a suitable mix proportion is established, the grading of each size of aggregate
shall be checked from time to time, to ensure that there is no deviation or
variation.

209
 (6) ESTABLISHING MIX CONTROL CRITERIA.

When a mix proportion has been established, representative sample of each

material shall be combined and quartered to make six number of CBR mould
specimens, moisturized to 5% of dry weight of sample and kept in air tight*
container for 18 hours. Before the samples are compacted the moisture shall be
checked using calibrated SPEEDY TESTER. If the moisture is lower than 5%
more water to attain this moisture shall be added. When the material is mixed
thoroughly it shall be compacted using Modified AASHO compactive effort or
using a vibrating kango hammer. Whichever compactive effort is used, (not
B.S.) it shall be in five layers and the thickness of compacted specimen shall not
be less than 125mm or more that 130mm, otherwise it shall be discarded. The
loose material on the specimen after compaction shall be removed carefully, and
with a straight edge placed across the mould, in a minimum of two directions,
the depth of the compacted specimen surface from the top shall be determined
in three places along each direction of the straight edge. The mean of six
readings shall be used to determine the depth of the specimen and thereafter its
volume.

Unless directed to the contrary the six specimens will be tested for Dry Density
only. Alternatively 3 specimens may be soaked for 24 hours (complete
immersion in water with 25mm water head above the specimen) tested for CBR
after the specimen is allowed to drain for 15 minutes. The remaining specimens
shall be tested for CBR (strength) unsoaked. The average of two close results
shall be the CBR or Dry Density of the specimen. If CBR of over 100% is
obtained the dry density established with corresponding moisture content shall
be the design criteria and control for the works.

GRADING OF CRUSHED STONE 6252.

The grading of crushed stone for use in crushed stone base course shall be as
follows:-

(I) DRY PROCESS

(A) 75mm to 12mm or 50mm - 12mm hereinafter referred to as

coarse stone.

(B) 12mm to dust hereinafter referred to as screening.

(II) WET PROCESS

Gradation: The composite mixture of coarse aggregate and binder material,

processed as hereinafter specified shall conform to one of the applicable
gradations shown in Table VI-7 and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve
to the high limit on adjacent sieve or vice versa, but shall be uniformly graded
from coarse to fine.

210
 Gradation requirement specified herein shall apply to the completed base course
after undergoing the mixing, placing, compacting and other operations. The
portion of the aggregate passing No 75µm sieve shall not be greater than one-
third of the portion passing the No. 425µm sieve. The aggregates shall
continuously be well graded within the limits of Gradation A, B. C, D or E as
specified below. The methods of test used will be ASTM Standards C117, C127,
C128, C136 and D422. Sieves shall conform to ASTM Standard E.11 or B. S.
sieve.

TABLE VI-7 GRADING ENVELOPE FOR STONE BASE COURSE WET METHOD

PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT PASSING SQUARE MESH SIEVE

SIEVE
GRADING GRADING GRADING GRADING GRADING
DESIGNATION OPENING
A B C D E
75mm 100 100 100 100 50mm 100
50mm 85 – 100 85 – 100 90 – 100 90 – 100 37.5mm 95 – 100
25mm 60 – 95 65 – 95 75 – 100 80 – 100 20mm 60 – 80
10mm 30 – 65 40 – 75 50 – 85 60 – 100 10mm 40 – 60
5mm 25 – 55 30 – 60 35 – 65 50 – 85 5mm 25 – 40
2mm 15 – 40 20 – 45 25 – 50 40 - 70 2.36mm 15 – 30
425µm 8 – 20 13 – 30 15 – 30 25 – 45 600µm 8 – 22
75µm 2-8 5 - 10 5 - 10 5 - 15 75µm 6 – 12

Note:- The table is based on aggregate of uniform specific gravity, and the
percentages passing the various sieves may require appropriate correction by the
Engineer when aggregates of varying specific gravities are used.

WORKMANSHIP

PREPARATION OF SUB GRADE 6253. 路基准备工作

The subgrade shall be prepared and compacted in accordance with terms as

contained in Section VI Clause 6161 of this specification.

Note:- No subgrade shall be considered as a working platform for the stone base
as this will promote the early collapse of the pavement. This is due to the fact
that the elastic property of the subgrade (of which strain is a part) will not be
able to sustain the wheel load from the crushed stone base to the subgrade
without any intermediate superior layer.

Where the subgrade or subbase is formed of material liable to be forced up into

the crushed stone during compacting operations, the Engineer's Representative
may direct that a 50mm thick blanket layer of approved material shall be
superimposed upon the subgrade prior to the laying of crushed stone. See
clause 6133.

FORMS 6254

211
 Where kerb or concrete haunches are not specified, the Contractor shall ensure
that the edges of crushed stone base course, laid by either the wet or dry
process, are true to line and level and properly compacted to the same standard
as the test of the Base course by the use of forms, hunching stones or other
methods approved by the Engineer's Representative.

CRUSHED STONE TO BE LAID AND COMPACTED IN LAYERS 6255.

Crushed stone Base course laid by either the wet or dry method shall be laid in
layers of not less than 150mm compacted thickness to the satisfaction of the
Engineer’s Representative.

LAYING AND COMPACTING CRUSHED STONE DRY PROCESS 6256.

When crushed stone Base-course is to be laid by the dry process the method of
laying and compacting shall be as follows:-

(I) The coarse stone 75mm to 12mm or 50mm to 12mm shall be spread in a
manner approved by the Engineer's Representative to an even depth
which, after compaction will produce the specified thickness of layer.

(II) The coarse stone shall then be regulated and compacted by not less than
three passes of an approved roller.

(III) Successive uniform layers of screening 12mm to dust shall then be

applied over the surface and shall be vibrated into the interstices of the
coarse stone by means of an approved vibrating plate compactor or other
approved means. Screenings may be spread by hand shovel using a
sweeping motion or by approved tailboard spreaders attached to lorries.
In no case shall screenings be dumped on the surface in piles and spread
therefrom. Great care shall be taken to ensure that screenings are not
applied either so quickly or so thickly as to "CAKE" or bridge on the
surface in a manner which prevents the filling of the interstices or causes
the vibrating or compacting equipment from bearing directly on the
coarse stone. The addition of screenings and vibrating into the
interstices of the coarse stone shall continue until all the voids are filled
in.

(IV) The surface of the crushed stone shall then be checked transversely and
longitudinally for level and camber and any indicated variations adjusted.

The surface shall then be sprinkled with water from a water bowser and
rolled with a smooth wheel roller having a weight of roll of not less than
58 kilograms per centimetre. Voids in the Base-course which occur
during this process shall be filled by sweeping screenings into them.

The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling shall continue until all voids are filled

212
 with grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

(v) The final surface shall be smooth and even, free from irregularities or
loose material and true to line and level having regard to the tolerances
for base course finish specified elsewhere herein.

CRUSHED STONE BASE COURSE LAID BY THE WET PROCESS 6257.

When crushed stone Base course is to be laid by the dry or wet process the
method of laying and compaction shall be as follows:-

(I) The approved crushed stoned, graded as specified shall be mixed with
between 3% and 5% of water as directed in a mixer of a type approved
by the Engineer's Representative.

(II) The mixed material shall be protected from the rays of the sun during
transit from the mixer to the site in order to prevent loss of moisture due
to evaporation and shall be laid by a self-propelled asphalt finisher or
other approved plant in layers of not less than 75mm or more than
150mm thickness after compaction. During this operation care shall be
taken to avoid segregation.

(III) Water can only be added to any wet laid stone base if it was discovered
that evaporation had taken place during rolling. The finished rolled stone
base shall not have moisture less than 3% or more than 5% by weight
of dry aggregate.

Should any patchiness appear during compaction, areas deficient in fines

shall be blinded with screenings watered and rolled and areas showing an
excess of fines shall be removed and reconstructed with graded material
to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

(IV) The final surface shall be smooth and even free from irregularities or
loose material, and true to line and level having regard to the tolerances
for Base-course finish specified elsewhere herein.

PREPARATION OF CRUSHED STONE BASE COURSE TO RECEIVE BITUMINOUS

SURFACING 6258

Crushed stone Base course, laid by either the dry or wet process shall be
prepared for the addition of bituminous surfacing as specified under the relevant
parts of this section of the specification.

COMPACTION 6259.

Compaction of crushed stone Base course shall be to the satisfaction of the

Engineer's Representative.

213
(IV) CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY CONSTRUCTION 水泥混凝土路面施工

GENERAL 6260.

In addition to any other clauses of this specification the following shall be

deemed to apply in particular to concrete carriageway construction. And shall be read in
conjunction with all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this
specification.

MATERIALS

CEMENT 6261.

Cement to be used in the construction of concrete carriageways shall comply in

all respects with the requirements of all relevant clauses of this specification regarding
cement for use in concrete work.

AGGREGATE 6262.

Fine and course aggregate for use in the manufacture of concrete for
construction of concrete carriageways shall comply with the requirements of all relevant
clauses of this specification regarding aggregates for use in concrete work.

REINFORCING STEEL 6263.

Steel reinforcement for use in the construction of concrete carriageways shall,

where used, comply with the requirement of all relevant clauses of this specification
regarding M.S. reinforced concrete work.

DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS 6264. 传力杆和拉杆

Dowel bars and tie bars shall consist of mild steel complying with the
requirements of British Standard 15, free from oil, paint, dirt and loose rust.

Dowel bars for transverse joints shall be straight, free from burred edges or
other irregularities and shall have their sliding ends sawn, not sheared, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.

The length and diameter of dowel bars and tie bars shall be as shown on the
drawings or directed by the Engineer.

SIDE FORMS 6265. 模板

Side Forms shall be of steel and of a design to be approved by the Engineer.

Curved forms of appropriate radius shall be used for all curves of 30 metres radius or
less. The width of the form shall be not less than the pavement thickness, up to a
maximum of 250mm and flange branches shall extend outward on the base not less
than two thirds the height of the form. All forms shall be free from warp, twists and

214
kinks, and where the top surface of the forms determines the finished level of the
concrete, it shall be accurate in manufacture to within a tolerance of ± 2mm in 3
metres measured in a vertical plane. Repaired forms shall not be used until inspected
and approved by the Engineer's Representative.

Forms to support rails on which the machine is to run shall be sufficiently robust
to support the weight of all plant running on them without deformation.

RAILS FOR MACHINE FINISHED CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY 6266.

Rails shall be of steel and of approved design enabling them to be properly

supported on the side forms or on other approved mountings.

All rails shall be sufficiently robust to support the weight of all plant running on
them without deformation. They shall be free from warp, twists and kinks and accurate
in manufacture to within a tolerance of ± 2mm in 3 metres measured in a vertical plane.

PREFORMED JOINT FILLER 6267.

Preformed joint filler shall be of the thickness shown on the drawings or directed
by the Engineer within a tolerance of ± 2mm. It shall be 25mm less in depth than the
thickness of the slab, within a tolerance of ± 3mm and of the full width between road
forms. Holes to accommodate dowel bars shall be accurately bored or punched out.

The material comprising joint filler shall be of approved quality, such that the
filler can be satisfactorily installed in position at the joint.

JOINT PRIMER 6268.

Joint priming compound shall consist of a suitable bitumen based compound

approved by the Engineer.

JOINT SEALING COMPOUND 6269.

Poured joint sealing material shall consist of an approved rubber bitumen

compound, complying with the requirements of British Standard 2499: test to assess the
properties of hot applied joint sealing compounds for concrete pavements, and shall be
grade

1. Class B or C. The joint sealing compound shall have the following qualities:

(a) Capable of adhering to concrete under all weather conditions.

(b) It should be ductile particularly in fairly cold weather as to cover the

widening of joint without cracking, and be able to withstand the
continuous cycle of expansion and contraction for a long time without a
break up or disintegration.

215
 (c) It must be durable etc.

WORKMANSHIP

GENERAL 6270.

Concrete carriageways shall be constructed in one or more slab widths as

indicated in the drawings.

Where a concrete carriageway is constructed more than one slab wide, the first
slab or alternate slabs shall be constructed between two forms and the adjacent or
intermediate slabs shall be constructed by replacing the flanged wheels on one or both
sides of the machine with flangeless wheels, which can travel on the surface of the
concrete already completed, or on rails fixed to longitudinal timber laid on the
completed concrete to support the flanged wheels. Concrete slabs shall be at least ten
days old before they are subjected to the weight of the finishing machine, but, in
suitable weather, the Engineer's Representative may permit a shorter period provided
that adequate provision is made for protecting the surface of the slab on which the
wheels of the finishing machine run and provided that the wheels do not run nearer to
the edge of the slab than 150mm and provided further that the Contractor gives an
undertaking in writing to be fully responsible for any damage that may occur and to
repair same at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

THICKNESS OF SLAB 6271.

The thickness at any point shall be not more than 6mm thinner nor more than
12mm thicker than that shown on the drawings.

CONCRETE DISTRIBUTOR 6272.

Unless hand spreading has been sanctioned in writing by the Engineer's

Representative, all concrete to be compacted by finishing machines shall be distributed
with a hopper type spreader of approved design. Where vibratory screeds instead of
finishing machines are used for compaction the arrangements for placing concrete shall
be to the approval of the Engineer. Spreaders shall be capable of striking off concrete
at the correct level for the placing of reinforcement and for producing a uniform surface.

To minimize pre-compaction, hand spreading will be permitted only where the

concrete is deposited in loads each not exceeding one cubic metre size, and from height
not exceeding 750mm.

COMPACTING AND FINISHING MACHINE 6273.

Compacting and finishing machines shall be approved by the Engineer and shall
compact and finish the concrete either by the action of vibration or by mechanical
tamping. The machine shall in addition have a strike-off blade or paddle-roller to control
the surcharge and a rear transverse oscillating screed.

216
WATERPROOF UNDERLAY 6274.

Where shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer's Representative,

waterproof paper as specified or other approved underlay, shall be used and where
more than one sheet is used for the construction of any one slab the overlaps shall be at
least 150mm. The waterproof underlay must not be torn or damaged, and water shall
not be allowed to collect upon it before the concrete is laid.

SETTING, CHECKING AND STRIKING OF SIDE FORMS 6275.

ALL SIDE FORMS SHALL:

(I) Be so supported that they remain rigid at all times.

They shall be set in position at least 20 hours before concrete is placed between
them unless the Engineer's Representative agrees to a shorter period. Forms
shall be cleaned and oiled each time before they are used.

(II) Be bedded on a layer, about 50mm thick and for only the width of the form
base, of cement mortar or concrete of the same grade as the slab on a firm
foundation so as to ensure the necessary complete rigidity and stability. The
base on the line of the forms shall be thoroughly compacted before the forms
are set.

(III) Be as specified in Clause 6265 set to line and level and secured by using not less
than three pins for each 3 metres section, one pin being placed at each side of
every joint or as otherwise approved by the Engineer's Representative. Form
sections shall be tightly joined together by a locked joint free from play or
movement in any direction, so as to prevent the extrusion of concrete.

For machine laid concrete the form joints shall be made without any discontinuity
in the top surface of the forms and the levels at the joints between the forms shall,
where form and rail are not integral, be set within a tolerance of ± 3mm of the levels
shown on the drawings.

The wheels of finishing machines shall not be run directly on the top surface of
the side forms but on rails as indicated in clause 6266 or on the finished concrete as
provided in clause 6270.

For concrete to be compacted by vibrating screeds the setting of the forms shall
be such as to provide the accuracy of finish specified in the relevant clauses of this
specification.

If corrections are necessary as a result of checking for conformity with the

alignments and levels shown on the drawings such correction shall be made before any
concrete is placed between them. Where any form has been disturbed it shall be reset
and rechecked. Side forms shall be removed not less than 12 hours after completion of

217
the construction of the concrete road slabs. Care shall be taken that the concrete and
any projecting rods are not damaged in any way during the removal of the forms. The
concrete or mortar bed used at the longitudinal joint in partial-width construction shall
be removed at the same time if applicable and the subgrade and subbase made good to
the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

SETTING CHECKING AND STRIKING OF RAILS FOR MACHINE-LAID

CONCRETE 6276.

The Engineer's Representative may require any or all concreting operations to

cease if at any time, the forms or rails are not set in position sufficiently far in advance
of the concreting to enable him to be satisfied as to their compliance with the relevant
requirements of this specification.

ALL RAILS SHALL:

(A) Be integral with the forms so that they remain rigidly fixed at all times, or
where independent, be mounted so that they remain rigidly fixed to the
approved mounting during the passage of the spreading and finishing
machines. The surface of rails shall be kept clean at all times.

(B) Be firmly supported along the length in such a manner that the finishing
machine can travel along the line of the carriageway at the correct level.

(C) Where the width of slab is continuously varying, it shall be firmly

supported throughout its length on cement mortar or concrete as
specified each about 50mm thick so as to ensure the necessary rigidity
and accuracy of levels. The subgrade or subbase or base course beneath
the rail shall be thoroughly compacted before any concrete or mortar is
laid.

(D) Be so set as to ensure accuracy of level of the surface of the concrete

within a tolerance of ± 3mm in 3 metres.

(E) Be so set that the screed of the finishing machine operates in relation to
the rail, not the form.

Where on checking it is found that any rail or the form on which it rests has been
disturbed or is incorrectly set, the rail shall be reset, and rechecked before placing of the
concrete between the forms is begun.

Rails may be removed in advance of removal of the forms on which they rest
provided that the latter are not disturbed by so doing.

QUANTITY AND DISTRIBUTION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT 6277.

The quantity and distribution of reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings, with
such modification as may be necessary and approved by the Engineer’s Representative to suit

218
manholes and surface boxes, junctions or slabs of different width or length; or as are directed by
the Engineer's Representative. No loose rods or small pieces of fabric other than as provided for
in the specification shall be permitted in any portion of the work.

PLACING OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT FORCARRIAGEWAYS 6278.

Steel fabric reinforcement for carriageways shall be as pecified in B.S. 1221. All
reinforcement shall be so placed that after compaction of the concrete it is in the
positions shown on the drawings and shall terminate 40mm from the Sedges of all joints
in the concrete unless otherwise specified.

TREATMENT AT MANHOLES 6279.

Manholes shall be housed in separate small slabs, which shall be the size of the
exterior of the shaft and shall be formed by casting the main slab against boxes of this
size, made from formwork and accurately placed vertically above the exterior of the
shaft. This formwork shall be removed at the same time as the remainder of the
formwork for the slab. Expansion joint filler 10mm wide shall be placed against the
exposed edges of the slab, and reinforcing bars if shown on the drawings or specified
shall be placed accurately in position so as to give the required final cover, concrete
being placed by hand in the space intervening between the slab and the manhole frame.
This concrete shall then be compacted to the same density as that of the adjoining slab.

A sealing groove shall be formed and filled at the top of the joints with the
surrounding slab, in accordance with Clause 6283 the top arises of both slabs being
rounded to a radius of 6mm.

JOINTS IN CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6280.

All joints shall be constructed by methods to be approved by the Engineer, and

with vertical faces. Grooves in the surface of the concrete over joints shall be sawn
except that alternative methods of forming the grooves may be submitted and may be
considered by the Engineer in lieu of a sawn grooves, provided that the Contractor
demonstrates to the Engineer's satisfaction, that the surface finish so obtainable is
within the appropriate tolerance permitted.

TRANSVERSE JOINTS 6281.

Expansion joints shall comprise an approved performed joint filler as specified

and dowel bars. The joint filler, together with the sawn groove, shall provide complete
separation of adjacent slabs. The dowel bars as specified shall be provided at mid depth
of the slab, parallel to the finished surface and to the centre line of the road within a
tolerance of ± 2mm in 300mm Provision shall be made for ensuring that the dowel bars
and joint filler are held securely in position during spreading and compacting of the
concrete.

Dowel bars shall be provided at one end with a closely fitting sleeve 100mm
long, consisting of cardboard or other approved material. A loose plug equal in

219
thickness to the width of the expansion joint, and consisting of cotton waste or a disc of
expansion joint filler, shall be inserted within the sleeve at the end of the dowel bar.
The free half of each dowel shall be greased or painted with joint priming compound as
specified or directed. The method of assembling and securing joints shall be approved
by the Engineer.

Where contraction joints are required, these shall be formed by a groove sawn in
the surface of the hardened concrete and a timber fillet cast into the base of the slab, all
as shown on the drawings. The sawn groove shall be located vertically above the
timber fillet to within a tolerance of ± 12mm. Dowel bars shall be provided as for
expansion joints. Construction joints shall be installed only under the conditions detailed
in Clause 6287. They shall be formed by means of a drilled and split cross form which
shall allow tie bars to be inserted and which shall permit the reinforcement to project
through the joint for a distance of at least 400mm. On recommencing work the cross
form shall be removed and the vertical face of the concrete roughened. The next
reinforcing mat shall completely overlap the projecting reinforcement.

Joints shall be formed in a straight line at right angles to the longitudinal axis of
the carriageway except where this cannot be achieved as at road junctions and
roundabouts and corresponding joints on either side of a longitudinal joint shall be in
line with each other. Where possible all transverse joints shall be staggered.

LONGITUDINAL JOINTS 6282.

When slabs are constructed to multi lane widths, tie additional reinforcement as
shown on the drawings shall be bars or provided as specified in clause 6264. The
longitudinal joints shall be placed symmetrically about the middle of the slab in the form
of a dummy joint, as shown on the drawings, or as directed.

For slabs of single lane width, tie bars shall be provided as above and as shown
on the drawings. Provision shall be made for maintaining the tie bars accurately in
position during spreading and compacting of the concrete. When the adjoining slab is
constructed, a groove shall be sawn or formed by other approved means to the
requirements of clause 6283.

SAWING AT JOINTS 6283.

Except when an alternative method is approved by the the Engineer, a groove

shall be sawn in the concrete immediately over the position of the joint. Sawing shall
take place by a method to be approved by the Engineer as soon as possible but not
before the concrete has hardened sufficiently to ensure clean faces to the groove. In
considering the type of construction joints to be adopted, causes precipitating the joint
must be considered and the instruments available. In addition to the above these other
methods may be found useful:
(a) Stepping method (vertical)

(b) Tongue method

220
 (c) Grooving method

The depth of grooves shall be 40mm. Groove over expansion joints shall
be 6mm wider than the width of the preformed joint filler, and shall be
accurately located over the joint filler. Grooves forming longitudinal or
contraction joints shall be of the width shown on the drawings, or as directed by
the Engineer.
SEALING OF JOINTS 6284.

All dust or grit shall he removed from the grooves which shall first be dried if
necessary for this purpose. Unless an alternative method of sealing is approved by the
Engineer, the dried joints shall then be coated with priming compound, complying with
clause 6268 and an approved sealing compound heated to a temperature not exceeding
180°C, shall be poured in so as to fill the groves completely. When filling grooves in
expansion joints, allowance shall be made for normal variations of ground temperature
in the locality, so as to avoid the extrusion of the sealing compound with an expected
increase in ground temperature.

COMPREHENSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE 6285.

During the whole progress of concreting, test cubes shall be made in the manner
described for concrete work. Not more than 1 per cent of cubes tested at 28 days shall
show a strength of less than specified.

If rapid-hardening cement is used, reference in this clause to 28 days, which is

the period for ordinary portland cement, shall be the period between concreting and
opening to traffic.

Cubes shall be made each day in sets at intervals and locations as decided by the
Engineer's Representative. At the start of the work, and until such time as the
Engineer's Representative may order a reduction in the number of cubes required, six
sets shall be made during each day's work, half of each set for testing at 28 days for
determination of the minimum permissible crushing strength and the other half for
testing at seven days for the information of the Engineer's Representative as to quality
of the mix. When the results of the first thirty sets are available and for so long as the
Engineer's Representative is satisfied with the quality of the mix, he may reduce the
number of cubes required to two sets per day.

If the minimum specified crushing strength is not so attained the Contractor may
without expense to the Employer, cut cores from locations selected by the Engineer's
Representative. Where this is done the strength of cores when tested in accordance with
British Standard 1881 methods of testing concrete will be accepted as taking precedence
over the cubes strengths in determining the strength of the concrete and a core
strength of not less than 75 per cent. of the specified crushing strength at 28 days
(tested vertically) will be accepted for a core having a height/diameter ratio of 2. The
method which shall be adopted for correcting the strength of cubes and cores for age
shall be as directed by the Engineer. In order to check the depth of concrete laid, the
state of compaction and the position of the reinforcement, the Engineer's Representative

221
may order cores to be cut, and the Contractor shall carry out same, and repair all holes
so formed at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

The unit prices to be inserted by the Contractor in the bill of quantities shall
include for preparing, cutting, packing, any transporting and testing cubes and cores
required by the Engineer or his Representative.

In addition, for cores the price shall include for all costs incurred in connection with
drilling and making good to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

TRIAL MIXES AND TRIAL SLABS 6286.

The Contractor shall make trial mixes using the aggregates proposed for the
work to ensure that the concrete mix is sufficiently workable and that segregation of the
mix during transportation and placing does not occur. The composition of the trial mixes
shall comply with the requirements of the specification in all respects.

The Contractor shall construct a trial slab of the same thickness as that to be laid
in the work, to the full width of the finishing machine, and at least 30 metre long. The
slab shall be constructed with the approved mix to be used in the work, and in a
position as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Construction of the trial slab shall be commenced sufficiently in advance of the main
construction to enable cores to be cut from the trial slab. Six cores shall be cut
therefrom and shall be tested at 7 days, to ensure that the mix as designed and the
equipment proposed to be used are both suitable to achieve a fully compacted concrete
of the specified strength, workability and surface finish.

PLACING CONCRETE 6287.

When concreting of a slab has commenced no cessation of the work will be

allowed until concreting of the slab is completed. In the event of mechanical break down
or adverse weather, however, the Engineer's Representative may permit the use of a
construction joint and the Contractor shall carry out any additional precautionary
measures stipulated at his own expense. Any of the following joints may be considered
by the Contractor:

(i) Construction joint

(ii) Expansion joint
(iii) Warping joint
(iv) Contraction joint

The placing, compacting and finishing of the concrete shall be carried out as
rapidly as possible and operations shall be so arranged that in any vertical section the
concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the whole depth and finished within 1 hour
from the time of the completion of the mixing of the first batch of concrete in that
section.

SPREADING AND COMPACTION WITH A FINISHING MACHINE OF

222
REINFORCED CONCRETE ROAD SLABS 6288.

For concrete slabs of 200mm, thickness or less the concrete may either:

(a) be spread and compacted in one layer, or

(b) be spread in two layers which shall be compacted as one

When the concrete is spread in one layer a travelling jig or a type approved by
the Engineer's Representative shall be used to hold the reinforcement in position while
the concrete is being placed so after compaction the top cover to the reinforcement is as
specified. When the concrete is spread in two layers the first layer shall be spread to
such a level that after subsequent compaction it will support the reinforcement at a level
which will ensure the specified top cover. The layer of reinforcement shall then be
placed in position and covered with concrete.

Whichever method of spreading is adopted the concrete shall be struck off at the
appropriate surcharge and compacted true to line and level by one or more traverses of
the machine to give the slab the final thickness required. The compaction and surface
finish shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

For concrete slabs exceeding 200mm. in thickness the concrete may either:

(a) be compacted in two layers or,

(b) be compacted in one layer, if it can be shown to the satisfaction of the

Engineer's Representative that, with the plant and methods to be used, full compaction
can be achieved through out the full depth of the slab.

If the concrete is to be compacted in two layers a layer of concrete shall be

spread, struck off at the appropriate surcharge and compacted to a level that will ensure
the specified top cover to the reinforcement. The layer of reinforcement shall then be
placed in position and covered with concrete, which shall be struck off at the
appropriate surcharge and compacted true to line and level by one or more traverses of
the machine to give the slab the final thickness required. The compaction and surface
finish shall be to the satisfaction of Engineer's Representative. If the concrete is to be
compacted in one layer the concrete shall be spread and the reinforcement placed in
position by one of the methods specified for slabs of 200mm thickness or less.

SPREADING AND COMPACTION WITH A VIBRATING SCREED OF REINFORCED

CONCRETE ROAD SLABS 6289.

A layer of concrete shall be spread, struck off at the appropriate surcharge

and compacted to a level that will ensure the specified top cover to the reinforcement.
The layer of reinforcement shall then be placed in position by hand, or by mechanical
means approved by the Engineer’s Representative and shall be covered with concrete,
which shall be struck off at the appropriate surcharge and compacted true to line and
level by means of a vibrating steel or hardwood screed. The compaction and surface

223
finish shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

SPREADING AND COMPACTION WITH A FINISHING MACHINE OR

VIBRATING SCREED ON CONCRETE SLABS OR HAUNCHES USED AS ROAD
BASES 6290.

In exceptional circumstances where reinforced concrete slabs or haunches are

used as road bases, the concrete shall be spread struck off at the appropriate
surcharged and compacted in a single layer by machine or by a vibratory steel or
hardwood screed and finished true to line, and level to the required thickness. The
compaction and surface finish shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s
Representative.

CURING CONCRETE 6291.

Immediately after completion of the finishing process, all exposed surfaces of the
concrete shall be protected from the sun and drying winds by frames covered by canvas
or other approved material until the concrete is sufficiently hard to bear the weight of
other protective material without the surface becoming marked. The sides and ends of
the frames shall be covered to exclude drying currents of air.

Thereafter all exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be protected and kept damp
by covering with suitable matting, sand or other approved material: if sand is to be laid
a minimum depth of 50mm, will be required. The curing material shall be kept wet for a
period of at least seven days or longer as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Alternatively waterproof paper in accordance with the relevant clause of this
specification, or other approved sheeting may be used, and this shall be laid dry and
kept in contact with the surface of the concrete for at least seven days. The sheets shall
be lapped by at least 230mm and shall be weighted down and well fastened along the
edges to prevent the wind blowing beneath.

As an alternative method of curing the surfaces may be protected, where

approved by the Engineer by treating with an approved resinous curing compound,
mechanically sprayed on to the surface of the finished concrete at a rate of 4.5
6 litres/sq. m as soon as it is possible to produce a membrane of uniform thickness.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the compound shall be applied as soon as
practicable after completion of the laying and finishing of the concrete. Any groove over
a point shall be protected from the entry of curing liquid.

ACCURACY OF CONCRETE SURFACE USING FINISHING OR VIBRATING

SCREED 6292.

The concrete surface shall not show a departure from the true surface greater
than 3mm when tested with a 3 meter straight-edge or template in the manner
described for checking Base course finish.

If at any point tested the tolerance is outside these limits, the Contractor may

224
make not more than two additional passes of the vibrating beam of the finishing
machine and one further pass of the oscillating screed.

The surface shall again be tested in the specified manner whereupon if the irregularity
so measured still exceeds 3mm in 3 meter, the Engineer's Representative shall direct
that the concrete be removed to the level of the top surface of the reinforcement or for
unreinforced concrete to a depth of 50mm.

The area to be removed shall be that represented by the length of the straight
edge in the position of measurement across the full width of the screed.

The concrete so removed, shall not be reused. Where the point of measurement
in default is less than 5 metres from a transverse expansion joint, the whole area up to
the joint shall be removed to the required depth.

Fresh concrete of specified quality shall be placed to the appropriate surcharge.

It shall then be compacted and finished in the normal manner and shall again be subject
to test for accuracy of finish.

Although the concrete may be removed immediately following measurement of

the irregularity and while it is still wet, this shall not absolve the Contractor from
complying with the requirements of this clause if for any reason the concrete to be
removed has hardened.

The removal of concrete under this clause and its replacement shall be carried
out as directed by the Engineer's Representative to his approval and without extra
charge.

The accuracy of surface required by this clause shall apply also to the surface
across any joint whether formed initially or as a result of replacement of concrete arising
out of the requirements of this clause.

In exceptional circumstances, where concrete road slabs are to be surfaced with

asphalt, coated macadam or dense tar surfacing, the requirements as to the finished
surface of the concrete shall be those in this clause except that the specified tolerance
shall be 6mm in 3 metres instead of 3mm in 3 metres.

6293. No vehicular traffic shall be allowed on the finished surface within 20 days of its
completion where ordinary portland cement is used or 10 days where rapid
hardening cement is used and until the joints have been sealed unless otherwise
authorized by the Engineer.

TESTS

SELECTION AND CONTROL TESTS 6294.

The selection and control tests to be carried out under this section of this
Specification shall be those specified to be carried out for concrete and reinforced

225
 concrete work and shall be conducted in the manner stipulated in all relevant clauses of
this specification.
In addition to the making, curing and testing of concrete test cubes as control tests on
concrete carriageways, the Engineer's Representative may order cores to be cut from
the finished work so as to check the state of compaction, the thickness of the concrete
and the position of the reinforcement. These cores shall be drilled and tested in
accordance with the provisions of B.S. 1881, or any amendment thereto as directed by
the Engineer.

TRIAL SECTIONS 6295.

The Contractor's attention is particularly drawn to the necessity for carrying out
trial sections with the proposed materials and plant prior to the start of the main
construction to determine the most efficient construction technique and the suitability of
the proposed materials and plant, as described by the relevant clause of this
specification.

(CLAUSES 6296 – 6299 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (D) SURFACING

(I) TWO COAT BITUMINOUS SURFACE DRESSING

GENERAL 6300.

In addition to all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this
specification, the following shall be deemed to refer more particularly to two coat
bituminous surface dressing work, and shall be read in conjunction with same.

MATERIALS

MATERIALS FOR SURFACE DRESSING 6301.

Materials used in surface dressing are to be:

(a) CUT-BACK BITUMEN FOR PRIME COAT:

Either a cut-back bitumen known as M.C-O, having a viscosity of 75/150 seconds

at 25°C as measured by the furol viscosimeter, or a cut-back bitumen known as
M.C-1 having a viscosity of 75/100 seconds at 50°C as measured by the furol
viscosimeter.

(b) CUT BACK BITUMEN FOR WEARING COAT:

(
: Either a cut-back bitumen having a viscosity of 100/150 seconds at 40°C as
measured by the standard tar viscometer, or a cutback bitumen having a viscosity
of 300/400 seconds viscosity at 40°C as measured by the standard tar viscometer.

226
(c) STRAIGHT RUN BITUMEN FOR WEARING COAT:

Straight run bitumen for first wearing Coat shall have a penetration grade
of 80/100 at 25°C and a flash point (open) of 107°C (Minimum).

(d) BLINDING MATERIALS

Sand for blinding prime coat surface shall consist of clean sharp sand of
6mm maximum size with not more than 20% passing 600µm. sieve, and
shall be approved by the Engineer's Representative. Alternatively grit
arising from the crushing of the rock may be used provided it is approved
by the Engineer's Representative, and the grading complies with the
specification for sand earlier discussed.

(e) MATERIALS FOR SURFACE DRESSING

Materials for blinding the first wearing coat surface dressing on the
carriageway, shall consist of clean crushed rock or clean crushed or
uncrushed gravel from an approved source, as specified, graded into
single sizes as defined in B.S. 63 latest edition or any amendment
thereto; "Single Sized Road Stone and chippings", or in B.S. 1984 latest
edition -"Single Size Gravel Aggregate for Roads as appropriate. Two
single sizes l9mm and 12mm shall be used for blinding on the
carriageways, while 10mm single size material may be allowed for non
trafficked surfaces (like verges) but only with the written approval of the
Engineer's Representative.

The grading of the material shall be carried out by means of an approved

mechanically operated screening plant, fitted with screens having square perforations
corresponding to the B.S. sieve size of the material it is intended to produce. Screens
with circular perforations will be permitted, provided the diameter of the perforations is
increased so as to be equivalent to the corresponding B.S. sieve size.

The different sizes of materials shall be stored in separate stockpiles and shall
not be mixed. If the Engineer's Representative considers it necessary the blinding
material shall be washed before use. The aim of the Contractor shall be to obtain the
maximum production of 19mm and 12mm single sized material from the plant and
either size may be used in blinding a continuous section of surface dressing of not less
than 2 kilometres in length.

The crushing aggregate value of all material used for surface dressing shall not
exceed 30% and its abrasion test result not more than 25%. All samples shall be tested
as described in B.S. 882. Samples of all blinding materials to be used in the works shall
be submitted to the Engineer's Representative for approval prior to being used.

227
 Prior to the commencement of surface treatment works the Contractor will carry
out tests under the direction of the Engineer for the purpose of assessing the adhesive
qualities of the materials which are to be used in the works. As a result of these tests
the Engineer may decide that it is necessary to use an additive to the bitumen for the
prevention of strippings of the stone surfacing, and the Contractor shall comply with the
directions of the Engineer in this respect. Strip test is recommended.

BITUMINOUS EMULSION 6302.

Bitumen emulsion shall contain 30% of bitumen and shall comply in all other
respects with B.S. 434 (latest edition and amendment thereto) except that the basic
bitumen used in the manufacture may have a penetration of 80/100. Bitumen emulsion
containing 30% of bitumen may be made by mixing thoroughly together in the correct
proportions emulsion complying with B.S. 434 (amendment thereto) with clean soft
water.

(CLAUSES 6303 - 6309 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

WORKMANSHIP

HEATING OF CUT BACK BITUMEN 6310.

The cut back bitumen shall be heated in a bitumen heater complying with B.S.
167, which shall have a capacity commensurate with the output required. The heater
shall be so operated that the temperature of the bitumen applied to the road shall be
within the specified range. Accurate thermometers shall be incorporated in the heater to
give a clear indication of the bitumen temperature. Should the temperature be in
excess of that specified, the Engineer's Representative may direct that this overheated
bitumen be disposed off at the Contractor's expense.

CUT-BACK BITUMEN PRIME COAT 6311.

The prime coat shall be of a medium curing cut-back bitumen of either M.C.O.
Grade or M.C.1 Grade as specified. The actual grade to be used shall be determined by
the Engineer after carrying out site tests to determine the penetration of each grade.

The bitumen shall be applied strictly in accordance with the provisions of the
relevant clauses of this specification on an approved Base course free from all dust and
loose material and slightly damped prior to applying the bitumen.

After spraying the surface shall be left for a minimum of three hours before
blinding is applied, or longer if considered necessary by the Engineer's Representative to
effect the maximum penetration. Blinding consisting of sand or grit complying with the
provisions of the relevant clauses of this specification shall be applied so that a uniform
covering of sufficient thickness is obtained to ensure that no bare or fat patches of
bitumen are showing. The blinding shall then be rolled in with not more than two
passes of a roller.

228
SPRAYING OF CUT-BACK BITUMEN PRIME COAT 6312.

The prime coat as specified shall be evenly applied to the prepared Base course
by means of an approved presuure feed mobile distributor and complying with the
requirements of B.S. 1707: "Binder distributors". In addition to the special requirements
detailed in section three of B.S. 1707, the pressure feed mobile distributor shall be fitted
with a spray bar through which the hot bitumen can be circulated while the distributor is
not spraying. The jets shall be so arranged in the spray bar that they are effectively
preheated to the same temperature as the circulating bitumen.

The Contractor shall provide a set of 50mm wide troughs as described in

Appendix "A" of B.S. 1707 and shall carry out depot tray test A in the presence of the
Engineer's Representative to demonstrate that the lateral distribution is in accordance
with B.S. 1707. This test shall be carried out prior to using the spraying plant for the
first time on the contract, and subsequently at the discretion of the Engineer's
Representative. In the event of the quantity of bitumen in any trough or troughs being
found to lie outside the prescribed tolerance from the average, the faulty jet shall be
located and cleaned or replaced.

The bitumen shall be applied at a temperature in accordance with the Table

given below, and at a rate of spray of between 0.8 and 1.2 litres per square metre
depending on the texture of the surface. From the calibration charts and tests made on
the distributor, the spraying speed shall be determined to give the required rate of
spray.
OR
Alternatively rate of spray may be checked as follows:-

Check the initial and final quantity of cut back and record. The difference
between initial and final readings divided by the area sprayed can be used to check
compliance with approved rate of spraying.

Note:- Initial and final reading shall take place at same position.

TABLE VI-8 SEALING COATS TEMPERATURE OF APPLICATION

BITUMEN TEMPERATURE OF
GRADE APPLICATION

M.C.0 MIN MAX

M.C.1 38°C 66°C
54°C 79°C

The Contractor shall carry out trial sections, as directed by the Engineer's
Representative to determine the most suitable grade and rate of application of bitumen.

229
 Immediately before any spraying run is begun, the spray bar shall be tested by
allowing all the jet to discharge simultaneously for about half a minute with a slotted
metal tray placed beneath the spray bar whilst a visual inspection is made. Any jet
which is seen not delivering a uniform spray cone shall be cleaned or replaced. After
testing the spray bar, the distributor shall proceed with the spraying run without delay.
No spraying shall be carried out when rain appears imminent, during rain, or after rain,
until the surface has dried. The Contractor shall ensure that joints between spraying
strips are straight and without excess or deficiency of bitumen which would cause either
fattening up or scabbing along the joint.

The Contractor will be required to respray at his own expense any section which
show deficiency of binder, or to burn off and respray at his own expense any sections
which show an excess of binder and which subsequently fat up.

FIRST COAT SURFACE DRESSING 6313.

The wearing course of the surface dressing shall not be laid until at least 10 days
after the application of the prime coat. During this period additional blinding sand shall
be added if directed and brushed over the surface to prevent damage. After such period
all damaged or weak spots shall be cut out, refilled, recompacted flush with the existing
surface, sealed and blinded as specified and rerolled to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative. After all repair work has been allowed sufficient time to harden, the
surface shall be swept clean of all loose material immediately prior to the application of
the wearing coat. Before spraying is begun the surface shall be dry.

Bitumen for the wearing coat of the surface dressing shall be an approved
cutback bitumen or straight run bitumen as specified in the relevant clauses of this
specification. The bitumen as specified shall be evenly sprayed on the surface by means
of an approved mechanical spraying machine as specified. The temperature of the
bitumen at the time of spraying shall be in accordance with the table given below. The
grade of bitumen to de used shall be determined by the Engineer.

TABLE VI-9 BITUMEN VISCOSITY AND TEMPERATURE OF APPLICATION

BITUMEN TEMPERATURE OF
VISCOSITY APPLICATION

MIN
STV AT 40°C MAX
132°C
100/1500 SECS 160°C
149°C
300/400 SECS 177°C

The rate of spray of the bitumen shall be determined according to the type of base, type
and size of chippings which are to be used as detailed in the table given below, and the
Contractor shall carry out trial sections, as directed by the Engineer's Representative to
determine the most appropriate rate of application of bitumen.

230
 TABLE VI-10 SIZE OF CHIPPING AND RATE OF SPRAY OF BITUMEN

NOMINAL SIZE RATE OF SPRAY OF

OF CHIPPINGS BITUMEN LITRE/SQ.M.
10mm 0.60 – 0.90
12mm 0.75 – 1.20
20mm 1.20 – 1.50

Immediately after spraying the surface shall be blinded with approved single size
chippings as specified. The chippings shall be distributed on the sprayed surface by
means of mechanical spreaders or tailboard gritters so that a single layer of closely
packed chippings is obtained. Any bare or lean areas shall be made good by a follow on
gang using hand blinding.

Rolling shall be carried out immediately after the chippings have been spread
with an approved roller weighing not less than 3,629 kilograms or more than 5,443
kilograms. The minimum number of passes of the roller shall be used to press the
chippings into the film of bitumen. Two passes of the roller should generally be
sufficient. Pneumatic tyre rollers are preferable to smooth wheeled rollers.

Prior to the commencement of spraying a section of the road for the first coat, a
2 metres wide paper strip shall be laid over the end of the previous section. The
bitumen sprayer shall then commence its run from over this paper strip.

FINAL SURFACE OF CARRIAGEWAY 6314.

The finished surface of the carriageway shall be left as smooth as possible and
the accuracy of finish in the longitudinal direction shall not vary at any point by more
than 6mm from a 3 metre straight edge, placed in any position on the finished surface
parallel to the centre line. The transverse profile shall conform to the same accuracy,
using a correctly shaped template instead of the straight edge.

The surface shall be evenly textured and show no lean or fat areas and shall not
have any low or flat spots where water will collect.

WET WEATHER 6315.

No surfacing work shall be done in wet weather or when rain is imminent. Only
dry chippings shall be used.

REGULATION OF TRAFFIC OVER PRIME COAT AND SURFACE DRESSING

6316.

After laying the prime coat surfacing, barriers shall be erected to keep the area
surfaced free from traffic. It shall remain free from traffic for such a period as the
Engineer’s Representative may direct after which it shall be opened to traffic for not less
than 3 days and for not more than 7 days. During this period additional blinding

231
material shall be added and all damage by traffic made good.
After the application of the first coat surfacing, the area surfaced shall be kept free from
traffic for at least 24 hours.

The section shall then be opened to traffic and suitable traffic notices and
barriers shall be erected for a period of one week restricting traffic speeds to 25 KPH
During this period empty bitumen drums or other obstacles, which shall be well lighted,
or alternatively removed during the hours of darkness, shall be placed on the newly
surfaced areas for the purpose of limiting the speed of traffic, and shall be moved to
different positions from day to day in such a way that the whole width of the surface
receives equal wear and compaction from the wheels of vehicles.

(CLAUSES 6317 - 6319 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

TESTS

TESTS FOR BITUMEN 6320.

The Contractor shall produce manufacturer's test certificate if requested,

otherwise the Engineer may require the Contractor to carry out the following tests as
described in "standard methods for testing petroleum and its products" published by the
Institute of Petroleum, 26 Portland Place, London W.1.

Penetration of bitumen IP.49/56

Soluble bitumen content: bitumen and asphalt IP.47/55.

Flash-point by means of the cleveland apparatus IP.36/55

Specific gravity IP.59/57. Method C.

Specific gravity of liquids or solids - pycnometer method.

Specific gravity of liquids or solids - method F.

The determination of viscosity by the standard tar viscosimeter or the furol

viscosimeter may also be required by the Engineer.

The cost of carrying out these tests if required by the Engineer shall be deemed
to be included in the tendered rates and prices.

TESTS FOR AGGREGATES ROADSTONE AND CHPPINGS 6321.

In determining the suitability of aggregates for use as road surfacing material

the Engineer may require the Contractor to carry out any of the test specified in B.S.
812- Mineral aggregates sand and fillers, B.S. 882, 1201 - Concrete aggregates from
natural sources B.S. 1881 - Methods of testing concrete, B.S. 1200 - building sands
from natural sources, B.S. 63 - Single-sized roadstones and chippings.

232
The cost of carrying out these tests if required by the Engineer shall be deemed to be
included in the tendered rates and prices.

TESTS FOR BINDER DISTRIBUTORS 6322.

The Contractor shall provide a set of 50mm wide trough as described in

Appendix A of B.S. 1707 and shall carry out depot tray test A in the presence of the
Engineer's Representative to demonstrate that the lateral distribution is in accordance
with B.S. 1707.

This test shall be carried out prior to using the spraying plant for the first time on
the contract and subsequently at the discretion of the Engineer's Representative. In the
event of the quantity of bitumen in any trough or troughs being found to lie outside the
prescribed tolerance from the average, the faulty jet shall be located, cleaned or
replaced and a further test carried out if required by the Engineer's Representative.

TESTS FOR RATE OF APPLICATION 6323.

The Contractor shall test the rate of application of bitumen at regular intervals,
as directed by the Engineer's Representative by means of the "tray test" as described in
Road Note No.11: "Binder distributors for surface dressing", issued by the Road
Research Laboratory, England.

(CLAUSES 6324 - 6329 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

(II) BITUMINOUS MACADAM SURFACINGS

GENERAL 6330.

In addition to all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this
specification, the following shall be deemed to refer more particularly to bituminous
macadam surfacing work and shall be read in conjunction with same.

MATERIALS

BITUMEN MACADAM GENERAL 6331.

The manufacture and grading of the bitumen macadam shall be in accordance

with B.S. 1621 "bitumen macadam with crushed rock or slag aggregate except where
stated otherwise in these specifications.

BITUMEN MACADAM MATERIALS 6332.

(A) AGGREGATE.

Coarse aggregate shall be hard clean and durable crushed igneous rock from a

233
 source to be approved by the Engineer and in accordance with B.S. 812.

Fine aggregate shall be quarry fines produced from the crushing of igneous rock
in a secondary plant. They are to consist of hard non-absorbent moderately sharp
particles and to be free from clay, loam, and other foreign matter.

If filler is used it shall consist of finely ground particles of hydrated lime, portland
cement or crushed rock and at least 75% of the filler shall pass 75µm sieve.

(1st) Binder: The binder shall be a straight-run bitumen with a penetration ranging
from 40/50, 60/70, 80/100 at 25°C.

BITUMEN MACADAM APPROVAL OF MATERIALS 6333.

Representative samples of all materials proposed for use under these

specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor at the Contractor's
expense for test and for preparation of trial mixes to determine job mix formula. The
Engineer shall make tests of the proposed materials and inform the Contractor if the
tests indicate compliance with the specifications.

BITUMEN MACADAM COMPOSITION OF MIXES 6334.

The grading of the combined aggregate to be used in the respective mix for each
course shall be within the limits stated below and when plotted graphically with the
particle size to a logarithmic scale shall lie on a smooth curve within the envelope of
these limits.

TABLE VI-11 GRADING ENVELOPE FOR BITUMINOUS BINDER COURSE

50MM BINDER COURSE

SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

38mm 100
25mm 50 - 100
12.5mm 26 - 50
6mm 18 - 30
2.8mm 12 - 22
1.25mm 8 - 17
600µm 7 - 14
300µm 4 - 11
150µm 2- 8
75µm 0- 5
BITUMEN 4 - 5.5%BY WT.
OF AGGREGATE OR AS PER DESIGN

234
TABLE VI-12 GRADING ENVELOPE FOR BITUMINOUS WEARING COURSE

40MM WEARING COURSE

SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

25mm 100
19mm 95 - 100
12.5mm 70 - 90
9.5 mm 55 – 75
6.4mm 40 - 60
3.2mm 25 - 40
1.25mm 15 - 30
600µm 12 - 24
300µm 8 - 18
150µm 5 - 12
75µm 3 - 6
BITUMEN 4 - 7% BY WT.OF AGGREGATE
OR AS PER DESIGN

The exact job-mix formulae will depend on the nature and grading of the
aggregate and the type of bitumen. The exact job-mix formulae for the respective
courses will be determined by the Engineer.

CLAUSES 6335 - 6339 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

WORKMANSHIP

BITUMEN MACADAM MIXING PLANT 6340.

The materials shall be mixed in an approved mixer of batch or continuous type

from which mixed materials can be delivered and laid hot.

The mixing plant shall be maintained in good working condition and shall be
subject to inspection by the Engineer's Representative. The weighing, measuring and
recording apparatus shall be checked at frequent intervals and maintained in perfect
adjustment throughout the contract.

BITUMEN MACADAM MIXING 6341.

The aggregate and binder shall be heated separately, aggregate to a

temperature range of 121°C - 149°C and the binder to 135°C - 163°C. The respective
temperatures of the aggregate and the binder are to be within 14°C on each other at
the time of mixing.

235
 Prolonged and excessive heating of the materials is to be avoided and particular
care is to be taken with binders. A dry mixing period of at least 10 seconds shall
precede the addition of bitumen to the mix. Wet mixing shall only continue as long as is
necessary to obtain a thorough blend.

Aggregates, including fillers, if any shall be thoroughly dry immediately before

mixing. When moisture is detected in the mixed materials all aggregates in the hot bins
are to be removed and replaced in their respective stock piles.

BITUMEN MACADAM TRANSPORTING MIXED MATERIAL 6342.

The mixed materials shall be transported from mixing plant to site in clean metal
lined vehicles. Every precaution is to be taken to avoid segregation of mixed materials
and to ensure that they do not become contaminated with dust or foreign matter.

Should any load be wetted excessively by rain, they will be rejected by the
Engineer's Representative.

BITUMEN MACADAM PREPARATION OF SURFACE PRIOR TO LAYING 6343.

Before the macadam is laid on the newly constructed based course, the surface
will be inspected by the Engineer’s Representative and testing using an Engineer’s level
3 metre straight edge or any other means to ensure that the surface conforms with the
requirements of this specification. Any irregularities in the surface shall be corrected to
the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative before surfacing work will be allowed to
proceed.

BITUMEN MACADAM LAYING 6344.

After mixing the material must not be reheated other than by the means
provided in or on the spreading machine.

Material must not be laid when the surface on which it is to be placed is wet or
when rain appears imminent.

Immediately prior to laying the bitumen macadam, the surface of the Base
course shall be swept clean of all loose and caked dirt. The macadam as specified shall
be laid by approved means to compacted thickness of 50mm binder course and 65mm
wearing course, subject to design.

It is essential that the material is laid at a temperature not less than 107°C and
not more than 149°C. The Contractor is to provide at each spreader and finisher a
suitable thermometer for testing the temperature of the material as it is being spread
and is to take such temperature reading continually and record them hourly throughout
each day's laying. This record shall be available for inspection by the Engineer or his

236
Representative who will himself make such additional temperature checks as he
considers desirable.

BITUMEN MACADAM SPREADER OR FINISHER 6345.

The materials shall be laid by approved mechanical spreaders and finishers. The
spreader and finisher shall be in in good mechanical condition and shall be capable of
laying to the required width and profile without causing segregation, dragging, burning,
irregularities or other surface defects and it shall be capable of being operated at a
speed consistent with the character of the mixture and the thickness of the course being
laid, so as to produce a surface having a uniform density and surface texture. When not
operated on side forms the spreader will employ equalizing runner evener arms or other
automatic compensating devices to adjust the profile and confine the edges of the
course to true lines.

The mixer capacity and the operating speed of the spreader shall be so adjusted
as to ensure continuous laying and to avoid intermittent stopping of the spread as far as
is practicable.

HAND SPREADING NOT ALLOWED 6346.

Hand spreading will not be permitted for general work, but will only be allowed
for filling localized depressions, or as directed by the Engineer or his Representative.

Where hand spreading and tamping is permitted the mixed material is to be

dumped on delivery upon an existing hard clean surface or an approved metal sheets
outside the area where it is to be spread and shall be distributed in to place immediately
by hot shovels. It shall be spread with hot rakes in a uniformly loose layer to the full
depth required.

BITUMEN MACADAM ROLLING 6347.

As soon after laying as conditions permit and when the material is still at a
temperature of not less than 95°C the materials will be uniformly compacted with 3
wheeled smooth rollers by rolling in a longitudinal direction, progressing gradually from
side to centre of work and so lapping the rolling as to obliterate all roller marks on
completion. A sufficient number of rollers shall be employed to ensure that the entire
surfacing as laid is compacted at the correct temperature.

At least two rollers are to be provided, one is to be three wheeled and is to have
a weight per centimetre width of rear wheel of between 44 and 63 kilograms. The
second roller shall preferably be a pneumatic typed roller and shall be of multiple axle,
multiple wheel type with smooth tread pneumatic tyres of equal size staggered on the
axles at such spacings and overlaps as will provide uniform compactive pressure for the
full compacting width of the roller when operating. Oscillation of the wheels, if
provided, shall be in vertical plane only. The pneumatic tyre roller shall be capable (A)
of being ballasted sufficiently to bring its loaded weight to at least 2½ times its own
weight. Gross weight to be preferably 18 - 21 Tonne and (B) of exerting compactive

237
ground pressures of at least 5.6 kilograms per square centimetre (5.6 - 8.4 Kg/sq.cm).
For the pneumatic rollers compaction should be done within 65°C - 80°C range.

All roller wheels are to be kept slightly moist by the use of water tanks and spray
bars attached to the machines to prevent the material being picked up or disturbed.

Rollers must not be left standing on the new surface while there is any risk of it
being damaged thereby.

The sequence of rolling operation shall be:

(a) breakdown rolling with the wheeled smooth roller;

(b) intermediate rolling with the high pressure tyre pneumatic roller; and

(c) the final rolling with a steel wheeled tandem roller.

Rolling will continue until the specified density is obtained. This can be checked
by using non-destructive method i.e. Nuclear gauge apparatus.

FIELD DENSITY OF COMPACTED BITUMEN MACADAM 6348.

Density tests of the bitumen macadam surfacing after compaction shall be taken
from the trial area and later at intervals throughout the course of the work and
compared with the density of control specimens taken from the same material before
laying, all in accordance with the following procedure:

(A) A sample of mixed material will be taken from a lorry before the material is
delivered to the spreader, and three control specimens shall be made and their
density measured by the Engineer's Representative by the marshall method.

The average of two close results from the specimens taken as the control density
of that particular batch.

(B) The pavement will be marked with the batch numbers to show where the lorry
load of material (from which the sample was taken) is laid, so that field density
samples can be taken for comparison with the control specimens.

(C) After completion of rolling, two samples are to be cut from each area so marked
in positions indicated by the Engineer's Representative.

(D) The samples shall be taken in accordance with part 1 section 3 of B.S. 598 and
the density calculated by weighing in air and weighing in water in accordance
with part 6 of B.S. 598. The average of two close results will be taken as the
density of the compacted material in that area.

(E) The field density will not be less than 100% of the control density determined as
above.

238
 When an approved rolling procedure has been established, each course will be
sampled in accordance with the above at the rate of one sample area for each 1670
sq.m or one sample area every four hours (whichever is the more frequent). Material
which does not achieve the required density will either be cut out and replaced or be
further compacted until the require density is obtained.

TRIAL AREAS 6349.

The first 30 metres of the approved bituminous macadam which is laid by the
spreader shall be regarded as a trial area in order to establish a rolling procedure which
will produce the required field density.

At least four samples of the material after rolling will be taken in accordance with
part 1 section 3 of B.S. 598 (1958) When the work is at least 12 hours old in order to
determine the degree of compaction.

If the required specified density determined in accordance with the foregoing

clause is not obtained, the field rolling procedure will be changed so as to achieve the
desired field density and the trial area will be cut out and replaced to the satisfaction of
the Engineer or his Representative.

BITUMEN MACADAM FINISHED LEVELS 6350.

(A) The surfacing will be finished to the required levels shown on the drawings. The
finished surface shall be of such smoothness that when tested with a 3 metre
straight edge placed anywhere in a longitudinal direction on the surface, there
shall not be a gap greater than 5mm between the bottom of the straight edge
and the surface of the pavement anywhere along the pavement. Any deviation
exceeding 5mm will be corrected at the Contractor's expense by scarifying,
cutting out and removing all loosened materials, adding new materials as
required, reshaping and rolling. No materials loosened by scarifying and cutting
out, will be left in position or otherwise reused. The surface shall be similarly
tested, and corrected if necessary in a transverse direction using a correctly
shaped template instead of a straight edge.

(B) It is essential that the surface of the road is free from waves, any depression
which retain water on the surface are immediately to be corrected as described
above to the satisfaction of The Engineer's Representative.

BITUMEN MACADAM JOINTS 6351.

All joints shall be vertical, properly formed to the correct line and level; if
necessary, they shall be cut back to achieve this. The exposed edges of the bitumen
macadam already laid shall be coated thinly with bitumen emulsion containing 30% to
50% bitumen before laying adjoining work. All joints on completion shall present the

239
same texture, density and smoothness as other sections of the surface.

Surfaces and projections which the new paving will abut shall be thoroughly
cleaned and coated with bitumen emulsion containing 30%
50% bitumen. The new paving shall then be tamped around and against the projection
to such a depth that, on completion of compaction the finished surface of the wearing
course is level with the top of the projection.

BITUMEN MACADAM DAMAGED WORK 6352.

Should the new bitumen macadam be dragged, churned up, become soft, show
signs of segregation, show that stripping of the binder from the aggregate has occurred,
or suffer other damage during or after being laid, the Contractor will remove the
damaged or faulty work at his own expense and replace with fresh material, laid and
compacted to the correct level to the approval of the Engineer's Representative.

(CLAUSES 6353 - 6359 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

TESTS

BITUMEN MACADAM TESTS 6360.

The Contractor shall provide equipment, labour and such trained staff as may be
required by the Engineer's Representative for carrying out the following tests on
materials to be used in the manufacture of bitumen macadam in accordance with the
following standards:

(A) Grading tests on aggregates in accordance with B.S. 812: "sampling and
testing of mineral aggregates and fillers".

(B) Determination of binder content of mixed materials in accordance with

hot extraction method BT 1 described in B.S. 598: - "Sampling and
Examination of Bituminous Road Mixtures". The Contractor is required to
comply to the requirements of B.S. 598.

FREQUENCY OF TESTS: BITUMEN MACADAM 6361.

Aggregates shall be sampled and tested at source, on delivery to the mixing

plant and after each extraction test and the result of each test shall be submitted to the
Engineer's Representative within 24 hours of the sample being taken. The number of
such tests shall be adequate for proper control of the materials and shall not be limited
to those made on specific instructions of the Engineer's Representative. Samples of
mixed materials shall be taken and tested during the first day's mixing and throughout
the work to confirm that the grading and binder contents are as specified.

Such samples shall be taken either at the place and time of mixing or at the
place of laying both may be necessary as the results will complement one another as

240
directed by the Engineer's Representative. Samples for testing shall also be cut from
the surfacing as laid when directed by the Engineer's Representative.

The frequency of sampling mixed materials shall be at least once per day or once
for each 90 tonne of material mixed whichever is the more frequent. The result of each
test on mixed materials shall be submitted to the Engineer's Representative within 24
hours of the sampling and any adjustments shown to be necessary shall be made
immediately. Until such adjustments have been made and until a certificate to the effect
has been forwarded to the Engineer's Representative no further batches of mixed
material shall be made.

INDEPENDENT TESTS: BITUMEN MACADAM 6362.

Independent sampling and testing may be carried out by the Engineer's

Representative throughout the contract period and for this purpose the Contractor shall
grant free access to the mixing plant and storage depots, supply materials and provide
every facility for the Engineer's Representative to take samples whenever required.

In particular, throughout the contract, the Engineer's Representative will carry

out control tests on the plant mix as he requires.

The Engineer's Representative shall be supplied with all necessary equipment,

labour and materials to perform any additional tests he may wish to carry out.

MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE FOR BITUMEN 6363.

A certificate is to be obtained from the suppliers with each consignment of

bitumen delivered, stating the grade of material being supplied, and these certificates
are to be handed to the Engineer's Representative.

CONTRACTOR TO TEST MATERIALS: BITUMEN MACADAM 6364.

Notwithstanding the production of any manufacturer’s test certificates if the

Engineer so requires, the Contractor shall arrange for the testing in an approved
manner of all materials used throughout the contract to ensure that they are up to the
standard specified, i.e. Aggregates, bitumen and such other materials as specified or
decided by the Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of materials
incorporated in the works to ensure that they have been manufactured or supplied as
specified, or as ordered by the Engineer.

NOTICE OF TESTS: BITUMEN MACADAM 6365.

Whenever the Contractor intends to carry out any of the above tests, he shall
give the Engineer's Representative sufficient notice to enable him, should he so wish, to
be present during the test. The Engineer's Representative shall be given the results in
writing of all tests, as soon as they are available, and in any case not later than 24
hours after samples have been taken.
SAMPLES TO BE IN DUPLICATE 6366.

241
 Whenever the Contractor takes samples for testing, and where so directed he is
to take duplicate samples and hand them to the Engineer's Representative. Such
samples are to be properly packed and labelled as directed.

COST OF TESTS BITUMEN MACADAM 6367.

The cost of these tests including the provision of samples, will be deemed to
have been included in unit price for bitumen macadam.

(CLAUSES 6368 - 6369 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

(III) HOT ASPHALTIC CONCRETE

GENERAL 6370.

This item consists of hot mixed, hot laid asphaltic concrete composed of mineral
aggregate and asphalt cement thoroughly mixed in an approved plant until all aggregate
particles are uniformly coated with asphalt.

The asphaltic concrete shall be laid in two courses surface and binder courses,
with or without wedge or levelling course or any combination of these as shown on the
drawings. Unless specified in Volume III or on the drawings, the compacted thickness of
each course shall not be less than 60mm for the binder and 40mm for the surface
course. The compacted thickness of any single constructed course shall not exceed
75mm for binder or levelling course or 60mm for surface course.

Priming of untreated base and application of tack coat to existing paved surfaces
shall be done as follows:

For Priming Base:

MC-O or MC-l shall be used at the rate of 1.0 - 2.0 Litres/ sq.m

For Applying Bitumen emulsion,

Tack Coat: quick breaking type applied at the rate of 0.25 -
0.70 Litres/sq.m

Tack coat shall be applied in all areas to take the binder course if warranted by
surface conditions and directed by the Engineer's Representative.

All materials and method of preparation and construction shall conform with the
requirements of these specifications. The finished pavement shall conform in all
respects with the lines, grades, dimensions and cross sections shown on the drawings or
as may be otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer.

MATERIAL 6371.

242
 The materials used shall be those prescribed for the several parts which
constitute the finished work and shall conform with all the requirements for such
materials as set out herein.

(A) AGGREGATE

(I) Coarse aggregate shall be the portion of the aggregate retained on the
No. 5mm opening sieve and shall be hard, clean and durable crushed
igneous rock from a source to be approved by the Engineer. The crushed
stone shall be free from dirt or other objectionable matter.

The coarse aggregate when tested by the methods described in B.S 812 shall
have properties not exceeding the following values ON Table VI – 13.

TABLE VI-13 AGGREGATE SPECIFICATION FOR DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM,

ASPHALTIC BASE AND WEARING COURSES

Pavement Aggregate Flakiness Absorption

Course Crushing Index Factor
Value

Dense Bitumen Macadam Base 30 35 1.5

Dense Bitumen Macadam

Wearing Course 30 35 0.5

Asphalt Concrete Base-Coarse 30 35 0.5

Asphalt concrete Wearing

Course 30 35 0.5

(II) Fine aggregate shall be the portion of the aggregate passing the No. 5mm
opening sieve and shall be quarry fines produced from the crushing of igneous
rock. They shall be composed of clean, tough, rough surfaced and angular
particles, free from lumps, or ball of clay, loam and other deleterious substances.

(III) Mineral filler shall consist of finely ground particles of hydrated lime, Portland
cement or other non plastic mineral matter approved by the Engineer. It shall
be free from foreign or other objectionable material, and shall meet the following
grading requirements:
TABLE VI-14 SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL FILLER

SIEVE %BY WEIGHT PASSING

243
 300µm 100
200µm 95 - 100
75µm 85 - 100
(B) BITUMINOUS MATERIAL

TABLE VI-15 QUALITY OF ASPHALTIC CEMENT

PROPERTY ASPHALT CEMENT

80 – 100 PEN 60 – 70 PEN

SPECIFIC GRAVITY @ 25°C 1.0 - 1.05 1.01- 1.06

SOFTENING POINT R AND 45 - 52 48- 56

B (°C)

PENETRATION @ 25°C--- 80 - 100 60- 70

CM 0.1mm

DUCTILITY @ 25°C---CM 100 100

MINIMUM

LOSS ON HEATING FOR 5 0.5 0.2

HOURS AT 163°C % BY
WEIGHT ----- MAX

SOLUBILITY IN CS2, 99 99
% BY WT … MIN.

DROP IN PENETRATION 20 20
AFTER HEATING %

ORIGINAL ----- MAX.

225 250
FLASH POINT (OPEN CUP)
ºC MIN.
0.5
ASH. % BY WT. MAX. 0.5

(C)Bitumen emulsion for tack coat shall be emulsion quick breaking type
containing 30% - 50% bitumen.

(D)Cutback bitumen for priming shall be MCO or MC-1.

APPROVAL OF MATERIALS 6372.

244
 Representative samples of all materials proposed for use under these
specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor at the Contractor's
expense for test and for the preparation of trial mixes to determine the job mix formula.
The Engineer shall make tests of the proposed materials and inform the Contractor if the
tests indicate compliance with the specifications.

Suitable sizes of aggregate shall be stored in bins at each point where

bituminous materials are mixed. The bins shall be in such numbers and of such
capacities as to ensure that an uninterrupted supply of all the necessary sizes of
aggregates is available at the mixer.

If aggregates are stockpiled prior to their transference to the bins, the stockpiles
shall be formed on concrete floors laid to falls sufficient to permit drainage at the base
of the stockpiles. Aggregates shall be handled to and from the stockpiles in a manner
such that they are not contaminated by the ground or by extraneous matter and also in
a manner such that segregation is prevented. In as much as possible the bins shall be
covered to prevent dampness of aggregate by rain.

Coarse and fine aggregates and aggregates from different sources shall be
stockpiled separately and if aggregates of different gradings or from different sources
are stockpiled in close proximity, the stockpiles shall be separated by partitioning.

All aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic methods and all washed

aggregates shall be stockpiled under cover for draining for at least 24 hours before use.

Material used as filler shall be stored in dry conditions to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative.

No material shall be used until it has been approved by the Engineer. Permission
to use material shall not be construed as an approval of its source nor any acceptance
as continued acceptance.

SAMPLING 6373. (1)

The Contractor shall provide equipment, labour and such trained staff as may be
required by the Engineer for carrying out the following tests on materials to be used in
the manufacture of hot asphaltic concrete in accordance with the following standards:

(A) Grading tests on aggregates in accordance with the latest B.S. 812
"Sampling and testing of mineral aggregate and fillers."

(B) Determination of binder content of mixed materials in accordance with

either

(I) Hot extraction method BT1 described in B.S. 598 (1974) -

"Sampling and examination of bituminous road mixtures." The
Contractor is to comply with the requirements of B.S. 598: and to
the need of providing results in duplicate.

245
 or
(II) By reflux extractor method.

(2) Aggregates shall be sampled and tested on delivery to the mixing plant
and after each extraction test and the result of each test shall be submitted to the
Engineer or his Representative within 24 hours of the sample being taken.

The number of such tests shall be adequate for proper control of the materials
and shall not be limited to those made on specific instructions of the Engineer or his
Representative. Samples of mixed materials shall be taken and tested during the first
day's mixing and throughout the work to confirm that the gradings and binder contents
are as specified. Such samples shall be taken either at the place and time of mixing or at
the place of laying as directed by the Engineer or his Representative. Samples for
testing shall also be cut from the surfacing as laid when directed by the Engineer or his
Representative.

The frequency of sampling mixed materials shall be at least once per day or once
for each 90 tonne of material mixed whichever is the more frequent. The result of each
test on mixed materials shall be submitted to the Engineer or his Representative within
24 hours of the sampling and any adjustments shown to be necessary shall be made
immediately. Until such adjustments have been made and until a certificate to the
effect has been forwarded to the Engineer or his Representative no further batches or
mixed material shall be made.

(3) Independent sampling and testing may be carried out by the Engineer
throughout the contractor period and for this purpose the Contractor shall grant free
access to the mixing plant and storage depots, supply materials and provide every
facility for the Engineer or his Representative to take samples whenever required.

In particular, throughout the contract, the Engineer will carry out control tests on
the plant mix material using the marshall test apparatus.

(4) A certificate is to be obtained from the suppliers with each consignment

of bitumen delivered, stating the grade of material being supplied, and these
certificates are to be handed to the Engineer's Representative.

(5) If the Engineer so requires, the Contractor shall arrange for the testing in
an approved manner of all materials used throughout the contract to ensure that they
are up to the standard specified, i.e. Aggregates, bitumen and such other materials as
specified or decided by the Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of
materials incorporated in the works to ensure that they have been manufactured as
specified, or as ordered by the Engineer.

(6) Whenever the Contractor intends to carry out any of the above tests, he
shall give the Engineer's Representative sufficient notice to enable him, should he so
wish, to be present during the test.

(7) Whenever the Contractor takes samples for testing, and where so

246
directed he is to take duplicate samples and hand them to the Engineer's
Representative. Such samples are to be properly packed and labelled as directed.

(8) The Engineer's Representative shall be given the results in writing of all
tests, as soon as they are available, and in any case not later than 24 hours after
samples have been taken.

(9) The Engineer shall be supplied with all necessary equipment, material
and labour to perform any additional tests he may wish to carry out himself.

(10) The cost of these tests including the provision of samples, will be deemed
to have been included in the bill of quantities under the appropriate item.

COMPOSITION OF MIXES 6374.

Hot asphaltic concrete prepared under these specifications shall be composed of

graded aggregates and asphalt cement within the limits set forth below. When plotted
graphically the aggregate grading shall lie on a smooth curve within the envelope.

TABLE VI-16 GRADING ENVELOPE FOR BINDER AND WEARING COURSES

% BY WEIGHT PASSING
SIEVE SIZE 40mm – 65mm 40mm – 50mm
BINDER-COURSE WEARING-COURSE
31.8mm 100 100
25mm 90 – 100 100
19.0mm 70 - 90 100
12.5mm 55 – 80 85 – 100
9.5mm 47 - 70 75 – 92
6.4mm 40 – 60 65 – 82
2.8mm 27 – 45 50 – 65
1.25mm 20 – 34 36 – 51
600µm 14 – 27 26 – 40
300µm 8 – 20 18 – 30
150µm 5 – 15 13 – 24
75µm 2-7 7 – 14

Bitumen Content %
By weight of 4.5 – 6.5 5 – 8.0
Aggregate

Asphaltic Concrete mixes designed by the Contractor prior to the selection of

Job-Mixes (see below) shall have combined aggregate gradings approximating as closely
as possible to the plotted averages of the respective limits of grading specified above
and shall comply with the following requirements:

TABLE VI-17 PROPERTIES OF COMPACTED ASPHALTIC CONCRETE

247
 Property Base-Course Wearing-Course

Optimum Bitumen Content 4.5% - 6.5% 5.0% - 8.0%

Stability, not less than 3.5KN 3.6KN

Flow 2mm – 6mm 2mm – 4mm

Voids in total mixture 3% - 8% 3% - 5%

Voids filled with bitumen 65% - 72% 75% - 82%

The exact job mix formula will depend on the nature and grading of the
aggregate and the grade of bitumen and will be determined by the Engineer using the
marshall method of mix design. For this purpose the Contractor shall supply to the
Engineer without charge adequate samples (in separate containers) of coarse and fine
aggregates and bitumen which he intends to use. The Engineer will, after testing,
furnish the Contractor with the exact job mix formula, which will be within the specified
limits.

Before any asphaltic concrete is laid, the Contractor shall produce sufficient dry
mixes in the plant and carry out sieve analysis to ensure that the correct grading is
being obtained. In addition he shall produce a number of trial mixes to which the
specified quality of bitumen has been added. He will then carry out extraction tests on
this material and further sieve analysis on the aggregate in accordance with clause 6373
of the specification. The results of these tests on both the dry and wet mixes shall be
approved by the Engineer before any surfacing is laid in the permanent works.

JOB MIX FORMULA DEFINED:

The job mix formula is the single definite percentage of aggregate passing each
required sieve size, a single definite bitumen content to be added to the aggregate, a
single definite temperature at which the mixture is to be emptied from the mixer and a
single definite temperature at which the mixture is to be delivered on the road.

Unless specifically changed in writing by the Engineer, the maximum permissible

variation from the job mix formula shall be as follows:

TABLE VI-18 PERMISSIBLE VARIATION PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF TOTAL MIX

PERMISSIBLE VARIATION
% BY WEIGHT OF TOTAL
MIX

Passing sieve 9.5mm and layer ± 5%

248
Passing sieve 9.5mm - 600µm ± 4%

Passing sieve 600µm - 150µm ± 3%

Passing sieve 150µm - 75µm ± 0.1%

Bitumen content ± 0.3%

Notes:
Temperature of Mixture when
emptied from mixer 145°± 5°
Temperature of Mixture
on delivery on the road 130°C ± 5°C
The job-mix formula is liable to alteration by the Engineer throughout the progress of
the work but at all times it will be within the specified limits.

PREPARATION 6375.
(1) PREPARATION OF AGGREGATES

The coarse and fine aggregate shall be separately fed by feeders to the cold
elevator or elevators in their proper proportions and at a rate to permit correct and
uniform temperature control of the heating and drying operation.

The aggregate shall be heated before entering the mixer to a temperature range
of 120ºC - 149°C. All aggregates in the bins of a temperature that will produce a mix
outside the limits stated above or that contain moisture or expanding gases to cause
"Foaming" in the mixture, shall be removed and replaced in their respective stock piles.
All aggregates that have been overheated shall be cooled before being deposited in the
feeder. All unsuitable aggregates that may be in the weigh box or that become
combined in the process of "Pulling" the bins shall be discarded.

The screening efficiency shall be maintained within the limits set forth in Clause
6383. When these limits are exceeded, the material shall be discarded and the cause
for such condition shall be corrected.

(2) PREPARATION OF ASPHALT CEMENT

The asphalt cement shall be delivered to the asphalt bucket at a temperature

between 135ºC and 163ºC. All asphalt cement heated beyond 177ºC at the plant
before mixing or heated beyond 163ºC during the mixing shall be rejected. No asphalt
shall be used while "foaming".

(3) PREPARATION OF MIXTURES:

The exact proportions within the limits specified for each mix shall be regulated
so as to produce a satisfactory mixture with all particles uniformly coated with bitumen.

249
 When batch mixing is used, the aggregate at the temperature specified, shall be
mixed dry for a minimum of 15 seconds; the asphalt cement shall then be added in an
evenly spread sheet over the full length of the mixer. The mixing shall be continued for
a minimum of 30 to 45 seconds for all mixtures.

The "initial time of mixing" shall be the interval of time between the opening of
the weigh box and the opening of the mixer gate. The number of batches produced in
one hour from the mixer shall not exceed 60.

When continuous mixing is used the dry aggregates shall be thoroughly mixed
before the addition of the asphalt cement. The asphalt cement shall then be added in
an evenly spread sheet over the full width of the mixer by means of spray bars. The
mixing shall be continued for a period of not less than 30 seconds. The "total time for
mixing" shall be the ratio of the "dead load" in the mixer to the kilograms per minute
delivered. The kilograms per minute delivered shall be determined by timing and
weighing a load of mixed material. The "dead load" shall be determined by weighing the
"mixer full" of material. The dry mixing shall be the product of the ratio of dry mixer
length to the total mixer length and total mixing time. The Engineer may vary the length
of the dry and wet mixing periods, but under no circumstances shall the total mixing
time be less than 45 seconds.

The mixture shall be loaded into trucks in such a manner that segregation will
not occur.

The temperature of the mixture on arrival at the project site shall be as

determined by the Engineer in keeping with the temperature range set for the mix
design and heat losses in transit.

TRANSPORTING MIXED MATERIALS 6376.

The mixed materials shall be transported from mixing plant to site in clean metal
lined vehicles. Every precaution is to be taken to avoid segregation of mixed materials
and to ensure that they do not become contaminated with dust or foreign matter.
Covers such as water proof canvas and other insulation shall be provided when directed.

PREPARATION OF AREA TO BE PAVED 6377.

The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade, having a dry and properly
prepared surface prior to the start of paving operations. The area to be paved shall be
free from all screenings, and other loose or foreign material.

Where a base is rough or uneven, a levelling course shall be placed by use of a

motor grader or spreader and shall be properly compacted before the placing of
subsequent paving courses.

When a levelling course is not required, all depressions and other irregularities
shall be patched or corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All fatty and
unsuitable patches, excess crack or joint filler, and all surplus bituminous material shall

250
be removed from the area to be paved. Blotting of excessive deposits of asphalt with
sand or stone shall not be permitted.

Where the area to be paved is an untreated soil or aggregate, it shall be primed.

The prime coat shall consist of an application of the asphaltic material indicated, and at
the rate specified in clause 6370. The prime coat shall be allowed to cure properly
before any further operations are permitted on the primed area.

A tack coat shall be applied when the surface to be paved is an existing Portland
Cement concrete, or dry asphalt pavement. When a tack coat is required, it shall consist
of an application of the asphaltic material indicated, and at the rate specified in clause
6370.
In all cases the emulsion shall be allowed to break before laying. Prior to
application of the tack coat, all loose or objectionable material will be removed from the
surface by brooming or other approved method. After cleaning, the surface shall be
inspected by the Engineer before the tack coat is applied. The tack coat will be applied
evenly and by mechanical sprayer of approved type which is to comply with B.S. 1707.

Where the time between the completion of one surface course and the laying of
the subsequent surface course exceed 72 hours, a tack coat shall be applied to the
preceding course as above but at a rate of spread of 4 - 4.5 square metres per litre.
Such tack coat shall be at the Contractor's expense unless compliance with the 72 hours
limit was impracticable.

Tack coats shall be applied 24 hours in advance of bituminous surfacing work, or

such longer period as is necessary to ensure complete breaking of the bitumen emulsion
before bituminous surfacing are laid thereon. Traffic shall not be allowed on the tack
coat before surfacing work begins.

Concrete kerbs, channels, and similar objects shall be adequately masked and
protected during the application of tack coats.

The surface of curbs, gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements and all
structures in actual contact with asphalt mixes shall be painted with a thin uniform
coating of asphalt material to provide a closely bonded water tight joint.

TRIAL AREAS 6378.

The first 30 metres of the approved bituminous mixture which is laid by each
spreader shall be regarded as a trial area in order to establish a rolling procedure which
will produce the required field density.

At least four samples of the material after rolling will be taken in accordance with
part 1 section 3 of B.S. 598: when the work is at least 12 hours old in order to
determine the degree of compaction.

251
 If the required density determined in accordance with clause 6381 is not
obtained, the field rolling procedure will be changed so as to achieve the desired field
density and the trial area will be cut out and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

After mixing, the material must not be reheated other than by the means
provided in or on the spreading machine.

Materials must not be laid when the surface on which it is to be placed is wet or
when rain appears imminent.

It is essential that the material is laid at a temperature not less than 121°C and
not more than 163°C. The Contractor is to provide at each spreader and finisher a
suitable thermometer for testing the temperature of the material as it is being spread
and is to take such temperature readings continually and record them hourly throughout
each day's laying. This record shall be available for inspection by the Engineer who will
himself make such additional temperature checks as he considers desirable.

The materials shall be laid by approved mechanical paver in accordance with

clause 6384. The spreader paver shall be in good mechanical condition and shall be
capable of laying to the required width and profile without causing segregation,
dragging, burning, irregularities or other surface defects. When not operated on side
forms, the paver will employ equalizing runners, evener arms or other automatic
compensating devices to adjust the profile and confine the edges of the course to true
lines.

As soon as the first load of material has been spread, the texture of the unrolled
surface shall be checked to determine its uniformity. The adjustment of the screed,
tamping bars, feed screws, hopper feed, etc., shall be checked frequently to ensure
uniform spreading of the mix to proper line and grade and adequate initial compaction.
Segregation of materials shall not be permitted. If segregation occurs, the spreading
operation shall be immediately suspended until the cause is determined and corrected.

Any irregularities in alignment left by the paver shall be corrected by trimming

directly behind the machine. Immediately after trimming, the edges of the course shall
be thoroughly compacted by tamping. Distortion of the pavement during this operation
shall be avoided.

Edges against which additional pavement is to be placed shall be vertically

formed to true line. A rake shall be used immediately behind the finisher, when
required, to obtain a true line and vertical edge. Any irregularities in the surface of the
pavement course shall be corrected directly behind the paver. Excess material forming
high spots shall be removed by a shovel. Indented areas shall be filled with hot mix and
smoothed with the back of a shovel being pulled over the surface. Fanning of materials
over such areas shall not be permitted.

The mixer capacity and the operating speed of the spreader shall be so adjusted

252
as to ensure continuous laying and to avoid intermittent stopping of the spreader as far
as is practicable.

Hand spreading will not be permitted for general work, but will only be allowed
for filling localized depressions, or as directed by the Engineer.

Hand laying of any bituminous material will only be permitted in the following
circumstances:-

(i) for laying regulating courses of irregular shape and varying thickness.

(ii) in confined spaces where it is impracticable for a paver to operate.

(iii) for footways.

(iv) at the approaches to expansion joints at bridges or viaducts.

When a paver laying base material approaches an expansion joint at a bridge or

viaduct it shall be taken out of use as soon as there is a danger of the material being
laid fouling the joint. In laying the remainder of the pavement up to the joint and the
corresponding area beyond it by hand, the joint or joint cavity shall not be fouled with
surface material.

Hand raking of wearing course material which has been laid by a paver and the
addition of such material by hand spreading to the paved area for adjustment of level
will only be permitted at the edges of the layers of materials or where otherwise
directed by the Engineer.

Where hand spreading and tamping is permitted, the mixed material is to be

dumped on delivery upon existing hard clean surface or on approved metal sheets
outside the area where it is to be spread and shall be distributed in to place immediately
by means of hot shovels. It shall be spread with hot rakes in a uniformly loose layer to
the full depth required.

Materials are to be laid to the depths necessary to give the required thickness
after compaction and they are to be finished true to profile.

The Contractor shall break out and remove at his own expense any asphaltic
concrete laid in trial areas if such asphaltic concrete fails to meet the specified
requirements for asphaltic concrete surfacing.

If for any reason the quality, grading or supply source of aggregates or the
quality or source of bitumen is changed, or at any time the cause of variations outside
the permissible limits cannot be corrected for reasons beyond the Contractor's control,
the Engineer may require the Contractor to carry out additional laboratory tests and/or
the construction of additional trial areas depending on the extent of the change or
variation.

253
COMPACTION 6379.

After spreading, the mix shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by rolling.

The initial 'breakdown' rolling shall be done with three wheel smooth roller,
followed by intermediate rolling with high- pressure typed pneumatic roller. The final
rolling shall be with a tandem roller. During rolling, the roller wheels shall be kept moist
with only sufficient water to avoid picking up material.

Heavy equipment or rollers shall not be permitted to stand on finished surface

until it has thoroughly cooled. In the initial rolling the three wheel smooth roller shall
proceed on to the fresh material with the rear or driven wheels leading. The rolling shall
start as soon after laying as conditions permit and when the material is still at a
temperature of not less than 99ºC. The weight per unit width of the rear wheel shall be
between 45 65 Kg per centimetre width.

After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted rolling shall start
longitudinally at the sides and gradually progress towards the centre of the pavement,
except on super elevated curves where rolling shall begin on the low side and progress
to the high side. Each pass of the roller shall overlap the preceding one by about one
half width of the rear wheel. The roller should move at a slow but uniform speed not
exceeding 8 kilometres per hour. The roller shall be in good condition, and capable of
being reversed without back lash, and the line of rolling shall not be suddenly changed
or the direction of rolling suddenly reversed, thereby displacing the mix. If rolling
causes displacement of the material the affected areas shall be loosened at once with
shovels or rakes and restored to the original grade of loose material before being re
rolled.

The intermediate rolling shall be done with a pneumatic roller exerting

compactive ground pressures between 5.6 - 8.4 kilograms per sq. cm. The Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer charts or tabulations showing the contact areas and contact
pressures for the full range of tyre inflation pressures and for the full range of tyre
loadings for each type and size compactor tyre furnished.

The intermediate rolling shall follow the breakdown rolling as closely as possible and
while the mix is still at a temperature of 70ºC 85°C. Rolling shall be continuous until the
mix is thoroughly compacted and the density specified in Clause 6381 is achieved.
Turning of pneumatic rollers on the hot mix which causes undue displacement shall not
be permitted.

The final rolling shall be accomplished with two wheel tandem roller while the
material is still warm enough for the removal of roller marks.

JOINTS 6380.

All joints shall be vertical, properly formed to the correct line and level; if
necessary they shall be cut back to achieve this. A template made to the shape of the
true line and width may be placed at each end of the construction joint to create vertical

254
straight finish. Joints in the surface course should be staggered with those in the binder
course and must be kept straight, when the abutting lane is not placed the same day or
if the edge of the first strip has been distorted by traffic the joint shall be cut back to an
even line and then be coated with bitumen before laying the adjoining strip. All joints
on completion are to present the same texture, density and smoothness as other
sections of the course.

FIELD DENSITY OF ROLLED ASPHALTS 6381.

Density tests of the asphalt surfacing after compaction shall be taken from the
trial area and later at intervals throughout the course of the work and compared with
the density of control specimens taken from the same material before laying, all in
accordance with the following procedure:

(a) A sample of mixed material will be taken from a lorry before the
material is delivered to the spreader, and three specimens shall be
made and their density measured by the Engineer by the immersion
method.

The average of the two close specimens will be taken as the control
density of that particular batch.

(b) The pavement will be marked to show where the lorry load of material
(from which the sample was taken) is laid, so that field density samples
can be taken for comparison with the control specimen.

(c) After completion of rolling, three samples are to be cut from each area so
marked in positions indicated by the Engineer.

(d) The samples shall be taken in accordance with part 1 section 3 of B.S.
598 (1974) and the density calculated by weighing in air and weighing in
water in accordance with part 6 of B.S. 598 (1974). The average of two
close results of the samples will be taken as the density of the compacted
material in that area.

(e) This density will not be less than 100% of the control density determined
as above.

When an approved rolling procedure has been established, each course will be
sampled in accordance with the above at the rate of one sample area for each 84
square metres placed or one sample area every 2 hours (whichever is more frequent).
Material which does not achieve the required density will either be cut out and replaced
or be further compacted until the required density is obtained.

FINISHED LEVELS 6382.

The surfacing will be finished to the required levels shown on the drawings. Any
deviation exceeding 5mm from these levels will be corrected at the Contractor's expense

255
by scarifying, cutting out and removing all loosened materials, adding new materials, as
required, re-shaping and rolling. No materials loosened by scarifying or cutting out, will
be left in position or otherwise re-used.

Except across the crown of a camber, the finished surface shall be of such
smoothness that when tested with a 3 metre straight edge placed anywhere and in any
direction on the surface, there shall not be a gap greater than 3mm between the bottom
of the straight edge and the surface of the pavement anywhere along the straight edge.

Should the new asphalt surface be dragged, churned up, become soft, show
signs of segregation, show that stripping of the binder from the aggregate has occurred,
or suffer other damage during or after being laid, the Contractor will remove the
damaged or faulty work at his own expense and replace with fresh material, laid and
compacted to the correct level and density to the approval of the Engineer.

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXING PLANT 6383. 混合料拌合站

(1) GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENT MIXING PLANT

All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be of approved design and shall
be maintained in its best mechanical condition. Equipment shall be serviced and
lubricated away from the paving site; units that drip fuel, oil and grease shall be
removed from the project until such leakage is corrected to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. This is necessary because fuel leakage can be injurious to newly laid asphaltic
concrete.

(2) ASPHALTIC PLANT SITE

The plant site shall have sufficient storage space for separate stock piles; bins or
stalls for each size of aggregate, and the different aggregate sizes shall be kept
separated until they have been delivered by the feeder or feeders to the boot of the cold
elevator or elevators in neat and orderly condition and the separate stock piles shall be
readily accessible for sampling. Samples from each bins shall be graded from time to
time for conformity to design size otherwise adjustment may be necessary.

(3) THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PLANT

The plant shall be either the batch mixing type or the continuous mixing type
meeting the following requirements.

(A) REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PLANTS

(I) UNIFORMITY: The plants shall be so designed, co-ordinated and

operated to produce a mix uniformly within the job-mix tolerances as
specified in Clause 6374 Table VI-18 Paragraph 5.

(II) EQUIPMENT FOR PREPARATION OF ASPHALT.

256
 Tanks for storage of asphalt shall be provided with a device for controlled
heating of the material to temperature requirements set forth in the
specifications. Heating shall be accomplished by steam or oil coils,
electricity or other means such that no flame shall come in contact with
the heating tank. All lines shall be checked periodically under full
pressure for leakage. All line valves shall have clear and permanent
markings to indicate all openable and closable positions. A circulating
system for the asphalt of adequate size to ensure proper and continuous
circulation between storage tank and mixer during the entire operating
period shall be provided. All pipe lines and fittings shall be properly
insulated and heated. The discharge end of the circulating pipe line shall
be maintained below the surface of the asphalt in the tank while the
pump is in operation. Storage tank capacity shall be sufficient for at least
one day's run.

(III) COLD AGGREGATE FEEDER

The plant shall be provided with an accurate mechanical means for

uniformly feeding the mineral aggregate into the drier to secure a
uniform production and a uniform temperature. The feeder or feeders
shall be capable of delivering the maximum weight of aggregate sizes
required in their proper proportion. The feeder shall provide for
adjustment of total and proportional feed and be capable of being locked
in any position. When more than one cold elevator is used each shall be
fed as a separate unit and the individual controls shall be integrated with
a total master control.

(IV) DRIER

The plant shall include a rotary drum drier that will continuously agitate
the mineral aggregates during the heating and drying process. It shall be
capable of heating and drying all aggregates specified in the necessary
quantities to supply the mixing unit continuously at its operating capacity
and at the temperature and maximum bitumen content specified.
(V) SCREENS

The plant shall have screens of the shaker or vibrating type and be
capable of screening all aggregates to the sizes required for
proportioning. The screens shall have normal capacity slightly in excess
of the full capacity of the mixer or the drier. The plant screens shall have
an efficiency such that when measured by weight there will be not more
than 5% of oversize material in bin No. 1 (fine aggregate), not more than
15% undersize and/or 10% oversize in bin No. 2 and not more than 20%
undersize and/or 5% oversize in bin No. 3, and not more than 20%
undersize and/or 0% oversize in bin No. 4. The Contractor shall expose
the screens for inspection at the request of the Engineer. These screen
tolerances are for general guidance and shall not invalidate the specified
job-mix tolerances.

257
(VI) BINS

Bins shall be divided into at least three compartments for any mix
composition other than a base (binder) composition, and at least four
compartments for a wearing course. They shall be arranged to ensure
separate storage of the appropriate fractions of aggregate. The bin sizes
shall be adequate for continuous operation of the plant at rated capacity.
Adequate additional dry storage shall be provided for mineral filler when
required and provision made for proportioning it into the mix

Each compartment shall be provided with an overflow pipe that shall be

of such size and location as to prevent any backing up of material into
other compartments or bins or against the screens. The overflow
material shall be wasted.

(VII) ASPHALT CONTROL UNIT

Satisfactory means, either by weighing, metering or volumetric

measurements, shall be provided to obtain the required amount of
asphalt in the mix within the tolerances specified. Where the quantity of
asphalt is controlled by metering, provision shall be made whereby the
amount of asphalt delivered through the meter may be readily checked
by weight. Suitable steam jacketing or other insulation for maintaining
the specified temperature of asphalt in pipe lines, metres, weigh buckets,
spray bars, flow lines, or other containers shall be provided.

(VIII) THERMOMETRIC EQUIPMENT

An armoured thermometer reading from 90°C to 205°C shall be fixed in

the asphalt feed line at a suitable location near the discharge valve at the
mixer unit. The plant shall be further equipped with an approved
dialfrom 90ºC to 205ºC shall be fixed in the asphalt feed line at a suitable
location near the discharge valve at the mixer unit.
The plant shall be further equipped with an approved dial scale, mercury
scale, mercury actuated thermometer, a recording electric pyrometer or
other approved thermometric instrument having an accuracy of ± 2°C
and a sensitivity which will provide an indication of temperature change
at the rate of not less than 5°C per minute. It shall be so placed at the
discharge chute of the drier to register automatically or indicate the
temperature of the heated aggregate. The Engineer shall have the right
to test the efficiency of thermometric instruments for better control of
asphalt, aggregate and mix temperatures. The Engineer shall direct the
immediate repair or replacement of any instrument yielding inaccurate or
inconsistent readings.

(IX) DUST COLLECTOR

258
 The plant shall be provided with a dust collector, designed to waste, or
return uniformly to the hot elevator, all or part of the material collected,
as directed by the Engineer. Prior to permitting the return of such
collected dust, the Engineer shall examine its characteristics in relation to
the mix requirements, and shall designate the quantity to be returned.
When dust is permitted to be returned to the hot elevator, it shall be
accomplished by mechanical means in a constant and uniform flow. All
plants shall have mixer covers and such additional housing as may be
necessary to ensure the proper collection of dust

(X) SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Adequate and safe stairways to the mixer platform and guarded ladders
to other plant units shall be provided. All gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets
and other dangerous moving parts shall be well guarded and protected.
Ample and unobstructed space shall be provided on the mixing platform.
A clear and unobstructed passage shall be maintained at all times in and
around the truck loading space. This space shall be free from drippings
from the mixing platform. A ladder, or platform, shall be so located at the
truck loading space to permit easy and safe inspection or sampling of the
mix as it is delivered into the truck. Adequate overhead protection should
be provided where necessary. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
ensure the plant or the plant site shall be free from fire hazard.

(XI) MIXING TIME

All plants shall be equipped with a positive means to govern the time of
mixing.

(B) SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BATCH TYPE PLANTS

(1) PLANT SCALES

Scales for any weigh-box or hopper may be of either the beam or

springless dial type and shall be of a standard make and design, accurate
to 0.005 of the indicated load.

When scales are of the beam type, there shall be tare beam for balancing
the hopper and a separate beam shall be provided which shall be capable
of functioning when the load being applied is within 45 kilograms of the
weight desired. Each beam shall have a locking device designed and so
located that the beam can easily be suspended or thrown into action.

Dial scales shall be springless and of a standard make. They shall be

designed, constructed and installed in such a manner as to be free from
vibration. They shall also be of such size that the numerical figures on
the dial can be read at a distance of 3 metres. All dials shall be so
located as to be plainly visible to the operator at all times. The end of

259
 the pointer shall be set close to the face of the dial and shall be free from
excessive parallax. The scale shall be provided with adjustable pointers
for marking the weight of each material to be weighed into the batch
which shall automatically cut off feeder system when the required weight
is attained.

Scales for the weighing of asphalt shall conform to the requirements for
aggregate scales, except that beam scales shall consist of a full capacity
beam and a tare beam. The minimum graduation shall not be greater
than 1 kilogram and there shall be attached a tell tale device which will
start to function when the load being applied is within 10 kilograms of the
weight desired. Dial scales for weighing the asphalt shall read to the
nearest 450g. All scales for weighing the asphalt shall have a capacity of
not more than 15% of the normal capacity of the mixer.

Scales shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and shall be tested and sealed
as often as the Engineer may deem it necessary to ensure their accuracy.
All weighing equipment shall be substantially constructed and of a design
which will permit easy realignment and adjustment. Weighing equipment
that easily gets out of adjustment shall be replaced when so ordered.
The Contractor shall provide and have at hand at least ten 25 kilogram
standard weights for frequent testing of all scales. For each scale, a
suitable cradle, or platform, shall be provided for applying the test load so
that the load is uniformly distributed. The test weights shall be kept
clean and stored near the scales.

Volumetric proportioning of heated and screened aggregates shall be

permissible provided the volumetric system is a standard equipment
furnished with the plant when first sold by the manufacturer. Convenient
and accurate scales and facilities shall be provided for checking the
measuring devices by weight.

(II) BINS

In addition to the requirements stated in clause 6383 (3A), each

compartment shall be provided with its individual outlet gate, designed
and constructed so that when closed there shall be no leakage into the
weigh box. The gates shall be cut off quickly, completely and easily and
prevent excessive overdrawn.

(III) WEIGH BOX OR HOPPER

Equipment shall include a means for accurately weighing each bin size of
aggregate in a weigh box or hopper suspended on scales ample in size to
hold a full batch without hand raking or running over. The weigh box or
hopper shall be supported on a fulcrum: with knife edges and shall be so

260
 constructed that they will not easily be thrown out of alignment. Gates
on hopper shall be so constructed as to prevent leakage when they are
closed. Proportioning of aggregates and charging of mixer shall be
performed so as to blend the aggregates thoroughly and prevent
segregation in the mixer.

(IV) ASPHALT MEASURING EQUIPMENT

Asphalt measuring equipment provided on the plant shall be capable of

accurately measuring into each batch the required amount of asphalt
within a tolerance of ±0.3%.

When an asphalt bucket is used, it shall be a non tilting type provided

with a loose sheet-metal cover. The capacity of the asphalt bucket shall
be at least 10% in excess of the weight of asphalt required for a one
batch mix. The plant shall have a steam jacketed quick closing, non
dripping, charging valve. The length of the discharge opening or spray
bar shall not be less than three fourths of the length of the mixer and it
shall discharge directly into the mixer. The discharge system shall be
designed and arranged to deliver the asphalt the full length of the mixer
in a thin, uniform sheet or in multiple streams or sprays except in the
case of a rotary mixer where the asphalt is sprayed.

When a volumetric meter is used, the meter shall be designed and

constructed so that it will automatically meter the asphalt into each
batch. The dial to indicate the amount of asphalt shall have a capacity of
at least 10% in excess of the weight of asphalt required in one batch.
The meter shall be constructed so that it may be locked at any dial
setting and will automatically reset to this reading after the addition of
asphalt to each batch. The dial shall be in full view of the mixer operator.
The flow of asphalt shall be automatically controlled so that it shall begin
when the dry mixing period is over and all of the asphalt required for one
batch shall be discharged in not more than 15 seconds after the flow has
started.
The size and spacing of the spray bar openings shall provide a uniform
application of asphalt the full length of the mixer. The section of the
asphalt flow line between the charging valve and the spray bar shall be
provided with a valve and outlet for checking and testing the accuracy of
the meter.

(V) MIXER

The plant shall have a mixer of approved type such as standard twin pug
mill batch type, steam jacketed and a batch capacity of not less than
1000 kilograms. It shall be capable of producing a uniform mix within the
job mix tolerances established by the Engineer. Deviation in size of
batches will be permitted to provide for mixing batches 20% below or
15% above the rated capacity of the mixer, provided the quality of the

261
 mix is not impaired. The paddles shall be set in such a manner to ensure
a completely uniform mix. If not enclosed, the mixer box shall be
equipped with a dust hood to prevent loss of dust. The mixer shall be so
constructed as to prevent leakage of contents until the batch is to be
discharged.

(VI) TIME LOCK AND BATCH COUNTER

The mixer shall have an accurate time lock to control the operation of a
complete mixing cycle by locking the weigh box gate after the charging of
the mixer, until the closing of the mixer gate at the completion of the
cycle. The time lock shall also lock the asphalt bucket throughout the dry
mixing period and shall lock the mixer gate throughout the dry and wet
mixing periods. The dry mixing period is the interval of the time between
the opening of the weigh box gate and the application of asphalt. The
wet mixing period is normally the interval of time between the application
of all asphalt and the opening of the mixer gate for discharge. When
asphalt is applied by a spray system, the wet mixing time shall begin with
the start of asphalt spray.

The Engineer shall, after tests of a few trial mixes, designate the length
of both dry and wet mixing periods to ensure a uniform and completely
coated mix. Excessive wet mixing shall be avoided. Control of the
timing shall be flexible, permitting timed intervals of not less than five
seconds throughout cycles up to three minutes. A mechanical batch
counter, designed to register only completely mixed batches shall be
installed.

(C) SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUS MIXING PLANTS

(I) BINS

In addition to the requirements stated in clause 6383 (3A), each

compartment shall have sufficient capacity to ensure the minimum depth
of aggregate necessary for the proper cut off action of the bin outlet, and
to compensate for normal variation in depth due to aggregate grading.
The bin partitions shall extend close enough to the apron or vibrating
plate to prevent cross flow of the unstrucked material.

(II) GRADATION CONTROL UNIT

The plant shall include a means for accurately proportioning each bin size
of aggregate either by weight or by volumetric measurement.

When gradation control is by volume, the unit shall include a feeder

mounted under the compartment bins. Each bin shall have an accurately

262
 controlled individual gate to form an orifice for volumetrically measuring
the material drawn from each respective bin compartment. The orifice
shall be rectangular, with one dimension, adjustable by positive
mechanical adjuster and provided with a lock. Indicators shall be
provided on each gate to show the gate opening in millilitres. Mineral
filler, if specified, shall be proportioned separately from a suitable hopper
equipped with an adjustable feed which may be accurately and
conveniently calibrated and which shall be interlocked with the aggregate
and asphalt feeds. The feeder equipment for the mineral filler shall meet
the approval of the Engineer.

(III) CALIBRATION AND SAMPLING

The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel to calibrate the plant so

that it will produce the specified composition of mixture within the
accuracy and uniformity tolerances specified.

The plant shall be calibrated at the beginning of each project and

whenever there is any change in source, size or unit weight of aggregate.
The plant shall be re-calibrated whenever the actual weight of bituminous
concrete varies from its theoretical weight by more than the specified
limit or when the tolerance set forth in "formula for job
mix" for the specified item are exceeded.

The plant shall be equipped so that bin samples weighing approximated

4.5 kg can be conveniently obtained without intermingling or segregation
of the aggregate.

(IV) SYNCHRONIZATION OF AGGREGATE AND ASPHALT FEED

Satisfactory means shall be provided to afford positive interlocking control

between the flow of aggregate from the bins and the flow of asphalt from
the meter or other proportioning device. This control shall be
accomplished by interlocking mechanical means or by any positive
method approved by the Engineer capable of being controlled by the
operator. The aggregate bins shall be provided with automatic controls
and signal devices which will warn of low levels and which will
automatically stop the flow of all aggregate and asphalt to the mixer
when the aggregate in any one bin is so low that the feeder will not
operate at set capacity.

The asphalt storage system shall be provided with automatic controls and
signal devices which will warn of low levels of asphalt and which will
automatically stop the entire plant operation when the asphalt storage
level is to the point of exposing the feed end of the asphalt suction line.

263
 (V) MIXER

The plant shall have a steam jacketed, twin pugmill, continuous type ixer
of not less than 700 kilograms per minute rated capacity. The mixer shall
be in first class condition equipped with a sufficient number of blades or
paddles and operated at such a speed as to produce a properly and
uniformly mixed composition within the job mix tolerance specified. The
paddles shall be of a type adjustable for angular position on the shafts
and reversible by remote control to retard the flow of the mix. The mixer
shall carry a manufacturer's plate giving the net volumetric contents of
the mixer at the several heights inscribed on the permanent gauge. The
mixer shall have a cut off gate at its discharge and adequately sealed
against leakage between truck loads. The determination of mixing time
shall be by a weight method under the following method unless otherwise
required:

Mixing Time in Seconds =

pugmill dead capacity in kilograms

Pugmill output in Kilograms per second.

The weights shall be determined for the job from the tests made by the
Engineer.

(VI) TRUCK SCALES

The Contractor shall provide conveniently accessible platform trucks

scales at the plant site for use in obtaining the net weight of each load of
finished mix.

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVERS 6384.

Bituminous concrete pavers shall be self-powered machines capable of spreading

and finishing the mixtures true to the line, grade and crown with or without the
use of forms or side supports. For two lane construction, pavers shall be capable
of laying to half widths plus or minus 150mm. The screed assembly shall be
such that it will be capable of laying courses from a minimum of 2.5 metres in
width in steps of 150mm to a maximum of 3.85 metres in width.

Pavers shall employ mechanical devices such as equalizing runners, straight

edge runners, evener arms or other compensating devices that will adjust the
grade and confine the edge of the courses to true lines.

Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distributing screws of the reversing
type to evenly place the mixtures in front of the screeds.

The screed shall be a strike off device operated by cutting, crowding or other

264
 practical action which is effective on the mixtures without tearing, shoving or
gouging, and which produces a finished surface without segregation. The screed
shall be adjustable as to level and shall have an indicating level attached thereto
in full view of the operator.

The pavers shall be further equipped with blending or joint levelling devices for
smoothing and adjusting all longitudinal joints between adjacent stripes of
surface course.

The paver shall be capable of being operated at variable forward speeds

consistent with the satisfactory laying of the mixtures.

The paver shall be equipped with an efficient steering device, and shall be
capable of travelling both forward and in reverse.

ROLLERS

Rolling equipment shall consist of steel wheel and pneumatic tyre rollers, or a
combination of both described as follows:

(A) STEEL-WHEEL ROLLERS

May be of three types: Three Wheel Rollers of 10 to 12 tonne in weight, Two

Axle Tandem Rollers of 7 to 12 tonne in weight and Three Axle Tandem Rollers
of 12 to 16 tonne in weight. These rollers shall be equipped with power units of
not less than four cylinders and under working conditions shall develop a
compression in the rear wheels of 45 65 Kg per centimetre of roller width.
Rollers shall be in good working condition and be free from backlash, faulty
steering mechanism, or worn parts. Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable
scrapers to keep the rolls clean and with efficient means of keeping the wheels
wet to prevent mixes from sticking to the rolls. Rollers shall also be free of flat
areas, openings or projections which will mar the surface of the pavement.

The Three-Axle Tandem Rollers shall be so constructed that, when locked in

position for all treads to be in one plane, the roller wheels are held with such
rigidity that, if either front or centre wheel is unsupported, the other two wheels
will not vary from the plane by more than 6mm.

(B) The pneumatic-tyre rollers shall be self propelled, multiple axle multiple wheel
type with smooth tread pneumatic tyres of equal size and diameter. The tyres
shall be staggered on the axles at such spacings and overlaps as will provide
uniform compactive pressure for the full compacting width of the roller, when
operating. Oscillation of the wheels, if provided, shall be in vertical plane only.
The pneumatic tyred roller shall be capable of:

(I) Being ballasted sufficiently to bring its loaded weight to at least 2½ times
its own weight and

265
 (II) Of exerting compactive ground pressures at least 5.6 kilograms per
square centimetre, 5.6 8.4Kg/cm² preferred.

Vehicles used for the transportation of hot mix asphalt from the plant to the site
of work shall have tight metal bottoms and shall be free from dust, screenings,
petroleum oils, volatiles or other mineral spirits which may affect the mix being
hauled. The truck beds shall be painted, or sprayed with a lime water or soap
solution, at least once a day or as often as required. After this operation the
truck bed shall be elevated and thoroughly drained, no excess solution shall be
permitted.

When ordered by the Engineer, trucks shall be suitably insulated and provided
with covers of canvas or other material of sufficient size and weight to protect
the load from adverse weather conditions. When variations in size, speed and
condition of trucks are such as to interfere with orderly and continuous
operation, the Engineer may order suitable substitutions to be made.

INSPECTION AND CONTROL OF ASPHALT MIXING PLANT 6385.

(1) GENERAL PROVISIONS

For verification of weights and measures, character and quality of materials and
determination of temperatures used in the preparation of the paving mixes, the
Engineer or his Representative shall at all times have access to all portions of the paving
plant, aggregate plant, storage yards and other facilities for producing and processing
the materials of construction. All sampling and testing of processed and unprocessed
material shall be under the control and direction of the Engineer.

(2) JOB-MIX FORMULA

The Engineer shall make frequent gradation analyses of the hot aggregate and
of the completed mix to be certain that the materials being used and produced
are within the tolerances of the job-mix formula and the specifications of the mix
number being used.
If the mix is found to be outside of the job-mix formula tolerances, or outside of
the specification limits, corrections shall be made in quantities measured from
the hot bins and suitable changes made at the cold bin feeders.

(3) SAMPLING AND TESTING

Stockpiles and bins shall be sampled for gradation analysis, dust coating and for
other purposes, at the option of the Engineer. Gradation analysis of material
from each hot bin shall be performed and a combined analyses computed at
least twice a day - once in the forenoon, and once in the afternoon. A combined
gradation and analyses shall be performed at least twice a day. If materials do
not run uniform, more frequent tests shall be made.

When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide representative

samples from each of the hot bins from convenient doors in the side of each bin,

266
or by drawing aggregate from each bin through the mixing chamber (without
asphalt) into a trunk or other receptacle. At least one sample shall be taken from
each 250 tonne of the mix being produced. Samples shall be used to determine
compliance with general and special requirements.

PLANT TESTING LABORATORY

At each plant site, there shall be provided a testing laboratory for joint use of the
producer's quality control and acceptance testing functions, and the Engineer's
Representative, during periods of mix production, sampling, and testing, and
whenever materials subject to the provisions of these specifications are being
supplied or tested.
The bituminous plant testing laboratory shall have a floor area of not less than
14 square metres, with a ceiling height of not less than 2.3 metres. The
laboratory shall be weather tight, sufficiently heated in cold weather, air
conditioned in hot weather, to maintain temperatures, for testing purposes, of
24°C plus or minus 2.5°C degrees centigrade. It shall be so located on the
asphalt plant site as to provide an unobstructed view from one of its windows of
the trucks as they are located with the plant mixed materials.

The bituminous plant testing laboratory shall have:

(1) adequate artificial lighting

(2) electrical outlets sufficient in number and capacity for operating the
required testing equipment and for drying samples

(3) fire extinguishers approved by the Engineer's Representative.

(4) work benches for testing with dimensions not less than 0.75 metres by 3
metres.

(5) a desk or table and at least two chairs

(6) sanitary facilities convenient to the testing laboratory

(7) exhaust fan to outside air, with minimum blade diameter of 300mm to
adequately handle laboratory dust and fumes

(8) telephone

(9) 4 drawer legal size file cabinet

(10) a sink with running water and attached drain-board and drain capable of
handling elutriable material

(11) a metal stand to hold sieves used in washing elutriable material.

267
 (12) a 2 element hot plate or other comparable heating device, with suitable
dial type thermostatically controlled to adjust the heat, for drying
aggregates

(13) mechanical shaker and appropriate sieves conforming to requirements of

current B.S. 812 or ASTM designation E-ll for determining the gradation
of coarse and fine aggregates in accordance with ASTM C 136 or AASHTO
T-27

(14) testing equipment meeting the requirements of current B.S. 598(1974 or

ASTM D 2172 Method A, for the extraction of bitumen from bituminous
paving mixtures.

(15) apparatus to perform the Marshall procedures as specified in B.S. 812

and ASTM C 127 and C 128

(16) an oven of suitable size to contain enough bituminous paving mixture to

prepare 3 Marshall specimens

(17) other necessary small hand tools required for proper sampling and testing
of materials

(18) library containing all British Standards referenced herein, ASTM Parts 10
and 11; and AASHTO Tests, Part II.

Approval of the bituminous plant and testing laboratory by the Engineer, will
require all the above facilities and equipment in good working order, during all
periods of mix production, sampling, and testing; and whenever materials
subject to the provisions of these specifications are being supplied or tested.
Failure to provide any of the above shall be sufficient cause for disapproving the
bituminous plant operations.

(CLAUSES 6386 - 6399 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

SECTION VI ROADWORK

PART (E) MISCELLANEOUS

KILOMETRE POSTS 6400.

Where directed by the Engineer, new precast reinforced concrete kilometre posts
shall be provided to indicate distance in kilometres along the road. The
kilometre posts shall conform with the accepted standards of the Federal Ministry
of Works for kilometre posts on Trunk "A" Roads, as shown on Federal Ministry
of Works Drawing No. 28016, or such modification thereof as the Engineer may
direct. Normally, the new kilometre posts, shall be constructed of Grade 15
N/mm² concrete, be approximately 2.0 metres in length, and shall have a
roughly triangular cross section the back face being 300mm wide with two 50mm

268
 perpendicular offsets and the two side surfaces being 400mm wide with the apex
truncated to give a 50mm flat surface. The kilometre posts shall be reinforced
longitudinally with three 16.0mm diameter mild steel rods having 6mm mild steel
stirrups at 250mm centres.

The kilometre posts shall be erected with the apex facing the road and shall be
located on the right hand side of the road(when looking towards the higher
distance in kilometres). They shall be set in a 600mm x 750mm x 380mm
(deep). block of grade 15 N/mm² concrete, and shall project 900mm above the
ground level. The distance between the nearest edge of the kilometre post and
the edge of the ultimate carriageway shall not be less than 3 metres.

All kilometre posts shall be twice painted with a white (non reflective) paint and
have the letters and numbers stencilled on in green reflective paint. The lettering
and distance in kilometre. Origin shall be approved by the Engineer.

Where existing kilometre posts are in good condition, the Engineer may direct
that these be taken down, painted and treated as for new kilometre posts, and
re-erected at the correct chainages.

CULVERT BEACONS 6401.

Where directed by the Engineer, culverts shall be provided with two precast concrete
beacons located diagonally near the ends of the culvert as directed by the Engineer.
The beacons shall be cast of grade 15N/mm² concrete and shall be 230mm, 150mm
thick and 900mm long, and shall project 45mm above the ground level. They shall be
set at the left hand side of the road with the broad face facing the traffic and on this
face shall be stencilled, in two coats of black oil paint figuring 20mm high on a two coat
white painted background, the appropriate mileage and culvert number as directed by
the Engineer.

The beacons shall be located in a readily visible position from the carriageway and as
near as possible to the ends of the culverts, but in no case shall they be nearer than 3.0
metres from the edge of the ultimate carriageway. All markings of culvert beacons shall
be completed before the issue of the completion certificate for the section of road in
question.

Where directed by the Engineer, the appropriate reference marks may be painted on
any flat easily visible and accessible surface of the culvert, such as on the head-walls of
box culverts, in lieu of culvert beacons. In such cases the figuring shall be stencilled as
described above on a white painted rectangular background as directed by the Engineer.

ROAD WARNING SIGNS 6402.

Where directed by the Engineer, road warning signs shall be provided by the Contractor
at approaches to all dangerous curves, narrow bridges, railway level crossings etc.
Warning signs shall be of approved standard design complying with the accepted
standards of the Federal Ministry of Works for use on Trunk "A" Roads. They shall be

269
constructed of plain single sided pressed aluminum, shall be suitably braced at the back,
and shall be painted in the regulation manner. They shall be mounted on 76mm
diameter tabular steel posts when supported from the ground or, where such a support
may not cause an obstruction. They may be suspended as shown on the drawings or as
may directed by the Engineer.

The signs shall be erected in such locations and in such numbers as shown on the
drawings or directed by the Engineer. They shall be erected, painted and completed in
every way prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the section of the works in
question.

Payment for road warning signs shall be made under the appropriate item in the bill of
quantities, or where no such item is included from the appropriate provisional sum.

ADVANCE DIRECTION SIGNS 6403.

The Contractor shall provide and erect advance direction signs in such numbers and in
such locations as directed by the Engineer. The signs shall be of approved design
complying in all respects with the accepted standards of the Federal Ministry of Works
for use on trunk A roads. Generally they shall consist of plain single sided pressed
aluminum suitably braced at the back and painted in the regulation manner. The
Engineer shall supply to the Contractor a more detailed specification and drawings for all
advance direction signs required, showing their locations, sizes, structural details, types
of support etc. The signs shall be erected, painted and completed in every way prior to
the issue of the completion certificate for the section of the works in question.

Payment for advance direction signs shall be from the appropriate item in the bill of
quantities or where no such item is included, from the appropriate provisional sum.

CARRIAGEWAY MARKINGS 6404.

On completion of the surfacing of the carriage ways e.t.c., the Contractor shall construct
such carriageway markings as are shown on the drawings or that may be directed by
the Engineer.

For smooth dense textured road surfacing the markings shall consist of an approved
ready coated self adhering thermoplastic material. It shall be suitably reflectorised, be
durable and long wearing containing adequate anti skid properties and the adhesive
shall provide sufficient bond between the markings and the road surface as to prevent
any undue movement either due to traffic action or due to temperature variations.

For coarse textured road surfacing such as surface dressing, the markings shall consist
of an approved quick setting thermoplastic composition applied hot by an approved 'line
laying' machine. The composition shall be suitably reflectorised, have a setting time of
not exceeding 60 seconds, be durable, long wearing and have adequate anti skid
properties. When set the markings shall be sufficiently rigid and provide sufficient bond
with the road surface as to prevent any undue distortion or movement due to traffic
action or temperature variation.

270
The type and colour of markings to be used shall be decided by the Engineer for the
various kinds of usage and road surface, and all markings shall be completed prior to
the issue of the completion certificate for the section of works in question.

Payment for carriageway markings shall be made per linear metres of marking from the
appropriate item in the bill of quantities or, where no such item is included, from the
appropriate provisional sum.

PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS 6405. 预制混凝土路缘石

All precast concrete kerbs shall be in accordance with B.S. 340 and shall be of the sizes
and dimension shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer. The kerbs shall be
manufactured using grade 20 N/mm² quality concrete and shall be cast in steel moulds,
and adequately vibrated or pressed. The kerbs shall pass the tests for transverse
strength and the absorption of water tests as described in the appropriate B.S 340.

After casting they shall be lightly rubbed over with a carborundum stone and later to a
smooth finish but shall not be slurried over with cement.

The kerbs shall be cured for a period of 14 days by protection from the direct rays of the
sun or from drying winds, and for the first 7 days after manufacture they shall be
thoroughly saturated with water. Kerbs shall not be incorporated into the works until
they are at least 28 days old.

The vertical joints shall be filled in with grade M1 mortar and flush pointed. Where
expansion joints occur in the carriageway such jointing shall be extended in the same
plane through the kerbing, and kerb base and ducking when provided.
Kerbs for radius work shall be purposely made to the required internal and external
radii. For radii less than 6 metres they shall be 500mm long. All kerbs for radii work in
excess of 15 metres radius may be straight kerbs and shall be 500mm long for radii up
to 30 metres. Otherwise than above all kerbs shall be 1000mm long.

Where shown on the drawings, or directed by the Engineer's Representative, precast

concrete kerbs shall be laid on a grade 15 N/mm² concrete bed and haunched at the
back as directed. All kerbs shall be bedded on a layer of grade M3 quality mortar and
shall be laid true to line and level as shown on the drawings to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative. Payment shall be per linear metre of kerb from the
appropriate item in the bill of quantities.

PRECAST CONCRETE EDGING BLOCKS 6406. 预制混凝土块

Where precast concrete edging blocks are specified, such as edging to footpaths, they
shall be of the sizes and dimensions shown on the drawings or directed by the
Engineer, shall be in accordance with B.S. 340 and generally shall comply with the
provisions of the preceding clause for precast concrete kerbs. They shall be
manufactured using 20 N/mm² grade quality concrete and shall be laid as directed true
to line and level to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Payment shall be

271
made per linear metre of edging under the appropriate item in the bill of quantities.

PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLAB 6407. 预制混凝土板

Precast concrete paving slab shall comply with BS. 368 "Precast Concrete Flags." Except
where otherwise stated to the contrary or directed by the Engineer, the slabs shall be
50mm thick, and except where cutting is necessary, be of a uniform width of 450mm
and a uniform length of 600mm. The paving slabs shall be adequately vibrated or
pressed and shall have a smooth hard wearing non skid finish.

The paving slabs shall be laid and bedded on approved compacted sand filling to the
correct level, grade and cross-fall, so that when tested with a 3 metre straight edge
placed in any position on the paving, the maximum deviation shall not exceed 6mm.
Joints between the paving slabs shall be filled in with a slurry of cement mortar grade
"Ml" brushed over the paving in a circular motion until all the joint cavities are
completely filled in to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Any excess
slurry shall be removed and as soon as the joints have sufficiently hardened the whole
of the paving shall be washed so as to leave the completed paving in a neat and
workmanlike manner.

The price for paving shall include all cutting, whether straight or curved, laying, bedding,
jointing etc., And payment shall be made per square metre of completed paving from
the appropriate item in the bill of quantities.

GULLEY KERBS 6408. 路缘石开口-路面集中排水用

As shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer precast concrete gulley kerbs
shall be inserted at intervals in the kerbing to ensure a quick and complete run off of
surface rainwater from the carriageway. Gulley kerbs shall be constructed to the
dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer and shall comply in all
respects with the provisions of the relevant clause for precast concrete kerbs. The
Contractor's attention is drawn to the necessity for accurate gradients of the kerbs and
the edge of the carriageway, especially for flat gradients, to ensure that no surface
water ponds on the carriageway, payment shall be per number of gulley kerbs placed
from the appropriate item in the bill of quantities.

GULLEY PIPES 6409. 排水管的急流槽

Gulley pipes shall be inserted into all gulley outlet kerbs to convey the surface water to
the side drain or otherwise. The gulley pipes shall consist of approved PVC pipes or
Class B asbestos cement pipe (150mm) in diameter, but the Engineer may direct that
cast iron pipes be used where the pipe is under an access road etc. Where the depth of
cover is less than 300mm on footpaths or less than 900mm on carriageways, the gulley
pipe shall be bedded on a 300mm by 150mm concrete bed and given a 76mm thick
concrete surround in grade 15 N/mm² concrete. Where a concrete bed or surround is
not used the gulley pipe shall be adequately supported and anchored in position at the
kerb and at its outlet by a bed and surround of grade 15 N/mm² concrete at least
300mm long. When completed all gulley pipes shall be flushed with water so as to leave

272
the full internal of the pipe free from any mortar, concrete or other debris. Payment for
gulley pipes shall be per linear metre of pipe and shall include all anchoring, fixing and
necessary joining, but shall not include the provisions of a concrete bed and surround.

PRECAST CONCRETE CHANNELS 6410.预制混凝土排水沟

Where the outlet of gulley pipes is over an embankment, or where the existing ground is
liable to erosion or otherwise as directed by the Engineer's Representative, precast
concrete half round channels of 225mm diameter or as directed, shall be laid to form a
water course leading from the outlets of the 150mm diameter gulley pipes.

The channels shall be cast in 600mm lengths of grade 15 N/mm² concrete and shall be
accurately laid on a prepared bed, true to line and level and jointed with Grade M.3
mortar to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Both extremities of the
channel shall be securely anchored and set in a bed of Grade 15 N/mm² concrete
approximately at least 75mm wider than the external width of the channel and 150mm
thick. Prior to the laying of the channels, the soil bed shall be properly shaped and
compacted to provide an even bed for the channels throughout the whole of their
length.

Payment shall be per linear metre of channel laid, including all necessary bedding,
jointing and anchoring, from the appropriate item in the bill of quantities.

CATS EYES 6411. 猫眼，路面钉

If shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide and
fix in position approved standard type reflecting road studs known as "cats eyes".
Payment shall be per number of cats eyes provided and fixed. And shall include for all
cutting out of the road surface and making good as necessary to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative.

STREET LIGHTING 6412.

Where provision for street lighting is included in the bill of quantities forming part of the
main contract, the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a separate street lighting
specification and drawings for each individual project. The street lighting system shall
be of the electrical type and generally shall comply with the relevant provision of the
British standard code of practice, "C.P. 1004 parts 1 and 2
Street lighting", or such other provisions specified by the Engineer. The types of
cables, controls, lanterns and mountings to be employed shall be specified by the
Engineer and the source and manufacturer's of same shall be approved by the Engineer.
The actual electrical installation shall be carried out by a competent electrical sub-
Contractor to be approved by the Engineer.

Payment for street lighting shall be made from the appropriate items in the bill of
quantities, or, where no such items are included, from the appropriate provisional sum.
The street lighting shall be completed and tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the section of work in

273
question.

TRAFFIC LIGHTS 6413.

Where provision for traffic control lights are included in the bill of quantities forming part
of the main contract, the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a separate traffic light
specification and drawings for each individual set employed. The traffic control lights
shall be electrically operated and the types of cables, controls, lanterns and mountings
shall be specified by the Engineer, and their source and manufacturers shall be
approved by the Engineer. The actual electrical installation shall be carried out by a
competent electrical sub Contractor to be approved by the Engineer.

Payment for traffic lights shall be made from the appropriate items in the bill of
quantities or, where no such items are included, from the appropriate provisional sum.
The traffic control lights shall be completed and tested to the satisfaction of the
Engineers' Representative prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the section
of work in question.

ILLUMINATED GUARD POSTS 6414.

Where illuminated guard posts, such as “keep right” signs at roundabouts etc., are to be
provided, they shall be of the electrically operated, internally illuminated type having a
pressed steel fluted type body with a vitreous enamel finish and rust proofed steel
lantern with a stove enamel finish. For roundabouts etc., the guard post shall be fitted
with a single aspect lantern having one 600mm x 300mm "keep right" glass panel.

The Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a comprehensive specification and drawings
for each individual type of guard post, indicating the types of cables, controls, lanterns
and mountings to be employed and the source and manufacturers of same shall be
subject to his approval. The actual electrical installation shall be carried out by an
approved competent electrical sub Contractor.

Payment for guardposts shall be made from the appropriate items in the bill of
quantities or, where no such items are included, from the appropriate provisional sum.
The guardposts shall be completed and tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the section of work in
question.

GUARD RAILS 6415. 护栏

A. Scope

The work covered by this Clause consists of the construction of beam guard rails
mounted on concrete or steel posts as shown on the DRAWINGS or as ordered
by the Engineer's Representative.

B. Material

274
 1. Steel rail elements shall conform to the DRAWING and shall be of Armco
Flex Beam Guardrail of 12 gage, non galvanized or equivalent. The
minimum tensile strength when tested in conjunction with splices and
end connections shall be 40,000 kg/cm², and the bolts attaching the rail
element to posts shall be 15mm in diameter.

Splices and end connections shall be as shown on the DRAWINGS and

the minimum tensile strength of the splice and end connection assembly
shall be 40,000 kg/cm².

2. Concrete posts shall conform to the design shown on the DRAWINGS.

The concrete shall be of 20 N/mm² and shall conform to the applicable
requirements of SECTION II - CONCRETE: MASS AND REINFORCED of
the GENERAL SPECIFICATION; "PART 8 - WORKMANSHIP". Reinforcing
steel shall be as shown on the DRAWINGS and shall conform to the
applicable requirements of SECTION ll CONCRETE: MASS AND
REINFORCED of the GENERAL SPECIFICATION; PART "B" -
WORKMANSHIP

3. Steel posts shall conform to the design shown on the DRAWINGS and
shall conform to the applicable requirements of SECTION ll CONCRETE:
MASS AND REINFORCED of the GENERAL SPECIFICATION.

4. White paint shall conform to the requirements of the applicable British

Standards and the painting clauses set forth in Section V Clause 5049.

C. Method of Construction

The concrete posts shall be set in excavated holes and the backfill shall be firmly
tamped in layers not more than 150mm thick in a manner satisfactory to the
Engineer's Representative.

All posts shall be plumb, properly spaced and to the prescribed line and grade.
Post holes shall be excavated to such depth that backfill below the posts will be
kept to the minimum and any such backfill shall be thoroughly compacted before
setting the posts.

The rail elements shall be erected to the required grade and line with the top
edge in a straight line or smooth curve, parallel to or concentric with the
roadway. Where a vertical transition is required the top edge of rail elements
shall form the chords of a smooth vertical curve. At each end post, a single
terminal section of rail element shall be erected and lapped in the direction of
traffic.

The Contractor's attention is directed to the details of guard rail transition at the
approach end of the guard railing as shown on the DRAWINGS.

275
 No punching, drilling, reaming. cutting or welding of the rail elements or terminal
sections will be permitted in the field unless provided for on the DRAWINGS or
specifically approved by the Engineer.

All bolts and nuts attaching the rail element to the posts shall be hot
dip galvanized in accordance with the current ASTM Designation 153.

All metal parts that are not galvanized shall be thoroughly cleaned and shop
painted with one coat of rust inhibitive primer. Any metal surfaces from which
the shop coat of rust inhibitive primer has worn off, or on which the primer has
become defective otherwise, shall be given a brush coat of the above specified
rust inhibitive primer before the first coat of white paint is applied. All exposed
parts of the guard rail shall be given two field coats of white paint. Paint shall
not be applied over a previous coat which is not thoroughly dry.

D. Measurement

The quantity of beam guard rail for which payment will be made will be the sum
of the overall lengths of all sections of new beam guard rail constructed in
accordance with the DRAWINGS and Specifications or as directed by the
Engineer's Representative, measured along the face of the guard rail, including
the terminal sections of the rail element.

E. Payment

Payment for beam guard rail shall be made at the unit rate shown in the Bill of
Quantities which price shall include furnishing and erecting the guard rail
complete, including excavation, backfilling, furnishing and setting posts, priming,
painting, preservation treatment, the furnishing of all materials, labour and
equipment, and all else necessary therefor and incidental hereto.

DELINEATORS 6416. 轮廓标

The Contractor shall furnish and erect delineators of hermetically sealed acrylic
plastic prismatic reflector housed in embossed aluminum and provided with a
single grommeted mounting hole, mounted on galvanized "U" section channel
post as shown on the DRAWINGS or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.

1. Materials

a. Prismatic Reflectors

The housing shall be 0.50mm aluminum formed to approximately 85mm in

diameter and 6mm in depth to retain the acrylic reflector. Housing shall be
provided with embossed reinforcement ribs.

A corrosion resistant metal grommet with 5mm inside diameter shall be

276
 expanded within the reflector mounting hole.

The reflector shall be acrylic plastic and the Contractor shall specify the
manufacturer of the raw material and the identification number of the particular
moulding compound to be furnished. Acceptable formulations:

TABLE VI-19 ACCEPTABLE FORMULATIONS FOR TYPE OF MOULDING

COMPOUND

TYPE OF
TRADE
MANUFACTURER MOULDING
NAME
COMPOUND
E.I. DUPONT
DENEMOURS LUCITE MH-140
AND CO INC.
ROHM AND
HAAS CO. OR FLEXIGLASS V
EQUIVALENT

The reflector shall consist of a clear and transparent plastic face with 45.0 sq.
cm. of reflecting area, herein referred to as the lens with a heat resistant plastic
coated back fused to the lens under heat and pressure around the entire
perimeters of the lens and control mounting hole to form a unit permanently
sealed against dust, water and water vapour. The reflector shall be colourless.

The lens shall consist of a smooth front surface free from projection or
indentation other than a central mounting hole and identification with a rear
surface bearing, a prismatic configuration, such that it will reflect total internal
reflection of light. The manufacturer's trade mark shall be moulded legibly into
the face of the lens.

b. Galvanized Steel Posts

Galvanized Steel posts for delineators shall be "U" section

channel posts as shown, on DRAWINGS and weigh not less
than, 1.0 kg/m nor more than 2.75 kg/metre as approved
by the Engineer's Representative. The channel posts shall
be drilled or punched as shown on the DRAWINGS. All
holes shall be provided before galvanizing. Oversize holes
shall be backed up with rectangular washers as stated
hereinafter.

All steel posts shall be mild steel No. 1 quality entirely in accordance with
the requirements of B.S. 15. All sections shall conform to British Standard
dimensions.

All steel posts shall be entirely galvanized after fabrication, including

cutting and punching or drilling, in accordance with Clause 5063 of the

277
 GENERAL SPECIFICATION.

c. Hardware

Bolts for connecting centre mounted reflectors to the posts shall be

Phillips round-headed bolts of aluminum alloy 2024 T4 or equivalent with
8 32 or 10-24 thread, and with square or hexagon aluminum nuts. If
post mounting holes are larger than 6mm diameter, provide rectangular
aluminum backing washers, 1.0mm thick, minimum, with holes 5.0mm to
6.0mm diameter, and large enough to provide satisfactory area of
bearing against the post. Reflectors may also be fastened to their
respective posts by blind rivets or bolts, provided aluminum washers are
used at oversize holes; rivets and riveting or tightening device and
technique may be used if only they are approved by the Engineer's
Representative.

Bolts shall be of such length that in no case shall the exposed threaded
length of a bolt extend beyond the tightened bolt more than 10mm

2. Methods of Construction

All delineators shall be located and erected in conformance with the

DRAWINGS or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and all
delineator posts and reflector mountings shall be plumb. The top of posts
shall have substantially the same cross sectional dimensions as the body
of the posts; no battered heads will be permitted. A suitable driving cap
shall be used whenever posts are driven.

If posts are set in earth, post holes shall be backfilled with suitable
material placed in layers not more than 150mm in depth and each layer
shall be thoroughly compacted.

All posts shall be in the final position before attaching reflectors.

Topmost centre mounted reflectors shall be mounted on posts through holes

having an edge distance from the top of post of not less than 10mm or more
than 25mm. Centre to centre spacing of delineators shall be 100mm. All
fasteners shall securely grip their respective reflectors. Reflectors shall show no
sign of damage after being mounted. Rectangular washers described herein
above shall be used under nuts whenever mounting holes exceed 6.0mm
diameter.

The Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace or repair to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative any delineators, removed or damaged in any way
prior to the acceptance of this work.

3. Quantity and Payment

278
 The quantity of delineators for which payment will be made shall be the number
of delineators actually furnished in accordance with the DRAWINGS, the
Specification, and as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

Payment for the delineators shall be made for the quantities as above
determined, at the unit price shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price shall
include the cost of posts, mounting plates, plastic reflectors, hardware,
galvanizing, driving or setting of posts, all excavation and backfilling, drilling in
rock and grouting, all material, equipment, labour, and all else necessary thereof
and incidental thereto.

TELEPHONE POLES 6417.

The Contractor shall furnish and install telephone poles where and as shown on
the DRAWINGS or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

All work under this Clause affecting the property, right of way and facilities of the
Posts and Telegraphs Department, Ministry of Communication (hereinafter called
as Owners) shall be carried out under joint supervision of the Engineer's
Representative and the said Owners in a manner satisfactory to both.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer's Representative detailed working

drawings and written description of the intended construction methods and shall
obtain approval from the Engineer's Representative.

After approval of the working drawings and/or working plans, the Contractor
shall furnish the said owners, through the Engineer's Representative, with as
many numbers of prints of such drawings as required by the said owners. No
work affecting the safety, operation or maintenance of the utilities shall be
commenced or prosecuted until written approval of the owners has been
obtained.
This provision must be complied with before the Contractor begins actual
construction work.

Payment shall be made at the unit price for this Item tendered in the Bill of
Quantities. Payment shall include all costs for furnishing materials, equipment
and labour, and for all costs for coordination of all construction activities with the
owners. The installation shall be completed and tested to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative and of the owners prior to the issue of the completion
certificate for the work in question.

(CLAUSES 6418 - 6499 INCLUSIVE NOT USED).

ANNEXURE TO THE GENERAL SPECIFICATION

(ROAD AND BRIDGES)

279
PENETRATION (GROUTED) MACADAM

GENERAL 6500.

Penetration macadam shall consist of a compacted wearing course of coarse crushed

rock aggregate laid upon a prepared base and grouted with straight run bitumen. For
keying the penetration layer 19mm and 10mm crushed rock chippings shall be used.
Surface sealing shall be carried out using either a straight run or cut back bitumen as
specified and 12mm crushed rock chippings.

MATERIALS 6501.

The materials to be used in penetration macadam shall comply with the following:

(a) The coarse aggregate for the wearing course shall consist of clean crushed rock
dry and free from dust. The aggregate crushing value shall not exceed 23%.
The aggregate shall be graded as shown in the table below.

TABLE VI-20 COARSE AGGREGATE GRADING ENVELOPES FOR PENETRATION

MACADAM

Percent Passing
Sieve
80mm thick base 50mm thick base
63.5mm 100 -
50.8mm 90 – 100 100
38.1mm 30 – 80 80 – 100
25.4mm 0 – 15 30 – 80
19.0mm - 0 – 15
(b) The 19mm aggregate for keying the penetration layer of coarse aggregate shall
comply with B.S. 63 "Single sized Road Stone and Chippings".

(c) The 10mm aggregate for keying the penetration layer of coarse aggregate shall
comply with the grading shown in the table below:

TABLE VI-21 GRADING ENVELOPE FOR KEYING THE PENETRATION LAYER OF

PENETRATION MACADAM

Sieve Percent Passing

12mm 100
9.5mm 90 – 100
6.4mm 5 – 20
600µm 0 - 10

(d) The 12mm aggregate for the seal coat shall comply with B.S. 63
"Single sized Road Stone and Chippings".

280
(e) The bitumen for grouting the penetration macadam shall be a straight run
bitumen as specified in Clause 6301 (iii).

(f) The bitumen for the seal coat shall be either a straight run or cut back bitumen
as specified in Clause 6301 (ii) or Clause 6301 (iii).

(g) An approved anti-stripping additive shall be incorporated in the bitumen when

this is directed by the Engineer. The additive shall be mixed with the bitumen by
the supplier during manufacture so as to ensure a uniform dispersion of the
additive.

(h) The specification for the various grades of aggregate required is devised so that
the full range of crushed stone produced will be used except for the fines
passing a 5mm screen. Aggregate in the 63.5mm to 19.0mm range will be used
in the base layer. Aggregate in the 19.0mm to 12mm and 10mm to 5mm range
shall be used as key stone. Aggregate in the 12mm to 10mm range shall be used
as chippings in the seal coat. The above will apply provided always that the
efficiency of the screening arrangements is such that the gradings of each range
of aggregate comply with the specifications.

WORKMANSHIP 6502

The coarse aggregate shall be spread by mechanical means on the prepared base in a
uniform loose layer so that after it is fully compacted it shall be of the specified
thickness. The layer of coarse aggregate shall be rolled to the correct shape
longitudinally and transversely by a three wheel steel tyred roller weighing not less than
9 tonne or by a vibratory roller of same capacity and having a minimum weight of 54
kilograms per centimetre width of rear wheel.
Any irregularities shall be corrected by loosening the surface and removing or adding
aggregate as required and re-compact. Rolling shall be continued until thorough
interlocking is obtained and there is no movement under the action of the roller. Rolling
shall be stopped if the aggregate begins to crack or crush. The finished surface shall
show uniform voids and when tested with a 3 metre straight edge placed parallel to the
centre line of the road shall not show any variation greater than 12mm. The transverse
profiles shall conform to the same accuracy using a correctly shaped rigid fabricated
metal template instead of a straight edge. The length of this template shall not be less
than the width of the base.

(2) Straight run bitumen shall then be sprayed as specified in Clause 6313 on the
shaped and compacted layer of coarse aggregate at the rate of 0.71 to 0.89 litres per
sq.m. per centimetre of compacted thickness. The actual rate of application shall be
determined by the Engineer's Representative after tests have been carried out on site,
as described in Clause 6503.

(3) Immediately following the applications of the bitumen and while it is still warm,
the key-stone shall be spread evenly over the surface so as to key the surface voids.
The key stone shall be applied in successive layers. The first layer shall be 19.0mm. Key
stone applied in just sufficient quantity to prevent the roller wheels sticking. As rolling

281
 continues further 19.0mm and 10mm key stone shall be spread and lightly broomed
over the surface and rolled until all the voids in the coarse aggregate have been filled
but without having an excess of loose key stone on the surface. Rolling shall continue
until the key stone is thoroughly embedded and the stone layer shows no movement
under the roller. The proportions of 19.0mm and 10mm key stone to be used and the
order in which they shall be used shall be determined after trial sections have been
constructed as described in Clause 6503.

(4) When the spreading and rolling of the key stone have been completed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, the road shall be opened to traffic as
specified in Clause 6316.

(5) The seal coat shall not be applied until at least 10 days after the completion of
the wearing course. During this period additional key stone shall be applied if directed
and brushed into any voids which may appear under the action of the traffic. After such
period any irregularities or areas of failure due to workmanship shall be cut out and
made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. After all remedial work
has been allowed sufficient time to harden and settle under the action of traffic, the
surface shall be swept clean of all loose material and the seal coat shall be applied as
described for the wearing coat in Clause 6313 except that the bitumen will be sprayed at
the rate of 1.30 to 1.50 litres per sq.m.

(6) On completion of the seal coat the road shall be opened to traffic and speeds
shall be restricted to a maximum speed of 25 km/h for one day following the opening.

TRIAL SECTIONS 6503.

The Contractor shall construct trial sections at least 90 metres long to determine the most
efficient construction technique and the suitability of the materials and plant to be used.
If the trial sections are satisfactory they shall be incorporated in the finished work.

TESTS 6504.

(1) The rate of application of the bitumen shall be checked as specified in Clause
6223. When tests are carried out on the rate of application of the bitumen used
in grouting, the test trays shall be provided with lips of sufficient depth to
prevent loss of bitumen through over flowing.

(2) Holes 300mm square shall be cut in the stone layer to the full depth where
directed by the Engineer's Representative who shall determine by visual
inspection the degree of penetration of the bitumen. The Engineer's
Representative may order such variation in the rate of spread or application
temperature of the bitumen as he may consider necessary to obtain the most
uniform penetration of the bitumen through
out the full depth of the stone layer.

282